JP2020146553A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving a method for selecting a background pattern.SOLUTION: Identification information is composed of a plurality of pattern rows, a lottery result by lottery means is set so as to show a specific lottery result by displaying a combination of specific patterns, and the dynamic display means displays one pattern row among the plurality of pattern rows in a ready-to-win display mode for displaying in a dynamically displayed state, sets and displays specific patterns to be a combination showing the specific lottery result, and includes operation means operable by a player, pattern varying means for executing a prescribed lottery on the basis of the operation of the operation means in the case that the dynamic display means displays the identification information in the ready-to-win display mode, and varying patterns of a pattern row that is dynamically displayed in the case that the lottery result is a specific result, and table setting means for varying and setting the lottery probability of the prescribed lottery.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a lottery is executed based on a player's operation to produce a game, and when the lottery is won, the effect is changed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 07-185086

However, there has been a demand for a game machine with even higher interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine with further improved interest.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the above. When the identification information is displayed by the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, a privilege advantageous to the player is provided. The identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings and is displayed in a combination of specific symbols, so that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result. The dynamic display means displays the specific lottery result in a reach display mode in which one of the plurality of symbol strings is dynamically displayed in a state of being dynamically displayed. A specific symbol that is a combination to be shown is set and displayed, and the operating means that can be operated by the player and the operating means when the identification information is displayed in the reach display mode by the dynamic display means. Is operated, a predetermined lottery is executed, and when the lottery result is a specific result, the symbol variable means for changing the symbol of the dynamically displayed symbol sequence and the predetermined lottery It has a table setting means for variablely setting the lottery probability.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information are dynamically displayed. A dynamic display means that can be displayed and a privilege giving means that gives a player an advantageous privilege when displayed by the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result. And, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol rows and is displayed in a combination of specific symbols, so that the lottery result by the lottery means is set to indicate that the specific lottery result. The dynamic display means is specified in a reach display mode in which one of the plurality of symbol strings is dynamically displayed in a state of being dynamically displayed, and is a combination showing the specific lottery result. The symbol is set and displayed, and the operating means that can be operated by the player and the operating means are operated when the identification information is displayed in the reach display mode by the dynamic display means. A symbol variable means for executing a predetermined lottery and changing the symbol of the dynamically displayed symbol string when the lottery result is a specific result, and a variable lottery probability of the predetermined lottery. It has a table setting means for setting. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a game board and a board lower part unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a game board and a board lower part unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a game board and a board lower part unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the variable winning device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is a top view of the variable winning device, (b) is a front view of the variable winning device, and (c) is a side view of the variable winning device in the direction of arrow XVc of FIG. 15 (b). is there. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in line XVIa-XVIa of FIG. 15 (b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device after sliding the moving upper lid member from FIG. 16 (a). It is a sectional view. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the game board. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the lower board unit in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower board unit in line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. 17 (a). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the lower board unit in which the arrangement of the light irradiation unit is virtually changed from FIG. 18 (b). It is a front perspective view of the compound operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a main body member, a shielding member and a swinging member. It is a back exploded perspective view of a main body member, a shielding member, and a swinging member. (A) is a front view of the first guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of the first guide arm, and (c) is a first guide arm in the XXVc-XXVc line of FIG. 25 (a). FIG. 25 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first guide arm in the line XXVd-XXVd of FIG. 25 (a). (A) is a front view of the second guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of the second guide arm, and (c) is a second guide arm in the XXVIc-XXVIc line of FIG. 26 (a). (D) is a cross-sectional view of the second guide arm in the line XXVId-XXVid of FIG. 26 (a). (A) and (b) are front views of the first guide arm, the second guide arm, and the wiring. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. FIG. 8 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit in the line XXXIV-XXXIV of FIG. 28. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit in the XXXV-XXXV line of FIG. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit in line XXXVII-XXXVII of FIG. It is a front perspective view of the rocking operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a rocking operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a rocking operation unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a swinging operation unit. (A) is a front view of the rocking operation unit, and (b) is a side view of the rocking operation unit in the direction of arrow XXXIIb of FIG. 42 (a). It is a front view of the rocking operation unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a drive side arm member, a driven side arm member and a first bridge member in the XXXXIVa-XXXXIVa line of FIG. 43, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the drive side arm in the XXXXIVb-XXXIVb line of FIG. 43. It is sectional drawing of the member, the driven side arm member, and the 2nd bridge member. (A) is a partial side view of the swinging operation unit in the direction of arrow XXXVa in FIG. 43, and (b) and (c) show the driven side arm member flexing to the front side from the state of FIG. 45 (a). It is a partial side view of the rocking operation unit which showed the state of squeezing in time series. It is sectional drawing of the drive side arm member and the driven side arm member in the XXXXIV-XXXXIV line of FIG. 43. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the rocking operation unit in the XXXXV-XXXXV line of FIG. 43. It is a front view of the drive side arm member and the driven side arm member. It is a front view of the drive side arm member and the driven side arm member. It is a front view of the drive side arm member and the driven side arm member. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the swinging operation unit in the second embodiment. (A) to (c) are front views of the rocking operation unit according to the third embodiment, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the rocking operation unit on the Ld-Ld line of FIG. 52 (b). It is a front view of the composite operation unit in 4th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the composite operation unit. It is a rear view of the composite operation unit in 5th Embodiment. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of the composite operation unit. It is a partial front view of the composite operation unit in the sixth embodiment. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the composite operation unit. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the swinging operation unit in the seventh embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in 8th Embodiment. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board in the LXI-LXI line of FIG. (A) is a front view of the first guide arm in the ninth embodiment, (b) is a bottom view of the first guide arm, and (c) is a perspective view of a detachable front locking member. .. (A) is a front view of the second guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of the second guide arm, and (c) is a second guide arm on the LXIIIc-LXIIIc line of FIG. 63 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of. (A) and (b) are front views of the first guide arm and the second guide arm of the wiring guide arm, and (c) is the first of the wiring guide arm in the LXIVc-LXIVc line of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the guide arm and the 2nd guide arm. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen of the super background notice, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen when the screen of (a) is scrolled horizontally in the super background notice. .. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating a screen on which a special image is displayed in the super background notice, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating a screen suggesting a transition to the background inside the door in the super background notice. Is. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating a screen in which a mode of loosening is displayed in Super Reach A, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating a mode screen of double reach in Super Reach A. .. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in Super Reach A, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in Super Reach A. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in Super Reach A, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in Super Reach A. It is a schematic diagram which illustrated the screen at the time of a big hit in Super Reach A. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in the jackpot effect, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in the jackpot effect. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in the jackpot effect, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in the jackpot effect. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in the jackpot effect, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in the jackpot effect. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the timing of the effect executed in Super Reach B, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the timing of the effect executed in Super Reach B. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the timing of the effect executed in Super Reach B, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the timing of the effect executed in Super Reach B. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in Super Reach B, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in Super Reach B. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in Super Reach B, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in Super Reach B. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of RAM in a main control device. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first hit random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value of the special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table, and (d) is a second hit random number counter C4 and a hit determination value of a normal symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence relationship of. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table provided in the ROM in the main controller, and (b) shows the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of a big hit. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of disconnection (normal), and (d) is a schematic diagram at the time of disconnection. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type in (probability variation). (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of ROM in an audio lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of RAM in an audio lamp control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the RAM in the display control device. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the data table storage area provided in the RAM in the display control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the mass setting table storage area provided in the RAM in the display control device, and (b) is a normal mass setting provided in the mass setting table storage area. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the table schematically, and (c) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the continuous mass setting table provided in the mass setting table storage area schematically. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface B. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the SW input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the operation process at the time of super background executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot operation process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the operation process at the time of super reach B executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the super background effect processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the reach-related command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the super reach B process for display which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot-related command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the map setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the background image change command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed SW-related command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the SW process in super background executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the big hit middle SW process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a counter executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is an update process. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the timing of the effect executed in the super reach B in the modified example of the first control example, and (b) is executed in the super reach B in the modified example of the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which illustrated the timing of the production. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in Super Reach B in the modified example of the first control example, and (b) is the screen displayed in Super Reach B in the modified example of the first control example. Is a schematic diagram illustrating. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the data table storage area provided in the RAM in the display control device in the modification of the 1st control example. This is a super reach B operation process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the super reach B process for display which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the modification of the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the frame button and the selection switch schematically.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 50, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength (launching intensity) corresponding to the above, and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 330, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63 and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like. The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable winning device 330 are formed in the board surface lower unit 300 fitted into the receiving opening 60a of the base plate 60 described later.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened more than in the normal state. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one time. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while synchronizing the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol string is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol string, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal period. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many chances that the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. (See FIG. 4), a big hit lottery is made, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. (See FIG. 4), a big hit lottery is made, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). (State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" The symbol "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a symmetrical configuration of the game board 13, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 640 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done. The details of the variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) that opens and closes the specific winning opening 65a will be described later, but briefly, the moving upper lid member 332 of the variable winning device 330 slides to move the specific winning opening 65a. It is opened and closed.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 314. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 314. Out ports 314 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 has a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and a selection switch 270 (upper switch 270a, right switch 270b, lower switch 270c). , Left switch 270d), decision switch 270e, etc. are connected respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor 433,462,551 and a solenoid 474.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the like is performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9. First, the storage structure of the units 400 and 500 in the rear case 210 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200 with the disassembled operation unit 200 viewed from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, one side (front side of the paper in FIG. 6) of the operation unit 200 is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A back case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The back case 210 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 211a in the center of the bottom wall portion 211. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

The left and right and upper outer wall portions 212 include an intermediate wall portion 212a formed in parallel with the bottom wall portion 211 in the middle in the front-rear direction, and a fastening portion 212b to which a member can be fastened to the intermediate wall portion 212a. On the front side of the intermediate wall portion 212a, the outer wall portion 212 extends from the opposite end of the opening 211a of the intermediate wall portion 212a, and on the back side of the intermediate wall portion 212a, the outer wall portion 212 is the intermediate wall portion. It extends from the end of the 212a on the side close to the opening 211a.

A holding and fixing portion 446 and a fixing plate 461 are fastened and fixed to the fastening portions 212b formed on the left and right intermediate wall portions 212a, and a guide plate 424 is attached to the fastening portion 212b formed on the upper intermediate wall portion 212a. Is fastened and fixed.

Here, the fixing plate 461 is a member that supports the drive motor 462 that generates a driving force that drives the composite operation unit 400, and the holding and fixing portion 446 is a member that fixes one end of the urging spring 445, and is a guide plate 424. Is a member that guides the movement of the connecting member 423 (see FIG. 20) of the composite operation unit 400. That is, all of them are not the production parts that are directly visible to the player, but the parts that have an auxiliary role of the production, such as generating the driving force for the operation of the composite operation unit 400 and guiding the operation. ..

By arranging the fixing plate 461 having such a role, the holding fixing portion 446, and the guide plate 424 closer to the front side of the back case 210, a space closer to the rear side of the back case 210 can be opened. By using this vacant space near the rear side as a space for retracting a portion actually visible to the player such as the shielding member 420, the constituent members of the composite operation unit 400 can be laminated in the front-rear direction, and the opening 211a can be stacked. The width required to retract the combined operation unit 400 to the outside of the can be narrowed. Therefore, the forming width of the bottom plate portion 211 can be narrowed. As a result, the opening 211a can be expanded, and the formation range of the third symbol display device 81 can be expanded.

In the operation unit 200, the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 are respectively housed in the internal space of the rear case 210, and these are configured as one unit.

Specifically, the composite operation unit 400 is arranged on the left, right, left and right and upper part of the area formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210, and the swing operation unit 500 is inside the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210. It is arranged at the bottom of the area formed by the side surface (see FIG. 5).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9, the outline of the operation mode of the combined operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 7 to 9, FIGS. 5 and 6 will be referred to as appropriate.

7 to 9 are front views of the operating unit 200. In FIG. 7, the main body member 410 of the composite operation unit 400 is arranged at the overhang position, in FIG. 8, the moving member 540 of the swing operation unit 500 is arranged at the overhang position, and in FIG. 9, The state in which the main body member 410 of the composite operation unit 400 and the moving member 540 of the swing operation unit 500 are arranged at the overhanging positions is shown.

As shown in FIG. 7, the composite operation unit 400 operates the main body member 410 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhanging position shown in FIG. That is, at the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the main body member 410 is retracted above the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 7, the main body member 410 is lowered, and the main body member 410 is arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). .. As will be described later, the composite operation unit 400 is a unit in which the shielding member 420 performs two types of operations (sliding operation and rocking operation) in different movement modes when the main body member 410 slides and moves.

As shown in FIG. 8, the swing operation unit 500 operates the moving member 540 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhanging position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the moving member 540 is retracted below the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 8, the moving member 540 is raised, and the moving member 540 is arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). .. A pair of left and right moving members 540 are formed, and at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of left and right moving members 540 are united and visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 9, both the combined operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 can be arranged at the overhanging position. In this case, the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 can be visually recognized as an integral decorative member (partially overlapped in a front view), and a decorative member having a width equal to or larger than the outer width of the opening 211a is formed. be able to. Thereby, the effect of the combined operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 can be improved. Further, by projecting the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 toward the center of the opening 211a in different directions (descending, ascending), for example, as compared with the case where all the movable members are projected in the same direction. The distance that each member moves from the retracted position to the overhanging position can be shortened. As a result, when the moving speeds of the combined operation unit 400 and the swinging operation unit 500 are the same, the period of movement from the retracted position to the overhanging position can be shortened.

Next, the board surface lower unit 300 arranged in the lower part of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 18. 10 and 11 are front exploded perspective views of the game board 13 and the lower board unit 300, and FIG. 12 is a rear exploded perspective view of the game board 13 and the lower board unit 300. Note that FIG. 10 shows a state in which only the front plate member 320 is disassembled from the game plate 13, and in FIGS. 11 and 12, the front unit 310 and the variable winning device 330 of the board surface lower unit 300 are further played from FIG. It is disassembled from the board 13. Further, in order to facilitate understanding, the game board 13 is shown in a simplified manner.

As shown in FIG. 10, a specific winning opening 65a is formed along the lower edge of the inner rail 61. Since the lower edge of the inner rail 61 is formed from a downwardly convex curved shape, the arrangement position of the specific winning opening 65a is set as compared with the case where the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a is formed by a straight line along the left-right direction. Can be lowered downwards. The outer edge of the specific winning opening 65a has an upper side formed by a moving upper lid member 332, a lower side formed by a lower edge of an inner rail 61, and left and right sides formed by left and right wall portions of an opening upper portion 313. ..

As will be described later, the specific winning opening 65a can be switched between the closed state and the open state by sliding the moving upper lid member 332 back and forth, and the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is, for example, 15 at the maximum. It can be repeated once (15 rounds).

As shown in FIG. 11, the board surface lower unit 300 is a unit constituting an out port 314 from which a ball is discharged and a specific winning opening 65a, and is a receiving receiving hole formed in the lower part of the game board 13 in the front-rear direction. The front unit 310 that is fitted into the opening 60a from the front side and fastened and fixed, the front plate member 320 that is fastened and fixed to the front unit 310 from the front side and a ball path is formed on the back side, and the receiving opening 60a. It mainly includes a variable winning device 330 including a moving upper lid member 332 that is fitted from the back side, fastened and fixed, and changes the flow direction of the ball.

The front unit 310 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion 311 formed so that a ball can flow down on the front side, and an electric accessory 640a in which a pair of members are opened and closed left and right at the center of the front side of the main body plate portion 311. , A plate-shaped inclined plate portion 312 projecting to the front side at the upper left and right sides of the main body plate portion 311 and an opening upper portion 313 recessed upward from the lower bottom portion of the main body plate portion 311 and the opening upper side thereof. A pair of out ports 314, which are bored in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides of the portion 313 and the balls are discharged out of the game area, are mainly provided.

The main body plate portion 311 is bored in the front-rear direction at a position surrounded by a pair of members of the first winning opening lower side 311a formed above the electric accessory 640a and forming the lower side of the first winning opening 64 and the electric accessory 640a. The second winning opening 640 to be provided, the light irradiation device 311b arranged below the second winning opening 640 and illuminating the front side of the second winning opening 640, and the rib-shaped front side on the outside of the out opening 314. It is mainly provided with a ball flow rib 311c that is convexly provided.

The light irradiation device 311b is accommodated in the accommodating recess 323a (see FIG. 12) of the front plate member 320, and is directed upward (the second winning opening 640 side) due to the ball winning in the second winning opening 640. It is an LED member that is irradiated with light.

The ball sink rib 311c adjusts the flow direction of the ball rolling along the inner rail 61, and the details will be described later in FIG.

The inclined plate portion 312 is formed so that a sphere can roll on the upper side surface, is arranged above the left and right of the electric accessory 640a, and is inclined downward as it approaches the electric accessory 640a. As a result, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state where it falls to the left or right, the ball that rolls down the inclined plate portion 312 can be made to win the second winning opening 640 with high probability. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state in which it stands up, the ball that rolls on the inclined plate portion 312 and flows down can be dropped to the front side of the opening upper portion 313 with high probability.

The upper side portion 313 of the opening is formed so as to be inclined upward toward the center of the left and right sides. Here, by setting the vertical width of the central portion in the left-right direction of the specific winning opening 65a to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere, the vertical width of the left and right wall portions of the opening upper portion 313 (corresponding to the left and right wall portions of the specific winning opening 65a). ) Can be set to a length equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere (see FIG. 17). In this case, it is difficult to win the ball from the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a, but the ball is flowed down to the central portion of the game board 13 along the inner rail 61, and the central portion in the left-right direction of the specific winning opening 65a. Since it is possible to win a prize from, the game can be continued.

Here, when the upper and lower side surfaces of the specific winning opening 65a are parallel surfaces (planes extending in the left-right direction), until the straight line intersecting the inner rail 61 becomes the same as the length of the lower side surface of the specific winning opening 65a. It is necessary to raise the specific winning opening 65a from the lower edge of the inner rail 61 and arrange it. Therefore, the position of the specific winning opening 65a becomes high.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the lower side surface of the specific winning opening 65a is curved like the lower side surface of the inner rail 61, it is not necessary to raise the specific winning opening 65a and the specific winning opening 65a is placed in a low position. Can be placed in.

Further, since the upper side surface of the specific winning opening 65a is inclined downward as it approaches the left and right ends, the ball to the specific winning opening 65a is compared with the case where the upper side surface is formed by a plane extending in the left-right direction. The placement of the road nails that guide the vehicle can be lowered. As a result, the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered.

The out openings 314 are formed in pairs on the left and right sides of the opening upper portion 313, and the lower side of the out opening 314 is arranged below and the upper side of the out opening 314 is arranged above the left and right ends of the opening upper portion 313. To. That is, the opening upper portion 313 is formed below the out opening 314. As a result, the arrangement of the variable winning device 330, which will be described later, can be lowered, and the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered. Even with such an arrangement, in the present embodiment, the sphere is flowed down the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 which has an upper side surface having substantially the same shape as the shape of the opening upper portion 313 and is slid and moved in the front-rear direction. Is discharged to the out port 314 (see FIG. 17), so that the game can be continued.

The front plate member 320 is a plate-shaped member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and is arranged on the front side of the front side unit 310 and is formed so that a sphere can flow down between the front plate member 320 and the main body plate portion 311. The plate-shaped main body plate portion 321 and the first winning opening front portion 322 which is arranged at the upper end of the main body plate portion 321 and guides the ball to the lower side 311a of the first winning opening, and is arranged below the electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory lower support portion 323 is provided, the out opening lower plate 324 arranged along the lower side surface of the out opening 314, and the main body plate portion 321 projecting from the main body plate portion 321 along the lower edge of the inner rail 61. It mainly includes a ball feed unit 325.

The main body plate portion 321 includes a ball sink rib 321a that is convexly provided on the back surface side in a rib shape on the outside of the out port lower plate 324. The ball sink rib 321a adjusts the flow direction of the ball rolling along the inner rail 61, and the details thereof will be described later in FIG.

The electric accessory lower support portion 323 includes a storage recess 323a which is a horizontally long recess, and the light irradiation device 311b is housed in the storage recess 323a.

The out port lower plate 324 is provided with thin ribs extending in the front-rear direction on the upper side surface in the left-right direction. Further, the out port lower plate 324 includes a step portion 324a projecting upward at the left and right inner end portions. The unevenness formed on the upper side surface of the out port lower plate 324 can decelerate the flowing ball. Further, the ribs formed on the out port lower plate 324 are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back surface side. As a result, the speed at which the flowing ball is discharged to the out port 314 can be improved.

Since the inclined plate portion 312 described above is formed directly above the out opening lower plate 324 (see FIG. 17), a ball that falls after rolling the inclined plate portion 312 is directed toward the out opening lower plate 324. It is suppressed from falling. That is, the ball that falls after rolling the inclined plate portion 312 falls inside the pair of out-port lower plates 324 in the left-right direction (position where the moving upper lid member 332 is arranged), or falls on the out-port lower plate 324. It either falls to the outer end portion (near the ball sink rib 321a and at the boundary position between the rib formation range and the rail through which the ball flows). Both of these are outside the rib formation range. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling onto the out-mouth lower plate 324 from a high place, and it is possible to improve the durability of the out-mouth lower plate 324.

The step portion 324a is a step formed between the out opening 314 and the specific winning opening 65a, and the ball flowing down from the left-right direction and flowing down the upper side surface of the out opening lower plate 324 exceeds the step portion 324a. It is prevented from flowing down to the central portion in the left-right direction (see FIG. 17). That is, the ball that flows down from the left-right direction and flows down the upper side surface of the out port lower plate 324 is exclusively guided to the out port 314.

The ball feeding portion 325 mainly includes a back surface side surface 325a formed on the back surface side, and left and right side surface 325b connected to the back surface side side surface 325a and formed on the left and right sides.

The rear side surface 325a is inclined downward toward the back side, and the left and right side surfaces 325b are inclined toward the center toward the back side. As a result, the flow direction of the ball that has reached the ball feed portion 325 can be directed to the back side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from staying in front of the specific winning opening 65a and prevent so-called over winning.

Next, the variable winning device 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 330, FIG. 14 is a rear exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 330, and FIG. 15A is a top view of the variable winning device 330. 15 (b) is a front view of the variable winning device 330, and FIG. 15 (c) is a side view of the variable winning device 330 in the direction of arrow XVc of FIG. 15 (b).

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the variable winning device 330 includes a main body member 331 forming a skeleton and a movable upper lid member 332 which is inserted into the main body member 331 from the front and is formed so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. A solenoid 333 that generates a driving force for sliding the moving upper lid member 332 and a lever member 334b that is swung by the solenoid 333 are accommodated and a rear lid member 334 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 331. And mainly prepare.

The main body member 331 is arranged below the deformed through hole 331a through which the moving upper lid member 332 is inserted, the lower passage 331b through which the ball won in the specific winning opening 65a flows down, and the lower passage 331b, and is directed upward. It mainly includes a light irradiation device 331c that irradiates light with light, and a back side accommodating portion 331d that is a recess formed on the back side toward the front side and accommodates a solenoid 333, a lever member 334b, and the like. ..

As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, the modified through hole 331a is a through hole formed along the shape of the moving upper lid member 332, and is a front portion accommodating the front side plate portion 332a. It mainly includes an opening 331a1 and a rear opening 331a2 for accommodating the rear plate portion 332b.

The front opening 331a1 is a recess formed in a pentagonal shape in which the lower side is horizontally extended in a front view, the upper side is ascended and inclined toward the center, and the left and right side sides are extended vertically.

The rear opening 331a2 is an opening formed by cutting off the left and right portions of the front opening 331a1 from the central portion on the back surface side of the front opening 331a1. That is, the outer shapes of the lower and upper sides of the rear opening 331a2 and the outer shapes of the lower and upper sides of the front opening 331a do not form steps in the front-rear direction, but are formed at surface positions. As a result, the moving upper lid member 332 can be smoothly guided.

The lower passage 331b is a passage formed in pairs on the left and right so that the sphere can pass through (see FIG. 18A), and is formed so as to project downward from the lower edge of the inner rail 61. A sensor S for detecting the passage of the sensor S is arranged (see FIG. 15B).

The light irradiation device 331c is a device that illuminates the lower passage 331b, the plate-shaped portion 332a1, and the like with light to produce an effect, and is arranged below the inner rail 61 (lower part of the receiving opening 60a). As a result, the devices required for the light irradiation device 331c can be arranged below the inner rail 61, so that a space on the back side of the game board 13 can be secured, and the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. FIG. The lower edge (see 2) can be lowered downward.

The light irradiation device 331c includes a light irradiation unit 331c1 that irradiates light. The light irradiation unit 331c1 is formed in pairs on the left and right directly below the lower passage 331b, and irradiates light upward.

The rear side accommodating portion 331d communicates with the front opening 331a1 with the rear opening 331a2 interposed therebetween.

The moving upper lid member 332 is a long member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a front side plate portion 332a accommodated in the front opening 331a1 and a rear side plate portion 332b accommodated in the rear opening 331a2. A central rib 332c projecting downward along the central axis of the front plate portion 332a and the rear plate portion 332b, and a connecting hole 332d bored in the rear end of the rear plate portion 332b in the vertical direction. Mainly prepare.

The front plate portion 332a is formed in a plate-shaped portion 332a1 formed in a manner of ascending and tilting toward the central portion in the left-right direction along the shape of the upper side of the front opening portion 331a1, and the plate-shaped portion 332a1 is bored in the vertical direction. A lightening hole 332a2 and a guide rib 332a3 extending downward and extending in the front-rear direction at the left-right end of the plate-shaped portion 332a1 are mainly provided.

The plate-shaped portion 332a1 includes a front inclined side surface 332a1f which is formed so as to be inclined toward the back surface side toward the lower side (see FIG. 16) and is formed so as to be recessed toward the back surface side toward the central portion in the left-right direction. Since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed so as to be recessed toward the back side toward the central portion in the left-right direction, the ball can flow toward the center side when the ball is sandwiched between the front plate member 320 and the front inclined side surface 332a1f. , It is possible to prevent the ball from interfering with the sliding operation of the moving upper lid member 332.

Since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed as a portion that reflects light as described later, in order to effectively reflect the light, a metal film may be formed on the front inclined side surface 332a1f or mirror-finished. You may. In this embodiment, a tape that reflects light is attached.

The guide rib 332a3 is formed along the left and right side surfaces of the front opening 331a1 in the assembled state (see FIG. 15), and is in contact with the lower side surface of the front opening 331a1. As a result, it is possible to suppress a displacement in the left-right direction when the moving upper lid member 332 is slid and moved.

The central rib 332c is formed at the bent portion of the front side plate portion 332a formed by bending the plate shape. As a result, the rigidity of the front plate portion 332a can be improved. Further, when the moving upper lid member 332 is slid forward (when the moving upper lid member 332 of the variable winning device 330 is in the retracted state), it is fastened to the back side of the opening upper portion 313. As a result, it is possible to prevent the central rib 332c and the ball from colliding with each other and causing the moving upper lid member 332 to malfunction.

The connecting hole 332d is a through hole through which the connecting portion 334b4 of the lever member 334b is inserted and the displacement due to the swing of the lever member 334b is transmitted to the moving upper lid member 332 (see FIG. 16).

The solenoid 333 mainly includes a main body 333a that serves as a drive source, and a hook-shaped hook-shaped member 333b that is arranged below the main body 333a and is moved up and down below the lever member 334b.

The rear lid member 334 mainly includes a plate-shaped main body portion 334a and a lever member 334b which is pivotally supported by the main body portion 334a and whose tip is formed so as to be movable in the front-rear direction.

The lever member 334b includes a main body portion 334b1 extending in the vertical direction, a pair of shaft portions 334b2 projecting in a columnar shape in both left and right directions at the lower end portion of the main body portion 334b1 and pivotally supported by the main body portion 334a. At a lower claw portion 334b3 that extends below the main body portion 334b1 at a substantially intermediate position of the pair of shaft portions 334b2 and is formed so as to accommodate a hook-shaped member 333b between the main body portion 334b1 and the upper end portion of the main body portion 334b1. It mainly includes a connecting portion 334b4 formed by bulging into a columnar shape.

Next, the sliding movement of the moving upper lid member 332 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 330 in the XVIa-XVIa line of FIG. 15 (b), and FIG. 16 (b) is a slide movement of the moving upper lid member 332 from the state of FIG. 16 (a). It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus 330 after making it. In addition, FIG. 16A shows a retracted state in which the moving upper lid member 332 is arranged rearward, and FIG. 16B shows an overhanging state in which the moving upper lid member 332 is arranged in the front, and light. In order to facilitate understanding of the path E1 of the above, the illustration of the central rib 332c is partially omitted. Further, in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the inner rail 61 and the front plate member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2) are virtually illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 16A, when the moving upper lid member 332 forms the retracted state, the hook-shaped member 333b is arranged upward and the lever member 334b is tilted backward. In this state, the ball can flow down in front of the variable winning device 330, that is, the ball can win a prize (open state) in the specific winning opening 65a (see FIGS. 10 and 17).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the moving upper lid member 332 forms an overhanging state, the hook-shaped member 333b is pressed downward so that the lever member 334b is tilted forward about the shaft portion 334b2 and the back surface. The moving upper lid member 332 is slid and moved to the front side while being abutted against the side surface of the side accommodating portion 331b. In this state, the ball cannot win a prize (closed state) in the specific winning opening 65a (see FIGS. 10 and 17).

In this case, the rear side surface of the lower end portion of the hook-shaped member 333b is brought into contact with the end portion of the lower claw portion 334b3 of the lever member 334b in the front-rear direction, so that the swing of the lever member 334b is mechanically restricted. (The hook-shaped member 333b is arranged in the moving direction of the lower claw portion 334b3, and the moving direction of the lower claw portion 334b3 and the moving direction of the hook-shaped member 333b are orthogonal to each other). Therefore, the driving force of the solenoid 333 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the swing of the lever member 334b is stopped by the driving force of the solenoid 333.

Here, the path of the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 331c will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 16A, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state, the light emitted upward from the light irradiation unit 331c1 reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the plate-shaped portion 332a1 along the path E1. To do. At this time, since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed so as to be inclined toward the back side toward the downward side, the light irradiated from below and reaching the front side inclined side surface 332a1f is reflected toward the front (player side). In this case, the player can visually recognize the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the moving upper lid member 332 as if it is emitting light. Further, since the light reflected by the front inclined side surface 332a1f is projected into the projection range E0 of the front plate member 320, the front plate member 320 can be attracted attention. Thereby, the directing ability of the moving upper lid member 332 and the front plate member 320 can be improved.

Here, when an LED or the like is arranged on the moving upper lid member 332 to cause the moving upper lid member 332 to emit light, the moving upper lid member 332 may become large. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the LED is not arranged on the moving upper lid member 332, the ability of the moving upper lid member 332 as an effect portion is improved while suppressing the increase in size of the moving upper lid member 332. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 16B, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the overhanging state, the light is irradiated upward from the light irradiation unit 331c1 along the path E2, and the light directed to the front inclined side surface 332a1f is the inner rail 61. It does not reach the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the plate-shaped portion 332a1 because it is shielded by. In this case, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 along the path E1 reaches the intermediate position of the plate-shaped portion 332a1 of the front side plate portion 332a and only transmits as it is, so that the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320 Is darkly visible to the player.

That is, depending on whether the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state or the overhanging state, whether or not the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f changes, and the front plate Whether or not the light projection range E0 of the member 320 is brightly visible changes. Therefore, by checking the brightness state of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the light projection range E0 of the front plate member 320, it is possible to confirm whether or not the ball can be won in the specific winning opening 65a.

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, since the moving upper lid member 332 slides back and forth, it is difficult to grasp the change in the state of the moving upper lid member 332 from the front view (FIGS. 17A and 17B). ), It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a ball can be won in the specific winning opening 65a by changing the brightness of the light projection range E0.

Here, the moving upper lid member 332 has an operation necessary for forming a closed state that prevents the ball from passing through the specific winning opening 65a and an open state that allows the ball to pass through the specific winning opening 65a ( The state of brightness in the light projection range E0 is changed only by moving it back and forth. In other words, since the state of the light projection range E0 is changed only by the operation required for the moving upper lid member 332 to continue the game, no additional mechanism is required. That is, the moving upper lid member 332 can be used for both the purpose of switching whether or not the ball can pass through the specific winning opening 65a and the purpose of producing the effect by the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1.

By crossing the path E1 when the sphere passes through the lower passage 331b, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c may be reflected by the sphere to produce an effect. In this case, the vicinity of the inner rail 61 (below the light projection range E0 in FIGS. 16A and 17B) can be brightly illuminated in front view.

With reference to FIG. 17, the flow of the sphere will be described when the moving upper lid member 332 forms the overhanging state and when the moving upper lid member 332 forms the retracted state. 17 (a) and 17 (b) are partial front views of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG. 17A, the case where the moving upper lid member 332 forms the overhanging state (see FIG. 16B) is shown, and in FIG. 17B, the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state (FIG. 16). The case of forming (see (a)) is illustrated, and in FIGS. 17 (a) and 17 (b), the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320 is illustrated by an imaginary line. In addition, in FIGS. 17A and 17B, whether or not the moving upper lid member 332 is overhanging is shown by the presence or absence of shading. That is, in FIGS. 17 (a) and 17 (b), the portion where the shading is formed is in contact with the front plate member 320 or blocks the passage of the sphere from the front plate member 320. It is a part close to the member 320.

In the state shown in FIG. 17A, the ball falling on the path C2 flows down along the upper side surface of the moving upper lid member 332 and is discharged to the out port 314. In this case, the weight of the ball may cause the moving upper lid member 332 to fall down, and when the left and right ends of the moving upper lid member 332 are moved below the step portion 324a, the ball is discharged to the out port 314. It becomes impossible and interferes with the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the moving upper lid member 332 has a length several times as long as the length overhanging the front side of the deformed through hole 331a (about four times as long, see FIG. 16B). It is housed in the deformed through hole 331a and is formed so as to be in contact with the side surface of the deformed through hole 331a in the vertical direction over the front-rear direction of the variable winning device 330. Therefore, by reducing the clearance between the moving upper lid member 332 and the deformed through hole 331a, it is possible to prevent the moving upper lid member 332 from falling down due to the weight of the ball colliding with the moving upper lid member 332. As a result, the left and right end portions of the moving upper lid member 332 can be formed at the surface position with the step portion 324a, and the road nail to the specific winning opening 65a can be lowered downward, so that the lower part of the third symbol display device 81 can be formed. The rim can be lowered downwards.

As shown in FIG. 17B, when the moving upper lid member 332 forms a retracted state, the ball can flow down toward the specific winning opening 65a. At this time, the ball that rolls on the path C1 from the left and right along the inner rail 61 collides with the step portion 324a and is discharged to the out port 314, so that the ball falls on the path C2 from above toward the specific winning opening 65a. Rolls on the inner rail 61 and reaches the specific winning opening 65a.

Here, in the present embodiment, the vertical width of the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a is formed to be equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere. That is, the vertical distance from the inner rail 61 at the left and right ends of the moving upper lid member 332 is formed to be equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the height of the step portion 324a from the inner rail 61 can be lowered, and the arrangement of the out port 314 to which the ball falling from the step portion 324a reaches can also be lowered.

Further, in this case, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter from the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a (in addition, in the present embodiment, the entry of the ball is blocked by the base plate 60). However, since the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a is formed along the inner rail 61, the ball flowing down to the front side of the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a rolls toward the center of the game area along the inner rail 61 due to gravity. It is moved and enters the specific winning opening 65a from there. Since the lower edge of the inner rail 61 is formed so as to be inclined rearward (see FIG. 16), the ball can smoothly enter the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 17).

As a result, the moving upper lid member 332 forming the upper side of the specific winning opening 65a is separated upward from the inner rail 61 by the diameter of the sphere or more at least near the center of the game area (near where the inner rail 61 is arranged at the lowest position). Therefore, the arrangement position of the moving upper lid member 332 can be lowered downward. Therefore, the arrangement position of the variable winning device 330 can be lowered as compared with the case where the inner rail 61 needs to be separated upward from the inner rail 61 by a diameter larger than the diameter of the sphere at a position other than the vicinity of the center of the inner rail 61. As a result, a space on the back side of the game board 13 can be secured, and the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) can be lowered downward.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, it will be described that the light is collected by the functions of the ball sink ribs 311c and 321a and the ball feed portion 325 and the front inclined side surface 332a1f. 18 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower board unit 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (b), and FIG. 18 (b) is a lower board unit 300 in line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. 17 (a). 18 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the board surface lower unit 300 in which the arrangement of the light irradiation unit 331c1 is virtually changed from FIG. 18 (b).

In FIG. 18A, the rolling path of the sphere is described by paths C1a, C1b, and C2a, and the moving upper lid member 332 in the retracted state is illustrated by an imaginary line. The moving upper lid member 332 is located on the front side (upper side of FIG. 17B) with respect to the cross section of FIG. 18A and is not actually visible, but for convenience of explanation, it is viewed in the vertical direction (paper surface of FIG. 18). It is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 18 (a) in a state where the positions (vertical view) match. Further, in FIGS. 18 (b) and 18 (c), three spheres flowing down the lower passage 331b are virtually illustrated.

The path of the ball that is rolled from the left-right direction along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 11) and discharged to the out port 314 will be described. As shown in FIG. 18A, the sphere that rolls from the left-right direction toward the center of FIG. 18A abuts on at least one of the ball sink rib 311c or the ball sink rib 321a. That is, the ball that rolls while contacting the main body plate portion 311 of the front unit 310 abuts on the ball sink rib 311c, and the ball that rolls while contacting the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320 is a ball sink rib. It comes into contact with 321a.

Here, when the ball comes into contact with the ball sink rib 311c, the velocity direction of the ball faces in the direction along the path C1a, and then the ball comes into contact with the ball sink rib 321a. Therefore, regardless of whether the ball rolls while contacting the main body plate portion 311 of the front unit 310 or while contacting the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320, the rolling ball is lengthened. It can be brought into contact with the rib 321a.

By bringing the ball rolling along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 11) into contact with the ball flow rib 321a, the velocity direction of the ball can be directed in the direction along the path C1b. In this case, the velocity of the ball can be directed to the back side (upper side in FIG. 18A) before the ball is arranged on the front side of the out port 314. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from when the ball is arranged on the front side of the out port 314 until the ball is discharged from the game area, and it is possible to prevent the ball from staying on the front side of the out port 314. At the same time, the opening width of the out port 314 can be suppressed. As a result, when the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 10) and the out opening 314 are arranged side by side, the arrangement of the specific winning opening 65a can be lowered below the game area.

A case where the spheres fall between the stepped portions 324a arranged in parallel on the left and right sides will be described. In this case, the ball that has fallen between the step portions 324a rolls toward the center in the left-right direction, and the ball comes into contact with the left-right side surface 325b of the ball feed portion 325, so that the velocity direction of the sphere is along the path C2a. Change. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from staying on the front side of the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 10), so that over-winning can be suppressed.

When the sphere flows down along the lower passage 331b and crosses the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the sphere shields the light so that the light does not reach the front inclined side surface 332a1f. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not the ball has won the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 17) depending on whether the light projection range E0 of the front inclined side surface 332a1f or the front plate member 320 is visually recognized brightly or darkly. it can.

As a result, as in the present embodiment, the front plate member 320 formed of a light-transmitting resin material is arranged in front of the specific winning opening 65a, and the inside of the specific winning opening 65a is difficult to see. Also, it can be confirmed that the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a due to the change in the brightness of the light projection range E0. Therefore, it is not necessary to remove the specific winning opening 65a from diagonally above in order to confirm that the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, and the burden on the player can be eased.

In the present embodiment, the irradiation direction of the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 and the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b intersect at an angle close to a right angle (see FIG. 18B). Therefore, the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a as compared with the case where the ball flows down in the direction of the light traveling (see FIG. 18C) and the case where the ball flows down along the light irradiation direction. The period during which the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b blocks the light can be shortened. In other words, it is possible to prolong the period during which the light projection range E0 of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320 is brightly visible, and it is possible to secure the directing ability of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320.

As shown in FIG. 18B, when the light path E1 and the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b intersect (cross) at an angle close to a right angle, the light path E1 is blocked by the sphere. Later, around the point where the sphere passes the front end of the lower passage 331b (right side of FIG. 18B), the light is not blocked by the sphere (the light reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f).

In this case, even if the balls flow down the lower passage 331b in a row, the path E1 is shielded for each ball, so that the change in the brightness of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the light projection range E0 of the front plate member 320 can be changed. By checking, the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a can be confirmed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18C, when the light path E3 and the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b are close to parallel, after the light path E3 is blocked by the sphere, When the sphere reaches the rear end of the lower passage 331b (left side of FIG. 18C, near the sensor S) and falls downward, the light is not blocked by the sphere (so that the light reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f). Become). That is, until then, the light path E3 remains blocked by the sphere.

In this case, when the spheres flow down the lower passage 331b in a row, the light path E3 is blocked by the first sphere (the sphere on the left side of FIG. 18C) as long as the spheres are arranged in the lower passage 331b. Further, after the first ball falls downward from the rear end of the lower passage 331b (left side in FIG. 18 (c)), the light path to the second ball (ball on the right side in FIG. 18 (c)). E3 is blocked. Moreover, when the second ball falls from the rear end of the lower passage 331b, if the next ball (third ball) enters the lower passage 331b, the path of light to the ball. E3 is blocked. In this way, the sphere continues to block the light path E3 and is always visible dark while the sphere is flowing down the lower passage 331b. That is, the number of times the light is visually recognized brightly or darkly is not always the same as the number of balls entered in the specific winning opening 65a, and the number of balls entered in the specific winning opening 65a is the same. Confirmation becomes difficult. On the other hand, the present embodiment has the above-mentioned advantages.

As shown in FIG. 18A, since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed to be recessed toward the back side toward the central portion in the left-right direction, the light emitted from the pair of left and right light irradiating portions 331c1 is formed on the front inclined side surface 332a1f. By being reflected, the light is focused on the center of the front plate member 320 along the path E1 and reaches the light projection range E0 (see FIG. 17B).

Here, in the present embodiment, since the front plate member 320 is arranged on the front side of the moving upper lid member 332, the specific winning opening 65a can be hidden, while the front inclined side surface 332a1f is visually recognized through the front plate member 320. Therefore, it may be difficult to grasp the change in the brightness of the front inclined side surface 332a1f. In that case, it is necessary to increase the light intensity of a light emitting element such as an LED used for the light irradiation unit 331c1, and there is a problem that the light emitting element that can be used for the light irradiation unit 331c1 is limited.

On the other hand, since the front inclined side surface 332a1f collects the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 toward the center of the front plate member 320, the light emitted from the pair of light irradiation units 331c1 is superposed. It is possible to improve the intensity of light visually recognized in the light projection range E0. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in selecting a light emitting element that can be used for the light irradiation unit 331c1 (it is possible to select a light emitting element having a weak light intensity).

Further, since the light emitted from the pair of light irradiation units 331c1 is partially overlapped and visually recognized in the front view (see FIG. 17B), the pair of light irradiation is performed by making the colors of the light different from each other. A total of three colors of light, that is, the color of the light emitted from the unit 331c1 and the color in which they are combined, can be visually recognized in the projection range E0 (see FIG. 17B).

Here, since the light emitted from each of the pair of light irradiation units 331c1 is shielded by the spheres that independently roll along the path C2a (see FIG. 18), at the timing when the spheres shield the light. The color of the light visually recognized in the projection range E0 can be switched in various ways.

For example, in FIG. 18, consider a case where the light irradiation unit 331c1 on the right side irradiates a "blue" color light and the light irradiation unit 331c1 on the left side irradiates a "red" color light. In this case, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state, light is emitted in the light projection range E0 (see FIG. 17B) in the order of "blue", "purple (overlapping part)", and "red" from the right side. Is visually recognized.

In this case, if the sphere rolls on the path C2a on the right side of FIG. 18 to block the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the "blue" color light is blocked, so that the light projection range E0 Only "red" light is visible in.

On the other hand, when the sphere rolls on the path C2a on the left side of FIG. 18 to block the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the "red" color light is blocked, so that the light projection range E0 is set. Only "blue" light is visible.

In this way, the mode of light visually recognized in the light projection range E0 can be changed depending on which path the sphere rolls and which light irradiation unit 331c1 blocks the light. Since this change in the light mode is caused by a sphere that flows down the game area in a random path while colliding with a nail or the like, the change in the light mode can be caused at a random timing. That is, as compared with the case where the mode of the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 is changed by electronic control, it is possible to perform an effect rich in randomness, and it is possible to improve the effect.

In the present embodiment, the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed in a dogleg shape when viewed from above, but from the viewpoint of condensing light, it may be formed in a parabolic shape when viewed from above.

Next, the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 37.

FIG. 19 is a front perspective view of the composite operation unit 400, and FIG. 20 is a rear perspective view of the composite operation unit 400. Note that FIGS. 19 and 20 show a state in which the main body member 410 of the composite operation unit 400 is arranged at the retracted position, and the drive motor 462 and the fixing plate 461 are not shown. In the composite operation unit 400, the guide member 450 and the rear upper plate 470 are fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210.

FIG. 21 is a front exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 400, and FIG. 22 is a rear exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the composite operation unit 400 has a horizontally long rectangular main body member 410 that can be slid and moved in the vertical direction, and one end thereof can be guided to the left and right ends of the main body member 410. A pair of members to be connected, a shielding member 420 whose other end is pivotally supported by each other, a swinging member 430 swayablely arranged on the central front side of the main body member 410, and a main body member 410. A pair of leg members 440 are fastened and fixed at both ends and extended in the vertical direction, a guide member 450 in which a guide hole 452 for guiding the leg member 440 is formed, and a driving force required for moving the leg member 440. Wiring guide that connects the drive device 460 to be generated, the rear upper plate 470 that is fastened and fixed above the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and the rear upper plate 470 and the main body member 410, and the wiring is housed inside. It is mainly composed of an arm 480.

FIG. 23 is a front view of the main body member 410, the shielding member 420, and the swinging member 430, and FIG. 24 is a rear view of the main body member 410, the shielding member 420, and the swinging member 430.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the main body member 410 is formed in a plate-shaped base member 411 formed elongated in the left-right direction and both left and right ends of the base member 411 in the front-rear direction and vertically. The elongated leg insertion hole 412 and the direction in which the base member 411 is arranged inside the leg insertion hole 412 in the left-right direction and is bored in the front-rear direction and ascends and inclines toward the left-right central axis of the base member 411. A long-hole-shaped guide hole 413 extending to the base member 411 and a columnar member extending from the upper end portion of the base member 411 to the front side, and one end portion of the wiring guide arm 480 is pivotally supported. An arm shaft support 414, a holding portion 415 extending upward from the center of the base member 411 in the left-right direction and having a hook-shaped tip, and a swinging member 430 arranged in pairs at the lower end of the base member 411. The shaft support portion 416 that pivotally supports the shaft support hole 431a and the photo sensor 417 that is arranged in front of the base member 411 and detects the sensor passing portion 435d of the swing member 430 are formed in a substantially semicircular shape in the front view. Mainly includes a decorative plate portion 418.

The base member 411 has a shape in which the central portion in the left-right direction hangs downward from both the left and right end portions. As a result, a space can be formed above the central portion in the left-right direction, and the wiring guide arm 480 can be arranged in the space (see FIG. 29).

The leg insertion hole 412 is formed in an elongated shape, and by inserting the connecting fixing portion 442 (see FIG. 21) of the leg member 440, the leg member 440 is prevented from rotating with respect to the base member 411. To. As a result, the postures of the leg member 440 and the main body member 410 can be stabilized.

The guide hole 413 is an elongated hole through which the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is inserted and is slidably moved, and is formed with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion shaft portion 421c. On the upper side of the guide hole 413, a front lid 413a that covers the front side of the leg insertion hole 412 and has a side surface facing the guide hole 413 formed along the upper side of the guide hole 413 is arranged and below the guide hole 413. On the side, a support plate 413b, which is a plate-shaped portion projecting from the front side of the base member 411 and is inclined upward along the guide hole 413, is arranged.

The front end of the support plate 413b is in contact with the back surface of the swing base member 421. As a result, the back-and-forth swing of the swing base member 421 is suppressed by the support plate 413b, so that the posture of the shielding member 420 during movement can be stabilized.

The arm shaft support portion 414 is arranged on the left side in the front view from the central portion of the base member 411, and more specifically, is arranged at an intermediate portion between the portion where the upper end portion of the base member 411 starts to hang down and the central portion in the left-right direction. Will be done. The end (lower end) of the third guide arm 483 (see FIG. 21) of the wiring guide arm 480 is pivotally supported on the arm shaft support 414, and a collar member is attached to the tip of the arm shaft support 414. Fastened and fixed.

The holding portion 415 is a portion that is hooked on the slide lever 473 (see FIG. 21) arranged on the rear upper plate 470. That is, in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 29), the upper end portion of the slide lever 473 and the lower end portion of the hook-shaped portion of the holding portion 415 are brought into contact with each other. The downward movement of the main body member 410 is restricted. An inclined surface 415a is formed on the upper surface of the hook-shaped tip portion. The inclined surface 415a does not hinder the movement of the main body member 410 even when the main body member 410 is moved to the retracted position while the slide lever 473 is still overhanging.

The decorative plate portion 418 is a decorative portion that can be visually recognized together with the shielding member 420 when the main body member 410 is arranged at the overhanging position, and the main body member 410 is arranged at the retracted position (FIG. FIG. 29), which is a portion that comes into contact with the lower surface of the contact plate 421d.

The shielding member 420 is a decorative member in which the swing base member 421 formed in such a manner that the ends of the pair of plate-shaped members are pivotally supported, and the upper end portion is fastened and fixed to the front side of the swing base member 421. A guide in which the 422, a pair of connecting members 423 whose one end is coaxially supported by the shaft support position of the swing base member 421 and the other end of the connecting member 423 are pivotally supported. It mainly includes a guide plate 424 in which the hole 424b is formed and fastened and fixed to the upper end portion on the front side of the back case 210.

The swing base member 421 is a swing shaft formed of a pair of plate-shaped members 421a formed in a substantially arc shape and coaxially supported with a shaft support hole 423d formed at one end of the connecting member 423. It mainly includes a hole 421b, a pair of left and right insertion shaft portions 421c that are inserted and guided through the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410, and a contact plate 421d that protrudes to the back side and comes into contact with the upper surface of the main body member 410. ..

The swing shaft hole 421b is a portion that is hung and supported by the connecting member 423 through a shaft support rod 423c that is inserted through one end of the connecting member 423 and serves as a swing shaft of the pair of plate-shaped members 421a. Is.

Since the insertion shaft portion 421c is inserted into the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410, the left and right end portions of the shielding member 420 are moved downward from the intermediate position (see FIG. 30) as the main body member 410 is moved downward. It is moved close to the center in the left-right direction.

The abutting plate 421d is a curved surface protruding from the plate-shaped member 421a to the back surface side, and is formed along the shape of the upper surface of the decorative plate portion 418. As a result, the upper surface of the main body member 410 and the lower surface of the contact plate 421d are brought into contact with each other at the retracted position.

The decorative member 422 has a pair of wide and thick portions 422a arranged on the front side of the swing base member 421, and a portion formed below the swing base member 421 in the front view, and the lower end portion thereof. It includes a hanging portion 422b formed by being curved rearward from the swing base member 421.

The hanging portion 422b is arranged closer to the main body member 410 than the swing base member 421.

The connecting member 423 is formed of a pair of rod members 423a that are bent in a frontal view at the bent portion 423b, includes a shaft support rod 423c, and has a shaft support rod 423c at one end of the rod member 423a. A shaft support hole 423d through which the rod member is inserted is formed, and a slide shaft portion 423e which is inserted and guided through the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 is formed at the other end of the rod member 423a.

The bent portion 423b is bent above the straight line connecting the shaft support hole 423d and the slide shaft portion 423e. That is, the bent portion 423b is arranged so as to be separated from the swing base member 421 than the straight line connecting the shaft support hole 423d and the slide shaft portion 423e. Therefore, a large space can be secured between the swing base member 421 and the connecting member 423, and the degree of freedom in designing the swing base member 421 can be improved.

The slide shaft portion 423e is formed of a cylindrical portion inserted into the guide hole 424b and a disk-shaped collar member fastened and fixed to the tip of the cylindrical portion.

The guide plate 424 includes a base plate 424a that is fastened and fixed to the back case 210, and a guide hole 424b that is a pair of elongated holes that are bored in the front-rear direction and extended in the left-right direction at both left and right ends of the base plate 424a. , Is mainly provided. A pair of guide holes 424b are formed at the same height.

The guide hole 424b is formed in the left-right direction, that is, in the direction along the upper outer edge of the opening 211a of the rear case 210. Therefore, the width required for the guide plate 424 for guiding the connecting member 423 can be suppressed. In this case, since the guide plate 424 can be arranged at a position farther from the third symbol display device 81, the shielding member 420 can be formed to be larger by that amount.

The swing member 430 is a member that is swingably supported by the shaft support portion 416, and is a main body member 431 that swings and a base that projects from the front side of the central portion of the base member 411. The member 432, the drive motor 433 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 432 to generate the driving force for driving the main body member 431, the drive gear 434 pivotally supported by the drive motor 433, and the drive gear 434 are meshed with each other. A transmission gear 435 that is pivotally supported above the base member 432 with respect to the drive gear 434, and a connecting member 436 that connects the connecting shaft 435c of the transmission gear 435 and the connecting shaft 431b of the main body member 431 are mainly used. Prepare for.

The main body member 431 is a member in which a hemispherical decorative portion is formed on the front side, and is formed in the left-right direction below both ends in the left-right direction on the back side, and has a shaft support hole 431a through which the shaft support portion 416 is inserted, and a back surface. It mainly includes a connecting shaft 431b which is arranged in the central portion on the side and is pivotally supported by one end of the connecting member 436.

The connecting shaft 431b is arranged on the back surface side of the main body member 431 at a position closer to the shaft support hole 431a than the end on the opposite side (upper side) of the shaft support hole 431a. As a result, the moving width of the upper end portion of the main body member 431 can be increased as compared with the moving width in which the connecting member 436 is actually moved back and forth.

The transmission gear 435 extends to the opposite side of the main body 435a on which the gear is axially supported by the base member 432 and meshed with the drive gear 434 over approximately half a circumference and the gear formed on the main body 435a. Formed along the front left side surface of the overhanging portion 435b, the columnar connecting shaft 435c projecting from the overhanging tip portion of the overhanging portion 435b to the right in the front view, and the overhanging portion 435b. It is mainly provided with a sensor passing portion 435d (see FIG. 34), which is formed in a fan shape in a left-right direction and whose peripheral edge passes through the photosensor 417.

The connecting member 436 is a rod-shaped member in which holes parallel to each other are bored at both ends, and the connecting member 436 has a one-sided connecting hole 436a which is bored at one end and pivotally supported by the connecting shaft 431b of the main body member 431. The other side connecting hole 436b, which is formed at the other end and is pivotally supported by the connecting shaft 435c of the transmission gear 435, is mainly provided.

A description will be given by returning to FIGS. 21 and 22. The arm member 440 is formed in a long plate-shaped main body 441 in which a pair extends in the vertical direction and a long hole shape in which a cross section projecting from the upper end of the main body 441 to the front side is long in the vertical direction. A pair of insertion shafts 443 that project from the upper and lower ends of the main body 441 to the back side and are inserted into the guide holes 452 of the guide member 450, and a front side from the lower end of the main body 441. The locking portion 444, which is projected to and locks one end of the urging spring 445, and the other end of the urging spring 445, whose one end is locked to the locking portion 444, are locked and the rear case 210. It mainly includes a holding and fixing portion 446 that is fastened and fixed to the front side.

A rack gear 441a is engraved on the side surface of the main body portion 441 on the side facing the main body member 410, and the rack gear 441a is meshed with the drive gear 463 of the drive device 460 to generate a drive device 460. The force is transmitted to the leg member 440.

The insertion shaft portion 443 is formed in a vertically long elongated hole shape and is inserted into the guide hole 452 of the guide member 450 extending vertically, so that the posture of the leg member 440 with respect to the guide member 450 is stabilized. Can be done. Further, since the insertion shaft portion 443 is formed in a pair of upper and lower parts, the posture of the leg member 440 with respect to the guide member 450 can be stabilized.

The urging spring 445 generates an urging force that moves the leg member 440 toward the retracted position (see FIG. 19). At this time, the other end of the urging spring 445 acts as a fixed side end portion locked to the holding and fixing portion 446, and one end acts as a moving side end portion locked to the locking portion 444.

The guide member 450 has a main body member 451 which is a long plate member in the vertical direction arranged in a pair on the left and right, and a long hole shape which is bored in a pair of the main body member 451 in the vertical direction and extended in the vertical direction. Guide hole 452, a pair of fixing portions 453 for fixing the drive device 460 in the central portion in the vertical direction of the main body member 451, and the leg member 440 are arranged on the front side of the upper end portion of the main body member 451 and the leg member 440 is retracted. A cover member 454 arranged on the front side of the leg member 440 in the state of being arranged in FIG. 19) is mainly provided.

The drive device 460 has a shape in which the side close to the main body member 410 is lowered one step rearward, the side close to the main body member 410 is fixed to the fixing portion 453 of the guide member 450, and the opposite side is the fastening portion 212b of the rear case 210 ( A fixing plate 461 fixed to the fixing plate 461), a drive motor 462 fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 461, and a drive gear 463 pivotally supported by the drive motor 462 are mainly provided.

Since the fixing plate 461 has a shape in which the side separated from the main body member 410 is raised one step to the front side, a gap surrounded by the back case 210 and the fixing plate 461 can be formed on the side separated from the main body member 410. it can. Here, when the urging springs 445 are arranged on the left and right sides of the leg member 440, the arrangement width of the leg member 440 including the urging spring 4454 in the left-right direction becomes large, and thereby the left-right width of the opening 211a becomes small. Was there. In the present embodiment, the urging spring 445 can be arranged in the gap (formed on the front side of the leg member 440) surrounded by the back case 210 and the fixing plate 461, and the left and right sides of the leg member 440 can be arranged accordingly. The space in the direction can be suppressed.

The rear upper plate 470 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) formed above the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and is a plate-shaped main body portion 471 and the main body portion 471 thereof. A columnar shaft support 472 projecting from the upper left end of the front view to the front side, a horizontally long slide lever 473 arranged in the center of the main body 471, and the slide lever 473 in the left-right direction. It mainly includes a solenoid 474 that generates a driving force that is moved to the main body, and a front cover 475 that is fastened and fixed to the main body 471 so as to cover the front side of the slide lever 473.

The shaft support portion 472 is a portion where the one-side tubular portion 481b (see FIG. 25) of the wiring guide arm 480 is pivotally supported, and the collar member C is fastened and fixed to the tip end. The wiring introduced into the main body member 410 is arranged through the vicinity of the shaft support portion 472.

The slide lever 473 is a member that is in contact with the lower surface of the holding portion 415 of the main body member 410 in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 29) to prevent the main body member 410 from moving downward. is there. An inclined surface 473a is formed on the lower surface of the tip of the slide lever 473. When the inclined surface 473a and the inclined surface 415a of the main body member 410 come into contact with each other, it is possible to suppress resistance generated between the inclined surfaces.

The extension allowance of the slide lever 473 is changed depending on whether or not electricity is conducted to the solenoid 474. For example, when the slide lever 473 projects to the left in the front view due to the conduction of electricity, the slide lever 473 abuts on the lower surface of the holding portion 415 if the electricity is conducted, and the main body member 410 Is prevented from moving downward (see FIG. 29). On the other hand, if electricity is not conducted, the slide lever 473 and the holding portion 415 are not brought into contact with each other, and the main body member 410 can move downward.

Here, it is conceivable that the solenoid 474 is driven as the main body member 410 is arranged at the retracted position, and the slide lever 473 is brought into contact with the holding portion 415. However, in this case, the driving force from the driving device 460 cannot be released from the time when the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position until the solenoid 474 moves the slide lever 473. Therefore, when detecting the arrangement of the main body member 410 and changing the operation of the drive device 460, it is necessary to control the drive device 460 in consideration of the time for the solenoid 474 to move the slide lever 473, which is difficult to control. It becomes.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface 415a of the holding portion 415 is arranged to face the inclined surface 473a of the slide lever 473 by moving the main body member 410 upward while the slide lever 473 is overhanging (FIG. 31). (See), and eventually the slide lever 473 is pushed back. When the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position and the contact between the holding portion 415 and the slide lever 473 in the longitudinal direction of the slide lever 473 is released, the slide lever 473 is projected again and the lower surface of the holding portion 415 and the slide lever are released. It comes into contact with the upper surface of 473 (see FIG. 29). As a result, regardless of the arrangement of the main body member 410, by keeping the slide lever in the overhanging state, it is possible to prevent the main body member 410 from moving downward after being moved to the retracted position. Therefore, the control of the drive device 460 becomes easy.

The front cover 475 is a member in which a slide groove 475a, which is a concave groove for guiding the slide lever 473, is formed on the back surface in the left-right direction, and the slide lever 473 slides by the slide groove 475a of the front cover 475. It is possible to prevent the position from shifting in the vertical direction during movement.

The wiring guide arm 480 is a movable mechanism portion that guides the wiring W from the rear upper plate 470 to the main body member 410, which is formed of a resin material and is fastened and fixed to the rear case 210, and is attached to one end in order from the top. A first guide arm 481 whose one-side tubular portion 481b is pivotally supported by a shaft support portion 472, and a second guide arm 482 that pivotally supports the other end of the first guide arm 481 at one end. And a third guide arm 483 in which the other end of the second guide arm 482 is pivotally supported by one end and the other end is pivotally supported by the arm shaft support 414.

Here, the wiring W is an electrical wiring (for example, a flat harness) formed in a band shape (formed wide in the vertical direction of FIG. 27). The length of the second guide arm 482 in the longitudinal direction is shorter than that of the first guide arm 481 by the diameter of the collar member C or more, and the length of the third guide arm 483 is shorter than that of the second guide arm 482 in the longitudinal direction. Is formed to be shorter than the diameter of the collar member C.

The wiring guide arm 480 is configured to accommodate the wiring W inside, and is a member for preventing the wiring W from breaking and breaking. As a result, it is not necessary to dispose the wiring W introduced into the main body member 410 through the leg member 440, and the space for arranging the leg member 440 can be suppressed. Therefore, the opening 211a can be expanded in the left-right direction.

Next, the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27. Since the third guide arm 483 includes the ones described in the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 as a technical idea, the description thereof will be omitted here.

25 (a) is a front view of the first guide arm 481, FIG. 25 (b) is a bottom view of the first guide arm 481, and FIG. 25 (c) is a view of XXVc of FIG. 25 (a). FIG. 25 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first guide arm 481 in the line XXVc, and FIG. 25 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first guide arm 481 in the line XXVd-XXVd of FIG. 25 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (d), the first guide arm 481 has a plate-shaped arm portion 481a formed in a long plate shape and the left end of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a in a front view. One-sided tubular portion 481b whose shaft is arranged on the vertical line of the lower bottom surface (lower side surface of FIG. 25 (a)) of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and which extends in the front-rear direction, and the plate-shaped arm portion Among the ends of 481a, the shaft is arranged on the vertical line of the lower bottom surface of the plate-shaped arm 481a at the opposite end of the one-side tubular portion 481b, and the other-side tubular portion extends in the front-rear direction. 481c, a plate-shaped attachment portion 481d formed above the plate-shaped arm portion 481a at a predetermined interval, a bottom portion 481e connecting the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the back surface side of the attachment portion 481d, and an attachment portion 481d. It mainly includes a front locking portion 481f extending from the front side surface toward the plate-shaped arm portion 481a.

The wiring W is inserted through the inside of the concave cross-sectional portion formed by the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, the attachment portion 481d, and the bottom portion 481e (see FIG. 27). As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from rubbing against other members or being sandwiched between other members.

In the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, a notch portion 481a1 is formed in a portion facing the front locking portion 481f, and the plate thickness of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a is reduced in the portion where the notch portion 481a1 is formed. ..

The cutout portion 481a1 is a recess formed in the plate-shaped arm portion 481a having a shape slightly larger than that of the front locking portion 481f in the front view, and is formed over the width direction of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. In the portion where the cutout portion 481a1 is formed, the formation of the bottom portion 481e is omitted (the bottom portion 481e is formed through).

By configuring the notch portion 481a1 as described above, the first guide arm 481 can be easily manufactured by die molding (by die cutting in one direction). Further, by inserting the wiring W from the notch portion 481a1, the wiring W can be easily accommodated in the first guide arm 481.

The portion of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a other than the portion where the cutout portion 481a1 is formed is shorter than the overhang width of the front locking portion 481f with the attachment portion 481d. Therefore, in a state where the wiring W is accommodated in the first guide arm 481 and extended in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 27A), the wiring W is prevented from falling off to the front side (front side in FIG. 27A). Can be prevented.

The plate-shaped arm portion 481a is provided with a rib portion N formed in a rib shape in the width direction on the side surface on the side facing the attachment portion 481d. The rib portion N is formed in the vicinity of the other side tubular portion 481c pivotally supported by the second guide arm 482, and is a rib projecting from the second guide arm 482 at the intermediate portion of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. It is formed alternately with the part N.

The other-side tubular portion 481c includes an enlarged diameter portion 481c1 whose inner diameter is partially increased, and the end surface on the back surface side is on the front side of the bottom portion 481e in order to form an overlapping margin with the second guide arm. It is formed (see FIG. 25 (b)).

The enlarged diameter portion 481c1 is formed on the inner peripheral side of the other side tubular portion 481c over a half circumference (upper half circumference in FIG. 25 (a)), and is formed from the other side bottom portion 481e2 side of the other side tubular portion 481c. It is a recess formed to a length of approximately half the length of the cylinder of the side tubular portion 481c (see FIG. 25 (c)).

The attachment portion 481d includes an arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1 formed as an arc coaxial with the other-side tubular portion 481c around the other-side tubular portion 481c, and extends to the front side of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. .. As a result, even when the flat surface locking portion 481f is formed, it is possible to secure a gap through which the wiring is inserted from the front side.

The attachment portion 481d is provided with a rib portion N formed in a rib shape in the width direction on the side surface on the side facing the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. The rib portion N is formed at an intermediate position between the rib portions N projecting from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a in the intermediate portion of the attachment portion 481d.

The arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1 is formed with a radius larger than the radius of the substantially arc-shaped shape formed when the wiring W bends to the outside of the other side tubular portion 481c (upper right of FIG. 27B). Radius.

Further, since the wiring guide arm 480 is formed at the inner upper end of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), when replacing or maintaining the wiring W, the wiring is attached by a route that is not blocked by the rear case 210. Need to remove. In the present embodiment, the attachment portion 481d close to the upper wall surface of the back case 210 is formed so as to project forward from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a separated from the upper wall surface of the back case 210. Therefore, for example, when removing the wiring W, the wiring W may be pulled out to the front side and pulled out in the direction from the attachment portion 481d to the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, so that the upper wall surface of the rear case 210 interferes with the work. Will never be. When inserting the wiring, insert it in the opposite direction. Therefore, the maintainability of replacing the wiring W can be improved.

The bottom portion 481e is arranged above the one-side tubular portion 481b and formed in a fan shape centered on the axis of the one-side tubular portion, and the other side bottom portion 481e1 is arranged above the other-side tubular portion 481c. The other side bottom portion 481e2 formed in a fan shape centered on a shaft spaced above the shaft of the side tubular portion 481c is mainly provided. The end of the arcuate attachment portion 481d1 is formed to the left of the front view from the end of the other side bottom portion 481e2.

The plane locking portion 481f is a claw-shaped member that prevents the wiring W from falling off from the front side. That is, the wiring W is formed with a width shorter than the length from the bottom portion 481e to the front locking portion 481f.

26 (a) is a front view of the second guide arm 482, FIG. 26 (b) is a bottom view of the second guide arm 482, and FIG. 26 (c) is a view of XXVIc of FIG. 26 (a). FIG. 26 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the second guide arm 482 in the −XXVIc line, and FIG. 26 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the second guide arm 482 in the XXVId-XXVId line of FIG. 26 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (d), since the second guide arm 482 has a plurality of configurations of the same technical idea as the first guide arm 481, the description thereof will be omitted. To do. That is, the plate-shaped arm portion 481a is attached to the plate-shaped arm portion 482a, the other side tubular portion 481c is attached to the other side tubular portion 482c, the attachment portion 481d is attached to the attachment portion 482d, the bottom portion 481e is attached to the bottom portion 482e, and the front locking portion. 481f corresponds to the front locking portion 482f, respectively.

The plate-shaped arm portion 482a includes a notch portion 482a2 at a portion facing the front locking portion 482f. Since the technical idea of the notch portion 482a2 is the same as the technical idea of the notch portion 481a1, the description thereof will be omitted.

The plate-shaped arm portion 482a and the attachment portion 482d are provided with rib portions N on the side surfaces facing each other. In the vicinity of the one-side shaft support 482b that is pivotally supported by the first guide arm 481, a rib portion N is formed in the attachment portion 482d, and in the intermediate portion of the second guide arm 482, the rib portion N is a plate-shaped arm portion 482a. And 482d are alternately formed.

The second guide arm 482 has a one-sided shaft support 482b and a one-sided shaft support 482b, which are formed in a columnar shape from the upper right portion of the bottom portion 482e to the front side and a fastening portion is formed at the tip thereof. One side bottom portion 482e1 which is formed in a substantially arc shape and extends from the bottom portion 482e on the same plane, and the right end portion of the plate-shaped arm portion 482a which is projected from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the one side bottom portion 482e1 to the front side. It is mainly provided with an arcuate plate portion 482a1 connected to the above.

The arcuate plate portion 482a1 is formed with a radius larger than the radius of the substantially arcuate shape formed when the wiring W bends to the outside of the other side tubular portion 481c (upper right of FIG. 27B). Radius.

The one-side shaft support portion 482b is a portion through which the reduced diameter portion 482b1 is formed and the other-side tubular portion 481c of the first guide arm 481 is inserted, and the front side surface of the one-side bottom portion 482e1 is the other-side cylinder. It is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface side surface of the shaped portion 481c. Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 27), the bottom portions 481e and 482e are formed on the same plane, and the bottom portions 481e and 482e can come into contact with each other in the respective rotation directions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482. It is formed. Therefore, overspeeding of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be prevented, and the wiring W can be prevented from being excessively bent (see FIG. 27).

The reduced diameter portion 482b1 is formed on the outer peripheral side of the one-side shaft support portion 482b over a half circumference (lower half circumference in FIG. 26A), and the one-side shaft support portion 482b is formed from the one-side bottom portion 482e1 side to the one-side shaft. It is a depression formed to a length of approximately half the length of the branch 482b (see FIG. 26 (c)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the swing of the second guide arm 482 with respect to the first guide arm 481 will be described. 27 (a) and 27 (b) are front views of the first guide arm 481, the second guide arm 482, and the wiring W. Note that FIG. 27 (a) shows a state in which the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481 (corresponding to the state of FIG. 29), and FIG. 27 (b) shows FIG. 27 (b). From the state of a) to the end of the movable range in which the second guide arm 482 can swing with respect to the first guide arm 481, the state of swinging counterclockwise in front view (corresponding to the state of FIG. 33). Illustrated. In FIG. 27 (b), the one side bottom portion 482e1 of the second guide arm 482 and the other side bottom portion 481e2 of the first guide arm 481 are brought into contact with each other to prevent further swinging of the second guide arm 482. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the wiring W is a recessed portion (FIGS. 25 (d) and 26 (d)) formed by the plate-shaped arm portions 481a and 482a, the attachment portions 481d and 482d, and the bottom portions 481e and 482e. )) Is arranged inside. Therefore, due to the rigidity of the first guide arm 481 or the second guide arm 482, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from being bent to the extent that the wiring W is broken during the movement of the main body member 410.

Further, at the shaft support positions (right end in FIG. 27A) of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, the wiring W is arranged so as to wrap around the other side tubular portion 481c. Therefore, at the axial support positions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, it is suppressed that the wiring W is bent with a radius of curvature equal to or less than the diameter of the other side tubular portion 481c. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from being bent, and it is possible to suppress disconnection of the wiring W.

The state of FIG. 27A corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 29, that is, the state in which the main body member 410 is arranged at the retracted position. The higher the speed at which the main body member 410 is moved from the retracted position to the overhanging position, the easier it is to improve the effect. When starting the main body member 410 from the stopped state at the retracted position, it is necessary for the drive device 460 to generate a driving force that exceeds the inertial force of the main body member 410 and the inertial force of the wiring guide arm 480. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 27A, it is desirable that the rotational resistance of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 constituting the wiring guide arm 480 at the shaft support position is small.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), in a state where the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481, the diameter-expanded portion 481c1 and the diameter-expanded portion 481c1 and the circumference of the one-side tubular portion 481b are folded. The reduced diameter portion 482b1 surrounds it. The enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are portions that are recessed in a direction away from the mating member forming the shaft support relationship, and have an effect of suppressing rotational friction during shaft rotation. When the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481, the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are formed around the axis of the one-side tubular portion 481b (over the entire circumference). Therefore, the resistance when rotating the second guide arm 482 with respect to the first guide arm 481 is suppressed.

On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 27 (b), the range in which the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are arranged around the axis of the one-side tubular portion 481b is substantially half the circumference (the upper half circumference of FIG. 27 (b)). ). As shown in FIG. 27 (b), the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 largely overlap each other. In this case, the rotational resistance of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be increased as compared with the state shown in FIG. 27 (a).

From the state where the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481, the length at which the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 overlap as the second guide arm 482 is rotated with respect to the first guide arm 481. The length becomes longer, and the rotational resistance of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 increases. That is, the speed of the second guide arm 482 can be reduced as the second guide arm 482 is rotated with respect to the first guide arm 481.

Therefore, the speed at which the other side bottom portion 481e2 and the one side bottom portion 482e1 come into contact with each other can be reduced, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are in contact with the other side bottom portion 481e2 and the one side bottom portion 482e1. The load received by contact can be suppressed. As a result, the durability of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be improved, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are on opposite sides (the second guide arm 482 is shown in FIG. 27). It is possible to prevent bending from the state of (b) to the side further rotated counterclockwise).

In the present embodiment, since the wiring guide arm 480 is formed by axially supporting three members, the moving speed of the wiring guide arm 480 can be changed even when the moving speed of the main body member 410 is constant. can do.

For example, in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the overhanging position (see FIG. 33), the posture of the wiring guide arm 480 is not limited to one, and the third guide arm 483 can rotate upward (posture). (Changeable) The amount can be changed. Therefore, the moving speed of the first guide arm 481 can be adjusted by changing the posture of the third guide arm 483 even while the main body member 410 is moving. Therefore, even if the moving speed of the wiring guide arm 480 is changed during the movement of the main body member 410, it is not necessary to change the moving speed of the main body member 410 accordingly.

As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the other side bottom portion 481e2 and the one side bottom portion 482e1 are in contact with each other, a gap is formed between the arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1 and the arc-shaped plate portion 482a1. Even if the wiring W bends to the outside of the other side tubular portion 481c (upper right in FIG. 27B) due to this gap, the wiring W is sandwiched between the arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1 and the arc-shaped plate portion 482a1. It is possible to prevent the wiring W from being broken.

As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the wiring guide arm 480 is in the open state, the wiring W moves significantly to the outside of the other side tubular portion 481c, and in particular, the first guide arm 481 and the second guide The wiring W is likely to be misaligned near the end (shaft support position) of the arm 482. When the wiring W is repeatedly displaced with respect to the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, the wiring W and the inner side surfaces of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 rub against each other, and the durability of the wiring W becomes durable. There is a risk of reduced sex.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rib portion N formed in a rib shape on the inner side surface of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 is caught in the wiring W, so that the wiring W and the first guide arm 481 and It is possible to improve the resistance with the second guide arm 482 and prevent the wiring W from being displaced.

The wiring W is effective by forming the rib portion N on the side surface opposite to the direction in which the wiring W separates from the other side tubular portion 481c in the vicinity of the shaft support positions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482. Can be supported. That is, for example, the portion of the wiring W projecting from the connecting position of the arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1 and the attachment portion 481d toward the attachment portion 481d side is pressed against the plate-shaped arm portion 481a along the shape of the arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1. .. Therefore, by forming the rib portion N in the pressed portion, the resistance between the wiring W and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a can be increased.

The side surface of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a on which the wiring W is pressed is curved to the opposite side of the attachment portion 481d and recessed so that the wiring W is fitted into the recess and the wiring is performed. It is possible to suppress the misalignment between the W and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. In this case, since the surface of the curved recess and the wiring W come into contact with each other by surface contact, local wear of the wiring W is suppressed as compared with the case where the wiring W receives resistance from the rib portion N by point contact. Can be done.

Further, the distance between the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the attachment portion 481d may be widened in the vicinity of the shaft support position. For example, the attachment portion 481d may be inclined so as to be separated from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a as it approaches the other side tubular portion 481c from the front locking portion 481f on the right side of FIG. 27 (b). In this case, the wiring W is curved by the portion where the distance between the attachment portion 481d and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a is widened (the portion near the other side tubular portion 481c) to reduce the slack of the wiring W near the support portion. It can be absorbed, and the misalignment of the wiring W at the intermediate portion (the portion sandwiched between the front locking portions 481f) of the first guide arm 481 can be suppressed (the wiring W cancels the slack near the support portion). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first guide arm 481 from being displaced in the longitudinal direction). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from rubbing against the inner surface of the first guide arm 481 and being worn, and to improve the durability of the wiring W.

In the intermediate portion between the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, rib portions N are alternately formed on the inner side surfaces arranged so as to face each other. Therefore, the wiring W can be easily hooked on more rib portions N as compared with the case where the rib portions N are formed on only one of the inner side surfaces arranged so as to face each other. As a result, the resistance between the wiring W and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be increased, and the misalignment between the wiring W and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 is suppressed. can do.

In FIG. 27, a disk-shaped color member C fastened and fixed to the front side of the wiring guide arm 480 is illustrated by an imaginary line. The collar member C is fastened and fixed to, for example, the tip of the one-side shaft support 482b or the tip of the shaft support 472 (see FIG. 21) inserted into the one-side tubular portion 481b, and the front surface of each tubular portion 481b, 481c. It is a member that prevents movement to the side.

In the present embodiment, the color member C is extended to a position where at least a part of the adjacent attachment portions 481d and 482d overlaps in the front view, or even if they do not overlap in the front view, the color member C and the attachment portion 481d, It is extended from between the 482d and the wiring W to a position where the wiring W does not come off. For example, at the left end of FIG. 27 (b), there is a gap between the collar member C and the attachment portion 481d, but the wiring W is deformed so as to be separated from the one-side tubular portion 481b (bulging outward). Therefore, there is little possibility that the wiring W will fall out from the gap. That is, the color member C is extended until it overlaps with the wiring W in the front view (FIG. 27), so that the collar member C has a sufficient diameter to prevent the wiring W from falling off. As a result, the wiring W is prevented from falling off from the wiring guide arm 480.

Here, assuming that the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are formed to have the same length, the collar member C is brought into contact with the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 when they are folded. You will not be able to fold it. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lengths of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 in the longitudinal direction are different. That is, in a state where the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are folded until their extension directions are parallel to each other (see FIG. 27A), they are arranged on the front side of the one-side tubular portion 481b. The collar member C provided and the collar member C disposed on the front side of the other side tubular portion 482c are different to the extent that they do not interfere with each other.

Thereby, while suppressing the wiring W from falling off from the wiring guide arm 480 by disposing the collar member C, it is possible to suppress the arrangement space by folding the wiring guide arm 480. It is desirable that the lengths of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 in the longitudinal direction (the length of the collar member C to the axis) differ from the diameter of the collar member C or more.

Next, the operation of the combined operation unit 400 will be described. First, the change in the posture of the shielding member 420 with respect to the sliding movement of the main body member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33.

28 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, FIG. 29 is a rear view of the combined operation unit 400, FIG. 30 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 31 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400. 32 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 33 is a rear view of the combined operation unit 400.

In addition, in FIGS. 28 and 29, the state in which the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position is shown, and in FIGS. 30 and 31, the posture of the swing base member 421 with respect to the main body member 410 from the state of FIGS. 28 and 29. The main body member 410 is arranged at an intermediate position where the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is arranged at the inner end of the guide hole 424b in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged. The state in which the member 410 is arranged at the overhanging position is illustrated.

Further, in FIG. 28, the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is shown by an imaginary line, and in FIGS. 28, 30 and 32, a part of the main body member 410 is shown by a hidden line and the overlapping portion P is shown by an imaginary line. In FIGS. 29, 31 and 33, the rear upper plate 470 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

Further, in FIG. 30, the vicinity of the connecting member 423 is magnified, and in the magnified view, a state in which the connecting member 423 is moved by a predetermined amount from the central end of the pair of guide holes 424b is illustrated by an imaginary line. Will be done. Further, in FIG. 31, the vicinity of the guide hole 413 is magnified, and in the magnified view, a state in which the insertion shaft portion 421c is moved by a predetermined amount from the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The main body member 410 is moved in the vertical direction along the guide hole 452 as the leg member 440 meshed with the drive gear 463 is rotated by rotating the drive gear 463.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the contact plate 421d of the swing base member 421 of the shielding member 420 is supported by the decorative plate portion 418 of the base member 411 in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position. Therefore, the central portion in the left-right direction of the swing base member 421 is supported. In this state, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is arranged at the lateral end of the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 in the left-right direction, and the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. The wiring guide arm 480 is folded so that the extending directions of the guide arms are parallel to each other. Further, the upper side surface of the slide lever 473 and the lower side surface of the holding portion 415 are brought into contact with each other to prevent the main body member 410 from moving downward.

As shown in FIG. 28, at least a part of the mechanical portion of the swing member 430 such as the transmission gear 435 is a gap (formed in the center in the left-right direction and downward) formed between the pair of decorative members 422 of the shielding member 420. It is arranged in a gap that becomes wider as it goes (see FIGS. 28 and 34). As a result, in the state where the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position, the swinging member 430 can be packed in the shielding member 420 in the vertical direction and arranged, and the width of the shielding member 420 and the swinging member 430 in the vertical direction can be increased. It can be suppressed. In this case, since the area of the front view formed by the main body member 410, the shielding member 420, and the swinging member 430 can be reduced, the opening 211a (see FIG. 6) can be made larger accordingly.

Here, for example, a mechanical portion such as a transmission gear 435 of the swing member 430 may be arranged on the front side of the main body member 410. In this case, in order to increase the area of the overlapping portion P between the main body member 410 and the decorative member 422 (the main body member 410 and the decorative member 422 are brought together in the moving direction of the main body member 410), the decorative member 422 is a mechanical portion thereof. It is conceivable to place it on the front side of. On the other hand, in this case, since it is necessary to move the swing member 430 accommodating the decorative member 422 to the front side (direction away from the main body member 410), the space on the front side of the swing member 430 is suppressed and the neck It becomes difficult to form the swing member 430 three-dimensionally on the front side.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, at least a part of the swing member 430 (mechanical part such as the transmission gear 435) can be accommodated in the space created by the pair of decorative members 422 being separated from each other. it can. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to move the decorative member 422 to the front side of the mechanical portion of the swing member 430 in order to increase the area of the overlapping portion P between the main body member 410 and the decorative member 422. The 430 can be arranged close to the main body member 410. As a result, the swing member 430 can be three-dimensionally formed on the front side.

In FIG. 28, since the swing member 430 takes a posture in which the main body member 431 is tilted (see FIG. 34), the vertical width in the front view is suppressed as compared with the standing posture (see FIGS. 32 and 35). To. Therefore, even when the swing member 430 is viewed alone, the area of the front view formed by the swing member 430 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the contact plate 421d of the swing base member 421 of the shielding member 420 is supported by the decorative plate portion 418 of the base member 411 in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged at an intermediate position. The left-right central portion of the swing base member 421 is supported (that is, the shielding member 420 is in the same posture as in FIGS. 28 and 29). In this state, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is arranged at the inner end of the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 in the left-right direction, and the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. Placed in. Further, in the wiring guide arm 480, the third guide arm 483 is mounted on the upper side surface of the main body member 410, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 take an inclined posture with respect to the left-right direction, respectively.

Since the third guide arm 483 is formed shorter than the other guide arms 481 and 482, the main body member is in a state where the third guide arm 483 is stably mounted on the upper side surface of the main body member 410. It can be maintained longer while the 410 is in motion. As a result, the wiring W arranged inside the wiring guide arm 480 can be made more stable, and disconnection of the wiring W can be prevented.

Here, when the main body member 410 is moved downward at high speed and is arranged at an intermediate position, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 bounces off at the inner end of the guide hole 424b, and the swing base of the shielding member 420. The shaft support position (shaft support rod 423c, see FIG. 23) between the member 421 and the connecting member 423 may bounce upward, and the posture of the shielding member 420 may not be stable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the guide hole 413 for guiding the insertion shaft portion 421c of the swing base member 421 is formed so as to incline toward the inside in the left-right direction, and the slide shaft portion 423e is guided. Holes 424b are formed in the left-right direction.

In other words, when the slide shaft portion 423e reaches the inner end of the guide hole 424b, the insertion shaft portion 421c is a directional component perpendicular to the rebounding direction of the shaft support positions of the swing base member 421 and the connecting member 423. It is guided so as to be movable in the direction of having.

Therefore, a resistor F directed downward from the upper side surface of the guide hole 413 is applied to the insertion shaft portion 421c that is moved upward as the swing base member 421 moves upward, and is above the insertion shaft portion 421c. Movement to is suppressed. In this case, it is suppressed that the swing base member 421 bounces upward and the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 bounces at the inner end of the guide hole 424b. In addition, even if the swing base member 421 bounces upward and the connecting member 423 bounces upward, the slide shaft portion 423e comes into contact with the upper and lower side surfaces of the guide hole 424b, so that the movement of the connecting member is suppressed. Will be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the bending portion 423b is formed in the connecting member 423 and the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 bounces off at the inner end of the guide hole 424b, the bending portion 423b is the swing base member 421. It moves in a direction away from the upper side surface (the bent portion 213b moves to the center side in the left-right direction by a distance X). Therefore, when the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 bounces off at the inner end of the guide hole 424b in the left-right direction, a sufficient distance can be formed between the connecting member 423 and the swing base member 421, and the connecting member 423 and the connecting member 423 can be separated from each other. It is possible to prevent the rocking base member 421 from colliding with the rocking base member 421. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the swing base member 421 can be improved.

In the state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the intermediate position, the connecting member 423 connected to the swing base member 421 suppresses the movement of the swing base member 421 in the left-right direction. That is, for example, when the swing base member 421 starts to move to the left in the front view due to disturbance, the connecting member 423 inserted into the guide hole 424b on the right in the front view is located at the center of the pair of guide holes 424b in the left-right direction. The movement is dammed at the end, and the movement of the swing base member 421 in the left-right direction is suppressed. Therefore, the arrangement of the swing base member 421 can be stabilized.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the swing base member 421 of the shielding member 420 is suspended and supported by the connecting member 423 in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the overhanging position. In this state, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is arranged at the inner end of the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 in the left-right direction, and the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is the upper end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. Placed in. Further, the wiring guide arm 480 has a posture in which the other side bottom 481e2 (see FIG. 25) of the first guide arm 481 and the one side bottom 482e1 (see FIG. 26) of the second guide arm 482 are in contact with each other in the swing direction. Take.

Here, when the main body member 410 moves from the intermediate position to the overhanging position, the pair of left and right insertion shaft portions 421c move upward along the guide holes 413 in opposite directions in the left-right direction. That is, the forces applied to the pair of swing base members 421 from the pair of left and right guide holes 413 of the main body member 410 are oriented in opposite directions to each other and cancel each other out. Therefore, the swing shaft hole 421b (see FIG. 33) formed on the central axis of the pair of swing base members 421 is suppressed from being displaced in the left-right direction, so that the shielding member 420 is displaced in the left-right direction. Is suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 33, the pair of swing base members 421 and the pair of decorative members 422 of the shielding member 420 are in contact with each other in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the overhanging position. As a result, for example, even if one swing base member 421 moves faster than the other swing base member 421 and the pair of swing base members 421 are displaced from each other (deviation in the vertical direction), the other The displacement can be suppressed by the contact with the swing base member 421. As a result, the posture of the shielding member 420 at the overhanging position can be stabilized.

The change in the area of the overlapping portion P will be described. The overlapping portion P means a portion where the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 overlap in the front view. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 30, most of the main body member 410 corresponds to the overlapping portion P from the state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the retracted position to the state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the intermediate position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32, when the main body member 410 is arranged at the overhanging position, the shielding member 420 is moved above the main body member 410, especially in the central portion in the left-right direction, and the area of the overlapping portion P is increased. Is made smaller. That is, the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 can be visually recognized separately.

As a result, the area of the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 in the front view is larger when the main body member 410 is arranged in the overhanging position than when the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position. It is made larger, and the width in the vertical direction is expanded especially in the central part in the horizontal direction. In this case, the area change in the front view of the region formed by the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which easily attracts the attention of the player, can be increased, and the effect is produced. The effect can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the change in the area of the overlapping portion P described above occurs after the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 start to project to the front of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). As a result, the effect can be performed as if the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 expand, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Next, the operation of the swing member 430 of the composite operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 on the line XXXIV-XXXIV of FIG. 28, and FIG. 35 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 on the line XXXV-XXXV of FIG. In FIG. 34, the tilted state of the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is shown by a solid line, and the hanging portion 422b of the decorative member 422 is accommodated between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the main body member 410. The state is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 35, the state in which the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is erected is shown by a solid line, and the state in which the swing member 430 is tilted is shown by an imaginary line for reference, and is arranged in an overhanging state. The moving member 540 of the swinging operation unit 500 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the drive gear 434 is rotated by the drive motor 433 (see FIG. 23), and the transmission gear 435 is rotated accordingly, so that the connecting shaft 435c moves back and forth, and the connecting shaft 435c is connected. When the connecting member 436 pivotally supported by the shaft 435c moves in the front-rear direction, the main body member 431 pivotally supported by the connecting member 436 swings around the shaft support portion 416 (see FIG. 23). In this case, the main body member 431 is moved in the direction of approaching and separating from the decorative member 422b. The swing member 430 can switch between the tilted state shown in FIG. 34 and the standing state shown in FIG. 35 at an arbitrary position, and the posture can be changed as long as it does not interfere with the shielding member 420.

Since the shaft support portion 416 (see FIG. 23) is connected to the lower end side of the swing member 430, when the swing member 430 is in the tilted state (see FIG. 34), the upper end side is arranged to face the shielding member 420. It is possible to secure a large distance D between the main body member 410 and the main body member 410. On the other hand, the movement width of the lower end portion of the swing member 430 on the opposite side of the shielding member 420 can be reduced, and the swing member 430 can be compared with the case where the swing member 430 slides back and forth. The space required for arranging the above can be suppressed.

In other words, when securing a space for accommodating the shielding member 420 by sliding in the front-rear direction, the lower end portion of the swing member 430 on the opposite side of the shielding member 420 also moves by the interval D in the same manner as the upper end portion. As a result, the arrangement space for the swing member 430 increases accordingly. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the swing member 430 is swung, the shielding member 420 is smoothly accommodated between the main body member 410 and the swing member 430, and the arrangement area of the swing member 430 is arranged. It is possible to achieve both suppression and suppression.

In the present embodiment, in particular, the change width d of the outer shape of the lower portion on the front side of the main body member 431 is small while the swinging member 430 tilts. Therefore, even if the main body member 431 is tilted in a state where the other members are close to or in contact with each other below the main body member 431 (see FIG. 9), it is possible to suppress the load from being applied between the members.

In the present embodiment, in the state of FIG. 9, the upper surface of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 40) arranged to face the main body member 431 forms a downwardly convex curved surface, and the main body member 431 is close to this curved surface. The main body member 431 can be tilted at a position (a position where the main body member 431 and the moving member 540 partially overlap each other in the front view). As a result, the posture of the main body member 431 can be changed by a large width at the upper part of the main body member 431 while ensuring the effect that the main body member 431 and the moving member 540 are brought close to each other and visually recognized integrally at the lower part of the main body member 431. it can.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the decorative member 422 of the shielding member 420 is inclined downward (closer to the shaft support 416 (see FIG. 23)) and toward the back surface (main body member 410 side). It is formed so as to be curved in a direction away from the swing member 430. In this case, when the decorative member 422 starts to be accommodated between the swing member 430 and the main body member 410, the distance between the decorative member 422 and the swing member 430 can be secured, and the decorative member 422 and the neck can be secured. Collision with the swing member 430 can be avoided.

Further, the lower end portion of the decorative member 422 can be stored deeply (downward) in the gap formed between the main body member 410 and the swing member 430 while the upper end portion of the decorative member 422 is projected to the front. .. Since no other member is arranged on the front side of the swing member 430, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the front portion of the swing member 430 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the swing member 430 is erected, the decorative member 422 is separated upward from between the swing member 430 and the main body member 410, and the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is separated. The upper end portion and the main body member 410 are arranged close to each other. As a result, it is possible to fill the dead space when the decorative member 422 is not accommodated between the main body member 410 and the swing member 430. Further, by making it possible to form a posture in which the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is arranged close to the main body member 410, the movement width of the swing member 430 in the front-rear direction in the pachinko machine 10 in which the front-rear width is defined is increased. It can be secured, and the effect of swinging the swing member 430 can be improved.

Here, in FIG. 34, a state in which the swing member 430 is arranged above the third symbol display device 81 and the swing member 430 is tilted is shown. In this case, the direction A1 of the effect surface on the front side of the swing member 430 is a direction inclined diagonally downward toward the front. On the other hand, in FIG. 35, the swing member 430 is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), and the state in which the swing member 430 is erected is shown by a solid line. In this case, the direction A2 of the effect surface on the front side of the swing member 430 is directed to the front. That is, by adjusting the degree of swing of the swing member 430, the directions A1 and A2 of the swing member 430 on the front side are directed toward the player's eyes (the center front side of the third symbol display device 81). Can be adjusted to. Therefore, the attention of the swing member 430 can be improved, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, in order to improve the attention of the swing member 430, a new rotating shaft is not provided, and the shaft branch 416 (see FIG. 23) is utilized. That is, the shaft support portion 416 is used for the purpose of securing a distance between the decorative member 422 and the swing member 430 when the decorative member 422 starts to be accommodated between the swing member 430 and the main body member 410. It is also used for the purpose of adjusting the front side orientations A1 and A2 of the member 430 toward the player's eyes (the front side of the center of the third symbol display device 81).

The degree of swing of the swing member 430 can be determined by whether or not the sensor passing portion 435d passes through the photo sensor 417. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 34, the sensor passing portion 435d does not pass through the photo sensor 417. On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 35, the sensor passing portion 435 has passed through the photo sensor 417. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a gap is secured between the swing member 430 and the main body member 410 in a state where the sensor passing portion 435 does not pass through the photo sensor 417.

Therefore, by moving the main body member 410 ascendingly while the sensor passing portion 435 does not pass through the photo sensor 417, the shielding member 420 can be combined with the main body member 410 without interfering with the swinging member 430 and the shielding member 420. It can be accommodated between the swing member 430 and the swing member 430.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37, it will be described that the shape of the hanging portion 422b suppresses the malfunction of the operation of the composite operation unit 400. FIG. 36 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 37 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 in the line XXXVII-XXXVII of FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 36 and 37, a state in which the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is tilted by a predetermined angle from the upright state (see FIG. 35) and the back side of the main body member 431 is in contact with the hanging portion 422b is shown. ..

As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the main body member 410 is moved up and down in a state where the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is in the middle of the standing state (see FIG. 35) and the tilted state (see FIG. 34). There are cases where control is performed. This control is performed, for example, when the combined operation unit 400 is immediately changed from the state shown in FIG. 34 to the state shown in FIG. 35.

Here, the drive motor 462 (see FIG. 21) that drives the main body member 410 after confirming that the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 reaches the tilted state (see the broken line in FIG. 35) from the upright state shown in FIG. 35. If the main body member 431 is rotated, the state in which the back surface side of the main body member 431 comes into contact with the hanging portion 422b cannot occur (see FIG. 34).

However, in this case, the drive motor 462 (see FIG. 21) is rotated after waiting for the completion of the operation of the swing member 430. Therefore, as compared with the case where the drive motor 433 (see FIG. 23) that tilts the swing member 430 and the drive motor 462 that drives the main body member 410 are simultaneously rotated, the composite operation unit 400 is moved from the state of FIG. 34 to FIG. 35. The period for changing to a state becomes longer. In other words, in order to immediately change the combined operation unit 400 from the state of FIG. 34 to the state of FIG. 35, it is necessary to drive the drive motor 433 and the drive motor 462 at the same time. In this case, the main body member 410 of the swing member 430 is moved up and down while the main body member 431 is in the standing state (see FIG. 35) to the tilted state (see FIG. 34). In this case, the main body portion 431 of the swing member 430 may come into contact with the hanging portion 422b, causing the composite operation unit 400 to malfunction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drooping portion 422b is formed in a curved shape (see FIG. 37). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 37, the contact of the swing member 430 with the back surface side (formed by a plane) of the main body member 431 is not a contact on a surface but a contact on a point (line). It is possible to suppress the frictional resistance at the contact position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the composite operation unit 400 from malfunctioning due to the contact between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging portion 422b.

For example, when the state of FIGS. 36 and 37 is a state in which the main body member 410 is in the process of ascending and moving from FIG. 35, the frictional resistance at the contact position between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging portion 422b is increased. If it is large, it causes a decrease in the moving speed of the main body member 410. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the frictional resistance at the contact position between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging portion 422b is suppressed, the moving speed of the main body member 410 can be increased. Further, as the main body member 410 moves upward, the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 tilts with respect to the curved shape of the hanging portion 422b, so that the hanging portion 422b exerts a driving force on the main body member 431 of the swing member 430. A giving relationship arises. As a result, it is possible to reduce the burden on the drive motor 433 to tilt the swing member 430.

Further, for example, when the state of FIGS. 36 and 37 is a state in which the main body member 410 is in the process of descending from FIG. 34, the friction at the contact position between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging portion 422b. If the resistance is large, it becomes a factor that reduces the moving speed of the main body member 410. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the frictional resistance at the contact position between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging portion 422b is suppressed, the moving speed of the main body member 410 can be increased. Further, since the hanging portion 422b is formed so as to be inclined downward and inclined diagonally backward and the back surface side of the main body member 431 is formed in a flat shape, even if the main body member 410 moves downward while they are in contact with each other, the hanging portion is formed. The 422b and the main body member 431 do not get caught in each other.

From these, it is possible to prevent the composite operation unit 400 from malfunctioning by moving the main body member 410 while the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is tilted. Therefore, the state of the composite operation unit 400 can be changed immediately by moving the main body member 410 while the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is tilted.

Next, the swing operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 50. FIG. 38 is a front perspective view of the rocking operation unit 500, and FIG. 39 is a rear perspective view of the rocking operation unit 500. Note that FIGS. 38 and 39 show a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged at the retracted position.

The swing operation unit 500 is composed of a pair of left and right operation units (see FIG. 5), but since they have the same technical configuration, in FIGS. 38 to 50, the operation on the left side of the pair of left and right operation units is performed. The unit will be described as a swinging operation unit 500.

FIG. 40 is a front exploded perspective view of the rocking operation unit 500, and FIG. 41 is a rear exploded perspective view of the rocking operation unit 500. In addition, in FIG. 40, the fastening hole portion 527 is partially magnified, and in FIG. 41, the bridge member 528 is partially magnified.

As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, in the swinging operation unit 500, a rectangular plate-shaped base member 510 and shaft support holes 522 and 526 are formed at both ends of the base member 510, and one side shaft support hole 522 is formed in the base member 510. The distance between the central shafts of the long plate-shaped drive side arm member 520 and the shaft support holes 532 and 533 formed at both ends is the shaft support hole 522 of the drive side arm member 520. , 526 has a length equivalent to the distance between the central shafts, and one side shaft support hole 532 at one end is swingably supported by the base member 510. A horizontally long block-shaped moving member 540 that is swingably supported by the other side shaft support hole 526 of the drive side arm member 520 and the other side shaft support hole 533 of the driven side arm member 530, and the drive side arm member 520. The drive device 550 that generates a driving force for swinging the shaft, and the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are sandwiched between the drive device 550 and the base member 510, and the drive motor 551 is fastened and fixed. Mainly includes a front plate member 560.

The base member 510 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 511, a plurality of shaft support portions 512 projecting in a columnar shape from the right side portion of the main body portion 511 to the front side, and the lowermost shaft support portion 512 thereof. A drive gear receiving hole 513 formed on the left side of the front view of the three shaft portion 512c, a photo sensor 514 arranged on the right side of the shaft support portion 512, and a rectangle from the left side portion of the main body portion 511 to the front side. It mainly includes a lower support portion 515 projecting from the shape.

The main body portion 511 is formed so that the height of the upper end portion of the first shaft portion 512a is different between the left side in front view and the right side in front view. That is, on the left side of the first shaft portion 512a in front view, a step-down portion 511a whose upper side surface is lowered by one step is provided.

The step-down portion 511a has an effect of expanding the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 8) in a state where the moving member 540 of the swing operation unit 500 is arranged at the overhanging position. Further, in a state where the moving member 540 is arranged in the retracted position, for example, when the driven side arm member 530 falls backward, the area where the driven side arm member 530 and the main body portion 511 may come into contact with each other in the front-rear direction is increased. It can be reduced (see FIG. 39). As a result, when the moving member 540 moves from the retracted position to the overhanging position, or when the moving member 540 moves from the overhanging position to the retracted position, the driven side arm member 530 and the main body portion 511 are brought together. The area that may be rubbed can be reduced, and the moving member 540 can be moved smoothly.

The shaft support portion 512 is formed of three rod members whose shafts are parallel to each other while being spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and one end of the driven side arm member is pivotally supported in this order from the top. The shaft portion 512a, the second shaft portion 512b on which one end of the drive side arm member is pivotally supported, and the third shaft portion 512c on which the transmission gear 553 meshed with the drive gear 552 is pivotally supported. Mainly prepare.

The drive gear receiving hole 513 is a through hole for internally fitting a step portion projecting to the back surface side of the drive gear 552.

The lower support portion 515 is brought into contact with the lower side of the lower side surface of the other end portion of the drive side arm member 520 in a state where the drive side arm member 520 is arranged in the retracted position, and the lower support portion 515 is in contact with the lower side of the lower side surface of the other end portion of the drive side arm member 520. The portion is prevented from swinging further downward.

The drive side arm member 520 is a member formed of a resin material, and is one end of a main body plate portion 521 formed in a long plate shape and the main body plate portion 521 (the end portion on the right side when viewed from the front). ), A semicircle centered on a one-sided shaft support hole 522 formed in the front-rear direction and through which the second shaft portion 512b is inserted, and a one-side shaft support hole 522 formed below the one-side shaft support hole 522. A gear portion 523 in which gear teeth are engraved on the outer circumference of the gear portion 523, a sensor passing plate 524 fastened and fixed to a raised portion 521a raised from the vicinity of the outer circumference of the gear portion 523 to the front side, and a one-side shaft support hole 522. A collar member 525 having through holes arranged coaxially and fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body plate 521, and the other end of the main body plate 521 (the left end when viewed from the front) are bored in the front-rear direction. The other side shaft support hole 526 in which the second shaft portion 542b of the moving member 540 is pivotally supported via the collar, and a pair of fastening holes arranged near the other end of the main body plate portion 521 and bored in the front-rear direction. A pair of fastening hole portions 527 including 527a1 and 527b1 and a bridge member 528 through which the insertion portions 528a2 and 528b2 are inserted into the fastening hole portion 527 and fastened and fixed are mainly provided.

The main body plate portion 521 includes a raised portion 521a at one end (right end in FIG. 40), which is inserted into the guide hole portion 563 and the sensor passing plate 524 is fastened and fixed to the tip.

The gear portion 523 is a portion that is meshed with the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553 of the drive device 550 (see FIG. 48), and includes an umbrella portion 523a that is overlaid on the front side.

In the present embodiment, the umbrella portion 523a is formed so as to cover the entire gear tooth 523 (see FIG. 48). However, the umbrella portion 523a does not necessarily have to cover the entire gear tooth 523, and is formed so as to cover at least the gear teeth of the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553, so that the umbrella portion 523a is formed as the second gear portion. The contact with 553b is possible, and the wobbling of the drive side arm member 520 can be prevented.

The sensor passing plate 524 is a member arranged on the front side of the front plate member 560 in the assembled state (see FIG. 42), and is a fastening portion that is raised and fastened to one end of the main body plate portion 521. It mainly includes a 524a and a sensor passing plate portion 524b extending in the radial direction about the one-side shaft support hole 522 in the assembled state from the fastening portion 524a.

The sensor passing plate portion 524b is a member that is arranged to face the front side surface of the front plate member 560 and passes through the inside of the photo sensor 514. Here, the sensor passing plate portion 524b can be brought into contact with the front side surface of the front plate member 560, and the sensor passing plate portion 524b is brought into contact with the front plate member 560 to bring the drive side arm member 520 into contact. Shaft tilting with respect to the biaxial portion 512b is suppressed. On the other hand, the sensor passing plate portion 524b is a member capable of detecting that the drive side arm member 520 is in the retracted position by passing through the inside of the photo sensor 514. That is, the sensor passage plate portion 524b can be used for both increasing the resistance to deformation (shaft tilt) of the drive side arm member 520 and detecting the posture of the drive side arm member 520.

The color member 525 is a plate-shaped member having a substantially diamond shape with rounded outer shapes, and has a main body portion 525a having a circular outer shape having a diameter at the end in the lateral direction of the outer shape, and a main body thereof. An outer fitting hole 525b formed in the center of the portion 525a, and a pair of fastening portions 525c arranged on both the left and right sides of the main body portion 525a and having a tapered tip and fixed to the main body plate portion 521. Mainly prepared.

The pair of fastening hole portions 527 includes a first fastening hole portion 527a to which the first bridge member 528a is fixed, and a second fastening hole portion 527b to which the second bridge member 528b is fixed.

As shown in FIG. 40, since the pair of fastening holes 527 are formed on the other side shaft support portion 526 side (the side on which the moving member 540 is arranged) of the drive side arm member 520, the fastening hole 527 and the one side shaft are formed. A long distance from the support hole 522 can be secured. Therefore, as will be described later, even if the driven side arm member 530 comes into contact with the bridge member 528 and the drive side arm member 520 may be twisted and deformed, the deformation is caused by the fastening hole 527 and the one-side shaft support hole 522. It can be generated using a long distance in the part between and (the twist angle per predetermined length in the longitudinal direction can be reduced). In this case, the load applied from the one-side shaft support hole 522 to the second shaft portion 512b (load in the direction in which the second shaft portion 512b is tilted and folded) can be suppressed, and the durability of the second shaft portion 512b is improved. be able to.

The first fastening hole portion 527a is bored adjacent to the first fastening hole 527a1 to which the first bridge member 528a is fastened and fixed, and the first fastening hole 527a1 and the auxiliary protrusion 528a3 is inserted. The first bridge member 528a is provided with a first pin fastening hole 527a2 to which the first bridge member 528a is non-rotatably fixed.

The first fastening hole 527a1 and the first pinning hole 527a2 are arranged along a line forming a predetermined angle θ1 (θ1 <90 degrees) with respect to the lateral direction of the drive side arm member 520 (see FIG. 43). ..

The second fastening hole 527b is bored adjacent to the second fastening hole 527b1 to which the second bridge member 528b is fastened and fixed, and the second fastening hole 527b1, and the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 is inserted. The second pin fastening hole 527b2 to which the second bridge member 528b is non-rotatably fixed, and the base portion 527b3 formed in such a manner that the outer edges of the second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pin fastening hole 527b2 are raised to the front side. , Equipped with.

The second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pin fastening hole 527b2 are arranged along a line forming a predetermined angle θ2 (θ2 <90 degrees) with respect to the lateral direction of the drive side arm member 520 (see FIG. 43). .. That is, when the second bridge member 528b bends and deforms toward the front side in FIG. 43, the load applied to the drive side arm member 520 is defined as the twisting direction (the direction of rotation about the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 520). It can be divided in the bending direction (the direction in which the drive side arm member 520 bends toward the front side). As a result, when the second bridge member 528b receives a load from the driven side arm member 530 and is flexed and deformed, it is possible to prevent the drive side arm member 520 from being twisted and deformed about the longitudinal direction.

The bridge member 528 is arranged on the opposite side of the other side shaft support 526 with the first bridge member 528a arranged on the side close to the other side shaft support 526 and the first bridge member 528a. A second bridge member 528b, which is formed to be larger (longer and wider in the lateral direction) than the first bridge member 528a, is provided.

The first bridge member 528a projects from the main body portion 528a1 formed in the shape of a long plate, the insertion portion 528a2 that is inserted into and fastened to the first fastening hole 527a1, and the insertion portion 528a2. Auxiliary protrusion 528a3, a rib portion 528a4 formed along the side edge of the main body portion 581a1 on the side close to the other side shaft support hole 526, and projecting toward the back side, and an end portion of the rib portion 528a4. 528a5 is an inclined portion that is inclined with respect to the projecting direction.

The main body portion 528a1 is formed with a length that covers the driven side arm member 530 in a front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 48).

The auxiliary protrusion 528a3 is a portion inserted into the first pin fastening hole 527a2 formed adjacent to the first fastening hole 527a1 of the main body plate portion 521, whereby the bridge member 528 is inserted into the main body plate portion 521. 2 points are supported. Therefore, the bridge member 528 can be fixed to the main body plate portion 521 so as not to rotate relative to each other.

Since the rib portion 528a4 is not formed up to the tip of the main body portion 528a1, contact with the driven side arm member 530 is suppressed at the retracted position (see FIG. 48), and the driven side arm is suppressed at the overhanging position (see FIG. 50). It is formed in such a manner that it easily comes into contact with the member 530. The details will be described later.

The second bridge member 528b is projected adjacent to the main body portion 528b1 formed in the shape of a long plate, the insertion portion 528b2 that is inserted into and fastened to the second fastening hole 527b1, and the insertion portion 528b2. Auxiliary protrusion 528b3, a rib portion 528b4 formed along the side edge of the main body portion 581b1 near the other side shaft support hole 526 and projecting toward the back side, and an end portion of the rib portion 528b4. It mainly includes an inclined portion 528b5 that is inclined with respect to the projecting direction.

The main body portion 528b1 is formed with a length that covers the driven side arm member 530 in a front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 48).

The auxiliary protrusion 528b3 is a portion inserted into the second pin fastening hole 527b2 formed adjacent to the second fastening hole 527b1 of the main body plate portion 521, whereby the bridge member 528 is inserted into the main body plate portion 521. 2 points are supported. Therefore, the bridge member 528 can be fixed to the main body plate portion 521 so as not to rotate relative to each other.

Since the rib portion 528b4 is not formed up to the tip of the main body portion 528b1, contact with the driven side arm member 530 is suppressed at the retracted position (see FIG. 48), and the driven side arm is suppressed at the overhanging position (see FIG. 50). It is formed in such a manner that it easily comes into contact with the member 530. The details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 43, the second bridge member 528b has a width of a portion overlapping the driven side arm member 530 rather than a width of a portion of the main body portion 528b1 (see FIG. 41) fastened to the drive side arm member 520. The one is formed narrower. As a result, when the driven side arm member 530 of the second bridge member 528b comes into contact with the second bridge member 528b, it is possible to prevent the second bridge member 528b from twisting about the longitudinal direction (flexion along the longitudinal direction). Can be made easier).

Therefore, when the driven side arm member 530 and the second bridge member 528b come into contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the second bridge member 528b from being twisted and deformed, and the mode of deformation can be limited. In this case, since the arrangement position of the portion (second pin fastening hole 527b2) for preventing the second bridge member 528b from turning over can be limited, the configuration of the second bridge member 528b can be simplified. .. That is, it is not necessary to form the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 (see FIG. 41) in the lateral direction of the second bridge member 528b with respect to the insertion portion 528b2 (see FIG. 41).

The driven side arm member 530 is a member formed of a resin material, and is one end of a main body plate portion 531 formed in a long plate shape and the main body plate portion 531 (the end portion on the right side when viewed from the front). ), It is bored in the front-rear direction at the one-side shaft support hole 532 through which the first shaft portion 512a is inserted, and at the other end (the left end when viewed from the front) of the main body plate portion 531. The first shaft portion 542a of the moving member 540 is mainly provided with an other side shaft support hole 533 that is pivotally supported via a collar.

The front side surface of the main body plate portion 531 is formed on the same plane as the front side surface of the drive side arm member 520.

The moving member 540 has a main body portion 541 formed from a long block shape in the left-right direction and a curved surface whose upper surface is convex downward, and a columnar protrusion on the back side on the right side of the main body portion 541 when viewed from the rear. It mainly includes a pair of shaft support portions 542 to be provided, and an alignment portion 543 projecting from the right side surface of the main body portion 451.

In the present embodiment, the moving member 540 is formed to be thicker toward the side where the pair of moving members 540 abut (right side in FIG. 42A), so that the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is a pair of moving members. The member 540 is formed on the abutting side and at a position separated from the driven side arm member 530 on the front side (see FIG. 42).

The shaft support portion 542 is formed at the same shaft-to-axis distance as the shaft-to-axis distances of the first shaft portion 512a and the second shaft portion 512b, and in the state shown in FIG. 38, the relative arrangement of the pair of shafts is first. It is formed from a pair of shafts formed in the same arrangement as the shafts of the shaft portion 512a and the second shaft portion 512b, and mainly includes a first shaft portion 542a and a second shaft portion 542b in order from the top.

The first shaft portion 542a is a portion inserted through the other side shaft support hole 533 of the driven side arm member 530, and the second shaft portion 542b is inserted through the other side shaft support hole 526 of the drive side arm member 520. This is the part.

Here, as described above, the distance between the shaft support holes 522 and 526 at both ends of the drive side arm member 520 and the distance between the shaft support holes 532 and 533 at both ends of the driven side arm member 530 are Be the same. Further, the relative arrangement of the first shaft portion 512a and the second shaft portion 512b arranged on the base member 510 and the first shaft portion 542a and the second shaft portion 542b arranged on the moving member 540 is arranged. The relationship (direction and distance of the straight line connecting the axes) is the same. Therefore, a parallel link is formed by the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530, and the posture of the moving member 540 is not changed during the swing of the drive side arm member 520 (FIGS. 48 to 50).

The alignment portion 543 is a portion for aligning the relative positional relationship of the pair of moving members 540 when the moving member 540 is arranged at the overhanging position. The moving member 540 on the right side of the front view (see FIG. 8) is formed with a recess that is recessed so as to accept the positioning portion 543 of the moving member 540 on the left side.

The drive device 550 includes a drive motor 551 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front plate member 560 with the drive shaft facing the rear side, a drive gear 552 that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 551, and one in the drive gear 552. It mainly includes a transmission gear 553 in which the first gear portion 553a of the first stage is meshed and the second gear portion 553b of the second stage is meshed with the gear portion 523 of the drive side arm member 520.

The transmission gear 553 is a member in which two gear teeth having different diameters are coaxially formed, and is a first gear portion 553a formed from a large-diameter gear arranged to face the base member 510, and a first gear portion 553a thereof. A second gear portion 553b formed of gears having a diameter smaller than that of the first gear portion 553a arranged on the front side of the gear portion 551a, and bored at the center of the first gear portion 553a and the second gear portion 553b. It is mainly provided with a shaft support hole 553c which is pivotally supported by the third shaft portion 512c of the base member 510.

The front plate member 560 has a main body portion 561 formed in a horizontally long plate shape, a holding portion 562 recessed in the same arrangement as the arrangement of the shaft support portion 512 of the base member 510, and a fastening portion 524a of the sensor passing plate 524. A guide hole portion 563 formed in an arc shape along the movement locus of the above is mainly provided.

The holding portion 562 is recessed with a diameter equivalent to the diameter of each cylinder of the shaft support portion 512, and the tip end portion of each shaft portion of the shaft support portion 512 is internally fitted and fixed. As a result, the shaft support portion 512 can be supported at both ends, so that the shaft can be stabilized. Therefore, the operation of the drive side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the transmission gear 553 can be stabilized.

The guide hole portion 563 is an arc-shaped elongated hole through which a raised portion 521a projecting from the drive side arm member 520 toward the sensor passing plate 524 is inserted, and extends in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion. A stopper wall portion 563a is provided. As a result, even if the drive-side arm member 520 is displaced in the radial direction with respect to the second shaft portion 512b, the raised portion 521a of the drive-side arm member 520 is brought into contact with the guide hole portion 563 and movement is restricted. , The position of the drive side arm member 520 can be stabilized.

The stopper wall portion 563a is a wall portion for preventing the moving member 540 from swinging beyond the movable range when the moving member 540 is moved toward the overhanging position (see FIG. 43). is there. When the moving member 540 moves to the right from the state shown in FIG. 43, the stopper wall portion 563a and the raised portion 521a (see FIG. 40) to which the sensor passing plate 524 and the sensor passing plate 524 are fastened and fixed are brought into contact with each other. To. The stopper wall portion 563a extends not only to the front side but also to the back side. As a result, the contact area between one end of the drive side arm member 520 and the stopper wall portion 563a can be increased, and the raised portion 521a to which the sensor passing plate 524 and the sensor passing plate 524 are fastened and fixed at the time of contact can be increased. The stress applied to can be reduced.

The end portion of the movable range of the swinging operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43. 42 (a) and 43 are front views of the rocking motion unit 500, and FIG. 42 (b) is a side view of the rocking motion unit 500 in the direction of the arrow XXXIIb of FIG. 42 (a). Note that FIG. 42 shows a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 43 shows a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged in the overhanging position.

As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the posture of the moving member 540 is not changed when the moving member 540 swings from the retracted position to the overhanging position. Therefore, when the pair of left and right moving members 540 (see FIG. 6) are close to each other (both are swung to the overhanging position), the side surfaces arranged to face each other (the right side surface in FIG. 43) remain parallel. Since they are brought close to each other, it is possible to easily fit the alignment portion 543 to unite the pair of moving members 540.

In a state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the overhanging position, the bridge member 528 is placed on the front side surface of the driven side arm member 530. Further, since the distance between the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 is narrowed, the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 can be brought into contact with each other when swinging beyond the overhanging position. As a result, the swing of the drive side arm member 520 can be stopped.

As shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the side (right side of FIG. 42) where the pair of moving members 540 are in contact with each other in the left-right direction, and is front and rear. In the direction, it is formed so as to be separated from the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530.

As shown in FIG. 43, the bridge member 528 fastened and fixed to the front side of the drive side arm member 520 is extended so as to cover the front side of the driven side arm member 530.

Here, with reference to FIG. 44, the difference in the fastening portion between the first bridge member 528a and the second bridge member 528b will be described. Due to the difference at the fastening portion, the ease of turning over the first bridge member 528a and the second bridge member 528b from the drive side arm member 520 differs.

Here, "turning over" means that the bridge member 528 receives a force from the driven side arm member 530 toward the upper side of FIG. 44 and is peeled off from the driving side arm member 520.

44 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the drive side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530 and the first bridge member 528a in the XXXIVa-XXXXIVa line of FIG. 43, and FIG. 44 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first bridge member 528a. It is sectional drawing of the drive side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the 2nd bridge member 528b in -XXXXIVb line.

First, as a first difference, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pinning hole 527b2 for receiving the second bridge member 528b are different from the first fastening hole portion 527a. The base portion 527b3 is formed. As a result, the second embedding width Wb1, which is the embedding width of the insertion portion 528b2 into the second fastening hole 527b1, is longer than the first embedding width Wa1, which is the embedding width of the insertion portion 528a2 into the first fastening hole 527a1. Will be done. Therefore, the second bridge member 528b can be fixed more firmly than the first bridge member 528a (the second bridge member 528b is less likely to be turned over than the first bridge member 528a).

The second difference is that the first overhang width Wa2, which is the overhang width of the insertion portion 528b2 from the main body plate portion 521 in the fastened and fixed state, is the overhang width of the insertion portion 528a2 from the main body plate portion 521. It is shortened as compared with the second overhang width Wb2. Therefore, the second bridge member 528b can suppress the deformation in the vicinity of the fastening position as compared with the first bridge member 528a (the second bridge member 528b is the first bridge member 528a. It's hard to turn over in comparison).

The third difference is that the first fastening hole 527a1 is formed on the opposite side of the driven side arm member 530 with respect to the first pin fastening hole 527a2 (see FIG. 44A), but the second fastening hole 527b1 is the first. The 2-pin fastening hole 527b2 is formed on the side close to the driven side arm member 530 as a reference (see FIG. 44 (b)).

In this case, the driven side arm member 530 moves (deflects and deforms, collapses and deforms) in a direction close to the bridge member 528 (upward in FIG. 44), and is fastened when a load is applied to the bridge member from the driven side arm member 530. There is a difference in how to endure in the part.

That is, when the main body portion 528a1 of the first bridge member 528a is pushed by the driven side arm member 530 and the main body portion 528a1 bends from the insertion portion 528a2, the auxiliary protrusion portion 528a3 separates from the drive side arm member 520 (FIG. 44 (a)). Therefore, the frictional resistance between the side surface of the auxiliary protrusion 528a3 and the inner surface of the first pin fastening hole 527a2 causes a resistance force against the turning of the main body portion 528a1.

On the other hand, when the main body portion 528b1 of the second bridge member 528b is pushed by the driven side arm member 530 and bends from the insertion portion 528b2, the seat surface of the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 is pressed against the drive side arm member 520. (See FIG. 44 (b)). Therefore, in addition to the frictional resistance between the side surface of the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 and the inner side surface of the second pin fastening hole 527b2, the seating surface of the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 is the side surface of the main body plate portion 521 on the front side (upper side of FIG. 44B). By being pressed against the body, resistance to turning over of the main body 528b1 is generated.

Therefore, the resistance to the turning of the second bridge member 528b can be increased as compared with the resistance to the turning of the first bridge member 528a.

The distance between the axes of the second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pinning hole 527b2 is formed longer than the distance between the axes of the first fastening hole 527a1 and the first pin fastening hole 527a2.

Due to the difference from the first to the third described above, the same load is applied from the driven side arm member 530 to either the first bridge member 528a or the second bridge member 528b toward the front side (upper part of FIG. 44). In this case, the second bridge member 528b has a resistance force at the root portion against turning (a force that can withstand turning at the fastening position with the drive side arm member 520) as compared with the first bridge member 528a. growing.

With reference to FIG. 45, a mode of contact between the driven side arm member 530 and the bridge member 528 when the driven side arm member 530 bends and deforms will be described. 45 (a) is a partial side view of the swinging operation unit 500 in the direction of arrow XXXVa of FIG. 43, and FIGS. 45 (b) and 45 (c) are driven sides from the state of FIG. 45 (a). It is a partial side view of the rocking operation unit 500 which showed the state which the arm member 530 bends to the front side in time series.

In addition, in FIG. 45A, a state in which the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are parallel in the longitudinal direction is shown, and in FIG. 45B, the driven side arm member 530 is on the front side (FIG. 45). (B) The state in which the first bridge member 528a is in contact with the bent first bridge member 528a is shown on the left side), and in FIG. 45 (c), the driven side arm member 530 is further bent toward the front side from the state of FIG. 45 (b). The state of contact with the bridge member 528b is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 45, the base member 510, the moving member 540, and the front plate member 560 are virtually illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 45, the first bridge member 528a is arranged closer to the moving member 540 as compared with the second bridge member 528b. Therefore, when the upper end of the driven side arm member 530 bends to the front side (left side in FIG. 45) due to factors such as the weight of the moving member 540 and contact with other members, the first bridge first when the amount of bending is small. The driven side arm member 530 abuts on the bridge member 528a (see FIG. 45B). After that, when the amount of bending of the driven side arm member 530 increases, the first bridge member 528a bends and deforms, and the second bridge member 528b comes into contact with the driven side arm member 530 (see FIG. 45 (c)).

That is, since the displacement of the driven side arm member 530 is larger in the portion in contact with the first bridge member 528a, a larger load is applied to the first bridge member 528a as compared with the second bridge member 528b. Be done.

Here, when the resistance to the bending deformation of the first bridge member 528a is as large as that of the second bridge member 528b, the first bridge member 528a is bent and deformed even if the amount of bending of the driven side arm member 530 is large. It may not (instead, the drive side arm member 520 bends). In this case, the driven side arm member 530 and the second bridge member 528b do not come into contact with each other, and only the first bridge member 528a receives the load from the driven side arm member 530 independently. The durability of the member 528a is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first bridge member 528a is fastened to the drive side arm member 520 in a manner in which the first bridge member 528a is more easily turned over at the root portion than the second bridge member 528b. Therefore, the first bridge member 528a is likely to be turned over (deforms with respect to the drive side arm member 520 near the root) before the driven side arm member 530 comes into contact with the second bridge member 528b.

In addition, the first bridge member 528a is formed to be narrower in the lateral direction and the plate thickness is formed to be the same as that of the second bridge member 528b (see FIG. 44). That is, the cross-sectional coefficient of the second bridge member 528b in the same direction is larger than the cross-sectional coefficient of the first bridge member 528a in the direction of the load applied from the driven side arm member 530 to the bridge member 528. Will be done. Therefore, the first bridge member 528a is more likely to bend in the vertical direction (left-right direction in FIG. 45A) in the lateral direction than the second bridge member 528b.

As a result, the pair of bridge members 528 can abut on the driven side arm member 530 and receive a load (see FIG. 45 (c)), and the load can be distributed and burdened on the pair of bridge members 528. Therefore, the durability of the first bridge member 528a and the second bridge member 528b can be improved.

The method in which the pair of bridge members 528 receive the load from the driven side arm member 530 is not limited to bending the first bridge member 528a. For example, by making the first overhang width Wa2 (see FIG. 44) of the first bridge member 528a longer than that of the present embodiment, the driven side arm member 530 and the first bridge have a deflection amount of FIG. 45 (b). The bridge member 528a may not be brought into contact with the bridge member 528a, and the pair of bridge members 528 may start to come into contact with the driven side arm member 530 at the same time with the amount of deflection shown in FIG. 45 (c). In this case, both the first bridge member 528a and the second bridge member 528b can receive the load from the driven side arm member 530, and the load is applied to the first bridge member 528a and the second bridge member 528b. Can be distributed and burdened.

On the other hand, when the amount of deflection is small (see FIG. 45B), the driven side arm member 530 does not come into contact with any of the pair of bridge members 528, so that it is difficult to suppress the bending of the driven side arm member 530. (Up to the amount of deflection in FIG. 45 (c), the deflection is suppressed only by the rigidity of the driven side arm member 530).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the amount of deflection of the driven side arm member 530 is small, the bending can be suppressed by bringing the driven side arm member 530 into contact with the first bridge member 528a (FIG. 45). See (b)). Further, as described above, when the amount of bending of the driven side arm member 530 becomes large, the first bridge member 528a is bent and deformed, and the driven side arm member 530 and the second bridge member 528b are brought into contact with each other. As a result, the pair of bridge members 528 can receive the load from the driven side arm member 530, and the load can be distributed to the pair of bridge members 528 to bear the load. Therefore, the first bridge member 528a and The durability of the second bridge member 528b can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the front-rear relationship between the drive side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the bridge member 528 will be described. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of the drive-side arm member 520 and the driven-side arm member 530 in the line XXXXIV-XXXXIV of FIG. 43. In FIG. 46, only the cross-sectional view of the long portion of the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 is shown for easy understanding, and the shapes of the end portions of the arm members 520 and 530 are omitted. To do.

As shown in FIG. 46, the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are formed so that the front side surface (the side surface above FIG. 46) is substantially the same plane, and the bridge member 528 is the driven side arm member 530. It is put on the front side of. Therefore, the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side along the arrow B1 (deflection deformation or tilt deformation), or the drive side arm member 520 moves to the back side along the arrow B2 (deflection deformation or tilt deformation). Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the drive-side arm member 520 from rotating (twisting and deforming) along the arrow B3. That is, by bringing the bridge member 528 and the driven side arm member 530 into contact with each other, the relative movement (deformation) between the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 can be suppressed.

Here, the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43) is arranged on the front side of the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530, and the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the front side of each arm member 520, 530. (See FIG. 42). As described above, since the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed closer to the side where the pair of moving members 540 abut (right side in FIG. 43), the driven side arm member 530 is in front of the driving side arm member 520. There is a great risk of falling. On the other hand, when the driven side arm member 530 tilts forward, the driven side arm member 530 of the bridge member 528 is supported (contacted) from the front side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the driven side arm member 530 from moving to the front side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 43), and accordingly, it is possible to prevent the moving member 540 from moving to the front side.

Since the drive-side arm member 520 is a member to which the driving force is transmitted, the drive-side arm member 520 may wobble in the swing axis direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46) depending on the transmission condition. The wobbling can be suppressed by the contact between the bridge member 528 and the driven side arm member 530.

On the other hand, when the drive side arm member 520 moves to the front side (deflection deformation or tilt deformation) along the arrow B1 or rotates clockwise (twist deformation) in the opposite direction of the arrow B3, the bridge Since the bridge member 528 is moved in a direction away from the driven side arm member 530, it becomes difficult to suppress the movement of the drive side arm member 520. Therefore, it is preferable that there is a mechanism for preventing these movements. Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the drive side arm member 520 is suppressed from moving toward the front side (deflection movement or tilting deformation) along the arrow B1, and the drive side arm member 520 is in the opposite direction of the arrow B3. A mechanism for suppressing clockwise rotation (torsional deformation) will be described.

FIG. 47 is a partial cross-sectional view of the swinging operation unit 500 in the line XXXXV-XXXXV of FIG. 43. As shown in FIG. 47, one end of the drive side arm member 520 is brought into contact with the transmission gear 553 from the front side (upper side of FIG. 47). That is, the gear portion 523 is brought into contact with the front side of the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553, and in addition, the umbrella portion 523a is brought into contact with the front side of the second gear portion 553b. Here, regardless of the arrangement of the drive side arm member 520, the transmission gear 553 is arranged on the opposite side of the driven side arm member 530 with respect to the straight line connecting the shaft support holes 522 and 526 formed at both ends of the drive arm member 520. It is installed (see FIGS. 48 to 50).

Therefore, when the side of the drive side arm member 520 close to the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side (twisting and deforming in the opposite direction of the arrow B3 in FIG. 46), the gear portion 523 is pressed against the first gear portion 553a. The umbrella portion 523a is moved in the direction of being pressed against the second gear portion 553b. In this case, the deformation resistance of the drive side arm member 520 increases. Therefore, the movement (twisting deformation) of the drive side arm member 520 in the opposite direction of the arrow B3 in FIG. 46 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 47, the sensor passing plate 524 is arranged on the front side of the front plate member 560 at the tip of one end of the drive side arm member 520. As a result, when the other end (right side of FIG. 47) of the drive side arm member 520 moves to the front side along the arrow B1 (deflection deformation or tilt deformation), one end sandwiching the second shaft portion 512b is sandwiched. The deformation resistance of the drive-side arm member 520 can be increased by the sensor passing plate 524 coming into contact with the front plate member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the other end of the drive-side arm member 520 from moving in the direction of the arrow B1 (deflection deformation or tilting deformation).

As shown in FIG. 47, the collar member 525 is formed to have a thickness substantially equal to the thickness of the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553. As shown in FIG. 41, the color member 525 is formed in a shape smaller than the outer shape of one end of the drive side arm member 520 in the front view. Therefore, the color member 525 causes the base member 510 and the drive side arm member. The contact area with 520 can be suppressed. Therefore, the contact resistance when the drive side arm member 520 is swung can be suppressed, and the drive motor 551 can be downsized.

Next, the swinging operation of the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. 48 to 50 are front views of the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530. In FIG. 48, the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are arranged at the retracted position as in FIG. 42, and in FIG. 49, the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm are arranged from the state of FIG. 48. A state in which the member 530 is swung by a predetermined amount is shown in FIG. 50, and a state in which the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are arranged at the overhanging positions is shown in FIG. Further, in FIGS. 48 to 50, the outer shape of the moving member 540 is shown by an imaginary line, the sensor passing plate 524 is not shown, and a part of the collar member 525 and the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553 is shown by a hidden line. In addition to being shown, the umbrella portion 523a of the gear portion 523 is partially omitted so that the gear teeth can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIGS. 48 to 50, the distance between the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 is shortened from the retracted position to the overhanging position. Therefore, the area covered by the driven side arm member 530 increases as the bridge member 528 moves from the retracted position to the overhanging position, and the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side and abuts on the bridge member 528. The resistance force generated from the bridge member 528 can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 48, the rib portion 528a4 of the first bridge member 528a and the rib portion 528b4 of the second bridge member 528b are formed on one side shaft support hole 532 and the other side shaft support hole of the driven side arm member 530. It is formed below the straight line connecting 533. Therefore, at the retracted position, the driven side arm member may change its posture in such a manner that the portion above the straight line connecting the one-side shaft support hole 532 and the other-side shaft support hole 533 falls to the front side (front side in FIG. 48). The distance between the 530 and the bridge member 528 can be kept large. As a result, when the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 start from the retracted position, the driven side arm member 530 falls forward and comes into contact with the bridge member 528, so that the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side It is possible to prevent the swing resistance of the arm member 530 from increasing.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 50, the rib portion 528a4 of the first bridge member 528a and the rib portion 528b4 of the second bridge member 528b are arranged at intermediate positions in the longitudinal direction of the driven side arm member 530. .. Therefore, at the overhanging position, the distance between the driven side arm member 530 and the bridge member 528, which may change in posture in a manner of tilting and deforming starting from the one-side shaft support portion 532, can be narrowed. As a result, at the overhanging position, the driven side arm member 530 and the bridge member 528 can be brought into contact with each other while the amount of deformation of the driven side arm member 530 is small.

That is, the rib portions 528a4 and 528b4 suppress the swing resistance when the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 start from the retracted position, and the driven side arm member 530 is arranged at the overhanging position. In the state, it is possible to make the driven side arm member 530 and the bridge member 528 come into contact with each other while the amount of deformation of the driven side arm member 530 is small.

Further, at least a part of the bridge member 528 is arranged on the front side of the driven side arm member 530 while the drive side arm member 520 is arranged from the retracted position to the overhanging position. .. As a result, the driven side arm member 530 moves in the axial direction while the bridge member 528 is not arranged on the front side of the driven side arm member 530, and the side surface of the driven side arm member 530 is arranged to face the drive side arm member 520. It is possible to prevent the bridge member 528 from coming into contact with the bridge member 528. Further, since the driven side arm member 530 can always come into contact with the bridge member 528, the effect of suppressing the axial misalignment of the driven side arm member 530 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 50, in a state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the overhanging position, the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are on the side where the pair of moving members 540 are in contact with each other (right side in FIG. 50). Take an inclined posture on the opposite side of. Therefore, it may be necessary to keep the drive motor 551 operating in order to maintain the arrangement of the moving member 540 (to prevent the drive side arm member 520 from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the side where the pair of moving members 540 abut (right side in FIG. 50). Therefore, in the state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the overhanging position, the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 receive a load from the moving member 540 in the clockwise direction in the front view. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drive side arm member 520 from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front, so that it is not necessary to continue operating the drive motor 551 while the moving member 540 is arranged at the overhanging position. The power consumption of the drive motor 551 can be reduced.

As described above, the transmission gear 553 and the gear portion 523 formed at one end of the drive side arm member 520 are brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIGS. 48 to 50, the contact surfaces of the transmission gear 553 and the gear portion 523 are moved in substantially the same direction (left side of FIG. 48) during the swinging operation of the drive side arm member 520.

That is, the driving force required for the rotation of the gear portion 523 is not only from the meshing with the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553, but also the side surface of the first gear portion 553a (front side in FIG. 48) and the gear. It can also be transmitted by contact with the side surface on the back side of the portion 523. This can be rephrased as reducing the swing resistance of the drive side arm member 520. As a result, the driving force required for the drive motor 551 can be reduced, and the drive motor 551 can be miniaturized.

As shown in FIG. 48, the collar member 525 has a longitudinal direction connecting the pair of fastening portions 525c and a lateral direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, and the longitudinal direction is a posture along the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 520. It is fastened and fixed to the drive side arm member 520. As a result, the collar member 525 and the base member are contacted along the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 520 as compared with the range in which the collar member 525 and the base member 510 are in contact with each other along the lateral direction of the drive side arm member 520. The range of contact with 510 is increased.

Therefore, the other end of the drive-side arm member 520 (the left end in FIG. 48) is inserted into the one-side shaft support hole 522 in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 40) starting from the second shaft portion 512b (see FIG. 40). The range in which the color member 525 is pressed against the base member 510 (see FIG. 40) can be increased when the color member 525 is deformed in the vertical direction of the paper surface. As a result, the deformation resistance of the drive side arm member 520 can be increased.

Further, the straight line L connecting the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 535 always intersects the circular outer shape of the main body portion 525a of the collar member 525. That is, it does not intersect with the outer shape of the fastening portion 525c. As a result, the distance between the shafts of the collar member 525 and the transmission gear 553 can be suppressed to the minimum length.

In other words, since it is not necessary to insert the fastening portion 525c arranged in the longitudinal direction of the collar member 525 between the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 553, the central axis of the collar member 525 and the transmission gear The distance between the axes of 553 and the central axis can be shortened. The distance between the axes is at least a distance at which the main body portion 525a of the collar member 525 and the transmission gear 553 can be arranged to face each other. As a result, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the collar member 525 can be improved, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the drive side arm member 520 can be improved.

Further, even when the distance between the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 555 is the same, when the fastening portion 525c is inserted between the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 553. In comparison, the contact area between the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553 and the drive side arm member 520 in the axial direction can be increased.

Next, the rocking operation unit 2500 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 51. In the first embodiment, the case where the end portion of the bridge member 528 of the swinging motion unit 500 is not fixed has been described, but in the swinging motion unit 2500 in the second embodiment, the main body portion 2561 of the front plate portion 2560 is used. A thickening portion 2561a for accommodating the tip of the bridge member 2528 is provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

51 (a) and 51 (b) are partial front views of the swinging operation unit 2500 in the second embodiment. Note that FIG. 51 (a) shows a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 51 (b) shows a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged in the overhanging position. In 51 (a) and 51 (b), the moving member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), the main body portion 2528a of the bridge member 2528 is formed over the width direction of the driven side arm member 530. As a result, when the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side (front side of the paper in FIG. 51) (falling deformation or bending deformation), the area of the main body portion 2528a that comes into contact with the driven side arm member 530 is set to the first embodiment. It can be expanded in comparison, and the movement of the driven side arm member 530 can be suppressed.

The main body portion 2561 of the front plate member 2560 is formed by thickening the thickening portion 2561a in the front-rear direction (vertical direction on the paper surface of FIG. 51) at the upper end portion thereof, and recessing downward from the upper end surface of the thickening portion 2561a. The accommodating portion 2561b is provided.

The accommodating portion 2561b is a recess that is recessed in a state of being closed on all sides in a top view, and is a recess in which the tip portion of the bridge member 2528 is accommodated in a state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the overhanging position. Is. The inner surface of the accommodating portion 2561b includes a movement locus of the tip portion of the bridge member 2528 (the upper tip portion of FIG. 51 (a)) (the tip portion of the bridge member 2528 is moved during the movement of the moving member 540). It is formed in a mode that does not abut on the inner surface of the accommodating portion 2561b). This prevents the bridge member 2528 from coming into contact with the inner surface of the drive side arm member 2520 in the inner surface of the accommodating portion 2561b during the movement of the moving member 540 from the retracted position to the overhanging position. can do.

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), the end portion of the bridge member 2528 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2561b in a state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the overhanging position. Therefore, for example, when the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side (for example, falls and deforms) and applies a load to the bridge member 2528, the resistance to the load can be improved.

That is, when the tip of the bridge member 2528 is not accommodated in the accommodating portion 2561b, the bridge member 2528 is cantilevered and resistant to the load from the driven side arm member 530 (the load toward the front side in FIG. 51). (The bridge member 2528 is fastened to the drive side arm member 2520). On the other hand, when the tip of the bridge member 2528 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2561b, a resistance force can be generated by the double-sided support against the load from the driven side arm member 530 (fastening with the driving side arm 2520). Supported by the position and the accommodating portion 2561b). As a result, it is possible to prevent the driven side arm member 530 from moving to the front side.

Further, since the bridge member 2528 is fastened and fixed to the drive side arm member 2520, the tip portion of the bridge member 2528 is housed in the accommodating portion 2561b, so that the drive side arm member 2520 is aligned in the front-rear direction. be able to.

In this case, the moving members 540 of the swinging operation unit 2500 formed in pairs on the left and right can be aligned in the front-rear direction, and the pair of moving members 540 are arranged at the overhanging positions (see FIG. 8). In the above, it is possible to prevent the pair of moving members 540 from being displaced relative to each other in the front-rear direction. Since the accommodating portion 2561b is arranged at a position closer to the contact position (see FIG. 8) between the pair of moving members 540 as compared with the driving side arm member 2520, the moving members 540 generated starting from the accommodating portion 2561b It is possible to reduce the misalignment of.

As a result, the effect of correcting the misalignment between the pair of moving members 540 can be ensured, and the pair of moving members 540 can be visually recognized integrally in the state where the pair of moving members 540 are arranged at the overhanging positions, thereby producing an effect. Can be improved.

Next, the rocking operation unit 3500 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 52. In the first embodiment, the case where the outer surface of the umbrella portion 523a of the drive side arm member 520 is formed in an arc shape has been described, but the swinging operation unit 3500 in the third embodiment is stretched outward from the umbrella portion 523a. An overhanging portion 3523b is provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

52 (a) to 52 (c) are front views of the rocking operation unit 3500 according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 52 (d) is a rocking on the Ld-Ld line of FIG. 52 (b). It is sectional drawing of the operation unit 3500. In FIG. 52, for easy understanding, only the base member 3510, the drive side arm member 3520, and the drive device 550 are shown, and the other members are omitted, and the photosensor 514 and the drive of the base member 3510 are shown. The illustration of the sensor passing plate 524 of the side arm member 3520 is omitted.

Further, FIG. 52 (a) shows a state in which the drive side arm member 3520 and the moving member 540 (see FIG. 7) are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 52 (b) shows the drive side arm member 3520 and the moving member. The state in which the 540 (see FIG. 7) is rotated by a predetermined angle from the retracted position is shown, and in FIG. 52 (c), the drive side arm member 3520 and the moving member 540 (see FIG. 7) are arranged in the overhanging position. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 52, the drive-side arm member 3520 includes an overhanging portion 3523b extending outward in the axial direction from the umbrella portion 523a. The overhanging portion 3523b is arranged below the second shaft portion 512b regardless of the posture of the drive side arm member 3520, and the width between the outer peripheral wall 3516 and the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553. It is formed with the above width (see FIG. 52 (b)). That is, during the swinging operation of the drive-side arm member 3520, either the outer peripheral wall 3516 or the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553 is arranged to face each other on the back surface side of the overhanging portion 3523b.

The base member 3510 includes an outer peripheral wall 3516 formed to be curved along the outer circumference of the umbrella portion 523a on the outer side in the axial direction of the umbrella portion 523a. The outer peripheral wall 3516 is projected from the front side of the main body portion 511 of the base member 3510 to a height equivalent to the front side surface of the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553 (see FIG. 52 (d)).

From these, it is possible to prevent the drive side arm member 3520 from moving (tilting deformation or bending deformation) to the front side starting from the second shaft portion 512b of the shaft support portion 512. That is, the drive side arm member 3520 moves to the front side (tilt deformation or flexure deformation) above the second shaft portion 512b due to the weight of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43), and is below the second shaft portion 512b. In, it moves to the back side (falling deformation or bending deformation). In this case, in addition to the umbrella portion 523a abutting on the front side surface of the transmission gear 553, the overhanging portion 3523b abuts on the front end surface of the outer peripheral wall 3516. As a result, the movement (falling deformation or bending deformation) of the drive side arm member 3520 can be suppressed by abutting at two positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), when the drive side arm member 3520 is arranged at the overhanging position, the drive side arm member is compared with the case where the drive side arm member 3520 is arranged at another position. The contact position between the 3520 and the transmission gear 553 in the front-rear direction can be set to a position separated from the second shaft portion 512b in the shaft radial direction.

That is, when the drive side arm member 3520 is arranged at the overhang position, the umbrella portion 523a is arranged so as to face the front side surface of the gear tooth portion of the second gear portion 553b, while the overhang portion 3523b is arranged at the second gear portion. It is arranged against the front side surface of the main body portion of 553b. In this case, the overhanging portion 3523b can come into contact with the main body portion of the second gear portion 553b in the front-rear direction. Such an arrangement is not seen in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b).

Further, in the state where the drive side arm member 3520 is arranged at the overhanging position, the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 3520 is along the vertical direction, so that the weight of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43) causes the drive side arm member 3520 to move. It is a state in which movement in the front-back direction (falling deformation or bending deformation) is likely to occur with a large width. In the present embodiment, as described above, the contact position between the drive side arm member 3520 and the transmission gear 553 in the front-rear direction can be set to a position separated from the second shaft portion 512b in the shaft radial direction, so that the drive side arm member The resistance to the movement of the 3520 in the front-rear direction can be increased, and the movement can be suppressed.

Next, the combined operation unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. In the first embodiment, the case where the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 is a smooth elongated hole without being caught has been described, but the composite operation unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment has a recessed portion on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b. 4424c is formed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 53 is a front view of the combined operation unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged at an intermediate position. In addition, in FIGS. 53 and 54, the illustration of the color member of the slide shaft portion 423e is omitted, and the shaft portion can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 53, when the main body 410 of the composite operation unit 4400 moves downward from the retracted position and is arranged at the intermediate position, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 hits the inner end of the guide hole 4424b. Contact. A recessed portion 4424c, which is a recess capable of accommodating a part of the slide shaft portion 423e, is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b arranged directly above the abutting position. The recessed portion 4424c is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of curvature of the recessed portion 4424c is formed to be equal to or greater than the radius of the slide shaft portion 423e.

Here, when the main body member 410 moves downward from the retracted position, the shaft support hole 423d arranged at the opposite end of the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 moves in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 abuts against the inner end of the guide hole 4424b and rebounds, the shaft support hole 423d rebounds in the vertical direction. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e also bounces upward due to the momentum of the bounce in the vertical direction.

The effect of the recessed portion 4424c will be described with reference to FIG. 54. 54 (a) and 54 (b) are partial front views of the combined operation unit 4400. FIG. 54 (a) shows a state immediately before the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 abuts on the inner end of the guide hole 4424b, and FIG. 54 (b) shows the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423. The state immediately after abutting on the inner end of the guide hole 4424b is shown. In FIG. 54, the slide lever 473, the solenoid 474, the wiring guide arm 480, and the like are omitted for ease of understanding, and the moving directions of the opposite ends of the slide shaft portion 423e and the slide shaft portion 423e. Are illustrated by arrows C41 to C44.

As shown in FIG. 54A, when the main body member 410 is moved downward and the end of the connecting member 423 on the opposite side of the slide shaft portion 423e is moved downward along the arrow C42, the slide shaft portion is moved downward. The 423e abuts on the lower side surface of the guide hole 4424b and slides along the arrow C41. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e is not accommodated in the recessed portion 4424c.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54B, the slide shaft portion 423e abuts against the inner end of the guide hole 4424b and bounces off, and the opposite end of the connecting member 423 of the slide shaft portion 423e is along the arrow C44. When it bounces upward, the slide shaft portion 423e is also pressed upward. In this case, the slide shaft portion 423e abuts on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b and tries to slide along the arrow C43. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e is housed in the recessed portion 4424c.

Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e and the recessed portion 4424c can be brought into contact with each other in the left-right direction, which is the elongated direction of the guide hole 4424b. In this case, a large resistance can be generated against the slide shaft portion 423e that tends to move in the elongated direction of the guide hole 4424b.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the slide shaft portion 423e from moving along the left-right direction of the guide hole 4424b. Therefore, the rebound width of the slide shaft portion 423e can be reduced, and the arrangement of the shielding member 420 can be stabilized. By moving the main body member 410 (see FIG. 21) upward by the drive device 460, the slide shaft portion 423e is driven inside the guide hole 4424b in the left-right direction.

Next, the combined operation unit 5400 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. In the first embodiment, the case where the end portion of the connecting member 423 on the slide shaft portion 423e side is in contact with only the guide plate 424 has been described, but the composite operation unit 5400 in the fifth embodiment is a slide of the connecting member 5423. A leaf spring member 5425, which is a plate-shaped spring member that abuts on the end on the shaft portion 423e side, is formed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 is a rear view of the combined operation unit 5400 in the fifth embodiment in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position. As the main body member 410 moves downward from the retracted position, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 moves in the left-right direction inside the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 5424.

The connecting member 5423 includes a projecting portion 5423f projecting from an end portion of the rod member 423a on the slide shaft portion 423e side. The projecting portion 5423f is projected vertically upward with the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 arranged at the inner end of the guide hole 424b, and is projected on the right side in the rear view (FIG. 56 (c)). The corners on the right side) are rounded and chamfered, and the corners on the left side when viewed from the rear are formed at right angles.

The guide plate 5424 includes a grip portion 5424c projecting in a U-shape on the back surface side of the base plate 424a at the upper outer end of the pair of guide holes 424b. The grip portion 5424c is formed in such a manner that the open side of the U-shaped portion is directed inward in the left-right direction and one end of the leaf spring member 5425 is sandwiched by the inner side surface of the U-shaped portion.

The details of the leaf spring member 5425 will be described with reference to FIG. 56. 56 (a) to 56 (c) are partial rear views of the combined operation unit 5400. In addition, in FIGS. 56 (a) to 56 (c), the movement of the connecting member 5423 is shown in chronological order, and the periphery of the guide hole 424b on the left side of the rear view is partially shown in FIG. 56 (a). In FIG. 56 (b), the main body member 410 (see FIG. 55) is arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG. 56 (b), the main body member 410 is moved from the retracted position to the intermediate position by a predetermined distance. In c), the states in which the main body member 410 is arranged at the intermediate position are illustrated.

For ease of understanding, in FIG. 56, only the decorative member 422, the connecting member 5423, the guide plate 5424, and the leaf spring member 5425 are shown, and the other members are not shown. Further, the decorative member 422 and the connecting member 5423 show only the outer shape, and the illustration of the internal pattern and the like is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 56A, the leaf spring member 5425 is arranged in a posture in which the elongated direction is directed to the left-right direction, and one end thereof is gripped by the grip portion 5424c in a straight plate-like fixed portion 5425a. And the curved portion 5425b which is connected to the other end portion of the fixed portion 5425a and is formed to be curved so as to project toward the connecting member side, and the lateral direction from the end portion inside the curved portion 5425b (right side in FIG. 56A). It mainly includes a fall prevention unit 5425c, which is extended to.

The curved portion 5425b is formed so that the first inclined surface 5425b1 formed on the outer side in the left-right direction and the second inclined surface 5425b2 formed on the inner side in the left-right direction have different inclination angles with respect to the left-right direction. That is, the first inclined surface 5425b1 is gently inclined from the left-right direction (the inclination angle is reduced), and the second inclined surface 5425b2 is sharply inclined from the left-right direction (the inclination angle is increased to near a right angle).

The fall prevention portion 5425c comes into contact with the upper end portion of the projecting portion 5423f in a state where the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 is arranged at the inner end (right side in FIG. 56A) of the guide hole 424b. As a result, even if the end of the leaf spring member 5425 on the opposite side of the grip portion 5424c may hang downward due to deterioration over time or the like, in the state of FIG. 56 (c), the projecting portion 5423f holds the leaf spring member 5425. Since it is lifted, the arrangement relationship between the leaf spring member 5425 and the projecting portion 5423f can be maintained. That is, it is possible to prevent the end portion of the leaf spring member 5425 on the opposite side of the grip portion 5424c from hanging downward.

Here, the change in the direction of the force generated between the projecting portion 5423f and the leaf spring member 5425 during the movement of the connecting member 5423 will be described. When the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 is arranged at the left end of the guide hole 424b, the projecting portion 5423f and the leaf spring member 5425 are separated from each other, so that the projecting portion 5423f and the leaf spring member 5425 are separated from each other. No force is generated (see FIG. 56 (a)).

As the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 moves toward the inside of the guide hole 424b in the left-right direction (right side in FIG. 56A), the posture of the connecting member 5423 changes, and the protruding portion 5423f becomes the leaf spring member 5425. They gradually approach each other and eventually come into contact with each other (see FIG. 56 (b)). The connecting member 5423 continues to move inward in the left-right direction, and the upper end of the projecting portion 5423f is gradually moved upward, so that the free end side of the leaf spring member 5425 (right end side in FIG. 56B) The end gradually moves upward.

When the protruding portion 5423f and the first inclined surface 5425b1 of the curved portion 5425b of the leaf spring member 5425 are in contact with each other, the force F51 applied from the protruding portion 5423f to the leaf spring member 5425 is the first inclined surface 5425b1 of the curved portion 5425b. It is transmitted in the normal direction of. That is, the force F51 faces in the thickness direction of the leaf spring member 5425, that is, in the direction of bending the leaf spring member 5425. In this case, since the component of the force applied to the connecting member 5423 as a reaction of the force F51 is small in the left-right direction, the leaf spring member 5425 causes the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 to move to the right. It is suppressed that the movement of the connecting member 5423 is hindered. As a result, the insertion shaft portion 421c (see FIG. 55) is maintained at the lower end of the guide hole 413 (see FIG. 55) until the main body member 410 (see FIG. 55) reaches the intermediate position. can do.

When the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 reaches the inner end portion in the left-right direction of the guide hole 424b (the end portion on the right side in FIG. 56C) and bounces off, the protruding portion 5423f is the curved portion 5425b of the leaf spring member 5425. The second inclined surface 5425b2 of the above is abutted (see FIG. 56 (c)).

In this case, the force F52 applied from the projecting portion 5423f to the leaf spring member 5425 is transmitted in the normal direction of the second inclined surface 5425b2 of the curved portion 5425b. That is, the force F52 has a large component directed in the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring member 5425, that is, in the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring member 5425.

Here, the leaf spring is easily elastically deformed in the thickness direction, but the leaf spring is unlikely to be elastically deformed in the longitudinal direction. In the present embodiment, the direction of the force F52 can be directed to the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring member 5425 by increasing the inclination angle of the right side surface of the curved portion 5425b to near a right angle with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the resistance force of the leaf spring member 5425 to the rebound of the connecting member 5423 can be increased, and the connecting member 5423 can be prevented from moving. Therefore, the connecting member 5423 can be maintained at the end inside the guide hole 424b (on the right side in FIG. 56C).

Further, as described above, the projecting portion 5423f is chamfered with rounded corners on the right side in the rear view (right side in FIG. 56C), and the left corner in the rear view is formed at a right angle. As a result, when the corner on the right side of the projecting portion 5423f in the rear view abuts on the leaf spring member 5425 (see FIG. 56B), the projecting portion 5423f abuts smoothly (without biting) on the left side of the projecting portion 5423f in the rear view. When the corner abuts on the leaf spring member 5425 (see FIG. 56 (c)), the projecting portion 5423f bites into the leaf spring member 5425. That is, the corner on the left side of the projecting portion 5423f when viewed from the rear is fitted between the second inclined surface 5425b2 of the leaf spring member 5425 and the fall prevention portion 5425c.

By moving the main body member 410 (see FIG. 55) upward by the drive device 460 (see FIG. 21), the slide shaft portion 423e is driven inside the guide hole 4424b in the left-right direction. In this case, the projecting portion 5423f moves away from the curved portion 5425b of the leaf spring member 5425.

Next, the combined operation unit 6400 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. In the first embodiment, the case where the wiring guide arm 480 for guiding the wiring is expanded and contracted by folding is described, but in the composite operation unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment, the wiring guide slide 6480 for guiding the wiring can be expanded and contracted by sliding movement. Is formed in. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 57 is a partial front view of the combined operation unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the overhanging position. Note that FIG. 57 shows the extended state of the wiring guide slide 6480. In the extended state of the wiring guide slide 6480, the wiring W arranged inside the wiring guide slide 6480 has few bends and is formed substantially linearly. Therefore, the required length of the wiring W can be suppressed.

The wiring guide slide 6480 is provided in the extending direction of the first guide slide 6488, which is swingably supported around the shaft support portion 472 and the wiring W is inserted therein, and the slide elongated hole 6481b of the first guide slide 6481. A second guide slide 6482 that is slid along the line and the wiring W is inserted inside, and a third guide that is slid along the extending direction of the slide elongated hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482 and the wiring W is inserted inside. It mainly comprises slide 6483.

The first guide slide 6481 has a rectangular tubular main body portion 6481a in which a substantially rectangular through hole 6481a1 is formed in the longitudinal direction, and a pair of side surfaces (arranged in the front-rear direction) arranged to face each other within the side surfaces of the main body portion 6481a. A pair of slide elongated holes 6481b formed so as to face each other and formed along the longitudinal direction of the main body 6481a, and a shaft support 472 which is formed in the front-rear direction at the end of the main body 6481a. Mainly includes a shaft support hole 6481c and a cylindrical columnar portion 6481d bridged in the front-rear direction to the lower end portion of the through hole 6481a1 of the main body portion 6481a.

The extending direction of the slide elongated hole 6481b is formed in parallel with the lower side surface (the side surface on the left side of FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6481a. The wiring W is wound around the cylindrical portion 6481d from below.

The second guide slide 6482 is a rectangular tubular main body portion 6482a and a main body portion 6482a that is slidably fitted in the through hole 6481a1 of the first guide slide 6781 to form a substantially rectangular through hole 6482a1 in the longitudinal direction. A pair of slide elongated holes 6482b formed facing each other and formed along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6482a, and a main body portion 6482a. Mainly includes a pair of projecting portions 6482c that project outward from the front and rear side surfaces of the above and are inserted into the slide elongated holes 6481b of the first guide slide 6488.

The extending direction of the slide elongated hole 6482b and the lower side surface of the main body portion 6482a (the side surface on the left side of FIG. 57) are formed in parallel. The projecting portion 6482c is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the slide elongated hole 6481b.

In the second guide slide 6482, the projecting portion 6482c is formed so as to be slidable inside the slide slot 6481b of the first guide slide 6488, and the outer surface of the second guide slide 6482 is the main body portion 6481a during the movement. It comes into contact with the inner surface of the through hole 6481a1. That is, the distance from the central axis of the slide elongated hole 6481b of the first guide slide 6488 to the inner surface of the lower side surface (the side surface on the left side of FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6481 is from the central axis of the projecting portion 6482c to the main body portion 6482a. It is formed approximately equal to the distance to the outer surface of the lower side surface. Thereby, when the second guide slide 6482 is slid with respect to the first guide slide 6488, the posture of the second guide slide 6482 can be stabilized.

The third guide slide 6483 is a rectangular tubular main body portion 6483a that is slidably fitted in the through hole 6482a1 of the second guide slide 6482 and has a substantially rectangular through hole 6483a1 formed in the longitudinal direction, and a main body thereof. It mainly includes a pair of projecting portions 6483b that project outward from the front and rear side surfaces of the portion 6483a and are inserted into the slide elongated holes 6482b of the second guide slide 6482.

In the third guide slide 6483, the projecting portion 6483b is formed so as to be slidable inside the slide elongated hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482, and the outer surface of the third guide slide 6483 is the main body portion 6482a during the movement. Abuts on the inner surface of the through hole 6482a1. That is, the distance from the central axis of the slide elongated hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482 to the inner surface of the lower side surface (side surface on the left side of FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6482a is from the central axis of the projecting portion 6483b to the main body portion 6483a. It is formed approximately equal to the distance to the outer surface of the lower side surface. As a result, the posture of the third guide slide 6482 can be stabilized when the third guide slide 6483 is slid with respect to the second guide slide 6482.

Here, the inner surface of the first guide slide 6488 and the outer surface of the second guide slide 6482 are each formed of smooth surfaces, while the inner surface of the second guide slide 6482 and the outer surface of the third guide slide 6483 are formed. It is formed on a rough surface. In this case, the frictional resistance of the slide movement of the second guide slide 6482 with respect to the first guide slide 6481 is formed smaller than the frictional resistance of the slide movement of the third guide slide 6483 with respect to the second guide slide 6482.

As a result, the second guide slide 6482 slides in preference to the third guide slide 6483. That is, when the main body member 410 moves upward from the state of FIG. 57, the second guide slide 6482 is first stored in the first guide slide 6488, and after the storage is completed, the third guide slide 6482 is stored in the second guide slide 6482. 6483 is stored.

58 (a) and 58 (b) are partial front views of the combined operation unit 6400. Note that FIG. 58 (a) shows a state in which the main body member 410 is arranged at an intermediate position (see FIG. 30), and FIG. 58 (b) shows a state in which the main body member 410 is arranged in a retracted position. To.

As shown in FIG. 58, the wiring guide slide 6480 does not have a portion where the wiring W may be sandwiched, and it is possible to prevent the wiring W from being disconnected. Further, since there is no risk of sandwiching the wiring W, the arrangement interval between the wiring W and the inner side surfaces of the guide slides 6481,6482,6483 can be reduced. As a result, the width of the wiring guide slide 6480 in the lateral direction can be suppressed.

With the main body member 410 arranged at the intermediate position, the wiring W is left inside the wiring guide slide 6480 (see FIG. 58 (a)). Therefore, the tension applied to the wiring W can be temporarily removed.

Next, the rocking operation unit 7500 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59. In the first embodiment, the case where the pair of bridge members 528 is fixed to the drive side arm member 520 has been described, but the rocking operation unit 7500 in the seventh embodiment is the first bridge of the pair of bridge members 7528. The bridge member 7528a is formed so as to be swingable with respect to the drive side arm member 7520. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

59 (a) and 59 (b) are partial front views of the rocking operation unit 7500 according to the seventh embodiment. In addition, FIG. 59 (a) shows a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 59 (b) shows a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged in the overhanging position. Is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the first bridge member 7528a, which is the smaller side of the pair of bridge members 7528, is formed in the shaft support hole 7529 formed in the main body plate portion 7521 of the drive side arm member 7520. It is pivotally supported so that it can swing, and is urged clockwise by a torsion spring (not shown). The main body plate portion 7521 is different from the main body plate portion 521 in the first embodiment except that the formation of the first fastening hole 527a1 corresponding to the first bridge member 7528a is omitted and the shaft support hole 7529 is formed instead. It is formed in the same way. Further, the second bridge member 7528b, which is the larger side of the pair of bridge members 7528, is fastened and fixed to the main body plate portion 7521 of the drive side arm member 7520.

The driven side arm member 7530 is provided so as to project from the front side of the main body plate portion 531 and include a projecting portion 7534 that abuts with the first bridge member 7528a in the swing direction.

Here, the drive side arm member 7520 and the driven side arm member 7530 are arranged in the retracted position and the overhanging position, and are relative to the shaft support hole 7529 of the projecting portion 7534. The position changes (similar to the relative movement of the other side shaft support hole 526 and the other side shaft support hole 533 along the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 7520).

By swinging the first bridge member 7528a along the projecting portion 7534, the distance between the first bridge member 7528a and the second bridge member 7528b at the overhanging position (see FIG. 59 (b)) is increased. Can be expanded. As a result, when the driven side arm member 7530 bends to the front side, the distance between the positions where it can come into contact with the bridge member 7528 (the end of the first bridge member 7528a and the end of the second bridge member 7528b). Can be expanded. In this case, the length in the longitudinal direction in which the driven side arm member 7530 can freely bend without abuting on the bridge member 7528 can be divided into short lengths, and the amount of bending of the driven side arm member 7530 (in the front-rear direction). The amount of movement of) can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 59, the distance between the first bridge member 7528a and the other side shaft support hole 533 can be maintained regardless of whether the moving member 540 is arranged in the retracted position or the overhanging position. it can. Here, the misalignment of the driven side arm member 7530 with respect to the driving side arm member 7520 is likely to occur at the other side shaft support hole 533, which is the connection position with the moving member 540, and the misalignment width is likely to be large. In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the first bridge member 7528a from being separated from the other side shaft support hole 533, and to increase the effect of suppressing the displacement of the driven side arm member 7530 with respect to the driving side arm member 7520. Can be done.

Further, when the drive side arm member 7520 and the driven side arm member 7530 are arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 59 (a)), the first bridge member 7528a is urged by a torsion spring (not shown). It swings in a direction close to the second bridge member 7528b. As a result, the drive side arm member 7520 is moved to the retracted position while the distance between the first bridge member 7528a and the second bridge member 7528b is widened, and the first bridge member 7528a and the other side shaft support hole 533 Can be prevented from interfering with each other.

Next, the game board 8013 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. In the first embodiment, the case where light is emitted from the light irradiation device 331c to the specific winning opening 65a has been described, but the game board 8013 in the eighth embodiment is an outer rail formed by planting on the base plate 8060. Light is applied to the vicinity of the upper half of 62. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board 8013 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 60, since the light irradiation device 8610 is arranged outside the outer rail 62, the degree of freedom of decoration of the game area is reduced by the shielding member for partially hiding the light irradiation device 8610. Can be prevented. Further, since the light irradiation device 8610 is arranged in the embedded hole 8013a formed in the game board 8013, it is possible to prevent the light irradiation device 8610 from increasing the thickness of the game board 8013 in the front-rear direction.

From the light irradiation device 8610, light is irradiated to the inside of the game area through the back side of the outer rail 62. A mechanism by which the irradiated light changes the traveling direction to the front side (front side in FIG. 60) will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

FIG. 61 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 8013 in the LXI-LXI line of FIG. 60. As shown in FIG. 61, the light irradiation device 8610 mainly includes a main body portion 8611 fixed to the embedding hole 8013a and a light irradiation portion 8612 arranged on the side surface of the main body portion 8611.

The game board 8013 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has an embedded hole 8013a in which the light irradiation device 8610 is arranged, and the game board 8013 downward from the embedded hole 8013a along the back surface of the game board 8013 beyond the outer rail 62 ( A projection passage 8013b, which is a recess extending inward of the game area), and a form formed at the extended end of the light projection passage 8013b and approaching the front side as it goes downward (inside the game area). It mainly includes a direction changing portion 8013c formed in an inclined manner.

The embedded hole 8013a, the light projecting passage 8013b, and the direction changing portion 8013c can be formed by processing such as cutting and drilling, or by forming a protrusion having an appropriate shape on the resin mold.

The light path E81 emitted from the light irradiation section 8612 is formed inside the light projecting passage 8013b, reaches the direction changing section 8013c and is reflected, so that the traveling direction of the light is on the front side from the path E81 (FIG. 61). It changes to the route E82 toward the left side). Here, since the direction changing portion 8013c that changes the traveling direction of the light is formed by the game board 8013 formed of the light-transmitting resin material, it is inconspicuous and the influence on the decoration of the game area can be reduced. it can. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the game area can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 61, the light traveling along the path E82 irradiates the nails planted in front of the game board 8013 from below. This makes it possible to brighten the shadow formed below the nail by illuminating the hall. Therefore, it is possible to improve the directing ability of the area below the nail, and it is possible to make the ball easier to see when the ball passes through the area below the nail, and the burden felt by the player due to the difficulty in seeing the ball is eased. be able to.

In particular, since the nail to be planted on the upper part of the game board 8013 is arranged at a position where the player can look up, the light reflected from the nail is directed to the player by irradiating the light from below the nail. be able to. In this way, the nail that defines the flow path of the sphere can be used as a member that produces light.

Since the lower part (lower half) of the nail is less likely to collide with the ball, the effect on the flow of the ball is small even if it is processed. For example, by processing the lower part (lower half) of the nail into a crystal shape, light can be reflected in a plurality of directions, and the effect ability of the nail can be enhanced.

Further, by setting the color of the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 8612 to a color different from the color of the nail (for example, yellow) (for example, red), the nail irradiated with the light can be distinguished from other nails. Can be made easier.

In this case, for example, a plurality of light irradiation devices 8610 may be arranged on the game board 8013 (six in this embodiment, see FIG. 60), and light may be irradiated in order. That is, after the light is radiated from the leftmost light irradiating device 8610 in the front view, the light is radiated from the light irradiating device 8610 on the right side (the second from the left end in the front view), and then on the right side (front). Light may be emitted from the light irradiation device 8610 (third from the left end in the visual sense), and the same may be continued thereafter.

According to this, the nails to be planted in the game board 8013 shine in order along the curved arrow R81 by the light emitted from the light irradiating device 8610. For example, when it is more advantageous for the player to hit right, the nails to be planted on the game board 8013 are lit in order along the curved arrow R81 so that the player can hit right. Can be signaled to. As a result, the nail forming the flow path of the ball is given the effect of telling the player where to drive the ball, so that the attention of the nail can be improved.

The light emitted from the light irradiation device 8610 is not necessarily limited to the nail. For example, the wind turbine arranged on the game board 8613, the through gate 67 (see FIG. 60), and the like may be exposed to light.

Next, the wiring guide arm 9480 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. In the first embodiment, the case where the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 of the wiring guide arm 480 do not overlap in the front-rear direction except for the shaft support portion has been described, but the wiring guide arm 9480 in the ninth embodiment has been described. , The overhanging front locking portion 9482f arranged on the second guide arm 9482 overlaps with the first guide arm 9481 in the front-rear direction. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIGS. 62 to 64, the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are omitted for ease of understanding.

62 (a) is a front view of the first guide arm 9484 according to the ninth embodiment, FIG. 62 (b) is a bottom view of the first guide arm 9481, and FIG. 62 (c) is a detachable front view. It is a perspective view of the locking member 9481f. In FIG. 62 (a), the detachable front locking member 9481f is partially cross-sectionally viewed, and the fitted portion between the attachment portion 9481d and the detachable front locking member 9481f is visible.

As shown in FIG. 62 (a), the first guide arm 9481 has a detachable front locking member 9481f formed detachably on the attachment portion 9781d and a plate-shaped arm portion 9481a from both ends of the straight portion of the attachment portion 9481d. Mainly includes a plate-shaped non-slip plate portion 9481 g extending toward the side and an auxiliary bottom portion 9481h extending from the back side of the other side bottom portion 481e2.

In the plate-shaped arm portion 9481a, the formation of the notch portion 481a1 (see FIG. 25A) is omitted. This is because, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the detachable front locking member 9481f is molded separately from the attachment portion 9481d, so that the notch portion 481a1 is unnecessary. As a result, the strength of the plate-shaped arm portion 9481a can be ensured.

As shown in FIG. 62A, the attachment portion 9481d includes a fitting recess 9481d1 which is a recess having a semicircular cross section extending in the front-rear direction.

The fitting recess 9481d1 is a recess having a semicircular cross section into which the columnar fitting arm portion 9481f2 of the detachable front locking member 9484f, which will be described later, is fitted, and is a recess in the lateral direction of the attachment portion 9481d (FIG. 62 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface). (Direction) is extended. As a result, the shape for the fitting recess 9481d1 is added to the molding die of the fitting portion 9481d, and the fitting portion 9481d1 is formed by pulling out in one direction (FIG. 62 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface). The 9481d can be easily manufactured.

The fitting recess 9481d1 is formed in a semicircular shape having a radius equal to or slightly smaller than the radius of the fitting arm portion 9481f2. As a result, the fitting arm portion 9481f2 can be fitted into the fitting recess 9481d1, and the detachable front locking member 9481f can be prevented from sliding in the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d.

In this case, the contact area with respect to the thickness of the fitting arm 9481f2 can be increased and the frictional force can be increased as compared with the case where the attachment arm 9481d and the fitting arm 9481f2 hit each other on a flat surface. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detachable front locking member 9481f from falling off from the attachment portion 9481d.

As shown in FIG. 62 (c), the detachable front locking member 9481f is a plurality of long plate-shaped main body plate portions 9481f1 extending vertically from the side surface of the main body plate portion 9481f1 in the thickness direction in a columnar shape. Mainly includes a fitting arm portion 9481f2.

Since the detachable front locking member 9481f is removable from the attachment portion 9481d, when the wiring W is replaced, such as when the wiring W is broken, the detachable front locking member 9481f is removed to lock the detachable front. It is possible to save the trouble of replacing the wiring W by avoiding the member 9481f and facilitating the replacement of the wiring W.

The plurality of fitting arm portions 9481f2 are portions for fixing the detachable front locking member 9481f to the attachment portion 9484d by sandwiching the attachment portion 9481d, and are arranged side by side at intervals slightly shorter than the plate thickness of the attachment portion 9481d. A pair of rod-shaped members are connected in two sets. When the detachable front locking member 9481f is fixed to the attachment portion 9481d, a pair of rod-shaped members of the plurality of fitting arm portions 9481f2 are elastically deformed by being pushed from the attachment portion 9481d, and the attachment portion is elastically restored by the elastic recovery force. 9481d is sandwiched.

The length of the fitting arm portion 9481f2 is formed to be slightly longer than the length in the width direction of the fitting portion 9481f, and the fitting portion 9481f is directed toward the mating arm portion 9481f2 on the other side holding the fitting portion 9481f at the tip of the fitting arm portion 9481f2. A protruding portion 9481f3 is formed. By catching the projecting portion 9481f3 on the attachment portion 9481f, it is possible to prevent the detachable front locking member 9481f from coming off from the attachment portion 9481f to the front side (front side in FIG. 62A).

In this case, the fitting arm portion 9481f2 is formed in a columnar shape, and the fitting recess 9481d1 is formed as a recess having a semicircular cross section. Therefore, when the fitting arm portion 9481f2 sandwiches the attachment portion 9484d with an elastic recovery force. , The axial center of the fitting arm portion 9481f2 is brought to the center of the fitting recess 9481d1. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the alignment when the detachable front locking member 9481f is attached to the attachment portion 9481d, and the time required for the attachment can be shortened.

The non-slip plate portion 9481g is a portion that sandwiches the wiring W with the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, and is formed continuously over the width direction (vertical direction in FIG. 62B) of the attachment portion 9481d. It is elastically deformable in the thickness direction of the attachment portion 9481d and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. The distance between the tip of the non-slip plate portion 9481g and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a is usually formed to be less than or equal to the thickness of the wiring W, and by inserting the wiring W there, the non-slip plate portion 9481g is formed. It is elastically deformed, and the elastic recovery force prevents the wiring W from slipping with respect to the plate-shaped arm portion 481a.

The orientation of the non-slip plate portion 9481g is arranged so as to be elastically deformable along the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d. As a result, the wiring W can be sandwiched between the non-slip plate portion 9481d and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a in the width direction, and the wiring W can be prevented from moving and rubbing in the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d. The durability of the wiring W can be improved.

The orientation of the pair of non-slip plate portions 9481g is opposite to each other at both ends of the attachment portion 9481d. As a result, it is possible to prevent the attachment portion 9481d and the wiring W from moving in the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d regardless of the movement direction of the wiring W. The non-slip plate portion 9481 g is arranged to face the rib portion N. As a result, the wiring W can be suppressed not at the tip portion of the non-slip plate portion 9481g but at the intermediate portion (belly), so that the resistance applied to the wiring W can be increased (see FIG. 64).

The other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h is a plate-shaped portion formed having the same outer peripheral shape as the other side bottom portion 481e2, and the other side tubular portion 481c is formed in the circumferential direction of the other side tubular portion 481c from the back surface of the other side bottom portion 481e2. It is extended over about 120 degrees around the axis, and an inclined side surface 9481h1 is provided at the extending tip. As shown in FIG. 64A, the extended tip of the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h and the end portion of the one side bottom portion 482e1 of the second guide arm 9482 overlap in a front view. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from falling off to the back side (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 64A).

The inclined side surface 9481h1 inclines toward the back side (lower side in FIG. 62B) as the distance from the other side bottom portion 481e2 increases.

63 (a) is a front view of the second guide arm 9482, FIG. 63 (b) is a bottom view of the second guide arm 9482, and FIG. 63 (c) is the LXIIIc of FIG. 63 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd guide arm 9482 in -LXIIIc line.

As shown in FIG. 63 (a), the second guide arm 9482 includes an overhanging front locking portion 9482f extending from the front end portion of the attachment portion 482d in both directions in the thickness direction of the attachment portion 482d, and the attachment portion. Mainly includes a non-slip plate portion 9482 g extending from the end portion of the straight portion of the plate-shaped arm portion 482a and the plate-shaped arm portion 482a toward the plate-shaped arm portion 482a and the attachment portion 482d arranged to face each other.

The overhanging front locking portion 9482f is attached to an extended end portion extending to the opposite side of the plate-shaped arm portion 482a with the attachment portion 482d sandwiched between them, and the back side (FIG. 63) as the extension tip approaches the attachment portion 482. (C) Provided with an inclined side surface 9482f1 inclined to the right side).

Since the technical idea of the non-slip plate portion 9482 g is the same as the technical idea of the non-slip plate portion 9481 g described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

64 (a) and 64 (b) are front views of the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 of the wiring guide arm 9480, and FIG. 64 (c) is the LXIVc- of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 1st guide arm 9481 and the 2nd guide arm 9482 of the wiring guide arm 9480 in the LXIVc line. In FIG. 64 (a), a state in which the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded is shown, and in FIG. 64 (b), the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are axially rotated and opened. The state of being struck is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the wiring W is shown, and in FIG. 64 (c), the wiring W is not shown.

Here, in order to secure the arrangement area of other movable accessories, it is desirable to suppress the arrangement area of the wiring guide arm 9480. Therefore, it is difficult to provide a margin in the area for accommodating the wiring W (for example, between the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the attachment portion 9481d of the first guide arm 9481). In this case, the wiring W rubs against the inner surface of the wiring guide arm 9480 each time the state changes, such as when the wiring guide arm 9480 is folded or opened, the wiring W deteriorates early, and the durability of the wiring W deteriorates. It may decrease.

On the other hand, in the wiring guide arm 9480 of the present embodiment, the wiring W is sandwiched between the non-slip plate portions 9481 g, 9482 g and the plate-shaped arm portions 481a, 482a, so that the wiring W becomes the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. , 482a and relative movements with respect to the attachment portions 9481d and 482d are suppressed. As a result, the durability of the wiring W can be ensured.

Further, when the second guide arm 9482 is deformed with respect to the first guide arm 9481 in a twisted manner, the wiring W may also be twisted and the durability of the wiring W may be lowered.

On the other hand, in the wiring guide arm 9480 according to the present embodiment, in the state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64B), the other side auxiliary bottom 9481h is the second guide arm. It overlaps with the one-side bottom 482e1 of 9482 in the front-rear direction. Here, the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h extends in the circumferential direction of the other side tubular portion 481c along the back surface of the other side bottom portion 481e2 (see FIG. 62 (b)).

Therefore, in the state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64 (b)), the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h and the one side bottom portion 482e1 are in a positional relationship that allows contact in the front-rear direction. It is formed. That is, when the second guide arm 9482 is twisted and deformed in the direction of pressing the one side bottom portion 482e1 against the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h with respect to the first guide arm 9484, the one side bottom portion 482e1 and the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h are brought into contact with each other. , The deformation resistance of torsional deformation increases. In this case, it is possible to prevent the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 from being twisted and deformed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress twisting and deformation of the wiring W, and it is possible to secure the durability of the wiring W.

In the present embodiment, in a state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64 (a)), the overhanging front locking portion 9482f is in front of and behind the attached portion 9481d of the first guide arm 9481. They overlap in the direction and are formed in a positional relationship that allows contact in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 64 (c)). That is, when the second guide arm 9482 is twisted and deformed in the direction of pressing the overhanging front locking portion 9482f against the attachment portion 9481d with respect to the first guide arm 9484, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f and the attachment portion 9481d are hit. It is touched and the deformation resistance of torsional deformation increases. In this case, it is possible to prevent the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 from being twisted and deformed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress twisting and deformation of the wiring W, and it is possible to secure the durability of the wiring W.

Further, when the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h is further extended in the circumferential direction from the present embodiment, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are in a folded state (see FIG. 64A), and the second guide arm is second. The guide arm 9482 and the other side auxiliary bottom 9481h are brought into contact with each other, and the first guide arm 9484 and the overhanging front locking portion 9482f are brought into contact with each other.

In this case, since the back surface side of the second guide arm 9482 and the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h are in contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the front side of the second guide arm 9482 from falling down. On the other hand, since the front side of the first guide arm 9484 and the overhanging front locking portion 9482f are in contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the back side of the second guide arm 9482 from falling down. Therefore, when the first guide arm 9484 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64 (a)), the second guide arm 9482 twists with respect to the first guide arm 9484 regardless of the direction. Can be suppressed.

Further, the same effect can be obtained by adding the overhanging front locking portion 9482f to the back side of the second guide arm 9482. In this case, the pair of overhanging front locking portions 9482f is the first. Since the guide arm 9482 is sandwiched, it is necessary to improve the accuracy of positioning the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the portion that suppresses the twist of the second guide arm 9482 is formed so as to be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the second guide arm 9482, so that the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are aligned. It is possible to reduce the degree required for the accuracy of.

In the present embodiment, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64 (a)), and the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (FIG. 64). Before reaching (b)), the extended tip of the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h may come into contact with the end surface of the one side bottom portion 482e1 of the second guide arm 9482.

On the other hand, by forming the inclined side surface 9481h1 (see FIG. 62 (a)) at the extending tip of the other side auxiliary bottom 9481h, the extending tip of the other side auxiliary bottom 9481h is in contact with the end face of the one side bottom 482e1. Even when they are in contact with each other, the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h can be mounted on the back side (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 64 (b)) of the one side bottom portion 482e1. This makes it easy to form a state in which the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64 (a)).

Further, from the state in which the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64 (b)), the first guide arm 9484 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (FIG. 64 (a)). (See), the extended tip of the overhanging front locking portion 9482f may come into contact with the side surface of the attachment portion 9481d.

On the other hand, by forming the inclined side surface 9482f1 (see FIG. 63 (c)) at the extending tip of the overhanging front locking portion 9482f, the extending tip of the overhanging front locking portion 9482f is attached to the attachment portion 9481d. Even when it comes into contact with the side surface, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f can be mounted on the front side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 64 (a)) of the attachment portion 9481d (see FIG. 64 (c)). This makes it easy to form the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 in a folded state (see FIG. 64A).

In the present embodiment, the case where the overhanging front locking portion 9482f that contacts the attachment portion 9481d is formed on the front side is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f may be formed as a pair of front side and back side. As a result, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f can be brought into contact with the attachment portion 9488d regardless of the direction of the twist deformation of the second guide arm 9482, and the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are twisted and deformed. It can be suppressed.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the pair of decorative members 422 of the composite operation unit 400 swings to form a gap has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the decorative member 422 may be guided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and the pair of decorative members 422 may be slidably moved in the directions away from each other to form a gap for accommodating the swing member 430. In this case, the width of the gap formed between the pair of decorative members 422 can be secured in the vertical direction.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the moving upper lid member 332 of the board surface lower unit 300 slides in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair of long plate-shaped movable members that are pivotally supported on the inner surface of the pair of step portions 324a and are formed in pairs on the left and right are provided, and the movable members are in the direction in which the pair of step portions 324a are continuously provided. A closed state that is arranged along the longitudinal direction to prevent the ball from passing through the specific winning opening 65a, and an opening that allows the ball to pass through the specific winning opening 65a by swinging in the ascending or descending direction from that state. It may be possible to form a state. Further, with the same configuration, the second winning opening 640 may be configured instead of the specific winning opening 65a.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the light emitted from the light irradiation device 331c is reflected to the front side when the moving upper lid member 332 of the board surface lower unit 300 is in the retracted state has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, a portion that reflects the light emitted from the light irradiation device 331c toward the front side when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the overhanging state may be formed in the lower portion of the moving upper lid member 332. In this case, the light reflected by the moving upper lid member 332 is not blocked by the sphere, and the effect of producing the light can be improved.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the positioning portion 543 is united with the moving member 540 of the swinging operation unit 500 by uneven fitting has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, magnets may be arranged at positions where the pair of moving members 540 are arranged close to each other, and the moving members 540 may be united by magnetic force. In this case, the moving members 540 can be attracted to each other by magnetic force, and it is not necessary for the driving device 550 to generate a holding force when the moving members 540 are arranged at the overhanging position. Therefore, the power consumption of the drive device 550 can be suppressed.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the guide hole 413 of the composite operation unit 400 is formed in a straight line has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the guide hole 413 may be formed in a curved shape. In this case, even if the moving speed of the main body member 410 is the same, the swing speed of the shielding member 420 can be adjusted.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 of the composite operation unit 400 swings has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the swing member 430 may include a slide member that slides and moves in a direction away from the main body member 410, and a decorative member 422 may be accommodated between the slide member and the main body member 410.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the guide arms of the wiring guide arms 480 of the composite operation unit 400 are stacked in the vertical direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the guide arms of the wiring guide arm 480 may be stacked in the front-rear direction. In this case, since the vertical width of the wiring guide arm 480 can be narrowed, the width of the bottom wall portion 211 required to accommodate the wiring guide arm 480 can be narrowed outside the opening 211a. As a result, the arrangement area of the third symbol display device 81 can be expanded.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the moving member 540 is supported by a pair of arm members of the driving side arm members 520, 2520, 3520, 7520 and the driven side arm members 530, 7530 has been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the moving member 540 may be supported by a plurality of arm members of three or more. In this case, for example, by fastening and fixing the bridge members 528, 2528, and 7528 to the intermediate arm members and arranging them so as to cover the front sides of the arm members at both ends, the effect of suppressing the misalignment between the arm members is suppressed. Can be improved. That is, when one of the arm members at both ends pushes one end of the bridge member 528, 2528, 7528 and the bridge member 528, 2528, 7528 bends, the other end is the other. It moves in a direction approaching the arm member and is supported by the other arm member. In this way, the arm members at both ends work to suppress the bending of the bridge members 528, 2528, 7528, and as a result, the misalignment of the plurality of arm members can be suppressed, and the posture of the moving member 540 is stabilized. Can be made to.

In the first to fifth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, each of the guide arms 481 to 483 of the wiring guide arm 480 has a cylindrical portion (for example, one side shaft support portion 482b) and a cylindrical portion (for example, one side shaft support portion 482b). For example, the case where the shaft is supported by the other side cylindrical portion 481c) has been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the portion supporting the columnar portion may be formed by elongated holes extending in the longitudinal direction of each of the guide arms 481 to 483. In this case, in addition to the vertical expansion and contraction in which the guide arms 481 to 483 are bent, the horizontal expansion and contraction in which the guide arms 481 to 483 slide and move in the extending direction of the elongated hole can be performed.

In the first to fifth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, the lower side surface (for example, the plate-shaped arm portion 481a) of each arm member (for example, the first guide arm 481) constituting the wiring guide arm 480 is used. Although the case where the width is shorter than that of the upper side surface (for example, the attachment portion 9481d) is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower side surface (for example, plate-shaped arm portion 481a) of each arm member (for example, the first guide arm 481) may be longer than the upper side surface (for example, the attachment portion 9481d). In this case, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from sliding down from the lower side surface (for example, the plate-shaped arm portion 481a) due to gravity.

From the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment, in the seventh embodiment and the ninth embodiment, the case where the width of the wiring W is shorter than the attachment portions 481d and 9484d has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, the formation of the front locking portion 481f may be omitted, and the width of the wiring W may be longer than the width of the plate-shaped arm portions 481a and the attachment portions 481d and 9481d. In this case, since a part of the wiring W protrudes from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the attachment portions 481d and 9484d, the wiring W can be easily taken out by pinching (hooking with a finger) the protruding portion with a finger. As a result, maintenance of the wiring W can be easily performed.

From the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment, in the seventh embodiment and the ninth embodiment, the case where the widths of the attachment portions 481d and 9481d are constant has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a portion other than the portion where the front locking portion 481f of the attachment portions 481d and 9481d is fixed may be formed with the same width as the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. In this case, by making the width of the wiring W longer than the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, a part of the wiring W can be projected from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the attachment portions 481d and 9481d. Therefore, the wiring W can be easily taken out by pinching the protruding portion with a finger (hanging it with a finger). As a result, maintenance of the wiring W can be easily performed.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the recessed portion 4424c is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the thickness of the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b may be thicker than the thickness of the lower side surface. In this case, the friction generated between the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b and the connecting member 423 can be made larger than the friction generated between the lower side surface of the guide hole 4424b and the connecting member 423, so that the main body member 410 is lowered. It is possible to suppress the rebound of the connecting member 423 that occurs when moving to.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the recessed portion 4424c is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a recess capable of accommodating the slide shaft portion 423e may be formed on the upper side surface of the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. In this case, when the insertion shaft portion 421c is arranged at the lower end portion of the guide hole 413, the resistance F applied to the insertion shaft portion 421c from the side surface of the guide hole 413 can be increased.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the direction changing portion 8013c is arranged only at the extended end portion of the light projecting passage 8013b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction changing portion 8013c may be additionally arranged in the middle of the light projecting passage 8013b. In this case, the light reflected from the direction changing portion 8013c arranged in the middle of the projection passage 8013b to the front side and the light transmitted through the direction changing portion 8013c are arranged at the extended end portion of the projection passage 8013b. The light can be separated from the light reflected from the direction changing portion 8013c to the front side. That is, since the light emitted from the light irradiation device 8610 can be divided into a plurality of pieces, the number of lights visually recognized in the front view can be increased with respect to the number of the light irradiation devices 8610. As a result, the number of light irradiation devices 8610 arranged can be suppressed while maintaining the effect of the light irradiation device 8610.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

<First control example>
Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 78. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

The symbol, which is a kind of symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, is composed of nine main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" and a sub symbol consisting of a shell-shaped symbol. It is configured. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 65 (a), on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of upper row, interruption, and lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. ing. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display screen, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), on the display screen, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become. Further, five effective lines, that is, left line L1, middle line L2, right line L3, right-down line L4, and right-up line L5 are set on the display screen. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state where a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the variable display of ~ Z3 is completed, it is assumed that a big hit has occurred, and the big hit movie is displayed.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "probability variation symbols", and the jackpot A which is a 16R probability variation jackpot or the jackpot B which is a 4R probability variation jackpot is When it occurs, the combination of the same probabilistic symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "normal symbols", and when a jackpot C which is a 16R normal jackpot or a jackpot D which is a 4R normal jackpot occurs. , The same combination of normal symbols is stopped and displayed.

The mode of the variable display of the symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol row. The number of symbols can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and for example, only numbers may be variablely displayed as the symbol.

Further, if a ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. On the third symbol display device 81, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, it is reserved. Indicates that the number of balls is four. When the number of reserved balls symbol is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there are no reserved balls.

In this control example, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the third symbol display device 81, the number of reserved balls may be a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four may be the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67, a super background notice effect, which is one of the effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, will be described. This super-background notice effect is an effect in which the player can operate the scroll direction of the background by the selection switch 270. Further, when a specific image (an image in which the door blinks in this control example) is displayed in the background image of the super background notice, by operating the decision switch 270e, it is expected whether or not there is a big hit in the hold. A background image (background inside the door) showing the value is displayed. Therefore, the player who wants to know the information on whether or not there is a big hit in the hold will pay attention to the appearance of the specific image in the background image of the super background notice and play the game. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, since the background image of the super background notice can be scrolled and displayed in any direction of the player by operating the switch, it is possible to give the player the impression that the background image is being searched. .. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

FIG. 66A is a diagram showing an example of a background image of the super background notice effect. When the background image of the super background notice effect is displayed, for example, when the right switch 270b is pressed, the background image is scrolled to the right. Here, in this control example, the background image is set to scroll to the right based on the pressing of the right switch 270b, and then scrolling is continued until the selection switch 270 in another direction is operated. Has been done. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the background image may be scrolled according to the pressing time of the selection switch 270. As a result, it is possible to flexibly respond to the operation of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In FIG. 66 (b), when the background image of the above-mentioned super background notice effect is displayed (see FIG. 66 (a)), the rear image is scrolled to the right based on the pressing of the right switch 270b. It is a figure. By scrolling the rear image to the right, the image of the door partially displayed at the right end of the screen in FIG. 66 (a) can be visually recognized in the center of the screen in FIG. 66 (b). In the state, it is displayed.

The image of this door is data that blinks at regular intervals. As a result, when a certain period of time elapses while the door is visible as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the door blinks and is displayed as shown in FIG. 67 (a). In this case, when the enter button 270e is pressed, an effect suggesting the display of the background inside the door, which is a special image, is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), an image in which the door is opened is displayed, and the characters "I will enter inside with the next fluctuation!" Are displayed. Here, in this control example, the blinking display of the door is configured to be performed at regular intervals, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking display interval may be irregular. Further, in this control example, data that blinks at regular intervals is prepared in advance and configured to display blinking of the door, but the present invention is not limited to this, and data that blinks the door based on a predetermined trigger. It may be configured to change to.

The background inside the door (not shown), which is a special image, indicates the degree of expectation as to whether or not there is a big hit in the hold, as described above. The detailed processing will be described later, but the background inside the door is displayed from the time it is displayed until the end of 20 fluctuations. When the 20th variation is completed, it is determined again whether or not there is a big hit in the hold, and the background image is changed based on the determination result. Specifically, if it is determined that there is a big hit in the hold, the same image of the background inside the door as the previous time is displayed with high probability, while if not, the display of the background inside the door is terminated. It becomes. Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71, the production of Super Reach A, which is one of the Super Reach effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, will be described. The effect of the super reach A is an effect executed during the variable period of the third symbol, and the stop symbol is displayed based on the pressing of the frame button 22.

In Super Reach A, a small bubble is displayed as well as a display mode of loose stitches. Here, the loose-grained display mode is, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the third symbol showing 6 symbols in which the number “6” is added to the main symbol of anglerfish on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1. The symbol, the shell symbol of the sub symbol on the middle line L2, the 7 symbols with the number "7" attached to the main symbol of the whale on the right line L3 are stopped and displayed, and the 5 symbols are on the left line L1 of the lower symbol row Z3. A shell symbol is displayed on the middle line L2 and four symbols are stopped and displayed on the right line L3, which is a display mode in which none of the lines (L1 to L5) is reachable.

Next, the characters "foam chance" are displayed, and the loosening display mode changes to the double reach display mode. Here, in the double reach display mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the same symbol as in FIG. 68 (a) is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 and is displayed on the left line L1 of the lower symbol row Z3. 7 symbols are displayed as a shell symbol on the middle line L2, a stop display of 6 symbols on the right line L3, a reach display mode of 6 symbols on the right-down line L4, and a reach display mode of 7 symbols on the right-up line L5. It is an aspect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (a), along with the display that a plurality of bubbles are rotated, the characters "Stop the bubbles by touching!" Are displayed, and then the bubbles are rotated as shown in FIG. 69 (b). A display is displayed in which a big hit symbol (6 symbols, 7 symbols and a special symbol) is inserted in the bubble.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70A, the color of the bubble containing the big hit pattern changes, and the characters "The colored bubble is a hit!" Are displayed. In addition, an indicator indicating the remaining time during which the button can be pressed is displayed at the lower right of the screen.

Then, when the frame button 22 is pressed within the remaining time during which the button can be pressed, the colored bubbles or the non-colored bubbles are stopped and displayed. FIG. 70B is a diagram illustrating a screen in which colored bubbles are stopped and displayed.

When the colored bubbles are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 71, the colored bubbles change to a symbol (7 symbols) in which the colored bubbles are jackpots, and the jackpot is notified. On the other hand, when the non-colored bubbles are stopped, the non-colored bubbles are changed to a design (for example, 5 symbols) that is disengaged, and the disengagement is notified (not shown).

As described above, in Super Reach A in this control example, the big hit symbols (6 symbols, 7 symbols and special symbols in the above example) are unified into colored bubbles, and the outlier symbols (6 symbols, 7 symbols) are unified. Designs (designs other than symbols and special symbols) are unified as uncolored bubbles. As a result, the player only has to press the button focusing on the presence or absence of the color, and can provide an easy-to-understand game machine.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74, the jackpot effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. In this jackpot effect, a map on which squares such as sugoroku are arranged is displayed, and the squares on the map can be selected based on the operation of the selection switch 270 or the like. An event is set for each of the selected squares, and a round effect during the jackpot production is performed based on the mass event. The mass event is set based on the jackpot type, the number of times the jackpot continues, the value of the display effect counter 233o, and the like.

In addition, when the jackpot continues (when the jackpot is in the probability change state or the time saving state), the continuous effect is executed from the square selected in the previous jackpot effect. Furthermore, although it is not the square selected in the previous jackpot production, there is a continue mass that can start (restart) continuous production. Whether or not the restart from the continuous mass can be executed is determined based on the history of the passed cells and the like. Also, if you have passed all the squares on the map, a new map will be displayed from the next jackpot production. Furthermore, at the end (ending) of the jackpot production, the mass event may be changed depending on whether or not there is a jackpot in the hold.

FIG. 72 (a) shows a case where the first square is selected from the start point in the previous jackpot effect, and then the jackpot effect is continuously started (during the probability change or the time reduction). It is a figure which showed. In addition, the square with "S" written in the figure means the starting point, and it will start from here at the time of the first big hit. Further, "G" in the figure means a goal point, and the operation when the goal point is reached will be described later with reference to FIG. 73 (b).

As shown in FIG. 72A, when the continuous jackpot effect is started, the effect is continuously started from the square selected in the previous jackpot effect. When the jackpot effect is started, the square that is the start point of this operation (the square that was selected last time) is lit in a different color from the other squares, and the dog character is displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize where the operation start point of this time is. The mode for allowing the player to recognize the operation start point is not limited to this, and for example, the cell at the operation start point may be displayed in a blinking manner, or the cell may be indicated by a symbol such as an arrow. It may be a thing.

An arrow indicating the operable direction is displayed near the square at the operation start point. As a result, the player can easily recognize which direction the player can operate. In this control example, arrows indicating that the operation is possible in the right direction and the downward direction are displayed. Here, when the right switch 270b is pressed, the square to the right of the square at the operation start point (that is, the square two ahead of the start point) is lit and displayed, and the dog character is displayed.

On the other hand, when the selection switch 270 corresponding to the direction not shown as the operable direction is operated, it is considered that the switch operation has not been performed, and the display is not changed. In the above case, in order to suggest that the switch operation is invalid, it may be configured to display on the screen or output a sound.

Here, if the decision switch 270e is pressed while the square to the right of the square at the operation start point (that is, the square two ahead of the start point) is selected, the square event set for the square is displayed. The production is executed.

In FIG. 72 (b), in the jackpot effect (see FIG. 72 (a)) when the square one step ahead of the start point described above is the operation start point, the decision switch 270e is pressed after the right switch 270b is pressed. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect when it is pressed. In FIG. 72B, when it is determined that the square two ahead of the start point has been selected based on the operation of the determination switch 270e, an effect corresponding to the mass event set in the square is performed. Specifically, a display suggesting the content of the mass event "The number of selectable backgrounds has increased!" Is displayed on the upper left portion of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can easily recognize the content of the mass event.

Further, when the continuous jackpot effect is started, the previous map and mass event are read, and a new mass event is read according to the value of the display effect counter 233o of the display control device 114. When a new mass event is set by comparing the previous mass event with the new mass event, the characters "Continue mass has increased!" Are displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (a). Will be done.

As a result, the player can easily recognize that the mass event has changed. On the other hand, not limited to this, the mass event may be changed so that the player cannot recognize it. As a result, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

With reference to FIG. 73 (b), a display will be described when the jackpot effect is continuously executed after passing through the continuous mass. In the jackpot effect of this control example, when passing through the continuous squares provided on the map of the jackpot effect, it is possible to execute the continuous effect (restart) from the passing square in the next continuous jackpot effect. Become. Specifically, when there is a route (one or more cells) that has passed through the continuous mass and has not passed, it is restarted from the continuous mass that has the unpassed route closest to the starting point. To. In this case, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), the characters "The restart point is here" are displayed, and the square corresponding to the restart point is indicated by an arrow.

As a result, the player can easily recognize that the continuous jackpot effect is started from the square. In addition, the squares that have passed are marked with the letters "Done" and are shaded, and the squares that have not passed are marked with the letters "Not". As a result, the player can easily recognize which square has not passed. By this restart, it is possible to restart not only the square selected last time but also the continuous square having a route that has not passed, so that it is easy to pass the square that has not passed.

If you pass all the squares, a new map will be displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 74A, a new map is displayed and the characters "I found a new map!" Are displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the new map has been displayed.

If it is determined that there is a big hit in the hold at the end (ending) of the big hit effect, a mass event is set based on the big hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), a square 2 squares ahead of the square at the current position (that is, a square that can be reached by generating a jackpot twice) is set as a special square. By setting the square two ahead as a special square, the player will continue the game with the expectation of at least two more big hits. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, the production of Super Reach B in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. 75 and 76 are schematic views schematically showing the effect timing of the super reach B, and FIGS. 77 and 78 are diagrams illustrating the effect of the super reach B.

The production of this Super Reach B is based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the character (girl) on the screen holding a pattern (shark, shrimp, etc.) in his hand (see FIG. 77 (a)). A throwing effect (see FIG. 77 (b)) or a non-throwing effect is performed. When this throwing effect is performed, the design held in the hand changes to the next design. Then, if the same symbol as the reach symbol appears, the effect is to notify the jackpot (see FIG. 78 (b)).

In the case of the super reach B production of the jackpot, it is possible to execute the production of throwing until the same symbol as the reach symbol appears based on the operation of the frame button 22, and the production of the out-of-order super reach B can be executed. If so, based on the operation of the frame button 22, the throwing symbol cannot be executed until the same symbol as the reach symbol appears.

In this control example, if the throwing effect (see FIG. 77 (a)) is executed three times, the effect of notifying the jackpot (see FIG. 78 (b)) is executed. Specifically, when the 7 symbols are reachable, the effect of throwing the 4 symbols is started. When the effect of throwing the symbol 4 is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22, the effect shifts to the effect of throwing the symbol 5. Similarly, when the effect of throwing the symbol of 5 is executed, the effect shifts to the effect of throwing the symbol of 6, and when the effect of throwing the symbol of 6 is executed, the effect of 7 is displayed.

On the other hand, in the production of the jackpot Super Reach B, if the frame button 22 is not pressed, the jackpot will be a jackpot even though the throwing effect has not been performed, so that the effect of notifying the normal jackpot (normal effect) Performs a different effect (replacement effect). Here, in Super Reach B, it is necessary to operate the frame button 22 a plurality of times before the effect of notifying the jackpot is executed. Therefore, the normal effect is replaced with the replacement effect in advance at the timing (replacement timing) in which the operation of the frame button 22 is considered to be insufficient before the effect of notifying the jackpot is executed. This replacement timing is variable according to the number of operations of the frame button 22, and the details will be described later.

First, with reference to FIG. 75A, a case where the frame button 22 is never pressed in the production of Super Reach B will be described. When the fluctuation of Super Reach B is started, the fluctuation of the symbol (normal effect) is started. Then, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped in a display mode in which they reach, and the reach effect is started. The period of this reach effect is the frame SW valid period in which the effect based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is executed. If the frame button 22 is not pressed during the frame SW valid period, the effect of notifying the jackpot is replaced with the replacement effect at the replacement timing. As a result, even if the frame button 22 is not pressed and the big hit is achieved even though there is no throwing effect, the player can be notified of the big hit without any discomfort.

Next, a case where the frame button 22 is pressed only once in the production of Super Reach B will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). When the fluctuation of the super reach B is started, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped in a display mode in which the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are reachable, and the reach effect is started, as in the case of FIG. 75 (a) described above. .. Then, based on the fact that the frame button 22 is pressed during the frame SW valid period, the effective effect of throwing a symbol is executed. Here, the effect of throwing a symbol (effective effect) or the effect of not throwing a symbol (fake effect), which is executed based on the button operation, is drawn based on the effect counter 223i of the voice lamp control device 113. is there.

When the effective effect is executed, the timing (replacement timing) at which the operation of the frame button 22 is considered to be insufficient changes before the effect for notifying the jackpot is executed, so that the replacement timing is delayed by the delay time dt. To. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect of notifying the big hit from being replaced even though the operation of the frame button 22 is in time by the time the effect of notifying the big hit is executed.

In FIG. 75B, since the frame button 22 is not pressed once the frame button 22 is pressed, the jackpot is notified at the replacement timing (after the change), which is delayed by the delay time dt as described above. The production will be replaced with a replacement production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76 (a), in the effect of Super Reach B, a case where the frame button 22 is pressed and the effect of notifying the big hit is not replaced and the big hit is notified will be described.

When the fluctuation of the super reach B is started, as in the case of FIGS. 75 (a) and 75 (b) described above, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped in a display mode in which the symbol of 7 is reached. And the reach production is started. Then, based on the fact that the frame button 22 is pressed during the frame SW valid period, the effective effect or the false effect is executed. In FIG. 76A, a false effect, which is an effect in which the symbol 4 cannot be thrown by the first pressing, is executed. Then, the effective effect is executed by pressing the second and third times, and the symbol possessed by the character is changed to the symbol of 6. When the frame button 22 is pressed during the stoptable period in the state where the symbols 6 are displayed, the stop display effect which is an effective effect is executed, and the stop display in which the symbols 7 appear is executed.

On the other hand, even if the frame button 22 is pressed when it is not in the stoptable period, the effective effect is not executed, and the false effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect of the stop display from being executed at an early timing such that the display period of the stop display is insufficient.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76 (b), in the effect of Super Reach B, a case where the frame button 22 is pressed and the effect of notifying the jackpot is not replaced and the disconnection is notified will be described.

In FIG. 76 (b), similarly to FIG. 76 (a) described above, in the frame SW valid period, a false effect and two effective effects are executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 three times, and the effect of 6 is executed. The design will appear. Here, in FIG. 76A, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the stoptable period, the stop display effect, which is an effective effect, is executed, and the symbol 7 is displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 76 (b), when the frame button 22 is pressed during the stoptable period, a stop display effect that is a false effect is executed, and the symbol 7 does not appear. As a result, it is possible to prevent a big hit symbol from being displayed even though the display mode of the out-of-order Super Reach B is being executed.

As described above, FIG. 77A exemplifies a screen in which the effective effect based on the frame button 22 is not executed when the symbol 7 is reached in the super reach B. In the upper left of the screen, 7 symbols are displayed to suggest that the 7 symbols have reached the reach. Further, the character in the center of the screen has 4 symbols, and when the effective effect is executed 3 times, the symbol changes from 5 symbols → 6 symbols → 7 symbols, which is a reach symbol 7 The design of will be displayed. An indicator indicating the frame SW validity period is displayed at the lower right of the screen.

As described above, FIG. 77B illustrates a screen in which the effective effect is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 when the symbol 4 is displayed during the frame SW valid period of the super reach B. It was done. An effect in which the character in the center of the screen throws the symbol 4 based on the operation of the frame button 22 is displayed.

FIG. 78 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a screen that has become a big hit due to the above-mentioned replacement effect. The jackpot notification by the replacement effect is executed when the jackpot is obtained even though the operation of the frame button 22 is not executed. In this case, since the operation of the frame button 22 is not executed, the stop display is performed in the disengaged manner. Therefore, in this control example, after the stop display, an effect of notifying the jackpot in which the characters "revival jackpot" is displayed as shown in FIG. 78A is executed. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that it is a big hit effect that looks like an outlier. As a result, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort felt by the player by notifying the jackpot even though the stop display is displayed in the off-mode.

FIG. 78 (b) is a diagram illustrating an effect in which a jackpot is notified by a normal effect in which replacement is not performed. This effect is a diagram when the frame button 22 is pressed a predetermined number of times during the frame SW valid period and a big hit symbol appears as shown in FIG. 76 (a). In FIG. 78 (b), the symbol 6 is thrown to the upper right of the screen based on the pressing of the frame button 22 during the stoppable period.

<About the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 79, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 100). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203h of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first winning opening 64. Alternatively, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second winning opening 640. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a ball is usually used in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the symbol start port (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 100).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the RAM 203 is timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. Further, in the first random number table 202a, there is a low probability time of the special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in the low probability state) and a high probability time of a higher probability of a big hit of the special symbol than the low probability time (the period when the special symbol is in the low probability state) Two types of judgment values are included, one for (the period during which the special symbol is in a high probability state). That is, the number of big hit random numbers included in the table is different in each state. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203.

Here, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol is out of alignment. If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first hit random number counter C1, there are three random number values that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random number values "0 to 2" are the first hit random numbers for the low probability. It is stored in table 202a (see FIG. 81 (b)). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 3 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "3/400".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 30 random number values that are big hits of the special symbol, and the values "0 to 29" are the first random number table 202a for high probability (FIG. 81 (b). ) Is stored in). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 30 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "3/40".

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and is provided in the ROM 202 together with the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 81 (c)). As shown in FIG. 81 (c), when the jackpot is a special symbol, the jackpot type when the random number value is "0 to 24" in the first hit type counter C2 is "big hit A". , When the random number value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is "big hit B". Further, the jackpot type when the random number value is "50 to 74" is "big hit C", and the jackpot type when the random number value is "75 to 99" is "big hit D".

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99), and "Reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the RAM 203 reaches the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and rear" and "reach other than the front and rear". Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. A table for a narrow low probability time is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off". Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front-back deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front-back deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long production time, so that it is possible to secure the ball entry time to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and the variation due to the third symbol display device 81. The display will be easier to continue. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Here, the fluctuation time refers to the time from when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started until the symbol is stopped and displayed and the symbol is fixed. For example, if the symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.4 seconds after the symbol fluctuation of 9.6 seconds is executed and the symbol is confirmed, the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (9.6 seconds + 0.4 seconds). Notated as. Based on this fluctuation time, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the fine symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 100) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (d)), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is mainly controlled. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110 (see FIG. 82 (a)).

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (d)), for example, as fluctuation patterns for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", and "disengagement" Various types of "normal reach", various types of "outlier super reach", and various types of "outlier special reach" are specified, and various types of "hit normal reach", various types of "hit super reach", and various types of "hit special reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for big hits. ing. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the lottery result and the stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type). As the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern effect of 5 seconds to 30 seconds specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, the fluctuation time of 5 seconds to 30 seconds is specified.

Here, the types of super reach will be described. In this control example, "super reach A", "super reach B", and various other super reach types are defined as the types of super reach. "Super Reach A" is a reach effect based on the player pressing the frame button 22, taking the effect screens of FIGS. 68 to 71 described above as an example, and "Super Reach B" is the above-mentioned effect. This is a reach effect based on the player pressing the frame button 22, using the effect screens of FIGS. 77 and 78 as an example.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. , It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second hit random number table (FIG. 81 (d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is set. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the second hit random number table, it is determined to be a hit of a normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability time of a higher probability of hitting a normal symbol than the low probability time (normal symbol). It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

When the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5-28". These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the release period of the second winning opening 640 is further. Is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", so that the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but the opening time And the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 100).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 79, the RAM 203 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 100) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 99) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 98) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 50, the RAM 203 is undergoing probabilistic change with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d. It has a flag 203e, a time saving medium counter 203f, a look-ahead probability changing flag 203g, a counter buffer 203h, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a storage area for the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data are four. Among the vacant areas of the hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a shifts to the execution area. Then, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having the smaller area number. Will be done. In this control example, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, those of them A winning information command including a value is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts each value of each counter C1 to C3 from the winning information command, and uses these as the winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. Store in 223a.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, and the acquired data is obtained from the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty, so that the winning data stored in the other hold areas can be stored in the same manner as the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. , Shift processing is performed to fill the holding area, which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (starting winning) of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of (variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S404 in FIG. 95). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the first special symbol is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 93).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 93 and S405 in FIG. 95). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d maximizes the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 97). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 96).

When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 and the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d (the number of hold times M of the fluctuation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is It is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 97). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 and the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b (FIG. 97). S603: No).

The probability changing flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability changing state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol). If the value of the probability changing flag 203e is on, the pachinko machine 10 is It indicates that the special symbol is in the probabilistic state, and if the value of the probabilistic change flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial value of the probabilistic change flag 203e is set to off, and at the timing when the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is closed (that is, the end timing of the jackpot) in the final round of the jackpot in the main control device 110. A value is set according to the jackpot type. Specifically, on is set in the case of "big hit type A" or "big hit type B", and off is set in the case of "big hit type C" and "big hit type D".

When the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 59) is executed by the MPU 201, a lottery for the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol change start processing, the value of the probability changing flag 203e is referred to, and if that value is on, a lottery of the special symbol is performed based on the judgment value for high probability in the first random number table 202a. On the other hand, if the value of the probability changing flag 203e is off, a lottery of special symbols is performed based on the determination value for the low probability time in the first random number table 202a.

The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time saving medium counter 203f is set to zero, and the value corresponding to the jackpot type at the closing timing (that is, the jackpot ending timing) of the specific winning opening (big opening opening) 65a in the final round of the jackpot. Is set. Specifically, 100 is set in the case of "big hit type A" or "big hit type C", and 0 is set in the case of "big hit type B" or "big hit type D". After that, 1 is subtracted every time the variation effect of the special symbol is completed until the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f becomes 0 (S223 in FIG. 57).

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the lottery for the normal symbol is based on the random number table per normal symbol for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability (see S710 and S711 in FIG. 62).

As described above, the counter buffer 203h is a buffer area used for counting each counter value.

The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

Next, the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. As described above, the ROM 202 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201.

FIG. 81A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 81 (a), the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first per random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, a second per random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. ..

As described above, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 81 (b)) is a table in which the values of random numbers that serve as jackpots for special symbols are defined. When the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, the first per random number table 202a includes a table for determining whether or not the special symbol is a big hit when the special symbol has a low probability (first per random number table 202a for a low probability) and a high special symbol. A table (first hit random number table 202a for high probability) for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit at the time of probability is provided, and the number of big hit random numbers included in each table is different. There is. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 81 (c)) is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is set for each jackpot type. .. As shown in FIG. 81 (c), in the first hit type selection table 202b, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, and jackpot D are set to be selectable, respectively, and the first hit is determined as the jackpot A determination value. The value of the type counter C2 is "0 to 24", the judgment value of the jackpot B is "25 to 49", the judgment value of the jackpot C is "50 to 74", and the judgment value of the jackpot D is "74 to 99". There is.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 81 (d)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 81 (d), when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C3 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is judged to be a hit of a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed. , The electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

On the other hand, when the probability of the normal symbol is high (during the time saving state of the normal symbol), it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit when the value of the second hit random number counter C3 is in the range of 5 to 204. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed. , The electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times".

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 82. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 82 (a)) is a data table used for determining the display mode of the variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202d is a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 82 (b)) dedicated to the case where the hit / fail determination result is a jackpot, and the hit / fail determination. If the result is out of order and the game is in the normal game state, the dedicated out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 82 (c)) and the hit / fail judgment result are out of order, and if the game is in the probabilistic game state Each of them is configured by at least the usage (probability variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 82 (d)).

Here, the various super reach selected by each fluctuation pattern table includes "super reach A", "super reach B", or other super reach selected by the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The type of super reach selected by this fluctuation pattern table is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice control device 113, and is transmitted from the voice control device 113 to the display control device 114 to execute various super reach effects. Will be done.

Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 83. At least the variation pattern table is stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. Since the fluctuation pattern table is already known, it will be briefly described. However, based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the rough fluctuation content (variation time, fluctuation type) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is shown. (Reach, disengagement, etc.)) to determine more detailed fluctuation details. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 83, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and a power off. At least the flag 223e, the frame SW valid period 223f, the replacement timing 223g, the replacement flag 223h, the effect counter 223i, and the other memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas has each of the counters C1 to C3 which are the winning information. Each value is stored. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in response to the start prize when the main control device 110 wins the start. Therefore, various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. , The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, or in the main control device 110, the first special symbol When the fluctuation display in the above is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command, and specially It is stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1308 in FIG. 104). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the number of hold balls corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere counter 203c of the main control device 110. .. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1302 in FIG. 104), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1402 in FIG. 105). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1305 in FIG. 104), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1410 in FIG. 105). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type) is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variation effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

The power off flag 223e is set to ON by receiving a command indicating power failure detection from the main control device 110. After that, when it is determined in the start-up process that the power off flag 223e is on, the work area of the RAM is cleared and the flag is set to off.

The frame SW valid period 223f is a counter for indicating a period during which the effect based on the operation of the frame button 22 is possible in the effect of the super reach A or the super reach B. This frame SW valid period 223f is set when Super Reach A or Super Reach B is executed, and is executed every 1 ms in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 106). And it is subtracted one by one.

The replacement timing 223g indicates the timing for replacement with the effect for notifying the jackpot even though the frame button was not pressed in Super Reach B. This replacement timing 223g is referred to in the super reach B operation process (see FIG. 109), and is reset based on the number of times the effective effect is executed based on the pressing of the frame button 22.

The replacement flag 223h is set to on when it is determined in the super reach B operation process (see FIG. 109) that the replacement timing has passed and the replacement effect is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent duplicate replacement effects from being set by determining that the replacement timing has passed again after the replacement effects have been set once. This replacement flag 223h is set off (initialized) when the frame SW valid period becomes 0.

The effect counter 223i is updated in the main process (see FIG. 103) of the voice lamp control device 113. The effect counter 223i selects an effect mode based on the pressing of the frame button 22.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 104) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 84.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 98).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by 1. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged consecutively on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation for.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be enabled in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d, or a control program thereof. Fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 or the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to transfer to the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a and corresponding to the boot process by the boot program (see S1901 in FIG. 111) is set.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 91) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 112 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, since it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b and the third symbol area 235d when the power is turned on are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing image data corresponding to the fluctuating image at power-on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 40). The main image at power-on is an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on, while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is a simple image with a smaller amount of data than the image displayed during a normal game. Therefore, the image data can be quickly transferred and the image can be displayed after the power is turned on.

When the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, while the main image is being turned on, the display control device 114 Is on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, the variable image when the power is turned on with the "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and the "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol when the power is turned on. The variable image and the variable image are displayed alternately and repeatedly during the variable period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the "x" symbol is displayed after the variable effect is stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 88, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 88 is an explanatory view illustrating two types of rear images and a range of rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 88 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 88 (b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the “city stage” and the back surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”.

As shown in FIG. 88, as the back image corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, so that the third symbol display device 81 smoothly displays the image. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player to change the stage to "city stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 first positions the display area between the position a and the position a'in the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, the back image (not shown) used for the super background notice is an image that can be scrolled not only in the horizontal direction but also in the vertical direction, unlike the above-mentioned back surface A and back surface B. This enables scrolling in the horizontal or vertical direction. In addition, the image used for the super background notice can be scrolled and includes an image that changes with the passage of time. As a result, it is possible to execute a display in which a specific image (door image) blinks at a predetermined time.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 88A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are recorded. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often performed without changing the stage while displaying the city stage, which is the initial stage, so all the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed city stage is displayed in the back image area. By making the character ROM 234 resident, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88B, the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage contains only a part of the back surface area, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, for the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the back image area 235c of.

Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the intention of the player, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but doing so makes the resident video RAM 235 very much. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a', and the position is from the position a including the initial position. Since the image between b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, it can be arbitrarily operated by the player by operating the frame button 22. When the stage is changed at the timing of, by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial positions of the rear surface B and the rear surface C are immediately displayed in the third symbol display device 81. It can be displayed in a scroll display or while changing the color tone with the passage of time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surface B and the back surface C, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from position b'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from position a to position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

On the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 84) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area by using the image data of the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left in a smooth connection.

Returning to FIG. 84, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned main symbol with the numbers "0" to "9", which is the third symbol, is resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first winning opening 64, the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a state.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the main symbol without the numbers "0" to "9" is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed of DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. Flag 233i, drawing target buffer flag 233j, winning information storage area 233k, game state storage area 233m, fluctuation history storage area 233n, display effect counter 233o, continuation counter 233p, rear image change flag 233q, super background flag 233r, map storage area It has at least 233s, a mass setting table storage area 233t, a mass event storage area 233u, a route history storage area 233w, a background addition flag 233x, and a door fluctuation count counter 233y.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table and display data in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A to D. If either is the case, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening production is a production for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened, and the round production will be from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state. As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variation effect was stopped. Therefore, the rear image changes as the third symbol disappears. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, a variation effect, an opening effect, a round effect, an ending effect, a final display effect, and a demo effect are stored. Here, the details of the data table storage area 233b will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the data table storage area 233b.

First, the data table storage area 233b corresponds to a variable effect table storage area corresponding to the variable effect, an opening effect table storage area corresponding to the opening effect, a round effect table storage area corresponding to the round effect, and an ending effect. A table storage area for the ending effect, a table storage area for the definite display effect corresponding to the definite display effect, and a table storage area for the demo effect corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

Here, in the variation effect table storage area, various variation effect display data tables for executing a normal variation effect and various stop display display data tables for executing stop display are provided. In addition, various display data tables for Super Reach A for executing the above-mentioned Super Reach A are provided. Further, various display data tables for super reach B for executing the above-mentioned super reach B are provided, and various display data tables for throwing display for executing the effective effect used in the production of super reach B. And, various display data tables for false throwing display for executing the false effect are provided, and various display data tables for the replacement display for executing the replacement effect are provided.

Further, in other opening effect table storage areas and the like, a plurality of types of display data tables corresponding to each effect are provided.

Next, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a boy image and a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backs A to. Information for specifying whether to display a back image different from C (for example, an image corresponding to the super background notice effect) is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this control example, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type will be described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. During that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 20). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 22) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This is because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration can be realized only based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, is resident among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 90). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 90).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In the "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 21, in the example of FIG. 21). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 91) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 91, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is displayed. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before being used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the above-mentioned power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 sets it on in the main process (see FIG. 110) (see S1905). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S4405 in FIG. 130 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2201 in FIG. 112 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2208 in FIG. 112 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 112B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 112 (b) see S2209) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command is determined so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 113 to 126) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 127 to 130) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4301 in FIG. 130 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 130 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 131) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 91), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 91) described later, which describes the drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 91) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 91 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 129) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 91) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 91, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and various image controllers 237 are used. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 creates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 112 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4007 in FIG. 127). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S1902 in FIG. 110) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4513 in FIG. 131). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4514 in FIG. 131). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S4602 in FIG. 132).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, displays the image on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 112 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S4602 in FIG. 132).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The winning information storage area 233k is an area for storing the winning information received from the voice lamp control device 113, and is used when determining whether or not there is a big hit in the hold at the time of super background notice.

In the game state storage area 233m, when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the game state is extracted from the received variation pattern command and stored. The game state storage area 233m is used in the opening command processing (S2902) executed in the jackpot-related command processing (FIG. 118) to determine whether or not the starting jackpot is a continuous jackpot. Specifically, if it is determined that the probability is changing or the time is shortened, it is determined that the jackpot is continuous, and in other cases, it is determined that the jackpot is not continuous.

The variation history storage area 233n is an area in which the variation pattern based on the received command is stored in the variation pattern command processing, similarly to the game state storage area 233m. The fluctuation history storage area 233n is used when a mass event is set in the map setting process (S3001) in the opening command process (FIG. 119) executed at the start of the jackpot. Specifically, it will be described later in the description in the mass event setting table storage area 233t.

The display effect counter 233o is a loop counter of 0 to 198, and is updated in the counter update process (S2207) executed in the V interrupt process (FIG. 112) of the display control device 114. This display effect counter can be used when selecting a background type in the super background effect process (see FIG. 115), when setting a mass event in the map setting process (FIG. 120), or in the super background SW process (see FIG. 124). It is used when selecting the background type in the above, or when selecting the background addition flag to be turned on in the jackpot middle SW process (see FIG. 125).

The continuation counter 233p is added when it is determined in the map setting process (see FIG. 120) that is executed at the start of the jackpot effect that it is a continuous jackpot. Based on the value of the continuation counter 233p and the value of the display effect counter 233o described above, the mass event defined in the mass setting table storage area 233t described later is set. The continuation counter 233p is initialized to 0 when the continuation of the jackpot ends (when the gaming state becomes normal).

The rear image change flag 233q is set to on in the rear image change command process (see FIG. 122) when the rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the rear image change flag 233q is set to on, in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 131),
The super background flag 233r is set to on when the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the super background notice is set to on in the back image change command (see FIG. 122). By setting this super background flag 233r to on, it is determined that the super background notice is being produced. As a result, when the SW-related command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the super-background SW process (S3602) is executed in the SW-related command process (see FIG. 123). This super-background SW process is performed based on the operation of the selection switch 270 or the like during the production of the super-background notice. This super background flag 233q is set to off at the end of the super background notice effect.

The map storage area 233s is an area for storing information on the map and mass event set in the jackpot effect. This map storage area 233s is an area that is read when the information between the map and the mass event is stored in the processing at the time of receiving the ending command, which is the end of the jackpot effect, and the continuous jackpot is executed. is there. As a result, when the continuous jackpot is executed, the previously set map and the mass event can be read out, and the continuous jackpot effect can be executed.

The mass setting table storage area 233t is referred to when a mass event is set in the map setting process (see FIG. 120) executed at the start of the jackpot effect. Here, the details of the mass setting table storage area 233t will be described with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the mass setting table storage area 233t.

The normal mass setting table 233t1 and the continuous mass setting table 233t2 are stored in the mass setting table storage area 233t.

The normal mass setting table 233t1 is a table that is referred to for setting a mass event when the first map is read (when the jackpot does not continue and there is no passage history of the continuous mass).

In the normal mass setting table 233t1, patterns A to C of mass events are defined based on the values of the jackpot type and the display effect counter 233o. Here, the jackpot type is determined using the information in the fluctuation history storage area 233n. For example, when the jackpot type is "big hit A" and the value of the display effect counter 233o is "10", "pattern B" is set as a mass event.

Next, the continuous mass setting table 233t2 is a table that is referred to for setting a mass event when reading a continuous map (when the jackpot is continuous or there is a passage history of the continuous mass). is there.

In the continuation mass setting table 233t2, mass event patterns A to E are set based on the number of continuations (value of the continuation counter 233p) and the value of the display effect counter 233o. For example, when the number of continuations (value of the continuation counter 233p) is "5" and the value of the display effect counter 233o is "10", "pattern B" is set as a mass event. In this control example, the mass event "pattern D" may be set when the number of continuations is 5 or more, and the mass event "pattern E" is set when the number of continuations is 10 or more. Is configured so that may be set. This makes it possible to set a special mass event that is set only when the jackpot continues.

The mass event storage area 233u is an area for storing the event of the mass selected during the jackpot production. Specifically, when the decision switch 270e is pressed in the jackpot middle SW process (FIG. 125), the event of the determined mass is stored in the mass event storage area by the process of S3807. The mass event stored in the mass event storage area 233u is referred to in the process of S3101 of the round number command process (see FIG. 119) for executing the round effect, and is used for determining the round number display data table. As a result, the corresponding round effect of the determined mass event can be executed.

The route history storage area 233w is an area for storing the selected (passed) square in the jackpot effect. In the route history storage area 233w, information on the selected square is added when the determination switch 270e is pressed in the jackpot middle SW process (see FIG. 125). Thereby, in the map setting process (see FIG. 120), it is possible to determine the presence / absence of the passage history of the continuous mass, the presence / absence of the non-passage mass, and the like.

The background addition flag 223x is a flag that is set to be turned on according to the selected mass event in the jackpot effect. By setting the background addition flag 223x to on, when the back image change command is received, the corresponding additional background can be set.

The door inside fluctuation counter 223y is an area for counting the number of fluctuations executed during the display of the door inside background in the super background notice stage. The in-door fluctuation counter 223y is set to a predetermined value (20 in this control example) when the in-door background is set, and is subtracted by 1 each time the subsequent fluctuation is executed. When the in-door fluctuation counter 223y becomes 0, the winning information storage area 233k is referred to, and if there is a big hit in the hold, the same in-door background is set again with high probability, and if there is no big hit in the hold, There is a high probability that a background other than the background inside the door will be set.

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 92 to 101. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67 is executed. Is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through-gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, a special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (S201: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 100) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S208). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 94.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time is determined. If (S209: No) has not elapsed, the display content of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S210), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 94. When this special symbol change start processing is executed, a lottery for special symbols is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined which of the jackpot A to the jackpot D.

In this control example, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The LED display is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S211 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S212). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of a special symbol (S212: Yes), the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S213), and this process ends. When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the process of S213, when the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 100), it branches to S1001: Yes and the opening command. Is set. As a result, the jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the process of S213, the probabilistic change flag 203e is set to off, or the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is set to 0. This is to make the state during the jackpot the same as the initial state.

In the processing of S212, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S214), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1. If the above is the case (S214: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S215), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S214: No), the processing of S215 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the special symbol variation start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (S104) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters, a lottery (win / fail judgment) for "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform the lottery. This is a process for determining an effect pattern of a variable effect (variable effect pattern).

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the probabilistic change flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probabilistic change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. If the probabilistic change flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. If the probabilistic change flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol.

When the probability changing flag 203e is on (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability changing state of the special symbol, so that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the first random number table Based on the jackpot determination value for high probability of 202a, the lottery result of whether or not the jackpot is a special symbol is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 30 jackpot determination values for high probability stored in the first random number table 202a one by one. As described above, 30 random numbers of "0 to 29" are set as the big hits of the special symbol at the time of high probability, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random numbers that hit these are set. If the numbers match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when the probability changing flag 203e is off (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, so the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301. And, based on the first hit random number table 202a and the jackpot determination value for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the jackpot determination value for the low probability of 3 stored in the first random number table 202a. As described above, three random number values of "0 to 2" are set as the big hits of the special symbol at the time of low probability, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first and the random numbers that hit these. If the numbers match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the jackpot of four types of special symbols (big hit). Of A to D), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 24", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16 round probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "25 to 49", it is determined. If it is judged to be jackpot B (4 rounds probability variation jackpot), if it is in the range of "50 to 74", it is judged to be jackpot C (16 rounds time reduction jackpot), and if it is in the range of "74 to 99" It is determined that the jackpot is D (4 rounds of time-saving jackpot) (see FIG. 81 (b)).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of LEDs 37A and 37B) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hits A to D). Further, the jackpot type (big hits A to D) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

For example, "completely off", "out of normal reach", "out of super reach", and "out of special reach" are defined as the variation pattern for the jackpot, and "hit normal reach", as the variation pattern for the jackpot. Various types of "hit super reach" and "hit special reach" are stipulated.

In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", the front-back off reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", the front-back off reach is set.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To determine.

Here, various types of "hit super reach" and "missing super reach" include "super reach A", "super reach B", and other super reach, based on the numerical value of the variable type counter CS1. Is selected in the process of S307 or S309. In this control example, the type of super reach (“super reach A”, “super reach B”, etc.) is configured to be selected by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the voice lamp control device 113 is not limited to this. It may be configured to be selected by the MPU 221 of. Thereby, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 100). Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S312 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64, and if there is a starting winning, This is a process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c must be less than 4. If (S403: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol reserved ball counter The value (N) of 203c is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 100) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, based on the various counter values stored in the processing of S406, the winning / failing of the lottery in the special symbol (whether it is a big hit or not), the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted. (S407).

If the winning / failing of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted by the processing of S407, then the predicted winning / failing of the lottery, the predicted stopping type, and A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S408).

The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 100) to be executed later by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as the winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, it is determined whether or not the game state is a probabilistic jackpot (S409). In the process of S409, when it is determined that the game state is a probability change jackpot (S409: Yes), the look-ahead probability change flag 203g provided in the RAM 203 is set to ON (S410), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state is not a probabilistic jackpot (S409: No), the process proceeds to S411.

In the process of S411, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the time saving jackpot (S411), and if it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving jackpot (S411: Yes), the look-ahead probability change provided in the RAM 203 is in progress. The flag 203g is set to off (S412), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S411, when it is determined that the game state is not a time saving jackpot (S411: No), the process of S412 is skipped and this process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the electric motor associated with the second winning opening 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S501). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. Includes monaka. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S501: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is larger than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S504: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S508). The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is a big hit of a special symbol (S509). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In this control example, the lottery of the normal symbol is less likely to be won during the jackpot of the special symbol.

During the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the second winning opening 640 provided immediately above the specific winning opening 65a , The ball becomes easy to enter. Here, in this control example, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is prevented from being opened during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state). As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball that is to be won in the specific winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible.

Even if the ball is suppressed from entering the second winning opening 640 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the ball enters the first winning opening 64. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first winning opening 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

In the processing of S509, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired by the processing of S507. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 81 (d)).

In the process of S508, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S508: No), the process proceeds to the process of S511. In the processing of S511, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 is low. Based on the second hit random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 81 (d)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S510 or S511 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S512), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S512: Yes). , Set the display mode at the time of hit (S513). In the process of S513, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S514), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S514: Yes), the special symbol is currently being hit. Whether or not it is determined (S515). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In this control example, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is missed. , The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S515, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so that the second winning opening 640 The opening period of the electric accessory 640a accompanying the above is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S514: No), the process proceeds to the process of S517. In the processing of S517, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set to 0. . Set to 2 seconds, set the number of times of opening to 1 (S517), and shift to the process of S519.

In the process of S512, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S512: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

In the process of S519, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S519), and if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S519: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83. The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S519: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S522). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S520 or the process of S521 before the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S522, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S522: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S522, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S518, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S523, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 100) is executed next, the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. After finishing, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S513 or the process of S518.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result of the normal symbol (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process a hit of the normal symbol? Is determined (S524). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S525), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S525, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 100) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S516 or the process of S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67, and if the ball has passed, the second This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per 2.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variation display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S603).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol entry port 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter The value (M) of 203d is added by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S605), and this process is terminated. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S701) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this control example) is executed in order to wait for the control devices on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. (S802). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process shifts to S810. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is shifted to S810 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S810 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S914 of the main process (see FIG. 100), the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 are correctly saved.

In the process of S810, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S810). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S811, S812) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S811, S812) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S811, S812) is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S811, S812), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S811), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S812). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S813.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S813. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S813, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S814), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (peripheral) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 93) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 95) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 95) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 101) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 96), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 94), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed on the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In this control example, among the LEDs 37A and 37B of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 94) ends, the first symbol display device The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 94) after ending the variation display executed in 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 96), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 96), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S513 or the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 96) after ending the variable display (see FIG. 96). Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process is shifted to S901, and each process after S901 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S909: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the processing of S908, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 98 has been executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S914), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack is used in the initial setting process (S801). By setting the pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S901. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 100), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (see FIG. 100). Large opening port) This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). Specifically, if the processing of S213 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 93) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1001, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001: Yes), the opening command is set (S1002), and this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1003). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. In the process of S1003, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1003: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1003, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1006). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1004, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls are formed. When a prize is won (for example, 10 pieces), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1007, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this processing is completed. To do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009). Specifically, when the special gaming state (all 16 or 4 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state is completed, it is determined that the ending effect is started.

In the process of S1009, when it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: Yes), the ending command is set (S1010). The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is jackpot A or jackpot B (S1011), and if it is jackpot A or jackpot B (S1011: Yes), the high probability of the special symbol after the end of jackpot A or jackpot B. In order to shift to the state, the probability changing flag 203e is set to on (S1012), and the process shifts to S1015.

In the processing of S1011, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not jackpot A or jackpot (that is, jackpot C or jackpot D), in order to shift to the time saving state of the normal symbol after the end of jackpot C or jackpot D. , The probability change flag 203e is set to off (S1013), the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 100 (S1014), and the process shifts to S1015. In the process of S1015 executed after the process of S1013 or S1014, the end of the jackpot is set and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1009, if it is not the ending start timing (S1009: No), this process ends. By this jackpot control process (see FIG. 101), various settings related to jackpot can be made.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 109. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S1101). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S1217 is in the middle of execution due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). It is determined whether or not it has been started (S1102). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 103, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1214 in FIG. 103), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1217. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1217 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1102: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1217. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1103).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1106. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1103: Yes), the process proceeds to S1104 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1103: No), the process proceeds to S1108.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1103: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1104. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1217 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1103: No), and the data shifts to S1108.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1102: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1217, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process shifts to S1104 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1104, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1104). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1105: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1106). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1105: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1107), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S1108, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1108). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1217 is executed (see S1216 in FIG. 103). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1217 is executed, the process of S1108 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1217 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1108: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1109), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1110), and then an interrupt occurs. Set the permission (S1111) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the process of S1108 is reached with the power off flag turned off because the start-up process of this time was started after, for example, the power supply was completely cut off, so that the process of S1108 via the processes of S1104 to S1106 was started. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1108: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1109, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1110, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1110), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1111), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1109 is that when the processing of S1108 is reached via the processing of S1104 to S1106, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1104. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1201 was executed (S1201), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1201: No), the process proceeds to S1212 without performing the processes of S1202 to S1311. In the process of S1201, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1202 to S1311 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1212 and the variation display setting process of S1213 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1212 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S1213 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1201 (S1201: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1203 to S1213 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1202). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1208 described later (S1203), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1204). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S1205 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1205, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1206). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the SW input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1207). In this SW input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 or the selection switch 270 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 or the like is confirmed. It is a process of setting to perform an effect corresponding to a case. In this process, when an operation by the player such as the frame button 22 is detected, a SW-related command based on the operated switch is set for the display control device 114. Details of this SW input monitoring / effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 106.

When the SW input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1208), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1209). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1209, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1210). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1208 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1209 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S1210 is completed, the effect counter 223i is updated (S1211). The effect counter updated here is used for selecting an effect when the frame button 22 is pressed in the above-mentioned Super Reach B. In this control example, the effect counter 223i is updated in the main process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an interrupt process may be provided for the update.

When the processing of S1211 is completed, the command determination processing that performs the processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed (S1212). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 104. Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1213). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 105.

When the processing of S1213 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1214). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If it is determined in the process of S1214 that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1214: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1216), and the power-off process is executed. (S1217). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1218), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of information on the occurrence of power failure.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1214 (S1214: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1215), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1215: No), the process returns to the process of S1201 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1215: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1212). This command determination process (S1212) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. ..

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1301). When the variation pattern command is received (S1301: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1302), and the variation pattern selection for extracting the variation pattern type from the received variation pattern command. The process is executed (S1303), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 105) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S1301: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S1304). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1305), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1306), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 105) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1304: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1307). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1307: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). The number of holdings N) of the fluctuation display in the above is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1308). Further, in the process of S1308, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1308 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) or when the special symbol lottery is performed, so that the starting winning is won. Every time it is detected or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set by the process of S1308 to the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110. Can be adjusted to the value of. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning prize is detected or special. At the time of the symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1408 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1307, when the reserved ball number command is not received (S1307: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning command is received from the main control device 110 (S1309). Then, when the opening command is received (S1309: Yes), the winning information is extracted from the received command and stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1310), and the winning command for display based on the winning information is set. (S1311), the process returns to the main process. The display winning command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display winning command, the display control device 114 stores the winning information in the winning information storage area 233k in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1309, when the reserved ball number command is not received (S1309: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command is received from the main control device 110 (S1312). Then, when the opening command is received (S1312: Yes), the display opening command for executing the opening effect is set in the third symbol display device 81 (S1313), and the process returns to the main process. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1312, if the opening command has not been received (S1312: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1314). Then, when the round number command is received (S1314: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1315), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number command (S1314: Yes). S1316), this process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1314, when the number of rounds command is not received (S1314: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command is received from the main controller 110, and when the ending command is received. (S1317: Yes), a display ending command is set (S1318), and this process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1317, if the ending command is not received (S1317: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1319). ), Return to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

By this process, it is possible to set a command for making various settings to the display control device 114 based on the command output from the main control device 110.

Next, the variation display setting process (S1213) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1213). This variation display setting process (S1213) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1401). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1406 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1402), and then the fluctuation pattern is processed in S1303 of the command determination process (see FIG. 104). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S1403).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1404). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the selection SW valid period is set based on the high-speed fluctuation period (S1405). Based on the selected SW validity period set here, in the SW input monitoring / effect processing (see FIG. 106) described later, the super-background operation processing for processing the switch operation at the time of super-background notice is executed. Become.

When the processing of S1405 is completed, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a SW effect (S1406). In the process of S1406, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is a SW effect (that is, super reach A or super reach B), the frame SW validity period 223f and the replacement timing 223g are set based on the fluctuation pattern. , The process proceeds to S1408. On the other hand, in the process of S1406, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not the SW effect (that is, super reach A or super reach B), the process of S1407 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1408.

In the process of S1408, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S1408). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1409.

In the process of S1409, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1409). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1409: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variation display Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1409: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1410), and then in the process of S1306 of the command determination process (see FIG. 104), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1411).

Next, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control unit 110, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. (S1412), and this process ends. By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 stops and displays the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

Here, the SW input monitoring / effect processing (S1207) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing this SW input monitoring / effect processing (S1207). This SW input monitoring / effect processing (S1207) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and causes the effect based on the operation of the frame button 22 or the like to be executed. Therefore, a display command based on the operated switch is generated and set.

In the SW input monitoring / effect processing (S1207), first, it is determined whether or not the selected SW is valid (S1501). As described above, whether or not the selection SW is valid is set based on the high-speed fluctuation period in the processing of S1405 of the fluctuation display setting processing (see FIG. 105).

In the process of S1501, when it is determined that the selected SW is valid period (S1501: Yes), the super background operation process which is the operation process when the super background notice is executed is performed (S1502), and this process is performed. To finish.

Here, the super-background operation process (S1502) will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the operation process (S1502) at the time of super background. This super background operation process (S1502) is executed in the SW input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a switch such as the selection switch 270 in the super background notice. This is a process of generating and setting a display command based on the operated switch in order to execute an effect based on the operation.

In the super-background operation process (S1502), first, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S1601). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), the background image change command is set (S1602), and this process ends. The display control device 114 changes the background image (super background preview image, normal background image, etc.) by receiving this background image change command.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1601 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1601: No), it is determined whether or not the determination switch 270e is pressed (S1603). If it is determined in the process of S1603 that the decision switch 270e is pressed (S1603: Yes), the display decision SW press command is set (S1604), and this process ends. In the display control device 114, the background image is changed to a special background by receiving this display determination SW command while displaying the specific image of the super background notice.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1603 that the determination switch 270e is not pressed (S1603: No), it is determined whether or not any of the selection switches 270a to 270d is pressed (S1605). If it is determined in the process of S1605 that any of the selection switches 270a to 270d is pressed (S1605: Yes), the display selection SW pressing command is set based on the pressed selection switch (270a to 270d). (S1606), this process is terminated. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display selection SW command during the display of the super background notice, the scroll direction of the super background notice is changed based on the operated selection switch.

Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. In the process of S1501, if it is determined that the selected SW is not valid (S1501: No), it is determined whether or not the frame SW is valid (S1503). In the process of S1503, if it is determined that the frame SW is not valid period (S1503: No), the jackpot operation process, which is the operation process when the jackpot effect is being executed, is performed (S1504), and this process is terminated. ..

Here, the jackpot operation process (S1504) will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation process (S1504). This jackpot operation process (S1504) is executed in the SW input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the switch operation of the selection switch 270 or the like during the jackpot effect. This is a process of generating and setting a display command based on an operated switch in order to execute an effect based on.

In the jackpot operation process (S1504), first, it is determined whether or not the determination switch 270e is pressed (S1701). If it is determined in the process of S1701 that the decision switch 270e is pressed (S1701: Yes), the display decision SW press command is set (S1704), and this process ends. When the display control device 114 receives the display decision SW pressing command at the time of selecting the event mass in the jackpot effect, the event mass is determined and the effect corresponding to the mass is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1701 that the determination switch 270e is not pressed (S1701: No), it is determined whether or not any of the selection switches 270a to 270d is pressed (S1703). If it is determined in the process of S1703 that any of the selection switches 270a to 270d is pressed (S1703: Yes), the display selection SW pressing command is set based on the pressed selection switch (270a to 270d). (S1704), this process is terminated. In the display control device 114, when the event mass is selected in the jackpot effect, the selected event mass is changed based on the operated selection switch by receiving this display selection SW command.

Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the processing of S1503 that the frame SW valid period is (S1503: Yes), the value of the frame SW valid period 223f is subtracted by 1 (S1505), and it is determined whether or not the super reach A is changing. (S1506). When it is determined in the process of S1506 that the super reach A is changing (S1506: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S1507).

If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the process of S1507 (S1508), a display valid press command is set (S1508), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1507 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1507: No), the process of S1508 is skipped and the present process is terminated. When the display control device 114 receives the display valid pressing command set in the process of S1508, the stop display (for example, FIGS. 70 (b) and 71 (a)) is executed in the effect of the super reach A. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S1506, when it is determined that it is not Super Reach A (S1506: No), it is determined whether or not it is Super Reach B (S1509). If it is determined in the process of S1509 that it is not Super Reach B (S1509: No), there is no process based on the switch operation, so this process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined to be Super Reach B in the processing of S1509 (S1509: Yes), the operation processing at Super Reach B is executed to execute the processing based on the switch operation during the production of Super Reach B (S1509: Yes). S1510), this process is terminated.

Here, the super reach B operation process (S1510) will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the operation process (S1510) at the time of super reach B. This super reach B operation process (S1510) is executed in the SW input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the operation of the frame button 22 in the super reach B is performed. This is a process of generating and setting a display command in order to execute an effect based on (for example, FIG. 77B).

In the super reach B operation process (S1510), first, it is determined whether or not the frame SW valid period is larger than 0 (S1801). If it is determined in the process of S1801 that the frame SW valid period is larger than 0 (S1801: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1803. On the other hand, in the processing of S1801, if it is determined that the frame SW valid period is not larger than 0 (that is, 0) (S1801: No), it is the timing to end the production of Super Reach B, so the replacement is performed. The flag is turned off (S1802), and the process proceeds to S1803.

In the process of S1803 executed after the process of S1801 or S1802, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S1803). If it is determined in the process of S1803 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1803: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1803, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1803: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223i is acquired (S1804), and the data of the winning information storage area 223a is acquired (S1805). The process proceeds to S1806.

In the process of S1806, it is determined whether or not the changing winning information is a big hit (S1806). In the processing of S1806, when it is determined that the changing winning information is a big hit (S1806: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223i acquired in the processing of S1804 is 0 to 100. (S1807).

In the process of S1807, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223i is 0 to 100, it is determined whether or not the remaining valid pressing count = 1 and it is not the stoptable period (S1808). In the process of S1808, if it is determined that the remaining number of valid presses = 1 and it is not the stoptable period (S1808: Yes), the display valid press command is set (S1809), and the process proceeds to S1811. .. On the other hand, in the processing of S1807, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223i is not 0 to 100 (that is, 101 to 198), and in the processing of S1808, the remaining effective number of times is not 1 or the stoppable period. If it is determined that (S1808: No), a false press command for display is set (S1809), and the process proceeds to S1811.

In the process of S1811, which is executed after the process of S1809 or S1810, the replacement timing is updated based on the number of remaining valid presses and the remaining frame SW valid period. Specifically, the super reach B is provided with a replacement timing. After this replacement timing has passed, it is determined that the number of remaining valid presses is large (that is, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is insufficient during the remaining frame SW valid period) even though the remaining frame SW valid period is short. The effect that is determined and suggests a big hit is replaced in advance. As described above, by setting the replacement timing based on the remaining frame SW valid period and the number of remaining valid presses, it is possible to set in advance an effect suggesting a big hit, and processing when the remaining frame SW valid period has elapsed. The load can be reduced.

When the processing of S1811 is completed, it is determined whether or not the replacement flag 223h is off (S1812). If it is determined in the processing of S1812 that the replacement flag 223h is not off (S1812: No), a display replacement command has already been set to replace the effect suggesting a big hit, so this processing is performed as it is. To finish.

On the other hand, in the process of S1812, when it is determined that the replacement flag 223h is off (S1812: Yes), it is determined whether or not the replacement timing has passed (S1813). If it is determined in the process of S1813 that the replacement timing has not passed (S1813: No), the replacement does not need to be performed yet, so this process ends. In the process of S1813, when it is determined that the replacement timing has passed (S1813: Yes), a display replacement command is set (S1814) to replace the effect suggesting a big hit, and the replacement flag 223h is set. Set it on (S1815) and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1806, when it is determined that the changing winning information is not a big hit (S1806: No), then it is determined whether or not the effect counter 223i is 0 to 50 (S1816). If it is determined that the effect counter 223i is 0 to 50 in the process of S1816 (S1816: Yes), a display valid pressing command is set (S1817), and this process is terminated. In the process of S1816, if it is determined that the effect counter 223i is not 0 to 50 (that is, 51 to 198) (S1816: No), a false press command for display is set (S1818), and this process is terminated. To do.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 132. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. If the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S1901), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S1901) will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1901) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is performed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2001). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2002). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2001.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2002, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2002, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S2003). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2004), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S1901 in FIG. 110) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1902 in FIG. 110) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (see S1901 in FIG. 110) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 111, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2001 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, it is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2001 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2002. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2003 to S2005 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2001 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. And, after repeating a plurality of times including the process of S1902, the processes of S2003 to S2005 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes S2003 to S2005 may be executed without performing the processes S2001 and S2002. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 110. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1902). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1903). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1903, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S1904). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1904, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (SS1905). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 130 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S4302 in FIG. 130 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, a simple command determination process (FIG. 112) is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112 (b)). 112 (b) S2208) and the simple display setting process (see S2209 in FIG. 112 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entering (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and the main control device was instructed to start the variable effect. When the sound lamp control device 113 is used from 110, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. be able to. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S1905, interrupt permission is set (S1906), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1906, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 112 (a). FIG. 112A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2101), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing or the simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described later, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 112 (b). FIG. 112B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 91) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2201), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2201: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. Therefore, instead of the image at the time of power-on, the normal production image is used as the third symbol. The command determination process (S2202) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S2203) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2202), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the image. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 113 to 126.

In the display setting process (S2203), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2202) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2204). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2203) or the simple display setting process (S2209). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2205). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2206). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2205), which are determined in the task process (S2204), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 91 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 132 (a).

Next, the counter update process (S2207) is executed. The details of the counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 132 (b). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2207, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2201 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2201: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2208) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2209) is executed to shift to the process of S2204.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 113 to 126, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2202), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 113, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2301), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2301: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2301: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2203) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2302), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2303).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2304), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2304: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2305), the process returns to S2301.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2305) will be described with reference to FIG. 114 (a). FIG. 114 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, the data in the game state storage area is updated based on the reception command (S2401). Next, the received variation pattern is stored in the variation history storage area (S2402), a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is used as data. It is read from the variation effect table storage area (see FIG. 17) of the table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2403).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of S2403, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2403 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2404). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2403 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2405). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2405, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2403, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2406), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S2407). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2408), the super background effect processing is executed (S2409), and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2407, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2403. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2404. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2406, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the super background effect processing (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the super background effect processing (S2409). When the door interior background in the super background notice is displayed, whether the super background effect processing (S2409) ends the door interior background according to the number of fluctuation displays executed during the display of the door interior background. This is a process for deciding whether to continue.

In the super background effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation number counter 233y in the door is larger than 0 (S2601). If it is determined in the process of S2601 that the number of fluctuation counters in the door 233y is 0 (S2601: No), the background inside the door is not being displayed, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2601, when it is determined that the in-door fluctuation counter 233y is larger than 0 (S2601: Yes), the in-door fluctuation counter 233y is subtracted by 1 (S2602), and the in-door fluctuation counter 223y is set. It is determined whether or not it is 0 (S2603).

If it is determined in the process of S2603 that the in-door variation counter 223y is not 0 (S2603: No), this process is terminated because it is not the end timing of the in-door background. On the other hand, in the process of S2603, when it is determined that the fluctuation number counter 223y in the door is 0 (S2603: Yes), the data of the winning information storage area 233k is acquired (S2604), and the value of the display effect counter 233o is acquired. Then (S2605), the process proceeds to S2606.

In the process of S2606, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit in the hold from the data of the winning information storage area 233k acquired in the process of S2604 (S2606). In the process of S2606, when it is determined that there is a big hit in the hold (S2606: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the display effect counter 233o acquired by the process of S2605 is 0 to 150 (S2606: Yes). S2607).

When the value of the display effect counter 233o is determined to be 0 to 150 in the processing of S2607, the same rear image discrimination flag as the currently displayed door interior background is set to ON (S2608), and S2612 Move to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2607 that the value of the display effect counter 233o is not 0 to 150 (that is, 151 to 198) (S2607: No), the door is different from the currently displayed door interior background. The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the inner background is set to on (S2609), and the process proceeds to S2612.

On the other hand, in the process of S2606, when it is determined that there is no big hit in the hold (S2606: No), then it is determined whether or not the display effect counter 233o is 0 to 30 (S2610). When the display effect counter 233o is determined to be 0 to 30 in the process of S2610, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the background inside the door different from the background inside the door currently displayed is set to ON (S2611). , S2612. On the other hand, in the processing of S2610, when it is determined that the value of the display effect counter 233o is not 0 to 30 (that is, 31 to 198) (S2611: No), the back image corresponding to the background other than the background inside the door. The determination flag is set to on (S2613), and the process proceeds to S2614.

In the process of S2612 executed after S2608, S2609 or S2611, the in-door fluctuation number counter 223y is set to 20, and the process proceeds to the process of S2614.

In the process of S2614 executed after S2612 or S2613, the rear image change flag 233q is set to ON (S2614), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 113, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2304, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2304: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2306). If there is a display variable type command (S2306: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2307), and the process returns to S2201.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2307) will be described with reference to FIG. 114 (b). FIG. 114B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, or complete out of order) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S2501), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B) is executed, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the variation effect to be performed is finally set (S2502).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2502 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. Set to (S2503) to end this process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2502 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2204), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2502 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2503, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S2502.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 113, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the processing of S2306 (S2306: No), then the reach-related command processing is executed among the unprocessed commands (S2309), and the process returns to the processing of S2301. ..

Here, the details of the reach-related command processing (S2309) will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing reach-related command processing (S2309). This reach-related command process (S2309) executes a process corresponding to the reach-related command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the reach-related command processing (S2309), first, it is determined whether or not the effect being changed is Super Reach A (S2701), and if it is determined to be Super Reach A (S2701: Yes), it is effectively pressed. It is determined whether there is a command (S2702).

If it is determined that there is a valid press command in the process of S2702, the stop display table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2703), and this process is terminated. Here, the process of S2703 is executed based on the pressing of the frame button 22 during the production of Super Reach A. By setting the stop display table in the display data table buffer 233d, the stop display (see FIG. 70B) is displayed in the effect of Super Reach A.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701, if it is determined that the effect being changed is not Super Reach A (that is, Super Reach B) (S2701: No), the display Super Reach B process is executed (S2704). , End this process.

Here, the details of the display super reach B process (S2704) will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the display super reach B process (S2704). This display super reach B process (S2704) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and is a switch such as the selection switch 270 during the production of the super reach B. This is a process for performing an operation-based process.

In the display super reach B process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a valid pressing command (S2801). In the process of S2801, when it is determined that there is a valid pressing command (S2801: Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol is a big hit (that is, whether or not it will be a big hit in the next effective effect) (S2802). ..

In the process of S2802, when it is determined that the symbol is a big hit (that is, it becomes a big hit in the next effective effect) (S2802: No), the stop display table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2803). This process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2802, if it is determined that the symbol is not a big hit (that is, it does not become a big hit in the next effective effect) (S2802: No), the throwing display table is set in the display table buffer (S2804), and this End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S2801, if it is determined that there is no valid command (S2801: No), it is determined that there is a false press command (S2805). If it is determined that there is a false press command in the process of S2805 (S2805: Yes), the false throw display table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and this process is terminated.

In the process of S2805, when it is determined that there is no false pressing command (S2805: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a replacement command (S2807). If it is determined that there is a replacement command in the process of S2807 (S2807: Yes), the replacement table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2808), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2807 that there is no replacement command (S2807), there is no process based on the switch operation during the production of Super Reach B, so this process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 113, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2308 that there is no reach-related command (S2308: No), it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot-related command (S2810). If it is determined in the process of S2810 that there is a jackpot-related command (S2810: Yes), the jackpot-related command process is executed (S2811), and the process returns to the process of S2301.

Here, the details of the jackpot-related command processing (S2811) will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related command processing (S2811). This jackpot-related command process (S2811) executes a process corresponding to a display command related to the jackpot effect received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the jackpot-related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command (S2901). If it is determined that there is a display opening command in the process of S2901, the opening command process is executed (S2902), and the process proceeds to the process of S2903. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display opening command, the process of S2902 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2903.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S2902) will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (a). FIG. 118 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the opening command process, first, a map setting process for setting a map displayed in the jackpot effect is executed (S3001). The details of this map setting process (S3001) will be described later with reference to FIG. 120. When the processing of S3001 is completed, the opening display data table is read from the opening effect table storage area (see FIG. 17) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3002). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S3002 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3003).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3002, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3004), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3004). S3005). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3006), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3005, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3002, The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S3003. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, when this opening command processing is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, the image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced due to the slow read speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data used for the above to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect of the third symbol display device 81 is completed, and thus indicates the first round. If the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There was a risk that time would be generated and the player would feel uncomfortable or anxious about whether or not the operation was stopped.

Further, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects (for 16 rounds) in the third symbol display device 81 are completed. If the image data required for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display ending command, there is a lot of waiting time from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. There is a risk that the player may feel uncomfortable or anxious about whether or not the operation has stopped.

Therefore, in this control example, when the display opening command is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and by the time the jackpot variation display is completed on the third symbol display device 81. , Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. As a result, when the opening effect is completed in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects (16 rounds) are performed in the third symbol display device 81. ) When the process is completed, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not feel anxious or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

As described above, in this control example, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is started from there. The third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is completed by the end of the variable effect that is a big hit. As a result, when the variable effect that becomes a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the opening effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is worried that the operation has not stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

Here, the details of the map setting process (S3001) will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a map setting process (S3001). This map setting process (S3001) is executed in the jackpot-related command process (see FIG. 118) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and is a process for setting the map displayed in the jackpot effect.

In the map setting process, first, the data of the game state storage area 233 m is acquired (S3301), and it is determined whether or not the acquired game state is in the probable change or the time reduction (S3302). In the process of S3302, when it is determined that the game state is in the probability change or the time is shortened (S3302: Yes), the continuation counter 223p is added by 1 (S3303), and the data of the previous map is read from the map storage area 233s. (S3304), a mass event is selected and set from the continuous mass setting table 233t2 based on the value of the continuation counter 233p and the value of the display effect counter (S3305), and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3302, when it is determined that the game state is not in the probability change or the time reduction (S3302: No), the route history storage area 233w is referred to to determine whether or not there is a continuous mass passage history. (S3306).

In the processing of S3306, if it is determined that there is no continuous mass passage history (S3306: Yes), the first map is read because there is no continuous map (S3307), and the jackpot fluctuation pattern and the value of the display effect counter 233o are set. Based on this, the mass event is selected and set from the normal mass setting table 233t1 (S3308), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3306, when it is determined that there is a continuous mass passing history (S3306: No), it is determined whether or not there is a non-passing mass (S3309). In the process of S3309, if it is determined that there is an unpassed cell (S3309: Yes), the previous map and the event cell are read from the map storage area 233s (S3310) in order to continue the production from the previous map. ), Set the restart point in the continuum of the route with the unpassed mass closest to the start (S3311), and end this process.

If it is determined in the processing of S3309 that there are no unpassed cells (S3309: No), a map different from the previous one is read from the map storage area 233s (S3312) in order to move to a new map, and a jackpot fluctuation pattern is displayed. A mass event is selected and set from the normal mass setting table 233t1 based on the value of the effect counter 233o (S3313), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2901, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2901: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2903), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S2903: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2904), and this process ends.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2904) will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (b). FIG. 119 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table is determined based on the round number indicated by the display round number command and the data of the mass event storage area 233u, and the determined round number display data table is used as the data table. It is read from the round effect table storage area (see FIG. 86) of the storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3101). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3102).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3104). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3105), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 118. In the processing of S2903, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2903: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2905), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S2905: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2906), and this process ends. On the other hand, if there is no display ending command in the process of S2905 (S2905: No), the process of S2906 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S2906) will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the ending command processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit in the hold in the data of the winning information storage area 233k (S3401). In the process of S3401, if it is determined that there is a big hit in the hold (S3401: Yes), the mass event is updated based on the information of the hold of the big hit and the display effect counter 233o (S3402), and the process of S3403 Move to. In the process of S3402, for example, when there is a jackpot in the hold, a square 2 squares ahead of the square at the current position (that is, a square that can be reached by generating the jackpot twice) is set as a special square (FIG. 74 (FIG. 74). b) See). By setting the square two ahead as a special square, the player will continue the game with the expectation of at least two more big hits.

Next, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined (S3403), and the determined ending display data table is stored in the ending effect table storage area (FIG. 3) of the data table storage area 233b. Read from (see 86) and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3404). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3405). Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3401, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3406), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3406). S3407). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3408), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this ending command processing, the ending effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot of the special symbol ends, so that the player recognizes that the jackpot has ended. Can be made to.

Returning to the description of FIG. 113, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2310, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2310: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2312), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S2312: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2313), and the process returns to the process of S2301.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2313) will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 131) of the rear image change due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (see FIG. 131). S3501). Then, the back image type (back A to C, super back notice, background inside the door, etc.) is selected based on the current background image and the background addition flag 223x, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the selected back image type is selected. Is turned on, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to other back image types is set to off (S3503), and the process shifts to S3504.

In the process of S3504, it is determined whether or not the selected back image type is a super background notice (S3504). If it is determined in the process of S3504 that it is a super background notice, the super background flag 233r is set to ON (S3505), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3504 that it is not a super background notice, the process of S3505 is skipped and the present process is terminated. By turning on the super background flag 233r by the processing of S3505, the super background SW processing (S3602) that performs the processing based on the switch operation in the super background in the SW related command processing (see FIG. 123) described later is performed. Can be executed.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S3501 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S3502. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing (S2204), when it is specified that any one of the back side A to C, the super back side notice, the background inside the door, etc. is displayed depending on the back side type of the back side image specified in the display data table. From the back image discrimination flag set by the processing of S3502, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the back image is The type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data corresponding to the range is stored and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3502, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier may be selected, or the back image type received later may be selected. You may select the back image type indicated by the back image command. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image type indicated by the command may be selected. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 113. In the process of S2312, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2312: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a SW-related command among the unprocessed commands (S2314). If it is determined that there is a SW-related command in the process of S2314 (S2314: Yes), the SW-related command process is executed (S2315), and the process returns to the process of S2301.

Here, the details of the SW-related command processing (S2315) will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing SW-related command processing (S2315). This SW-related command process (S2315) executes a process corresponding to a command based on the switch operation received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the SW-related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the super background flag 233r is on (S3601). If it is determined that the super background flag 233r is on in the processing of S3601 (S3601: Yes), the super background notice is being displayed, so the super background SW that performs processing based on the switch operation in the super background The process is executed (S3602), and the present process is terminated.

Here, the details of the SW process in the super background (S3602) will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the SW process (S3602) in the super background. This super-background SW process (S3602) is a process for executing an effect based on the operation of the selection switch 270 or the like while the super-background notice is being displayed.

In the super background SW process, first, it is determined whether or not the determination switch 270e is pressed (S3701). When it is determined in the process of S3701 that the determination switch 270e is pressed (S3701: Yes), the display data of the background image currently being displayed is acquired (S3702), and it is determined whether or not the transitionable display is in progress. (S3703). Here, the transitionable display means a case where a specific image is displayed in the rear image, and a case where the image of the door is blinking in the present control example (see FIG. 67).

In the process of S3703, if it is determined that the transferable display is not in progress (S3703: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if this is not the case (S3703: Yes), the value of the in-door fluctuation counter 223y is set to 20 (S3704), the data of the winning information storage area 233k is acquired (S3705), and the value of the display effect counter 233o is obtained. (S3706), and the process proceeds to S3707.

In the processing of S3707, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit in the hold in the data of the winning information storage area 233k acquired by the processing of S3705 (S3707), and if it is determined that there is a big hit in the hold (S3707). : Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the display effect counter 233o acquired by the process of S3706 is 0 to 100 (S3708).

In the process of S3708, when the display effect counter 233o is determined to be 0 to 100 (S3708: Yes), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the high-expectation door interior background is set to ON (S3709). The process proceeds to S3714. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display effect counter 233o is not 0 to 100 (that is, 101 to 198) (S3708: No), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the low expectation door interior background is set to on. Then, the process proceeds to S3714.

On the other hand, in the process of S3707, when it is determined that there is no big hit in the hold (S3707: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the display effect counter 233o is 0 to 30 (S3711).

When it is determined that the display effect counter 233o is 0 to 30 in the processing of S3711 (S3711: Yes), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the high-expected door interior background is set to ON (S3712). The process proceeds to S3714. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display effect counter 233o is not 0 to 30 (that is, 31 to 198) (S3711: No), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the low expectation door interior background is set to on. Then, the process proceeds to S3714.

In the process of S3714 executed after S3709, S3710, S3712 or S3713, the rear image change flag 233q is set to ON (S3714), and this process is terminated. By setting the rear image change flag 233q to ON in the process of S3714, the rear image of the background inside the door set in any of S3709, S3710, S3712 or S3713 can be displayed.

The back image change flag 233q set to ON in the process of S3714 sets the data of the back image in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 131), and the back image is changed. The timing at which the data of the rear image is set may be synchronized with the timing at which the next variation display is started, or may be synchronized with the timing at which the currently executed variation display ends. good. As a method of synchronizing with each of the above-mentioned timings, a method of adjusting the timing for setting the rear image change flag 233q to ON in the processing of S3714, and a method of adjusting the rear image data in the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 131) are set. An example is a method of adjusting the timing. Specifically, in the process of S3714, the time difference from the synchronization timing is calculated, and the rear image change flag 233q is set to on after the calculated time elapses to adjust the timing at which the rear image is changed. be able to.

Here, depending on the processing of S3707, S3708, and S3709, the ratio of setting the high-expected door interior background differs depending on whether there is a big hit in the hold or not. That is, for the player, the display content of the background inside the door is one of the information for predicting the possibility that the hold may be a big hit. As a result, the player who wants to know this information will play the game while paying attention to the display of the specific image, which is the timing when the background inside the door can be displayed. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of S3701, when it is determined that the determination switch 270e is not pressed (S3701: No), then whether or not any of the selection switches (upper switch 270a to left switch 270d) is pressed is determined. Determine (S3715).

When it is determined in the process of S3715 that any of the selection switches (upper switch 270a to left switch 270d) is pressed (S3715: Yes), it is based on the pressed selection switch (upper switch 270a to left switch 270d). Then, the display coordinates are reset (S3716), and this process ends. On the other hand, if this is not the case (S3715: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the scroll display of the rear image is executed based on the set display coordinates. Specifically, the display coordinates for displaying the rear image are stored in chronological order, and the rear images corresponding to the display coordinates are displayed in the stored order. For example, if the display coordinates are stored so as to increase only in the horizontal direction, the rear image is scrolled and displayed in the horizontal direction (to the right of the third symbol display device 81).

In the process of S3716, for example, the display coordinates set to increase only in the horizontal direction are fixed at the current values in the horizontal direction and increased in the vertical direction based on the pressing of the upper switch 270a. Reset the display coordinates so that. As a result, the rear image scrolled in the horizontal direction (rightward of the third symbol display device 81) can be changed to be scrolled in the vertical direction (upward of the third symbol display device 81).

As a result, the player can be given a feeling as if he / she is searching in the back image of the super background notice displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by his / her own operation, and the player's interest can be enjoyed. Can be improved. Further, the background image of the super background notice includes a specific image (the image of the door in this control example) necessary for displaying the background inside the door as described above. As a result, the player who wants to display the background inside the door searches in the back image of the super background notice with further interest in order to find a specific image, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 123, the description continues. If it is determined in the process of S3601 that the super background flag 233r is not on (S3601: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot is being produced (S3603). In the process of S3603, if it is determined that the jackpot is being produced (S3603: Yes), the jackpot SW process is executed (S3604), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if this is not the case (S3603: No), the process of S3604 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Here, the details of the jackpot middle SW process (S3604) will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the SW processing during the jackpot. This jackpot middle SW process executes a process corresponding to a display command based on an operation of the selection switch 270 or the like received from the voice lamp control device 114 during the jackpot effect.

In the jackpot middle SW process, first, it is determined whether or not the SW is valid within the round (S3801). In the process of S3801, when it is determined that the SW valid period in the round is not (S3801: No), it is not the timing to perform the effect based on the switch operation, so the process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3801, when it is determined that the SW valid period in the round is (S3801: Yes), then it is determined whether or not any of the selection switches (upper switch 270a to left switch 270d) is pressed. (S3802).

In the process of S3802, if it is determined that any of the selection switches (upper switch 270a to left switch 270d) is pressed (S3802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the selection is normal (S3803). Specifically, when the movable direction in the map of the jackpot effect is downward or right (see FIG. 72 (a)), the case where the lower switch 270c or the left switch 270d is pressed is considered to be a normal selection. It is determined.

If it is determined in the process of S3803 that the selection is normal (S3803: Yes), the pointer 233f is set so that the display moves one square in the selection direction (S3804), and the process proceeds to the process of S3805.

On the other hand, in the process of S3803, if it is determined that the selection is not normal (S3803: No), the process of S3804 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3805.

In the process of S3805, it is determined whether or not the determination switch 270e is pressed (S3805). In the process of S3805, when it is determined that the determination switch 270e is pressed (S3805: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a determinable cell is selected (S3806). Specifically, when the same square as the previous time is selected, it is determined that the determinable square is not selected.

If it is determined in the process of S3806 that the decidable cell is not selected (S3806: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if this is not the case (S3806: Yes), the event of the determined mass is stored in the mass event storage area 233u (S3807), the determined mass is added to the route history storage area (S3808), and the process proceeds to S3809. Transition.

By the process of S3807, the round effect by the above-mentioned round number command process (see FIG. 119 (b)) can be executed based on the mass event stored in the mass event storage area 233u. Further, based on the route history stored in the route history storage area 233w by the processing of S3808, the presence or absence of unpassed cells is determined by the above-mentioned map setting processing (see FIG. 120) (whether or not to display a new map). Discrimination) becomes possible.

In the process of S3809 executed after the process of S3808, it is determined whether or not the determined mass event is the background addition (S3809). In the process of S3809, when it is determined that the mass event is the background addition (S3809: Yes), the background addition flag 233x is set to on based on the display effect counter 233o (S3810). Specifically, when the display effect counter 233o is 0 to 100, the background addition flag 233x is set to on. Not limited to this, if a plurality of backgrounds to be added (for example, additional background A and additional background B) are prepared and the display effect counter 233o is 0 to 50, the background addition flag 233x for adding the additional background A is turned on. When the display effect counter 233o is 51 to 100, the background addition flag 233x for adding the additional background B may be set to on.

On the other hand, in the process of S3809, if it is determined that the event is not the background addition (S3809: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 113. In the process of S2314, if it is determined that there is no SW-related command (S2314: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display winning command among the unprocessed commands (S2216). If there is a display winning command in the processing of S2216 (S2216: Yes), the winning information based on the received command is stored in the winning information storage area 233k (S2317), and the process returns to the processing of S2301.

The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 233k by the processing of S2317 is used for selecting a display effect in the above-mentioned super background effect processing (see FIG. 115).

On the other hand, in the processing of S2316, if it is determined that there is no display winning command (S2316: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2318), and the error command is determined. If there is (S2318: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2319), and the process returns to the process of S2301.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2319) will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3901). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S3902). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3901, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S3902 is determined, and the error type is supported. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S3902, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 113. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2318 (S2318: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2320), and the process returns to the process of S2301.

In the processing of S2301 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2301: Yes). ), The processing of S2302 to S2320 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2301 to S2320 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2301 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2209) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112B) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are sent from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 114 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 114 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, , Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 114A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2402. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2203), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 127, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4001: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S4002 to S4004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4005. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S4001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S4002), S4003 to S4004 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S4003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S4003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S4004).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S4101).

In the task processing (S2204), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are obtained for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S4102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 127. After the warning image setting process (S4004) or in the process of S4003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4003: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4005.

In S4005, the pointer update process is executed (S4005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S4201, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S4202). As a result, if it is End information (S4202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S4203), and if it is a demo display data table (S4203: Yes), the display data table buffer. The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S4204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4205), and this process is completed and displayed. Return to the setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S4203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S4206). ), End this process and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S4202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 127. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4006). In the task processing (S2204), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S4006 together with the warning image developed earlier, and for each sprite, Determine various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S4007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4008). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S4008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S4008: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S4009).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S4009: No), the confirmation display has not yet been produced and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S4010), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4011). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4013). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S4014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2204), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S4015, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4009, if the confirmation display flag is off instead of on (S4009: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S4016). If the demo display flag is off (S4016: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S4017) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4018). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3320), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S4021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S4016, if the demo display flag is on (S4016: No), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2209), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112 (b)), also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, a simple variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2205), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 130A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. (S4302) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 130 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S4301 (S4301: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 131.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 130 (b). FIG. 130 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S4401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4401: Yes). ), Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4402). In the process of S4402, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S4402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4402: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4403. Further, as a result of the processing of S4401, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4401: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4403.

In the process of S4403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4403: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S4403 (S4403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S4405), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2208 in FIG. 112 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2209 in FIG. 112 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 113 to 126) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 127 to 129) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. Is displayed as a normal image. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 131) (see S4301: No in FIG. 130 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 contains image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by the above, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a normal image transfer setting process (S4303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4005) of the display setting process (S2203) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described at the indicated address (S4501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4502), and if it is transfer data information (S4502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4504), and the process proceeds to S4505.

Further, in the process of S4502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S4502: No), the processes of S4503 and S4504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4505. In the process of S4505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4506).

In the process of S4506, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S4506 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4506: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4506: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4507. Further, as a result of the processing of S4505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S4505: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4507.

In the processing of S4507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4507), and if the transfer start flag is on (S4507: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S4508), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S4503 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S4513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4507: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S4509). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S4509: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4509: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S4510), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4511). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4512), and the process proceeds to S4513.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S4511, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S4513, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4513). The discrimination in the process of S4513 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S4513, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4513: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S4513 (S4513: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4514). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S4514, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S4515), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. The image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132 (a), the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2206), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 132A is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2204) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2205), the drawing list shown in FIG. 91 is generated (S4601). That is, in the process of S4601, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2204). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2205), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S4602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information instructing the first frame buffer 236b to expand the image drawn as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S4602 (S4603). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 112 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132 (b), the details of the counter update process (S2207) described above, which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 132B is a flowchart showing this counter update process.

In the counter update process, first, the display effect counter 233o is updated (S4701). Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S4702), and this processing is terminated.

<Modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, a modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 137. In the modified example of the first embodiment, the relief timing is provided during the production period of Super Reach B. If the frame button 22 is not pressed during the production of Super Reach B and this relief timing elapses, the relief production is executed. Here, as described above, the super reach B is an effect in which the jackpot is notified by pressing the frame button 22 a plurality of times. Therefore, if the inputtable period of the frame button 22 is reduced, there may be a case where the frame button 22 is not pressed in time. However, in this modification, when the inputtable period of the frame button 22 decreases (the relief timing elapses), the relief effect is executed, so that the frame button 22 required to notify the jackpot is pressed. The number of times decreases. As a result, the above-mentioned problem can be avoided.

With reference to FIG. 133, the timing at which the effect of Super Reach B in this modification is executed will be described. FIG. 133 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the execution timing of the effect of Super Reach B.

First, referring to FIG. 133 (a), the frame button 22 is not pressed until the first relief timing and the second relief timing have passed during the production of Super Reach B, and then the frame button 22 is not pressed during the stoptable period. A case where 22 is pressed to execute the stop display effect will be described.

When the reach effect of Super Reach B (reach with 7 symbols) is started, a screen in which the girl character in the center of the screen holds the 4 symbols in her hand is displayed as in the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 77 (a)). When the frame button 22 is not pressed in this state and the first relief timing elapses, the relief effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. 134 (a), the screen in which the character holds the symbol 5 together with the symbol 4 in his hand. Is changed to. Similarly, when the frame button 22 is not pressed and the second relief timing elapses, the relief effect is executed again, and as shown in FIG. 134 (b), the character has 4 symbols, 5 symbols, and 6 symbols. The screen is changed to a handheld screen.

In this state, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the stoptable period, the effect of throwing the 4 symbols, 5 symbols, and 6 symbols is executed, and the effect of notifying the jackpot is executed. As described above, in this modification, the remaining number of effective effects required for the notification of the jackpot is reduced each time the relief timing elapses. As a result, even if the player is delayed in noticing the pressing of the frame button 22 in the reach effect, the required number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is reduced, so that the frame button 22 is in time for the notification of the jackpot. The press can be executed.

Further, although the frame button 22 is pressed, the relief effect is executed in the same manner as described above when the relief timing elapses without being effective. As a result, even if the throwing effect, which is an effective effect, is not displayed even though the frame button 22 is pressed, the effect proceeds at the relief timing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect from not progressing even though the frame button 22 is pressed, and to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player.

FIG. 133 (b) is a diagram showing the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed before the elapse of each relief timing described above. If the frame button 22 is pressed and the effective effect is executed before the lapse of the first relief timing, the relief effect is not executed even after the lapse of the first relief timing, and the same applies to the second relief timing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the details of the contents of the data table storage area 233b in the modified example of the first control example will be described. FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the data table storage area 233b in this modification. The only difference from the first control example of this data table storage area 233b is that various display data tables for relief display are provided in the variation effect table storage area, and the others are different from the first control example described above. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Various display data tables for relief display store display data for relief effects such as FIGS. 134 (a) and 134 (b) described above. The display data for the relief effect is stored in the data table storage area 223b by the process of S2003 of the boot process (see FIG. 111) of the display control device 114, similarly to various other display data tables. Then, in the display super reach B process (see FIG. 137) described later, when the relief command is received, the relief display display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the super reach B time operation process (S1510) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the operation process (S1510) at the time of super reach B. In the super reach B operation process (S1510) in this modification, the above-mentioned first control example, determination of whether or not the relief timing has passed (S1830), and display relief command when the relief timing has passed are displayed. Since the parts to be set (S1831) are different and the other processes are the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, in the process of S1803, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1803: No), it is determined whether or not the relief timing corresponding to the remaining number of valid presses has elapsed (S1830). ). For example, as shown in FIG. 133 (a), when the effective effect has never been executed (the number of remaining effective presses is 3), the case where the first relief timing has passed corresponds to the case. Further, when the first relief timing has passed and the relief effect is executed once (the number of remaining effective pressings is two), the case where the second relief timing has passed corresponds to.

If it is determined in the process of S1830 that the relief timing has not passed, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if this is not the case, a display relief command is set based on the elapsed timing (S1831). For example, when the first relief timing has passed, a command for executing the effect of having two symbols is set as shown in FIG. 134 (a), and when the second relief timing has passed as it is, FIG. 134 (b). ), A command is set to execute the effect of having three symbols. The relief command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the display of the relief effect is executed by the display super reach B process (see FIG. 137) of the display control device 114 that has received the command. Become.

Next, the display super reach B process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the display super reach B process (S2704). The display super reach B process (S2704) in this modification displays the above-mentioned first control example, determination of whether or not there is a relief command (S2830), and a relief display display data table when there is a relief command. Since the processing (S2831) portion set in the data table buffer 233d is different and the other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, when it is determined that there is no replacement command in the processing of S2807 (S2807: No), it is determined whether or not there is a rescue command (S2830). If it is determined that there is no rescue command in the process of S2830, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a relief command in the process of S2830, the relief display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and this process is terminated.

As a result, the relief effect is executed based on the passage of the relief timing. As a result, even if the inputtable period of the frame button 22 is reduced, the case where the frame button 22 is not pressed in time can be relieved by executing the relief effect.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

An effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect based on the establishment of the start condition, a display means for displaying the effect mode of the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means, and an operation means that can be operated by the player. And an identification means for identifying a signal output by operating the operation means, and a determination means for determining whether or not a specific condition is satisfied when a specific identification result is identified by the identification means. , When it is determined by the discriminating means that the specific condition is satisfied, the effect mode executed by the effect execution means is changed to the specific effect mode until the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the start condition that is satisfied next. A game machine A1 characterized by having an effect variable setting means for setting to be variable.

According to the game machine A1, the effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect based on the establishment of the start condition, the display means for displaying the effect mode of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means, and the game. A specific condition is satisfied when an operation means that can be operated by a person, an identification means that identifies a signal output by the operation of the operation means, and a specific identification result are identified by the identification means. A predetermined condition is satisfied for the effect mode to be executed by the effect execution means based on the determination means for determining whether or not the signal is met and the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the determination means. It has an effect variable setting means that is set so as to be changed to a specific effect mode until it is done. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied, the effect mode executed by the effect execution means can be changed to a specific effect mode based on the player's operation, which improves the interest of the player. be able to.

In the game machine A1, the back display mode is determined based on the back display means for displaying the back display mode displayed on the back side of the predetermined effect displayed on the display means and the identification result by the identification means. The gaming machine A2 includes a scroll display means for scrolling and displaying in the direction of the above, and the specific condition is satisfied when a specific back symbol is displayed in the back display mode.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the back display means for displaying the back display mode displayed on the back side of the predetermined effect displayed on the display means and the identification by the identification means. Based on the result, it has a scroll display means for scrolling the back display mode in a predetermined direction, and the specific condition is satisfied when the specific back design is displayed in the back display mode. is there. Therefore, the rear display mode can be scrolled based on the operation of the player. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the game machine A2, the back display means normally scrolls and displays the back display mode in a predetermined direction, and when a predetermined identification result is determined by the identification means. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the scroll display in a predetermined direction is changed to a scroll display in a direction based on the identification result.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the back display means normally scrolls and displays the back display mode in a predetermined direction, and the identification means. When a predetermined identification result is determined, the scroll display in the predetermined direction is changed to the scroll display in the direction based on the identification result. Therefore, based on the player's operation, the scroll display is executed in a predetermined direction, and when the scroll display direction is changed, the operation may be performed again. As a result, the burden on the player for executing the scroll display can be reduced.

In any of the game machines A1 to A3, the operation means is composed of a plurality of operation units, and the plurality of operations includes a direction operation unit that indicates a scroll direction of the rear display mode, and the specific identification result. The gaming machine A4, characterized in that it is composed of at least a specific operation unit to be identified.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A1, the operation means is composed of a plurality of operation units, and the plurality of operations indicate the scroll direction of the rear display mode. It is composed of at least a directional operation unit and a specific operation unit that is identified with the specific identification result. Therefore, the scroll direction can be changed by operating the direction operation unit, and the effect can be changed by operating the specific operation unit. As a result, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

An effect mode selection for selecting an effect execution means for executing a game effect, a display means for displaying an effect mode executed by the effect execution means, and an effect mode executed by the effect execution means from a plurality of effect modes. By having an operating means that can be operated by the player in the gaming machine having the means, and operating the operating means every time a predetermined condition is satisfied as the effect mode selected by the effect mode selection means. A route effect mode in which the effect mode is changed by the player selecting one route from a plurality of routes is set, and when the route effect mode is executed, the previously executed route effect mode is used. A game machine B1 characterized in that it has an auxiliary means for assisting in selecting a route other than the selected route.

According to the game machine B1, there are a plurality of effects of the effect execution means for executing the effect of the game, the display means for displaying the effect mode executed by the effect execution means, and the effect mode executed by the effect execution means. The game machine having the effect mode selection means for selecting from the modes has an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the effect mode selected by the effect mode selection means is described every time a predetermined condition is satisfied. A route effect mode is set in which the effect mode is changed by the player selecting one route from a plurality of routes by operating the operation means, and when the route effect mode is executed, it is executed before. It has an auxiliary means for assisting in selecting a route other than the route selected in the route effect mode. As a result, when the player selects a route in the route effect mode, the player is assisted in selecting a route other than the previously selected route. As a result, it is possible to reduce the operation load of the player when selecting a route other than the previously selected route.

In the game machine B1, the determination means for executing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the determination information by the determination means on the display means, and the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating specific determination information is displayed, the effect mode selection means executes the privilege game. The game machine B2, characterized in that the route effect mode is selected based on the privilege game being executed by the means.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the judgment means for executing the judgment based on the establishment of the judgment condition and the identification information indicating the judgment information by the judgment means are dynamically displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having a dynamic display means for causing the display means and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating specific determination information is displayed on the display means. The effect mode selection means selects the route effect mode based on the privilege game being executed by the privilege game execution means. Therefore, the player can select the route effect mode during the execution of the privilege game. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the execution of the privilege game.

In the game machine B2, the effect executing means is characterized in that, during the execution of the privilege game, the display means displays the route effect mode selected by the effect mode selection means.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B2, the effect execution means causes the display means to display the route effect mode selected by the effect mode selection means during the execution of the privilege game. Is. Therefore, during the execution of the privilege game, the route effect mode based on the operation of the player is displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the execution of the privilege game.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, the route effect mode is set to the set square by passing through the set square or stopping at the set square when a plurality of set squares are set on the route. The gaming machine B4, which has a route privilege granting means for granting the privilege being granted.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects played by the game machines B1 to B3, in the route effect mode, a plurality of set squares are set on the route, and the set squares pass through or stop at the set squares. As a result, it has a route privilege granting means for granting the privilege set in the set square. Therefore, when the route effect mode is displayed, the player can be expected to be given the privilege. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the game machine B4, the route privilege granting means sets a privilege to be assisted by the auxiliary means so that the route privilege granting means can be started from the start of the next privilege game from the set square that has passed or stopped as the privilege. A game machine B5 characterized by being.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B4, the route privilege granting means can be started from the start of the next privilege game from the set square that has passed or stopped as the privilege. The privilege to be assisted by the auxiliary means is set. Therefore, at the start of the next privilege game, the player can start from the set square that has passed or stopped in the previous privilege game. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression of a continuous production from the previous privilege game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information. , The identification in a gaming machine having a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed with the identification information indicating that the lottery result is a specific lottery result. The information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings and is displayed in a combination of specific symbols so that the lottery result by the lottery means is set to indicate that the lottery result is the specific lottery result. , A reach display mode in which one symbol string is dynamically displayed among the plurality of symbol rows is displayed, and a plurality of specific symbols that are a combination indicating the specific lottery result are set and displayed. This is a symbol variable means for changing the specific symbol of the symbol string dynamically displayed in the reach display mode to a specific display mode, and the symbol variable means is changed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The gaming machine C1 is characterized by having a revariable means for changing a specific symbol to the original display mode.

According to the game machine C1, the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information can be dynamically displayed. It has a possible dynamic display means and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed with the identification information indicating that the lottery result is a specific lottery result. In the game machine, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings and is displayed in a combination of specific symbols so as to indicate that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result. , The dynamic display means displays a reach display mode in which one symbol string is dynamically displayed among the plurality of symbol rows, and is a specific symbol that is a combination showing the specific lottery result. Is displayed by setting a plurality of the above, and based on the symbol variable means for changing the specific symbol of the symbol string dynamically displayed in the reach display mode to a specific display mode and the establishment of a predetermined condition. It has a re-variable means for changing a specific symbol changed by the symbol-variable means to the original display mode. Therefore, even when there are a plurality of specific symbols that result in a specific lottery during the display of the reach display mode, the specific symbol is changed to the specific display mode by the symbol variable means. Here, the specific symbol that has been changed to the specific display mode is changed to the original display mode by the revariable means. As a result, the player only needs to pay attention to the specific display mode during the display of the reach display mode in which there are a plurality of specific symbols that result in a specific lottery result. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

The game machine C1 has an operating means that can be operated by the player, and the dynamic display means dynamically performs the specific symbol and symbols other than the specific symbol that are varied by the symbol variable means in the reach display mode. It is to be displayed, and is characterized by having a stop display means for stopping and displaying the dynamic display of the symbol string dynamically displayed in the reach display mode based on the operation of the operation means. Game machine C2.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, the dynamic display means has an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the dynamic display means is the specific one that is changed by the symbol variable means in the reach display mode. A symbol other than the symbol and its specific symbol is dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display of the symbol string dynamically displayed in the reach display mode is stopped and displayed based on the operation of the operating means. It has a stop display means. Therefore, even when there are a plurality of specific symbols that result in a specific lottery during the display of the reach display mode, the specific symbol is changed to the specific display mode by the symbol variable means. As a result, the player may pay attention to the specific variable display mode and perform the operation. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the game machine C2, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, one of the specific symbols is the reach display mode at the timing when the operation means is operated. The game machine C3 is characterized in that it is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed at a position where it can be displayed in combination with the symbol displayed stopped by.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the stop display means is described at the timing when the operation means is operated. One of the specific symbols is stopped and displayed so that it is displayed at a position where it can be displayed in combination with the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach display mode. Therefore, the symbol that is stopped and displayed based on the operation of the player and is re-variable to the original display mode by the re-variable means is displayed in combination with the symbol that is stopped in the reach display mode. As a result, the player can easily recognize whether or not the stopped-displayed symbol is a specific lottery result. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the game machines C1 to C3, the reach display mode is characterized in that the reach display mode is composed of a display mode in which two or more symbol rows are stopped and displayed and one symbol row is dynamically displayed with the same symbol. Game machine C4 to play.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C3, in the reach display mode, two or more symbol rows are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and one symbol sequence is dynamically displayed. It is composed of the display modes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In any of the game machines C1 to C4, the symbol variable means is characterized in that the plurality of specific symbols are variably displayed in the specific display mode having the same display mode. ..

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines C1 to C4, the symbol variable means causes the plurality of specific symbols to be variably displayed in the specific display mode having the same display mode. It is a thing. Therefore, even if there are a plurality of specific symbols that result in a specific lottery during the display of the reach display mode, the specific symbol is changed to the same specific display mode by the symbol variable means. As a result, the player only needs to pay attention to one specific display mode while displaying the reach display mode in which there are a plurality of specific symbols that result in a specific lottery result. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information. , The identification in the gaming machine having the privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by the identification information indicating that it is a specific lottery result. The information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings and is displayed in a combination of specific symbols so that the lottery result by the lottery means is set to indicate that the lottery result is the specific lottery result. , One of the plurality of symbol columns is displayed in a reach display mode in which one symbol string is dynamically displayed, and a specific symbol that is a combination indicating the specific lottery result is set and displayed. The dynamic display is based on the operation means that can be operated by the player and the operation means that is operated when the identification information is displayed in the reach display mode by the dynamic display means. A symbol variable means for changing the symbol of the symbol sequence, a discriminating means for discriminating the remaining period of the period displayed in the reach display mode, and a symbol by the symbol variable means within the period determined by the discriminating means. In the remaining period of the reach display mode, when it is determined by the symbol variable determination means for determining whether or not the specific symbol can be changed to the specific symbol and the symbol variable determination means cannot be changed to the specific symbol, the specific symbol D1 is a gaming machine D1 having a specific effect setting means for setting a specific effect for displaying.

According to the game machine D1, the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information can be dynamically displayed. It has a possible dynamic display means and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed with the identification information indicating that the lottery result is a specific lottery result. In the gaming machine, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings and is displayed in a combination of specific symbols so as to indicate that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result. , The dynamic display means displays in a reach display mode in which one of the plurality of symbol rows is dynamically displayed, and the specific symbol is a combination showing the specific lottery result. Is set and displayed, and the operating means that can be operated by the player and the operating means are operated when the identification information is displayed in the reach display mode by the dynamic display means. Based on the symbol variable means for varying the symbols in the dynamically displayed symbol sequence, the discriminating means for discriminating the remaining period of the period displayed in the reach display mode, and the discriminating means within the discriminant period. , The symbol variable determining means for determining whether or not the symbol can be changed to the specific symbol by the symbol variable means, and the reach display mode when it is determined by the symbol variable determining means that the symbol cannot be changed to the specific symbol. In the remaining period, it has a specific effect setting means for setting a specific effect for displaying the specific symbol. Therefore, during the execution of the reach display, the symbol can be changed to a specific symbol based on the operation of the player. Here, if the symbol cannot be changed based on the player's operation in the remaining time of the reach display during execution, a specific effect for displaying the specific symbol is set. As a result, even when there is no or few operations by the player, it is possible to set and display a specific symbol which is a combination showing a specific lottery result. As a result, in the execution of the reach display, even when there is no or few operations by the player, a specific symbol can be displayed to indicate that a specific lottery result has been obtained.

In the game machine D1, in the specific effect, after the symbol sequence dynamically displayed in the reach display mode is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the specific symbol, the stopped and displayed symbol is replaced with the specific symbol. A game machine D2 characterized in that it is composed of an effect to be displayed.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D1, the specific effect is performed after the symbol sequence dynamically displayed in the reach display mode is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the specific symbol. It is composed of an effect of replacing the stopped display symbol with a specific symbol and displaying it. Therefore, if the symbol cannot be changed based on the player's operation due to the absence or few operations of the player, first, a symbol different from the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. After that, the stopped and displayed symbol is replaced with a specific symbol. As a result, even when there is no or few operations by the player, it is possible to perform an effect with less discomfort.

In the game machine D1 or D2, when the lottery result by the lottery means is different from the specific lottery result, the symbol of the symbol string dynamically displayed in the reach display mode is specified regardless of the operation of the operation means. The game machine D3, characterized in that it has a prohibiting means for prohibiting the change to a symbol.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, when the lottery result by the lottery means is different from the specific lottery result, the symbols of the symbol sequence dynamically displayed in the reach display mode are displayed. It has a prohibiting means for prohibiting the change to the specific symbol regardless of the operation of the operating means. Therefore, even though the lottery result is not a specific lottery result, it is possible to prevent a specific symbol indicating a specific lottery result from being displayed.

A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information. , The identification in a gaming machine having a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed with the identification information indicating that the lottery result is a specific lottery result. The information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings and is displayed in a combination of specific symbols so that the lottery result by the lottery means is set to indicate that the lottery result is the specific lottery result. , One of the plurality of symbol columns is displayed in a reach display mode in which one symbol string is dynamically displayed, and a specific symbol that is a combination indicating the specific lottery result is set and displayed. The dynamic display is based on the operation means that can be operated by the player and the operation means that is operated when the identification information is displayed in the reach display mode by the dynamic display means. A symbol variable means for changing the symbols in the symbol sequence to different symbols in a predetermined order, a discriminating means for discriminating the remaining period of the period displayed in the reach display mode, and within the period discriminated by the discriminating means. , The symbol variable determining means for determining whether or not the symbol can be changed to the specific symbol by the symbol variable means, and the symbol variable determining means, when it is determined that the specific symbol cannot be changed by the symbol variable determining means, the said The gaming machine D4 is characterized by having a special symbol variable means for varying the symbol in an order in which it can be varied to a specific symbol.

According to the game machine D4, the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information can be dynamically displayed. It has a possible dynamic display means and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed with the identification information indicating that the lottery result is a specific lottery result. In the game machine, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings and is displayed in a combination of specific symbols so as to indicate that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result. , The dynamic display means displays in a reach display mode in which one of the plurality of symbol rows is dynamically displayed, and is a combination of showing the specific lottery result. Is set and displayed, and the operating means that can be operated by the player and the operating means are operated when the identification information is displayed in the reach display mode by the dynamic display means. Based on this, a symbol variable means for changing the symbols of the dynamically displayed symbol sequence into different symbols in a predetermined order, a discriminating means for discriminating the remaining period of the period displayed in the reach display mode, and a discriminating means thereof. When the symbol variable determining means for determining whether or not the symbol can be changed to the specific symbol by the symbol variable means and the symbol variable determining means determine that the specific symbol cannot be changed within the period determined by In addition, it has a special symbol variable means for varying the symbol in an order in which the specific symbol can be varied during the remaining period. Therefore, during the execution of the reach display, the symbol can be changed to a specific symbol based on the operation of the player. Here, if the symbol cannot be changed based on the player's operation in the remaining time of the reach display during execution, the symbols are changed in the order in which the specific symbol can be changed in the remaining period. As a result, even if the start of the operation by the player is delayed, the symbol can be changed to a specific symbol based on the operation of the player.

In the game machine D4, the special symbol changing means variably displays the symbols in the order in which the symbols to be changed in a plurality of orders are put together in the predetermined order changed by the symbol changing means. A game machine D5 characterized by being.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, the special symbol variable means is a collection of symbols that are variable in a plurality of orders among the predetermined orders that are variable by the symbol variable means. The symbols are variably displayed in order. Therefore, even if the start of the operation by the player is delayed, the player can easily recognize that the symbol can be changed to a specific symbol based on the operation of the player.

Examples of the member projecting from the board surface include nails, wind turbines, and through gates.

A game machine F1 in any one of the game machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, and E1 to E15, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and when the stop It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine F2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, and E1 to E15. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, and E1 to E15, the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Machine F3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the above, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
22 Frame button (part of operation means)
270 selection switch (part of operating means)
270a Upper switch (part of operating means)
270b Right switch (part of operating means)
270c down switch (part of operating means)
270d Left switch (part of operating means)
270e decision switch (part of operating means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
S3701 Identification means S3703 Discrimination means S3714 Effect variable setting means S4514 Effect execution means

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that make it easier for players to understand the reach display mode.

JP-A-2002-306719

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machines, further improvement in the interest of the game has been required .

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of evaluation criteria, in combination identification information of the plurality of symbols to indicate the judgment result by the judgment means The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information as a plurality of symbol strings for a predetermined period by the display means, and the display means, the discrimination result by the discrimination means is specified. The dynamic display means , which comprises a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the identification information is stopped and displayed by a combination of specific symbols for showing that it is the determination result of the above. dynamic 1 of symbol rows of the display the plurality of symbol columns which are allowed to dynamically display the, and reach the display setting means for setting a reach display mode other symbol columns is stopped and displayed, or the suspend display, said reach the When the display mode is displayed, the special symbol display means for displaying a plurality of special symbols different from the plurality of symbols and the symbols included in the symbol string dynamically displayed in the reach display mode are stopped and displayed. This makes it possible to select the suggestion mode display means for displaying the suggestion mode suggesting the special symbol corresponding to the symbol corresponding to the combination of the specific symbols, and one of the special symbols from the plurality of special symbols. A possible special symbol selection means, a notification means for notifying a notification mode indicating that the combination of the specific symbols is used when the special symbol corresponding to the suggestion mode is selected by the special symbol selection means, and a notification means. It has.

According to claim 1 the gaming machine, comprising: a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of evaluation criteria, display means identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination unit is displayed by a combination of a plurality of symbols When a predetermined period the identification information as a plurality of symbol columns in the display unit, a dynamic display unit capable of dynamic display, on the display unit, the discrimination result by said discrimination means is a particular judgment result When the identification information is stopped and displayed by a combination of specific symbols for indicating that, the identification information has a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player, and is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. wherein the plurality of by dynamic receive one of the symbol rows of the symbol row, and reach the display setting means for setting a reach display mode other symbol columns is stopped and displayed, or the suspend display, the reach display mode is displayed that In this case, among the special symbol display means for displaying a plurality of special symbols different from the plurality of symbols and the symbols included in the symbol string dynamically displayed in the reach display mode, the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. A suggestion mode display means for displaying a suggestion mode suggesting the special symbol corresponding to the symbol that is a combination of the symbols, and a special symbol selection capable of selecting one of the plurality of special symbols. It has means and a notification means for notifying a notification mode indicating that the combination of the specific symbols is used when the special symbol corresponding to the suggestion mode is selected by the special symbol selection means. .. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a game board and a board lower part unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a game board and a board lower part unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a game board and a board lower part unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the variable winning device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is a top view of the variable winning device, (b) is a front view of the variable winning device, and (c) is a side view of the variable winning device in the direction of arrow XVc of FIG. 15 (b). is there. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in line XVIa-XVIa of FIG. 15 (b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device after sliding the moving upper lid member from FIG. 16 (a). It is a sectional view. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the game board. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the lower board unit in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower board unit in line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. 17 (a). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the lower board unit in which the arrangement of the light irradiation unit is virtually changed from FIG. 18 (b). It is a front perspective view of the compound operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a main body member, a shielding member and a swinging member. It is a back exploded perspective view of a main body member, a shielding member, and a swinging member. (A) is a front view of the first guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of the first guide arm, and (c) is a first guide arm in the XXVc-XXVc line of FIG. 25 (a). FIG. 25 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first guide arm in the line XXVd-XXVd of FIG. 25 (a). (A) is a front view of the second guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of the second guide arm, and (c) is a second guide arm in the XXVIc-XXVIc line of FIG. 26 (a). (D) is a cross-sectional view of the second guide arm in the line XXVId-XXVid of FIG. 26 (a). (A) and (b) are front views of the first guide arm, the second guide arm, and the wiring. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. FIG. 8 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit in the line XXXIV-XXXIV of FIG. 28. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit in the XXXV-XXXV line of FIG. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit in line XXXVII-XXXVII of FIG. It is a front perspective view of the rocking operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a rocking operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a rocking operation unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a swinging operation unit. (A) is a front view of the rocking operation unit, and (b) is a side view of the rocking operation unit in the direction of arrow XXXIIb of FIG. 42 (a). It is a front view of the rocking operation unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a drive side arm member, a driven side arm member and a first bridge member in the XXXXIVa-XXXXIVa line of FIG. 43, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the drive side arm in the XXXXIVb-XXXIVb line of FIG. 43. It is sectional drawing of the member, the driven side arm member, and the 2nd bridge member. (A) is a partial side view of the swinging operation unit in the direction of arrow XXXVa in FIG. 43, and (b) and (c) show the driven side arm member flexing to the front side from the state of FIG. 45 (a). It is a partial side view of the rocking operation unit which showed the state of squeezing in time series. It is sectional drawing of the drive side arm member and the driven side arm member in the XXXXIV-XXXXIV line of FIG. 43. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the rocking operation unit in the XXXXV-XXXXV line of FIG. 43. It is a front view of the drive side arm member and the driven side arm member. It is a front view of the drive side arm member and the driven side arm member. It is a front view of the drive side arm member and the driven side arm member. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the swinging operation unit in the second embodiment. (A) to (c) are front views of the rocking operation unit according to the third embodiment, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the rocking operation unit on the Ld-Ld line of FIG. 52 (b). It is a front view of the composite operation unit in 4th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the composite operation unit. It is a rear view of the composite operation unit in 5th Embodiment. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of the composite operation unit. It is a partial front view of the composite operation unit in the sixth embodiment. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the composite operation unit. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the swinging operation unit in the seventh embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in 8th Embodiment. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board in the LXI-LXI line of FIG. (A) is a front view of the first guide arm in the ninth embodiment, (b) is a bottom view of the first guide arm, and (c) is a perspective view of a detachable front locking member. .. (A) is a front view of the second guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of the second guide arm, and (c) is a second guide arm on the LXIIIc-LXIIIc line of FIG. 63 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of. (A) and (b) are front views of the first guide arm and the second guide arm of the wiring guide arm, and (c) is the first of the wiring guide arm in the LXIVc-LXIVc line of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the guide arm and the 2nd guide arm. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen of the super background notice, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen when the screen of (a) is scrolled horizontally in the super background notice. .. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating a screen on which a special image is displayed in the super background notice, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating a screen suggesting a transition to the background inside the door in the super background notice. Is. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating a screen in which a mode of loosening is displayed in Super Reach A, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating a mode screen of double reach in Super Reach A. .. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in Super Reach A, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in Super Reach A. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in Super Reach A, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in Super Reach A. It is a schematic diagram which illustrated the screen at the time of a big hit in Super Reach A. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in the jackpot effect, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in the jackpot effect. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in the jackpot effect, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in the jackpot effect. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in the jackpot effect, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in the jackpot effect. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the timing of the effect executed in Super Reach B, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the timing of the effect executed in Super Reach B. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the timing of the effect executed in Super Reach B, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the timing of the effect executed in Super Reach B. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in Super Reach B, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in Super Reach B. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in Super Reach B, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in Super Reach B. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of RAM in a main control device. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first hit random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value of the special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table, and (d) is a second hit random number counter C4 and a hit determination value of a normal symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence relationship of. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table provided in the ROM in the main controller, and (b) shows the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of a big hit. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of disconnection (normal), and (d) is a schematic diagram at the time of disconnection. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type in (probability variation). (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of ROM in an audio lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of RAM in an audio lamp control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the RAM in the display control device. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the data table storage area provided in the RAM in the display control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the mass setting table storage area provided in the RAM in the display control device, and (b) is a normal mass setting provided in the mass setting table storage area. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the table schematically, and (c) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the continuous mass setting table provided in the mass setting table storage area schematically. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface B. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the SW input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the operation process at the time of super background executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot operation process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the operation process at the time of super reach B executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the super background effect processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the reach-related command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the super reach B process for display which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot-related command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the map setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the background image change command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed SW-related command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the SW process in super background executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the big hit middle SW process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a counter executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is an update process. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the timing of the effect executed in the super reach B in the modified example of the first control example, and (b) is executed in the super reach B in the modified example of the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which illustrated the timing of the production. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the screen displayed in Super Reach B in the modified example of the first control example, and (b) is the screen displayed in Super Reach B in the modified example of the first control example. Is a schematic diagram illustrating. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the data table storage area provided in the RAM in the display control device in the modification of the 1st control example. This is a super reach B operation process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the super reach B process for display which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the modification of the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the frame button and the selection switch schematically.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 50, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength (launching intensity) corresponding to the above, and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 330, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63 and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like. The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable winning device 330 are formed in the board surface lower unit 300 fitted into the receiving opening 60a of the base plate 60 described later.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened more than in the normal state. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one time. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while synchronizing the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol string is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol string, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal period. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many chances that the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. (See FIG. 4), a big hit lottery is made, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. (See FIG. 4), a big hit lottery is made, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). (State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" The symbol "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a symmetrical configuration of the game board 13, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 640 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done. The details of the variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) that opens and closes the specific winning opening 65a will be described later, but briefly, the moving upper lid member 332 of the variable winning device 330 slides to move the specific winning opening 65a. It is opened and closed.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 314. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 314. Out ports 314 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 has a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and a selection switch 270 (upper switch 270a, right switch 270b, lower switch 270c). , Left switch 270d), decision switch 270e, etc. are connected respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor 433,462,551 and a solenoid 474.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the like is performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9. First, the storage structure of the units 400 and 500 in the rear case 210 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200 with the disassembled operation unit 200 viewed from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, one side (front side of the paper in FIG. 6) of the operation unit 200 is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A back case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The back case 210 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 211a in the center of the bottom wall portion 211. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

The left and right and upper outer wall portions 212 include an intermediate wall portion 212a formed in parallel with the bottom wall portion 211 in the middle in the front-rear direction, and a fastening portion 212b to which a member can be fastened to the intermediate wall portion 212a. On the front side of the intermediate wall portion 212a, the outer wall portion 212 extends from the opposite end of the opening 211a of the intermediate wall portion 212a, and on the back side of the intermediate wall portion 212a, the outer wall portion 212 is the intermediate wall portion. It extends from the end of the 212a on the side close to the opening 211a.

A holding and fixing portion 446 and a fixing plate 461 are fastened and fixed to the fastening portions 212b formed on the left and right intermediate wall portions 212a, and a guide plate 424 is attached to the fastening portion 212b formed on the upper intermediate wall portion 212a. Is fastened and fixed.

Here, the fixing plate 461 is a member that supports the drive motor 462 that generates a driving force that drives the composite operation unit 400, and the holding and fixing portion 446 is a member that fixes one end of the urging spring 445, and is a guide plate 424. Is a member that guides the movement of the connecting member 423 (see FIG. 20) of the composite operation unit 400. That is, all of them are not the production parts that are directly visible to the player, but the parts that have an auxiliary role of the production, such as generating the driving force for the operation of the composite operation unit 400 and guiding the operation. ..

By arranging the fixing plate 461 having such a role, the holding fixing portion 446, and the guide plate 424 closer to the front side of the back case 210, a space closer to the rear side of the back case 210 can be opened. By using this vacant space near the rear side as a space for retracting a portion actually visible to the player such as the shielding member 420, the constituent members of the composite operation unit 400 can be laminated in the front-rear direction, and the opening 211a can be stacked. The width required to retract the combined operation unit 400 to the outside of the can be narrowed. Therefore, the forming width of the bottom plate portion 211 can be narrowed. As a result, the opening 211a can be expanded, and the formation range of the third symbol display device 81 can be expanded.

In the operation unit 200, the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 are respectively housed in the internal space of the rear case 210, and these are configured as one unit.

Specifically, the composite operation unit 400 is arranged on the left, right, left and right and upper part of the area formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210, and the swing operation unit 500 is inside the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210. It is arranged at the bottom of the area formed by the side surface (see FIG. 5).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9, the outline of the operation mode of the combined operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 7 to 9, FIGS. 5 and 6 will be referred to as appropriate.

7 to 9 are front views of the operating unit 200. In FIG. 7, the main body member 410 of the composite operation unit 400 is arranged at the overhang position, in FIG. 8, the moving member 540 of the swing operation unit 500 is arranged at the overhang position, and in FIG. 9, The state in which the main body member 410 of the composite operation unit 400 and the moving member 540 of the swing operation unit 500 are arranged at the overhanging positions is shown.

As shown in FIG. 7, the composite operation unit 400 operates the main body member 410 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhanging position shown in FIG. That is, at the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the main body member 410 is retracted above the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 7, the main body member 410 is lowered, and the main body member 410 is arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). .. As will be described later, the composite operation unit 400 is a unit in which the shielding member 420 performs two types of operations (sliding operation and rocking operation) in different movement modes when the main body member 410 slides and moves.

As shown in FIG. 8, the swing operation unit 500 operates the moving member 540 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhanging position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the moving member 540 is retracted below the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 8, the moving member 540 is raised, and the moving member 540 is arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). .. A pair of left and right moving members 540 are formed, and at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of left and right moving members 540 are united and visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 9, both the combined operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 can be arranged at the overhanging position. In this case, the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 can be visually recognized as an integral decorative member (partially overlapped in a front view), and a decorative member having a width equal to or larger than the outer width of the opening 211a is formed. be able to. Thereby, the effect of the combined operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 can be improved. Further, by projecting the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 toward the center of the opening 211a in different directions (descending, ascending), for example, as compared with the case where all the movable members are projected in the same direction. The distance that each member moves from the retracted position to the overhanging position can be shortened. As a result, when the moving speeds of the combined operation unit 400 and the swinging operation unit 500 are the same, the period of movement from the retracted position to the overhanging position can be shortened.

Next, the board surface lower unit 300 arranged in the lower part of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 18. 10 and 11 are front exploded perspective views of the game board 13 and the lower board unit 300, and FIG. 12 is a rear exploded perspective view of the game board 13 and the lower board unit 300. Note that FIG. 10 shows a state in which only the front plate member 320 is disassembled from the game plate 13, and in FIGS. 11 and 12, the front unit 310 and the variable winning device 330 of the board surface lower unit 300 are further played from FIG. It is disassembled from the board 13. Further, in order to facilitate understanding, the game board 13 is shown in a simplified manner.

As shown in FIG. 10, a specific winning opening 65a is formed along the lower edge of the inner rail 61. Since the lower edge of the inner rail 61 is formed from a downwardly convex curved shape, the arrangement position of the specific winning opening 65a is set as compared with the case where the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a is formed by a straight line along the left-right direction. Can be lowered downwards. The outer edge of the specific winning opening 65a has an upper side formed by a moving upper lid member 332, a lower side formed by a lower edge of an inner rail 61, and left and right sides formed by left and right wall portions of an opening upper portion 313. ..

As will be described later, the specific winning opening 65a can be switched between the closed state and the open state by sliding the moving upper lid member 332 back and forth, and the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is, for example, 15 at the maximum. It can be repeated once (15 rounds).

As shown in FIG. 11, the board surface lower unit 300 is a unit constituting an out port 314 from which a ball is discharged and a specific winning opening 65a, and is a receiving receiving hole formed in the lower part of the game board 13 in the front-rear direction. The front unit 310 that is fitted into the opening 60a from the front side and fastened and fixed, the front plate member 320 that is fastened and fixed to the front unit 310 from the front side and a ball path is formed on the back side, and the receiving opening 60a. It mainly includes a variable winning device 330 including a moving upper lid member 332 that is fitted from the back side, fastened and fixed, and changes the flow direction of the ball.

The front unit 310 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion 311 formed so that a ball can flow down on the front side, and an electric accessory 640a in which a pair of members are opened and closed left and right at the center of the front side of the main body plate portion 311. , A plate-shaped inclined plate portion 312 projecting to the front side at the upper left and right sides of the main body plate portion 311 and an opening upper portion 313 recessed upward from the lower bottom portion of the main body plate portion 311 and the opening upper side thereof. A pair of out ports 314, which are bored in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides of the portion 313 and the balls are discharged out of the game area, are mainly provided.

The main body plate portion 311 is bored in the front-rear direction at a position surrounded by a pair of members of the first winning opening lower side 311a formed above the electric accessory 640a and forming the lower side of the first winning opening 64 and the electric accessory 640a. The second winning opening 640 to be provided, the light irradiation device 311b arranged below the second winning opening 640 and illuminating the front side of the second winning opening 640, and the rib-shaped front side on the outside of the out opening 314. It is mainly provided with a ball flow rib 311c that is convexly provided.

The light irradiation device 311b is accommodated in the accommodating recess 323a (see FIG. 12) of the front plate member 320, and is directed upward (the second winning opening 640 side) due to the ball winning in the second winning opening 640. It is an LED member that is irradiated with light.

The ball sink rib 311c adjusts the flow direction of the ball rolling along the inner rail 61, and the details will be described later in FIG.

The inclined plate portion 312 is formed so that a sphere can roll on the upper side surface, is arranged above the left and right of the electric accessory 640a, and is inclined downward as it approaches the electric accessory 640a. As a result, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state where it falls to the left or right, the ball that rolls down the inclined plate portion 312 can be made to win the second winning opening 640 with high probability. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state in which it stands up, the ball that rolls on the inclined plate portion 312 and flows down can be dropped to the front side of the opening upper portion 313 with high probability.

The upper side portion 313 of the opening is formed so as to be inclined upward toward the center of the left and right sides. Here, by setting the vertical width of the central portion in the left-right direction of the specific winning opening 65a to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere, the vertical width of the left and right wall portions of the opening upper portion 313 (corresponding to the left and right wall portions of the specific winning opening 65a). ) Can be set to a length equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere (see FIG. 17). In this case, it is difficult to win the ball from the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a, but the ball is flowed down to the central portion of the game board 13 along the inner rail 61, and the central portion in the left-right direction of the specific winning opening 65a. Since it is possible to win a prize from, the game can be continued.

Here, when the upper and lower side surfaces of the specific winning opening 65a are parallel surfaces (planes extending in the left-right direction), until the straight line intersecting the inner rail 61 becomes the same as the length of the lower side surface of the specific winning opening 65a. It is necessary to raise the specific winning opening 65a from the lower edge of the inner rail 61 and arrange it. Therefore, the position of the specific winning opening 65a becomes high.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the lower side surface of the specific winning opening 65a is curved like the lower side surface of the inner rail 61, it is not necessary to raise the specific winning opening 65a and the specific winning opening 65a is placed in a low position. Can be placed in.

Further, since the upper side surface of the specific winning opening 65a is inclined downward as it approaches the left and right ends, the ball to the specific winning opening 65a is compared with the case where the upper side surface is formed by a plane extending in the left-right direction. The placement of the road nails that guide the vehicle can be lowered. As a result, the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered.

The out openings 314 are formed in pairs on the left and right sides of the opening upper portion 313, and the lower side of the out opening 314 is arranged below and the upper side of the out opening 314 is arranged above the left and right ends of the opening upper portion 313. To. That is, the opening upper portion 313 is formed below the out opening 314. As a result, the arrangement of the variable winning device 330, which will be described later, can be lowered, and the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered. Even with such an arrangement, in the present embodiment, the sphere is flowed down the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 which has an upper side surface having substantially the same shape as the shape of the opening upper portion 313 and is slid and moved in the front-rear direction. Is discharged to the out port 314 (see FIG. 17), so that the game can be continued.

The front plate member 320 is a plate-shaped member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and is arranged on the front side of the front side unit 310 and is formed so that a sphere can flow down between the front plate member 320 and the main body plate portion 311. The plate-shaped main body plate portion 321 and the first winning opening front portion 322 which is arranged at the upper end of the main body plate portion 321 and guides the ball to the lower side 311a of the first winning opening, and is arranged below the electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory lower support portion 323 is provided, the out opening lower plate 324 arranged along the lower side surface of the out opening 314, and the main body plate portion 321 projecting from the main body plate portion 321 along the lower edge of the inner rail 61. It mainly includes a ball feed unit 325.

The main body plate portion 321 includes a ball sink rib 321a that is convexly provided on the back surface side in a rib shape on the outside of the out port lower plate 324. The ball sink rib 321a adjusts the flow direction of the ball rolling along the inner rail 61, and the details thereof will be described later in FIG.

The electric accessory lower support portion 323 includes a storage recess 323a which is a horizontally long recess, and the light irradiation device 311b is housed in the storage recess 323a.

The out port lower plate 324 is provided with thin ribs extending in the front-rear direction on the upper side surface in the left-right direction. Further, the out port lower plate 324 includes a step portion 324a projecting upward at the left and right inner end portions. The unevenness formed on the upper side surface of the out port lower plate 324 can decelerate the flowing ball. Further, the ribs formed on the out port lower plate 324 are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back surface side. As a result, the speed at which the flowing ball is discharged to the out port 314 can be improved.

Since the inclined plate portion 312 described above is formed directly above the out opening lower plate 324 (see FIG. 17), a ball that falls after rolling the inclined plate portion 312 is directed toward the out opening lower plate 324. It is suppressed from falling. That is, the ball that falls after rolling the inclined plate portion 312 falls inside the pair of out-port lower plates 324 in the left-right direction (position where the moving upper lid member 332 is arranged), or falls on the out-port lower plate 324. It either falls to the outer end portion (near the ball sink rib 321a and at the boundary position between the rib formation range and the rail through which the ball flows). Both of these are outside the rib formation range. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling onto the out-mouth lower plate 324 from a high place, and it is possible to improve the durability of the out-mouth lower plate 324.

The step portion 324a is a step formed between the out opening 314 and the specific winning opening 65a, and the ball flowing down from the left-right direction and flowing down the upper side surface of the out opening lower plate 324 exceeds the step portion 324a. It is prevented from flowing down to the central portion in the left-right direction (see FIG. 17). That is, the ball that flows down from the left-right direction and flows down the upper side surface of the out port lower plate 324 is exclusively guided to the out port 314.

The ball feeding portion 325 mainly includes a back surface side surface 325a formed on the back surface side, and left and right side surface 325b connected to the back surface side side surface 325a and formed on the left and right sides.

The rear side surface 325a is inclined downward toward the back side, and the left and right side surfaces 325b are inclined toward the center toward the back side. As a result, the flow direction of the ball that has reached the ball feed portion 325 can be directed to the back side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from staying in front of the specific winning opening 65a and prevent so-called over winning.

Next, the variable winning device 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 330, FIG. 14 is a rear exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 330, and FIG. 15A is a top view of the variable winning device 330. 15 (b) is a front view of the variable winning device 330, and FIG. 15 (c) is a side view of the variable winning device 330 in the direction of arrow XVc of FIG. 15 (b).

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the variable winning device 330 includes a main body member 331 forming a skeleton and a movable upper lid member 332 which is inserted into the main body member 331 from the front and is formed so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. A solenoid 333 that generates a driving force for sliding the moving upper lid member 332 and a lever member 334b that is swung by the solenoid 333 are accommodated and a rear lid member 334 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 331. And mainly prepare.

The main body member 331 is arranged below the deformed through hole 331a through which the moving upper lid member 332 is inserted, the lower passage 331b through which the ball won in the specific winning opening 65a flows down, and the lower passage 331b, and is directed upward. It mainly includes a light irradiation device 331c that irradiates light with light, and a back side accommodating portion 331d that is a recess formed on the back side toward the front side and accommodates a solenoid 333, a lever member 334b, and the like. ..

As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, the modified through hole 331a is a through hole formed along the shape of the moving upper lid member 332, and is a front portion accommodating the front side plate portion 332a. It mainly includes an opening 331a1 and a rear opening 331a2 for accommodating the rear plate portion 332b.

The front opening 331a1 is a recess formed in a pentagonal shape in which the lower side is horizontally extended in a front view, the upper side is ascended and inclined toward the center, and the left and right side sides are extended vertically.

The rear opening 331a2 is an opening formed by cutting off the left and right portions of the front opening 331a1 from the central portion on the back surface side of the front opening 331a1. That is, the outer shapes of the lower and upper sides of the rear opening 331a2 and the outer shapes of the lower and upper sides of the front opening 331a do not form steps in the front-rear direction, but are formed at surface positions. As a result, the moving upper lid member 332 can be smoothly guided.

The lower passage 331b is a passage formed in pairs on the left and right so that the sphere can pass through (see FIG. 18A), and is formed so as to project downward from the lower edge of the inner rail 61. A sensor S for detecting the passage of the sensor S is arranged (see FIG. 15B).

The light irradiation device 331c is a device that illuminates the lower passage 331b, the plate-shaped portion 332a1, and the like with light to produce an effect, and is arranged below the inner rail 61 (lower part of the receiving opening 60a). As a result, the devices required for the light irradiation device 331c can be arranged below the inner rail 61, so that a space on the back side of the game board 13 can be secured, and the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. FIG. The lower edge (see 2) can be lowered downward.

The light irradiation device 331c includes a light irradiation unit 331c1 that irradiates light. The light irradiation unit 331c1 is formed in pairs on the left and right directly below the lower passage 331b, and irradiates light upward.

The rear side accommodating portion 331d communicates with the front opening 331a1 with the rear opening 331a2 interposed therebetween.

The moving upper lid member 332 is a long member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a front side plate portion 332a accommodated in the front opening 331a1 and a rear side plate portion 332b accommodated in the rear opening 331a2. A central rib 332c projecting downward along the central axis of the front plate portion 332a and the rear plate portion 332b, and a connecting hole 332d bored in the rear end of the rear plate portion 332b in the vertical direction. Mainly prepare.

The front plate portion 332a is formed in a plate-shaped portion 332a1 formed in a manner of ascending and tilting toward the central portion in the left-right direction along the shape of the upper side of the front opening portion 331a1, and the plate-shaped portion 332a1 is bored in the vertical direction. A lightening hole 332a2 and a guide rib 332a3 extending downward and extending in the front-rear direction at the left-right end of the plate-shaped portion 332a1 are mainly provided.

The plate-shaped portion 332a1 includes a front inclined side surface 332a1f which is formed so as to be inclined toward the back surface side toward the lower side (see FIG. 16) and is formed so as to be recessed toward the back surface side toward the central portion in the left-right direction. Since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed so as to be recessed toward the back side toward the central portion in the left-right direction, the ball can flow toward the center side when the ball is sandwiched between the front plate member 320 and the front inclined side surface 332a1f. , It is possible to prevent the ball from interfering with the sliding operation of the moving upper lid member 332.

Since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed as a portion that reflects light as described later, in order to effectively reflect the light, a metal film may be formed on the front inclined side surface 332a1f or mirror-finished. You may. In this embodiment, a tape that reflects light is attached.

The guide rib 332a3 is formed along the left and right side surfaces of the front opening 331a1 in the assembled state (see FIG. 15), and is in contact with the lower side surface of the front opening 331a1. As a result, it is possible to suppress a displacement in the left-right direction when the moving upper lid member 332 is slid and moved.

The central rib 332c is formed at the bent portion of the front side plate portion 332a formed by bending the plate shape. As a result, the rigidity of the front plate portion 332a can be improved. Further, when the moving upper lid member 332 is slid forward (when the moving upper lid member 332 of the variable winning device 330 is in the retracted state), it is fastened to the back side of the opening upper portion 313. As a result, it is possible to prevent the central rib 332c and the ball from colliding with each other and causing the moving upper lid member 332 to malfunction.

The connecting hole 332d is a through hole through which the connecting portion 334b4 of the lever member 334b is inserted and the displacement due to the swing of the lever member 334b is transmitted to the moving upper lid member 332 (see FIG. 16).

The solenoid 333 mainly includes a main body 333a that serves as a drive source, and a hook-shaped hook-shaped member 333b that is arranged below the main body 333a and is moved up and down below the lever member 334b.

The rear lid member 334 mainly includes a plate-shaped main body portion 334a and a lever member 334b which is pivotally supported by the main body portion 334a and whose tip is formed so as to be movable in the front-rear direction.

The lever member 334b includes a main body portion 334b1 extending in the vertical direction, a pair of shaft portions 334b2 projecting in a columnar shape in both left and right directions at the lower end portion of the main body portion 334b1 and pivotally supported by the main body portion 334a. At a lower claw portion 334b3 that extends below the main body portion 334b1 at a substantially intermediate position of the pair of shaft portions 334b2 and is formed so as to accommodate a hook-shaped member 333b between the main body portion 334b1 and the upper end portion of the main body portion 334b1. It mainly includes a connecting portion 334b4 formed by bulging into a columnar shape.

Next, the sliding movement of the moving upper lid member 332 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 330 in the XVIa-XVIa line of FIG. 15 (b), and FIG. 16 (b) is a slide movement of the moving upper lid member 332 from the state of FIG. 16 (a). It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus 330 after making it. In addition, FIG. 16A shows a retracted state in which the moving upper lid member 332 is arranged rearward, and FIG. 16B shows an overhanging state in which the moving upper lid member 332 is arranged in the front, and light. In order to facilitate understanding of the path E1 of the above, the illustration of the central rib 332c is partially omitted. Further, in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the inner rail 61 and the front plate member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2) are virtually illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 16A, when the moving upper lid member 332 forms the retracted state, the hook-shaped member 333b is arranged upward and the lever member 334b is tilted backward. In this state, the ball can flow down in front of the variable winning device 330, that is, the ball can win a prize (open state) in the specific winning opening 65a (see FIGS. 10 and 17).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the moving upper lid member 332 forms an overhanging state, the hook-shaped member 333b is pressed downward so that the lever member 334b is tilted forward about the shaft portion 334b2 and the back surface. The moving upper lid member 332 is slid and moved to the front side while being abutted against the side surface of the side accommodating portion 331b. In this state, the ball cannot win a prize (closed state) in the specific winning opening 65a (see FIGS. 10 and 17).

In this case, the rear side surface of the lower end portion of the hook-shaped member 333b is brought into contact with the end portion of the lower claw portion 334b3 of the lever member 334b in the front-rear direction, so that the swing of the lever member 334b is mechanically restricted. (The hook-shaped member 333b is arranged in the moving direction of the lower claw portion 334b3, and the moving direction of the lower claw portion 334b3 and the moving direction of the hook-shaped member 333b are orthogonal to each other). Therefore, the driving force of the solenoid 333 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the swing of the lever member 334b is stopped by the driving force of the solenoid 333.

Here, the path of the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 331c will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 16A, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state, the light emitted upward from the light irradiation unit 331c1 reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the plate-shaped portion 332a1 along the path E1. To do. At this time, since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed so as to be inclined toward the back side toward the downward side, the light irradiated from below and reaching the front side inclined side surface 332a1f is reflected toward the front (player side). In this case, the player can visually recognize the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the moving upper lid member 332 as if it is emitting light. Further, since the light reflected by the front inclined side surface 332a1f is projected into the projection range E0 of the front plate member 320, the front plate member 320 can be attracted attention. Thereby, the directing ability of the moving upper lid member 332 and the front plate member 320 can be improved.

Here, when an LED or the like is arranged on the moving upper lid member 332 to cause the moving upper lid member 332 to emit light, the moving upper lid member 332 may become large. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the LED is not arranged on the moving upper lid member 332, the ability of the moving upper lid member 332 as an effect portion is improved while suppressing the increase in size of the moving upper lid member 332. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 16B, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the overhanging state, the light is irradiated upward from the light irradiation unit 331c1 along the path E2, and the light directed to the front inclined side surface 332a1f is the inner rail 61. It does not reach the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the plate-shaped portion 332a1 because it is shielded by. In this case, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 along the path E1 reaches the intermediate position of the plate-shaped portion 332a1 of the front side plate portion 332a and only transmits as it is, so that the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320 Is darkly visible to the player.

That is, depending on whether the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state or the overhanging state, whether or not the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f changes, and the front plate Whether or not the light projection range E0 of the member 320 is brightly visible changes. Therefore, by checking the brightness state of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the light projection range E0 of the front plate member 320, it is possible to confirm whether or not the ball can be won in the specific winning opening 65a.

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, since the moving upper lid member 332 slides back and forth, it is difficult to grasp the change in the state of the moving upper lid member 332 from the front view (FIGS. 17A and 17B). ), It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a ball can be won in the specific winning opening 65a by changing the brightness of the light projection range E0.

Here, the moving upper lid member 332 has an operation necessary for forming a closed state that prevents the ball from passing through the specific winning opening 65a and an open state that allows the ball to pass through the specific winning opening 65a ( The state of brightness in the light projection range E0 is changed only by moving it back and forth. In other words, since the state of the light projection range E0 is changed only by the operation required for the moving upper lid member 332 to continue the game, no additional mechanism is required. That is, the moving upper lid member 332 can be used for both the purpose of switching whether or not the ball can pass through the specific winning opening 65a and the purpose of producing the effect by the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1.

By crossing the path E1 when the sphere passes through the lower passage 331b, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c may be reflected by the sphere to produce an effect. In this case, the vicinity of the inner rail 61 (below the light projection range E0 in FIGS. 16A and 17B) can be brightly illuminated in front view.

With reference to FIG. 17, the flow of the sphere will be described when the moving upper lid member 332 forms the overhanging state and when the moving upper lid member 332 forms the retracted state. 17 (a) and 17 (b) are partial front views of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG. 17A, the case where the moving upper lid member 332 forms the overhanging state (see FIG. 16B) is shown, and in FIG. 17B, the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state (FIG. 16). The case of forming (see (a)) is illustrated, and in FIGS. 17 (a) and 17 (b), the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320 is illustrated by an imaginary line. In addition, in FIGS. 17A and 17B, whether or not the moving upper lid member 332 is overhanging is shown by the presence or absence of shading. That is, in FIGS. 17 (a) and 17 (b), the portion where the shading is formed is in contact with the front plate member 320 or blocks the passage of the sphere from the front plate member 320. It is a part close to the member 320.

In the state shown in FIG. 17A, the ball falling on the path C2 flows down along the upper side surface of the moving upper lid member 332 and is discharged to the out port 314. In this case, the weight of the ball may cause the moving upper lid member 332 to fall down, and when the left and right ends of the moving upper lid member 332 are moved below the step portion 324a, the ball is discharged to the out port 314. It becomes impossible and interferes with the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the moving upper lid member 332 has a length several times as long as the length overhanging the front side of the deformed through hole 331a (about four times as long, see FIG. 16B). It is housed in the deformed through hole 331a and is formed so as to be in contact with the side surface of the deformed through hole 331a in the vertical direction over the front-rear direction of the variable winning device 330. Therefore, by reducing the clearance between the moving upper lid member 332 and the deformed through hole 331a, it is possible to prevent the moving upper lid member 332 from falling down due to the weight of the ball colliding with the moving upper lid member 332. As a result, the left and right end portions of the moving upper lid member 332 can be formed at the surface position with the step portion 324a, and the road nail to the specific winning opening 65a can be lowered downward, so that the lower part of the third symbol display device 81 can be formed. The rim can be lowered downwards.

As shown in FIG. 17B, when the moving upper lid member 332 forms a retracted state, the ball can flow down toward the specific winning opening 65a. At this time, the ball that rolls on the path C1 from the left and right along the inner rail 61 collides with the step portion 324a and is discharged to the out port 314, so that the ball falls on the path C2 from above toward the specific winning opening 65a. Rolls on the inner rail 61 and reaches the specific winning opening 65a.

Here, in the present embodiment, the vertical width of the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a is formed to be equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere. That is, the vertical distance from the inner rail 61 at the left and right ends of the moving upper lid member 332 is formed to be equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the height of the step portion 324a from the inner rail 61 can be lowered, and the arrangement of the out port 314 to which the ball falling from the step portion 324a reaches can also be lowered.

Further, in this case, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter from the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a (in addition, in the present embodiment, the entry of the ball is blocked by the base plate 60). However, since the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a is formed along the inner rail 61, the ball flowing down to the front side of the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a rolls toward the center of the game area along the inner rail 61 due to gravity. It is moved and enters the specific winning opening 65a from there. Since the lower edge of the inner rail 61 is formed so as to be inclined rearward (see FIG. 16), the ball can smoothly enter the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 17).

As a result, the moving upper lid member 332 forming the upper side of the specific winning opening 65a is separated upward from the inner rail 61 by the diameter of the sphere or more at least near the center of the game area (near where the inner rail 61 is arranged at the lowest position). Therefore, the arrangement position of the moving upper lid member 332 can be lowered downward. Therefore, the arrangement position of the variable winning device 330 can be lowered as compared with the case where the inner rail 61 needs to be separated upward from the inner rail 61 by a diameter larger than the diameter of the sphere at a position other than the vicinity of the center of the inner rail 61. As a result, a space on the back side of the game board 13 can be secured, and the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) can be lowered downward.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, it will be described that the light is collected by the functions of the ball sink ribs 311c and 321a and the ball feed portion 325 and the front inclined side surface 332a1f. 18 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower board unit 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (b), and FIG. 18 (b) is a lower board unit 300 in line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. 17 (a). 18 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the board surface lower unit 300 in which the arrangement of the light irradiation unit 331c1 is virtually changed from FIG. 18 (b).

In FIG. 18A, the rolling path of the sphere is described by paths C1a, C1b, and C2a, and the moving upper lid member 332 in the retracted state is illustrated by an imaginary line. The moving upper lid member 332 is located on the front side (upper side of FIG. 17B) with respect to the cross section of FIG. 18A and is not actually visible, but for convenience of explanation, it is viewed in the vertical direction (paper surface of FIG. 18). It is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 18 (a) in a state where the positions (vertical view) match. Further, in FIGS. 18 (b) and 18 (c), three spheres flowing down the lower passage 331b are virtually illustrated.

The path of the ball that is rolled from the left-right direction along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 11) and discharged to the out port 314 will be described. As shown in FIG. 18A, the sphere that rolls from the left-right direction toward the center of FIG. 18A abuts on at least one of the ball sink rib 311c or the ball sink rib 321a. That is, the ball that rolls while contacting the main body plate portion 311 of the front unit 310 abuts on the ball sink rib 311c, and the ball that rolls while contacting the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320 is a ball sink rib. It comes into contact with 321a.

Here, when the ball comes into contact with the ball sink rib 311c, the velocity direction of the ball faces in the direction along the path C1a, and then the ball comes into contact with the ball sink rib 321a. Therefore, regardless of whether the ball rolls while contacting the main body plate portion 311 of the front unit 310 or while contacting the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320, the rolling ball is lengthened. It can be brought into contact with the rib 321a.

By bringing the ball rolling along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 11) into contact with the ball flow rib 321a, the velocity direction of the ball can be directed in the direction along the path C1b. In this case, the velocity of the ball can be directed to the back side (upper side in FIG. 18A) before the ball is arranged on the front side of the out port 314. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from when the ball is arranged on the front side of the out port 314 until the ball is discharged from the game area, and it is possible to prevent the ball from staying on the front side of the out port 314. At the same time, the opening width of the out port 314 can be suppressed. As a result, when the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 10) and the out opening 314 are arranged side by side, the arrangement of the specific winning opening 65a can be lowered below the game area.

A case where the spheres fall between the stepped portions 324a arranged in parallel on the left and right sides will be described. In this case, the ball that has fallen between the step portions 324a rolls toward the center in the left-right direction, and the ball comes into contact with the left-right side surface 325b of the ball feed portion 325, so that the velocity direction of the sphere is along the path C2a. Change. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from staying on the front side of the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 10), so that over-winning can be suppressed.

When the sphere flows down along the lower passage 331b and crosses the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the sphere shields the light so that the light does not reach the front inclined side surface 332a1f. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not the ball has won the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 17) depending on whether the light projection range E0 of the front inclined side surface 332a1f or the front plate member 320 is visually recognized brightly or darkly. it can.

As a result, as in the present embodiment, the front plate member 320 formed of a light-transmitting resin material is arranged in front of the specific winning opening 65a, and the inside of the specific winning opening 65a is difficult to see. Also, it can be confirmed that the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a due to the change in the brightness of the light projection range E0. Therefore, it is not necessary to remove the specific winning opening 65a from diagonally above in order to confirm that the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, and the burden on the player can be eased.

In the present embodiment, the irradiation direction of the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 and the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b intersect at an angle close to a right angle (see FIG. 18B). Therefore, the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a as compared with the case where the ball flows down in the direction of the light traveling (see FIG. 18C) and the case where the ball flows down along the light irradiation direction. The period during which the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b blocks the light can be shortened. In other words, it is possible to prolong the period during which the light projection range E0 of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320 is brightly visible, and it is possible to secure the directing ability of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320.

As shown in FIG. 18B, when the light path E1 and the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b intersect (cross) at an angle close to a right angle, the light path E1 is blocked by the sphere. Later, around the point where the sphere passes the front end of the lower passage 331b (right side of FIG. 18B), the light is not blocked by the sphere (the light reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f).

In this case, even if the balls flow down the lower passage 331b in a row, the path E1 is shielded for each ball, so that the change in the brightness of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the light projection range E0 of the front plate member 320 can be changed. By checking, the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a can be confirmed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18C, when the light path E3 and the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b are close to parallel, after the light path E3 is blocked by the sphere, When the sphere reaches the rear end of the lower passage 331b (left side of FIG. 18C, near the sensor S) and falls downward, the light is not blocked by the sphere (so that the light reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f). Become). That is, until then, the light path E3 remains blocked by the sphere.

In this case, when the spheres flow down the lower passage 331b in a row, the light path E3 is blocked by the first sphere (the sphere on the left side of FIG. 18C) as long as the spheres are arranged in the lower passage 331b. Further, after the first ball falls downward from the rear end of the lower passage 331b (left side in FIG. 18 (c)), the light path to the second ball (ball on the right side in FIG. 18 (c)). E3 is blocked. Moreover, when the second ball falls from the rear end of the lower passage 331b, if the next ball (third ball) enters the lower passage 331b, the path of light to the ball. E3 is blocked. In this way, the sphere continues to block the light path E3 and is always visible dark while the sphere is flowing down the lower passage 331b. That is, the number of times the light is visually recognized brightly or darkly is not always the same as the number of balls entered in the specific winning opening 65a, and the number of balls entered in the specific winning opening 65a is the same. Confirmation becomes difficult. On the other hand, the present embodiment has the above-mentioned advantages.

As shown in FIG. 18A, since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed to be recessed toward the back side toward the central portion in the left-right direction, the light emitted from the pair of left and right light irradiating portions 331c1 is formed on the front inclined side surface 332a1f. By being reflected, the light is focused on the center of the front plate member 320 along the path E1 and reaches the light projection range E0 (see FIG. 17B).

Here, in the present embodiment, since the front plate member 320 is arranged on the front side of the moving upper lid member 332, the specific winning opening 65a can be hidden, while the front inclined side surface 332a1f is visually recognized through the front plate member 320. Therefore, it may be difficult to grasp the change in the brightness of the front inclined side surface 332a1f. In that case, it is necessary to increase the light intensity of a light emitting element such as an LED used for the light irradiation unit 331c1, and there is a problem that the light emitting element that can be used for the light irradiation unit 331c1 is limited.

On the other hand, since the front inclined side surface 332a1f collects the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 toward the center of the front plate member 320, the light emitted from the pair of light irradiation units 331c1 is superposed. It is possible to improve the intensity of light visually recognized in the light projection range E0. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in selecting a light emitting element that can be used for the light irradiation unit 331c1 (it is possible to select a light emitting element having a weak light intensity).

Further, since the light emitted from the pair of light irradiation units 331c1 is partially overlapped and visually recognized in the front view (see FIG. 17B), the pair of light irradiation is performed by making the colors of the light different from each other. A total of three colors of light, that is, the color of the light emitted from the unit 331c1 and the color in which they are combined, can be visually recognized in the projection range E0 (see FIG. 17B).

Here, since the light emitted from each of the pair of light irradiation units 331c1 is shielded by the spheres that independently roll along the path C2a (see FIG. 18), at the timing when the spheres shield the light. The color of the light visually recognized in the projection range E0 can be switched in various ways.

For example, in FIG. 18, consider a case where the light irradiation unit 331c1 on the right side irradiates a "blue" color light and the light irradiation unit 331c1 on the left side irradiates a "red" color light. In this case, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state, light is emitted in the light projection range E0 (see FIG. 17B) in the order of "blue", "purple (overlapping part)", and "red" from the right side. Is visually recognized.

In this case, if the sphere rolls on the path C2a on the right side of FIG. 18 to block the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the "blue" color light is blocked, so that the light projection range E0 Only "red" light is visible in.

On the other hand, when the sphere rolls on the path C2a on the left side of FIG. 18 to block the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the "red" color light is blocked, so that the light projection range E0 is set. Only "blue" light is visible.

In this way, the mode of light visually recognized in the light projection range E0 can be changed depending on which path the sphere rolls and which light irradiation unit 331c1 blocks the light. Since this change in the light mode is caused by a sphere that flows down the game area in a random path while colliding with a nail or the like, the change in the light mode can be caused at a random timing. That is, as compared with the case where the mode of the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 is changed by electronic control, it is possible to perform an effect rich in randomness, and it is possible to improve the effect.

In the present embodiment, the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed in a dogleg shape when viewed from above, but from the viewpoint of condensing light, it may be formed in a parabolic shape when viewed from above.

Next, the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 37.

FIG. 19 is a front perspective view of the composite operation unit 400, and FIG. 20 is a rear perspective view of the composite operation unit 400. Note that FIGS. 19 and 20 show a state in which the main body member 410 of the composite operation unit 400 is arranged at the retracted position, and the drive motor 462 and the fixing plate 461 are not shown. In the composite operation unit 400, the guide member 450 and the rear upper plate 470 are fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210.

FIG. 21 is a front exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 400, and FIG. 22 is a rear exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the composite operation unit 400 has a horizontally long rectangular main body member 410 that can be slid and moved in the vertical direction, and one end thereof can be guided to the left and right ends of the main body member 410. A pair of members to be connected, a shielding member 420 whose other end is pivotally supported by each other, a swinging member 430 swayablely arranged on the central front side of the main body member 410, and a main body member 410. A pair of leg members 440 are fastened and fixed at both ends and extended in the vertical direction, a guide member 450 in which a guide hole 452 for guiding the leg member 440 is formed, and a driving force required for moving the leg member 440. Wiring guide that connects the drive device 460 to be generated, the rear upper plate 470 that is fastened and fixed above the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and the rear upper plate 470 and the main body member 410, and the wiring is housed inside. It is mainly composed of an arm 480.

FIG. 23 is a front view of the main body member 410, the shielding member 420, and the swinging member 430, and FIG. 24 is a rear view of the main body member 410, the shielding member 420, and the swinging member 430.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the main body member 410 is formed in a plate-shaped base member 411 formed elongated in the left-right direction and both left and right ends of the base member 411 in the front-rear direction and vertically. The elongated leg insertion hole 412 and the direction in which the base member 411 is arranged inside the leg insertion hole 412 in the left-right direction and is bored in the front-rear direction and ascends and inclines toward the left-right central axis of the base member 411. A long-hole-shaped guide hole 413 extending to the base member 411 and a columnar member extending from the upper end portion of the base member 411 to the front side, and one end portion of the wiring guide arm 480 is pivotally supported. An arm shaft support 414, a holding portion 415 extending upward from the center of the base member 411 in the left-right direction and having a hook-shaped tip, and a swinging member 430 arranged in pairs at the lower end of the base member 411. The shaft support portion 416 that pivotally supports the shaft support hole 431a and the photo sensor 417 that is arranged in front of the base member 411 and detects the sensor passing portion 435d of the swing member 430 are formed in a substantially semicircular shape in the front view. Mainly includes a decorative plate portion 418.

The base member 411 has a shape in which the central portion in the left-right direction hangs downward from both the left and right end portions. As a result, a space can be formed above the central portion in the left-right direction, and the wiring guide arm 480 can be arranged in the space (see FIG. 29).

The leg insertion hole 412 is formed in an elongated shape, and by inserting the connecting fixing portion 442 (see FIG. 21) of the leg member 440, the leg member 440 is prevented from rotating with respect to the base member 411. To. As a result, the postures of the leg member 440 and the main body member 410 can be stabilized.

The guide hole 413 is an elongated hole through which the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is inserted and is slidably moved, and is formed with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion shaft portion 421c. On the upper side of the guide hole 413, a front lid 413a that covers the front side of the leg insertion hole 412 and has a side surface facing the guide hole 413 formed along the upper side of the guide hole 413 is arranged and below the guide hole 413. On the side, a support plate 413b, which is a plate-shaped portion projecting from the front side of the base member 411 and is inclined upward along the guide hole 413, is arranged.

The front end of the support plate 413b is in contact with the back surface of the swing base member 421. As a result, the back-and-forth swing of the swing base member 421 is suppressed by the support plate 413b, so that the posture of the shielding member 420 during movement can be stabilized.

The arm shaft support portion 414 is arranged on the left side in the front view from the central portion of the base member 411, and more specifically, is arranged at an intermediate portion between the portion where the upper end portion of the base member 411 starts to hang down and the central portion in the left-right direction. Will be done. The end (lower end) of the third guide arm 483 (see FIG. 21) of the wiring guide arm 480 is pivotally supported on the arm shaft support 414, and a collar member is attached to the tip of the arm shaft support 414. Fastened and fixed.

The holding portion 415 is a portion that is hooked on the slide lever 473 (see FIG. 21) arranged on the rear upper plate 470. That is, in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 29), the upper end portion of the slide lever 473 and the lower end portion of the hook-shaped portion of the holding portion 415 are brought into contact with each other. The downward movement of the main body member 410 is restricted. An inclined surface 415a is formed on the upper surface of the hook-shaped tip portion. The inclined surface 415a does not hinder the movement of the main body member 410 even when the main body member 410 is moved to the retracted position while the slide lever 473 is still overhanging.

The decorative plate portion 418 is a decorative portion that can be visually recognized together with the shielding member 420 when the main body member 410 is arranged at the overhanging position, and the main body member 410 is arranged at the retracted position (FIG. FIG. 29), which is a portion that comes into contact with the lower surface of the contact plate 421d.

The shielding member 420 is a decorative member in which the swing base member 421 formed in such a manner that the ends of the pair of plate-shaped members are pivotally supported, and the upper end portion is fastened and fixed to the front side of the swing base member 421. A guide in which the 422, a pair of connecting members 423 whose one end is coaxially supported by the shaft support position of the swing base member 421 and the other end of the connecting member 423 are pivotally supported. It mainly includes a guide plate 424 in which the hole 424b is formed and fastened and fixed to the upper end portion on the front side of the back case 210.

The swing base member 421 is a swing shaft formed of a pair of plate-shaped members 421a formed in a substantially arc shape and coaxially supported with a shaft support hole 423d formed at one end of the connecting member 423. It mainly includes a hole 421b, a pair of left and right insertion shaft portions 421c that are inserted and guided through the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410, and a contact plate 421d that protrudes to the back side and comes into contact with the upper surface of the main body member 410. ..

The swing shaft hole 421b is a portion that is hung and supported by the connecting member 423 through a shaft support rod 423c that is inserted through one end of the connecting member 423 and serves as a swing shaft of the pair of plate-shaped members 421a. Is.

Since the insertion shaft portion 421c is inserted into the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410, the left and right end portions of the shielding member 420 are moved downward from the intermediate position (see FIG. 30) as the main body member 410 is moved downward. It is moved close to the center in the left-right direction.

The abutting plate 421d is a curved surface protruding from the plate-shaped member 421a to the back surface side, and is formed along the shape of the upper surface of the decorative plate portion 418. As a result, the upper surface of the main body member 410 and the lower surface of the contact plate 421d are brought into contact with each other at the retracted position.

The decorative member 422 has a pair of wide and thick portions 422a arranged on the front side of the swing base member 421, and a portion formed below the swing base member 421 in the front view, and the lower end portion thereof. It includes a hanging portion 422b formed by being curved rearward from the swing base member 421.

The hanging portion 422b is arranged closer to the main body member 410 than the swing base member 421.

The connecting member 423 is formed of a pair of rod members 423a that are bent in a frontal view at the bent portion 423b, includes a shaft support rod 423c, and has a shaft support rod 423c at one end of the rod member 423a. A shaft support hole 423d through which the rod member is inserted is formed, and a slide shaft portion 423e which is inserted and guided through the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 is formed at the other end of the rod member 423a.

The bent portion 423b is bent above the straight line connecting the shaft support hole 423d and the slide shaft portion 423e. That is, the bent portion 423b is arranged so as to be separated from the swing base member 421 than the straight line connecting the shaft support hole 423d and the slide shaft portion 423e. Therefore, a large space can be secured between the swing base member 421 and the connecting member 423, and the degree of freedom in designing the swing base member 421 can be improved.

The slide shaft portion 423e is formed of a cylindrical portion inserted into the guide hole 424b and a disk-shaped collar member fastened and fixed to the tip of the cylindrical portion.

The guide plate 424 includes a base plate 424a that is fastened and fixed to the back case 210, and a guide hole 424b that is a pair of elongated holes that are bored in the front-rear direction and extended in the left-right direction at both left and right ends of the base plate 424a. , Is mainly provided. A pair of guide holes 424b are formed at the same height.

The guide hole 424b is formed in the left-right direction, that is, in the direction along the upper outer edge of the opening 211a of the rear case 210. Therefore, the width required for the guide plate 424 for guiding the connecting member 423 can be suppressed. In this case, since the guide plate 424 can be arranged at a position farther from the third symbol display device 81, the shielding member 420 can be formed to be larger by that amount.

The swing member 430 is a member that is swingably supported by the shaft support portion 416, and is a main body member 431 that swings and a base that projects from the front side of the central portion of the base member 411. The member 432, the drive motor 433 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 432 to generate the driving force for driving the main body member 431, the drive gear 434 pivotally supported by the drive motor 433, and the drive gear 434 are meshed with each other. A transmission gear 435 that is pivotally supported above the base member 432 with respect to the drive gear 434, and a connecting member 436 that connects the connecting shaft 435c of the transmission gear 435 and the connecting shaft 431b of the main body member 431 are mainly used. Prepare for.

The main body member 431 is a member in which a hemispherical decorative portion is formed on the front side, and is formed in the left-right direction below both ends in the left-right direction on the back side, and has a shaft support hole 431a through which the shaft support portion 416 is inserted, and a back surface. It mainly includes a connecting shaft 431b which is arranged in the central portion on the side and is pivotally supported by one end of the connecting member 436.

The connecting shaft 431b is arranged on the back surface side of the main body member 431 at a position closer to the shaft support hole 431a than the end on the opposite side (upper side) of the shaft support hole 431a. As a result, the moving width of the upper end portion of the main body member 431 can be increased as compared with the moving width in which the connecting member 436 is actually moved back and forth.

The transmission gear 435 extends to the opposite side of the main body 435a on which the gear is axially supported by the base member 432 and meshed with the drive gear 434 over approximately half a circumference and the gear formed on the main body 435a. Formed along the front left side surface of the overhanging portion 435b, the columnar connecting shaft 435c projecting from the overhanging tip portion of the overhanging portion 435b to the right in the front view, and the overhanging portion 435b. It is mainly provided with a sensor passing portion 435d (see FIG. 34), which is formed in a fan shape in a left-right direction and whose peripheral edge passes through the photosensor 417.

The connecting member 436 is a rod-shaped member in which holes parallel to each other are bored at both ends, and the connecting member 436 has a one-sided connecting hole 436a which is bored at one end and pivotally supported by the connecting shaft 431b of the main body member 431. The other side connecting hole 436b, which is formed at the other end and is pivotally supported by the connecting shaft 435c of the transmission gear 435, is mainly provided.

A description will be given by returning to FIGS. 21 and 22. The arm member 440 is formed in a long plate-shaped main body 441 in which a pair extends in the vertical direction and a long hole shape in which a cross section projecting from the upper end of the main body 441 to the front side is long in the vertical direction. A pair of insertion shafts 443 that project from the upper and lower ends of the main body 441 to the back side and are inserted into the guide holes 452 of the guide member 450, and a front side from the lower end of the main body 441. The locking portion 444, which is projected to and locks one end of the urging spring 445, and the other end of the urging spring 445, whose one end is locked to the locking portion 444, are locked and the rear case 210. It mainly includes a holding and fixing portion 446 that is fastened and fixed to the front side.

A rack gear 441a is engraved on the side surface of the main body portion 441 on the side facing the main body member 410, and the rack gear 441a is meshed with the drive gear 463 of the drive device 460 to generate a drive device 460. The force is transmitted to the leg member 440.

The insertion shaft portion 443 is formed in a vertically long elongated hole shape and is inserted into the guide hole 452 of the guide member 450 extending vertically, so that the posture of the leg member 440 with respect to the guide member 450 is stabilized. Can be done. Further, since the insertion shaft portion 443 is formed in a pair of upper and lower parts, the posture of the leg member 440 with respect to the guide member 450 can be stabilized.

The urging spring 445 generates an urging force that moves the leg member 440 toward the retracted position (see FIG. 19). At this time, the other end of the urging spring 445 acts as a fixed side end portion locked to the holding and fixing portion 446, and one end acts as a moving side end portion locked to the locking portion 444.

The guide member 450 has a main body member 451 which is a long plate member in the vertical direction arranged in a pair on the left and right, and a long hole shape which is bored in a pair of the main body member 451 in the vertical direction and extended in the vertical direction. Guide hole 452, a pair of fixing portions 453 for fixing the drive device 460 in the central portion in the vertical direction of the main body member 451, and the leg member 440 are arranged on the front side of the upper end portion of the main body member 451 and the leg member 440 is retracted. A cover member 454 arranged on the front side of the leg member 440 in the state of being arranged in FIG. 19) is mainly provided.

The drive device 460 has a shape in which the side close to the main body member 410 is lowered one step rearward, the side close to the main body member 410 is fixed to the fixing portion 453 of the guide member 450, and the opposite side is the fastening portion 212b of the rear case 210 ( A fixing plate 461 fixed to the fixing plate 461), a drive motor 462 fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 461, and a drive gear 463 pivotally supported by the drive motor 462 are mainly provided.

Since the fixing plate 461 has a shape in which the side separated from the main body member 410 is raised one step to the front side, a gap surrounded by the back case 210 and the fixing plate 461 can be formed on the side separated from the main body member 410. it can. Here, when the urging springs 445 are arranged on the left and right sides of the leg member 440, the arrangement width of the leg member 440 including the urging spring 4454 in the left-right direction becomes large, and thereby the left-right width of the opening 211a becomes small. Was there. In the present embodiment, the urging spring 445 can be arranged in the gap (formed on the front side of the leg member 440) surrounded by the back case 210 and the fixing plate 461, and the left and right sides of the leg member 440 can be arranged accordingly. The space in the direction can be suppressed.

The rear upper plate 470 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) formed above the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and is a plate-shaped main body portion 471 and the main body portion 471 thereof. A columnar shaft support 472 projecting from the upper left end of the front view to the front side, a horizontally long slide lever 473 arranged in the center of the main body 471, and the slide lever 473 in the left-right direction. It mainly includes a solenoid 474 that generates a driving force that is moved to the main body, and a front cover 475 that is fastened and fixed to the main body 471 so as to cover the front side of the slide lever 473.

The shaft support portion 472 is a portion where the one-side tubular portion 481b (see FIG. 25) of the wiring guide arm 480 is pivotally supported, and the collar member C is fastened and fixed to the tip end. The wiring introduced into the main body member 410 is arranged through the vicinity of the shaft support portion 472.

The slide lever 473 is a member that is in contact with the lower surface of the holding portion 415 of the main body member 410 in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 29) to prevent the main body member 410 from moving downward. is there. An inclined surface 473a is formed on the lower surface of the tip of the slide lever 473. When the inclined surface 473a and the inclined surface 415a of the main body member 410 come into contact with each other, it is possible to suppress resistance generated between the inclined surfaces.

The extension allowance of the slide lever 473 is changed depending on whether or not electricity is conducted to the solenoid 474. For example, when the slide lever 473 projects to the left in the front view due to the conduction of electricity, the slide lever 473 abuts on the lower surface of the holding portion 415 if the electricity is conducted, and the main body member 410 Is prevented from moving downward (see FIG. 29). On the other hand, if electricity is not conducted, the slide lever 473 and the holding portion 415 are not brought into contact with each other, and the main body member 410 can move downward.

Here, it is conceivable that the solenoid 474 is driven as the main body member 410 is arranged at the retracted position, and the slide lever 473 is brought into contact with the holding portion 415. However, in this case, the driving force from the driving device 460 cannot be released from the time when the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position until the solenoid 474 moves the slide lever 473. Therefore, when detecting the arrangement of the main body member 410 and changing the operation of the drive device 460, it is necessary to control the drive device 460 in consideration of the time for the solenoid 474 to move the slide lever 473, which is difficult to control. It becomes.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface 415a of the holding portion 415 is arranged to face the inclined surface 473a of the slide lever 473 by moving the main body member 410 upward while the slide lever 473 is overhanging (FIG. 31). (See), and eventually the slide lever 473 is pushed back. When the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position and the contact between the holding portion 415 and the slide lever 473 in the longitudinal direction of the slide lever 473 is released, the slide lever 473 is projected again and the lower surface of the holding portion 415 and the slide lever are released. It comes into contact with the upper surface of 473 (see FIG. 29). As a result, regardless of the arrangement of the main body member 410, by keeping the slide lever in the overhanging state, it is possible to prevent the main body member 410 from moving downward after being moved to the retracted position. Therefore, the control of the drive device 460 becomes easy.

The front cover 475 is a member in which a slide groove 475a, which is a concave groove for guiding the slide lever 473, is formed on the back surface in the left-right direction, and the slide lever 473 slides by the slide groove 475a of the front cover 475. It is possible to prevent the position from shifting in the vertical direction during movement.

The wiring guide arm 480 is a movable mechanism portion that guides the wiring W from the rear upper plate 470 to the main body member 410, which is formed of a resin material and is fastened and fixed to the rear case 210, and is attached to one end in order from the top. A first guide arm 481 whose one-side tubular portion 481b is pivotally supported by a shaft support portion 472, and a second guide arm 482 that pivotally supports the other end of the first guide arm 481 at one end. And a third guide arm 483 in which the other end of the second guide arm 482 is pivotally supported by one end and the other end is pivotally supported by the arm shaft support 414.

Here, the wiring W is an electrical wiring (for example, a flat harness) formed in a band shape (formed wide in the vertical direction of FIG. 27). The length of the second guide arm 482 in the longitudinal direction is shorter than that of the first guide arm 481 by the diameter of the collar member C or more, and the length of the third guide arm 483 is shorter than that of the second guide arm 482 in the longitudinal direction. Is formed to be shorter than the diameter of the collar member C.

The wiring guide arm 480 is configured to accommodate the wiring W inside, and is a member for preventing the wiring W from breaking and breaking. As a result, it is not necessary to dispose the wiring W introduced into the main body member 410 through the leg member 440, and the space for arranging the leg member 440 can be suppressed. Therefore, the opening 211a can be expanded in the left-right direction.

Next, the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27. Since the third guide arm 483 includes the ones described in the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 as a technical idea, the description thereof will be omitted here.

25 (a) is a front view of the first guide arm 481, FIG. 25 (b) is a bottom view of the first guide arm 481, and FIG. 25 (c) is a view of XXVc of FIG. 25 (a). FIG. 25 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first guide arm 481 in the line XXVc, and FIG. 25 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first guide arm 481 in the line XXVd-XXVd of FIG. 25 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (d), the first guide arm 481 has a plate-shaped arm portion 481a formed in a long plate shape and the left end of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a in a front view. One-sided tubular portion 481b whose shaft is arranged on the vertical line of the lower bottom surface (lower side surface of FIG. 25 (a)) of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and which extends in the front-rear direction, and the plate-shaped arm portion Among the ends of 481a, the shaft is arranged on the vertical line of the lower bottom surface of the plate-shaped arm 481a at the opposite end of the one-side tubular portion 481b, and the other-side tubular portion extends in the front-rear direction. 481c, a plate-shaped attachment portion 481d formed above the plate-shaped arm portion 481a at a predetermined interval, a bottom portion 481e connecting the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the back surface side of the attachment portion 481d, and an attachment portion 481d. It mainly includes a front locking portion 481f extending from the front side surface toward the plate-shaped arm portion 481a.

The wiring W is inserted through the inside of the concave cross-sectional portion formed by the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, the attachment portion 481d, and the bottom portion 481e (see FIG. 27). As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from rubbing against other members or being sandwiched between other members.

In the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, a notch portion 481a1 is formed in a portion facing the front locking portion 481f, and the plate thickness of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a is reduced in the portion where the notch portion 481a1 is formed. ..

The cutout portion 481a1 is a recess formed in the plate-shaped arm portion 481a having a shape slightly larger than that of the front locking portion 481f in the front view, and is formed over the width direction of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. In the portion where the cutout portion 481a1 is formed, the formation of the bottom portion 481e is omitted (the bottom portion 481e is formed through).

By configuring the notch portion 481a1 as described above, the first guide arm 481 can be easily manufactured by die molding (by die cutting in one direction). Further, by inserting the wiring W from the notch portion 481a1, the wiring W can be easily accommodated in the first guide arm 481.

The portion of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a other than the portion where the cutout portion 481a1 is formed is shorter than the overhang width of the front locking portion 481f with the attachment portion 481d. Therefore, in a state where the wiring W is accommodated in the first guide arm 481 and extended in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 27A), the wiring W is prevented from falling off to the front side (front side in FIG. 27A). Can be prevented.

The plate-shaped arm portion 481a is provided with a rib portion N formed in a rib shape in the width direction on the side surface on the side facing the attachment portion 481d. The rib portion N is formed in the vicinity of the other side tubular portion 481c pivotally supported by the second guide arm 482, and is a rib projecting from the second guide arm 482 at the intermediate portion of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. It is formed alternately with the part N.

The other-side tubular portion 481c includes an enlarged diameter portion 481c1 whose inner diameter is partially increased, and the end surface on the back surface side is on the front side of the bottom portion 481e in order to form an overlapping margin with the second guide arm. It is formed (see FIG. 25 (b)).

The enlarged diameter portion 481c1 is formed on the inner peripheral side of the other side tubular portion 481c over a half circumference (upper half circumference in FIG. 25 (a)), and is formed from the other side bottom portion 481e2 side of the other side tubular portion 481c. It is a recess formed to a length of approximately half the length of the cylinder of the side tubular portion 481c (see FIG. 25 (c)).

The attachment portion 481d includes an arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1 formed as an arc coaxial with the other-side tubular portion 481c around the other-side tubular portion 481c, and extends to the front side of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. .. As a result, even when the flat surface locking portion 481f is formed, it is possible to secure a gap through which the wiring is inserted from the front side.

The attachment portion 481d is provided with a rib portion N formed in a rib shape in the width direction on the side surface on the side facing the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. The rib portion N is formed at an intermediate position between the rib portions N projecting from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a in the intermediate portion of the attachment portion 481d.

The arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1 is formed with a radius larger than the radius of the substantially arc-shaped shape formed when the wiring W bends to the outside of the other side tubular portion 481c (upper right of FIG. 27B). Radius.

Further, since the wiring guide arm 480 is formed at the inner upper end of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), when replacing or maintaining the wiring W, the wiring is attached by a route that is not blocked by the rear case 210. Need to remove. In the present embodiment, the attachment portion 481d close to the upper wall surface of the back case 210 is formed so as to project forward from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a separated from the upper wall surface of the back case 210. Therefore, for example, when removing the wiring W, the wiring W may be pulled out to the front side and pulled out in the direction from the attachment portion 481d to the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, so that the upper wall surface of the rear case 210 interferes with the work. Will never be. When inserting the wiring, insert it in the opposite direction. Therefore, the maintainability of replacing the wiring W can be improved.

The bottom portion 481e is arranged above the one-side tubular portion 481b and formed in a fan shape centered on the axis of the one-side tubular portion, and the other side bottom portion 481e1 is arranged above the other-side tubular portion 481c. The other side bottom portion 481e2 formed in a fan shape centered on a shaft spaced above the shaft of the side tubular portion 481c is mainly provided. The end of the arcuate attachment portion 481d1 is formed to the left of the front view from the end of the other side bottom portion 481e2.

The plane locking portion 481f is a claw-shaped member that prevents the wiring W from falling off from the front side. That is, the wiring W is formed with a width shorter than the length from the bottom portion 481e to the front locking portion 481f.

26 (a) is a front view of the second guide arm 482, FIG. 26 (b) is a bottom view of the second guide arm 482, and FIG. 26 (c) is a view of XXVIc of FIG. 26 (a). FIG. 26 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the second guide arm 482 in the −XXVIc line, and FIG. 26 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the second guide arm 482 in the XXVId-XXVId line of FIG. 26 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (d), since the second guide arm 482 has a plurality of configurations of the same technical idea as the first guide arm 481, the description thereof will be omitted. To do. That is, the plate-shaped arm portion 481a is attached to the plate-shaped arm portion 482a, the other side tubular portion 481c is attached to the other side tubular portion 482c, the attachment portion 481d is attached to the attachment portion 482d, the bottom portion 481e is attached to the bottom portion 482e, and the front locking portion. 481f corresponds to the front locking portion 482f, respectively.

The plate-shaped arm portion 482a includes a notch portion 482a2 at a portion facing the front locking portion 482f. Since the technical idea of the notch portion 482a2 is the same as the technical idea of the notch portion 481a1, the description thereof will be omitted.

The plate-shaped arm portion 482a and the attachment portion 482d are provided with rib portions N on the side surfaces facing each other. In the vicinity of the one-side shaft support 482b that is pivotally supported by the first guide arm 481, a rib portion N is formed in the attachment portion 482d, and in the intermediate portion of the second guide arm 482, the rib portion N is a plate-shaped arm portion 482a. And 482d are alternately formed.

The second guide arm 482 has a one-sided shaft support 482b and a one-sided shaft support 482b, which are formed in a columnar shape from the upper right portion of the bottom portion 482e to the front side and a fastening portion is formed at the tip thereof. One side bottom portion 482e1 which is formed in a substantially arc shape and extends from the bottom portion 482e on the same plane, and the right end portion of the plate-shaped arm portion 482a which is projected from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the one side bottom portion 482e1 to the front side. It is mainly provided with an arcuate plate portion 482a1 connected to the above.

The arcuate plate portion 482a1 is formed with a radius larger than the radius of the substantially arcuate shape formed when the wiring W bends to the outside of the other side tubular portion 481c (upper right of FIG. 27B). Radius.

The one-side shaft support portion 482b is a portion through which the reduced diameter portion 482b1 is formed and the other-side tubular portion 481c of the first guide arm 481 is inserted, and the front side surface of the one-side bottom portion 482e1 is the other-side cylinder. It is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface side surface of the shaped portion 481c. Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 27), the bottom portions 481e and 482e are formed on the same plane, and the bottom portions 481e and 482e can come into contact with each other in the respective rotation directions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482. It is formed. Therefore, overspeeding of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be prevented, and the wiring W can be prevented from being excessively bent (see FIG. 27).

The reduced diameter portion 482b1 is formed on the outer peripheral side of the one-side shaft support portion 482b over a half circumference (lower half circumference in FIG. 26A), and the one-side shaft support portion 482b is formed from the one-side bottom portion 482e1 side to the one-side shaft. It is a depression formed to a length of approximately half the length of the branch 482b (see FIG. 26 (c)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the swing of the second guide arm 482 with respect to the first guide arm 481 will be described. 27 (a) and 27 (b) are front views of the first guide arm 481, the second guide arm 482, and the wiring W. Note that FIG. 27 (a) shows a state in which the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481 (corresponding to the state of FIG. 29), and FIG. 27 (b) shows FIG. 27 (b). From the state of a) to the end of the movable range in which the second guide arm 482 can swing with respect to the first guide arm 481, the state of swinging counterclockwise in front view (corresponding to the state of FIG. 33). Illustrated. In FIG. 27 (b), the one side bottom portion 482e1 of the second guide arm 482 and the other side bottom portion 481e2 of the first guide arm 481 are brought into contact with each other to prevent further swinging of the second guide arm 482. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the wiring W is a recessed portion (FIGS. 25 (d) and 26 (d)) formed by the plate-shaped arm portions 481a and 482a, the attachment portions 481d and 482d, and the bottom portions 481e and 482e. )) Is arranged inside. Therefore, due to the rigidity of the first guide arm 481 or the second guide arm 482, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from being bent to the extent that the wiring W is broken during the movement of the main body member 410.

Further, at the shaft support positions (right end in FIG. 27A) of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, the wiring W is arranged so as to wrap around the other side tubular portion 481c. Therefore, at the axial support positions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, it is suppressed that the wiring W is bent with a radius of curvature equal to or less than the diameter of the other side tubular portion 481c. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from being bent, and it is possible to suppress disconnection of the wiring W.

The state of FIG. 27A corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 29, that is, the state in which the main body member 410 is arranged at the retracted position. The higher the speed at which the main body member 410 is moved from the retracted position to the overhanging position, the easier it is to improve the effect. When starting the main body member 410 from the stopped state at the retracted position, it is necessary for the drive device 460 to generate a driving force that exceeds the inertial force of the main body member 410 and the inertial force of the wiring guide arm 480. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 27A, it is desirable that the rotational resistance of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 constituting the wiring guide arm 480 at the shaft support position is small.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), in a state where the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481, the diameter-expanded portion 481c1 and the diameter-expanded portion 481c1 and the circumference of the one-side tubular portion 481b are folded. The reduced diameter portion 482b1 surrounds it. The enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are portions that are recessed in a direction away from the mating member forming the shaft support relationship, and have an effect of suppressing rotational friction during shaft rotation. When the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481, the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are formed around the axis of the one-side tubular portion 481b (over the entire circumference). Therefore, the resistance when rotating the second guide arm 482 with respect to the first guide arm 481 is suppressed.

On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 27 (b), the range in which the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are arranged around the axis of the one-side tubular portion 481b is substantially half the circumference (the upper half circumference of FIG. 27 (b)). ). As shown in FIG. 27 (b), the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 largely overlap each other. In this case, the rotational resistance of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be increased as compared with the state shown in FIG. 27 (a).

From the state where the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481, the length at which the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 overlap as the second guide arm 482 is rotated with respect to the first guide arm 481. The length becomes longer, and the rotational resistance of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 increases. That is, the speed of the second guide arm 482 can be reduced as the second guide arm 482 is rotated with respect to the first guide arm 481.

Therefore, the speed at which the other side bottom portion 481e2 and the one side bottom portion 482e1 come into contact with each other can be reduced, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are in contact with the other side bottom portion 481e2 and the one side bottom portion 482e1. The load received by contact can be suppressed. As a result, the durability of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be improved, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are on opposite sides (the second guide arm 482 is shown in FIG. 27). It is possible to prevent bending from the state of (b) to the side further rotated counterclockwise).

In the present embodiment, since the wiring guide arm 480 is formed by axially supporting three members, the moving speed of the wiring guide arm 480 can be changed even when the moving speed of the main body member 410 is constant. can do.

For example, in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the overhanging position (see FIG. 33), the posture of the wiring guide arm 480 is not limited to one, and the third guide arm 483 can rotate upward (posture). (Changeable) The amount can be changed. Therefore, the moving speed of the first guide arm 481 can be adjusted by changing the posture of the third guide arm 483 even while the main body member 410 is moving. Therefore, even if the moving speed of the wiring guide arm 480 is changed during the movement of the main body member 410, it is not necessary to change the moving speed of the main body member 410 accordingly.

As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the other side bottom portion 481e2 and the one side bottom portion 482e1 are in contact with each other, a gap is formed between the arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1 and the arc-shaped plate portion 482a1. Even if the wiring W bends to the outside of the other side tubular portion 481c (upper right in FIG. 27B) due to this gap, the wiring W is sandwiched between the arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1 and the arc-shaped plate portion 482a1. It is possible to prevent the wiring W from being broken.

As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the wiring guide arm 480 is in the open state, the wiring W moves significantly to the outside of the other side tubular portion 481c, and in particular, the first guide arm 481 and the second guide The wiring W is likely to be misaligned near the end (shaft support position) of the arm 482. When the wiring W is repeatedly displaced with respect to the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, the wiring W and the inner side surfaces of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 rub against each other, and the durability of the wiring W becomes durable. There is a risk of reduced sex.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rib portion N formed in a rib shape on the inner side surface of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 is caught in the wiring W, so that the wiring W and the first guide arm 481 and It is possible to improve the resistance with the second guide arm 482 and prevent the wiring W from being displaced.

The wiring W is effective by forming the rib portion N on the side surface opposite to the direction in which the wiring W separates from the other side tubular portion 481c in the vicinity of the shaft support positions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482. Can be supported. That is, for example, the portion of the wiring W projecting from the connecting position of the arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1 and the attachment portion 481d toward the attachment portion 481d side is pressed against the plate-shaped arm portion 481a along the shape of the arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1. .. Therefore, by forming the rib portion N in the pressed portion, the resistance between the wiring W and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a can be increased.

The side surface of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a on which the wiring W is pressed is curved to the opposite side of the attachment portion 481d and recessed so that the wiring W is fitted into the recess and the wiring is performed. It is possible to suppress the misalignment between the W and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. In this case, since the surface of the curved recess and the wiring W come into contact with each other by surface contact, local wear of the wiring W is suppressed as compared with the case where the wiring W receives resistance from the rib portion N by point contact. Can be done.

Further, the distance between the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the attachment portion 481d may be widened in the vicinity of the shaft support position. For example, the attachment portion 481d may be inclined so as to be separated from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a as it approaches the other side tubular portion 481c from the front locking portion 481f on the right side of FIG. 27 (b). In this case, the wiring W is curved by the portion where the distance between the attachment portion 481d and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a is widened (the portion near the other side tubular portion 481c) to reduce the slack of the wiring W near the support portion. It can be absorbed, and the misalignment of the wiring W at the intermediate portion (the portion sandwiched between the front locking portions 481f) of the first guide arm 481 can be suppressed (the wiring W cancels the slack near the support portion). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first guide arm 481 from being displaced in the longitudinal direction). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from rubbing against the inner surface of the first guide arm 481 and being worn, and to improve the durability of the wiring W.

In the intermediate portion between the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, rib portions N are alternately formed on the inner side surfaces arranged so as to face each other. Therefore, the wiring W can be easily hooked on more rib portions N as compared with the case where the rib portions N are formed on only one of the inner side surfaces arranged so as to face each other. As a result, the resistance between the wiring W and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be increased, and the misalignment between the wiring W and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 is suppressed. can do.

In FIG. 27, a disk-shaped color member C fastened and fixed to the front side of the wiring guide arm 480 is illustrated by an imaginary line. The collar member C is fastened and fixed to, for example, the tip of the one-side shaft support 482b or the tip of the shaft support 472 (see FIG. 21) inserted into the one-side tubular portion 481b, and the front surface of each tubular portion 481b, 481c. It is a member that prevents movement to the side.

In the present embodiment, the color member C is extended to a position where at least a part of the adjacent attachment portions 481d and 482d overlaps in the front view, or even if they do not overlap in the front view, the color member C and the attachment portion 481d, It is extended from between the 482d and the wiring W to a position where the wiring W does not come off. For example, at the left end of FIG. 27 (b), there is a gap between the collar member C and the attachment portion 481d, but the wiring W is deformed so as to be separated from the one-side tubular portion 481b (bulging outward). Therefore, there is little possibility that the wiring W will fall out from the gap. That is, the color member C is extended until it overlaps with the wiring W in the front view (FIG. 27), so that the collar member C has a sufficient diameter to prevent the wiring W from falling off. As a result, the wiring W is prevented from falling off from the wiring guide arm 480.

Here, assuming that the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are formed to have the same length, the collar member C is brought into contact with the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 when they are folded. You will not be able to fold it. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lengths of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 in the longitudinal direction are different. That is, in a state where the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are folded until their extension directions are parallel to each other (see FIG. 27A), they are arranged on the front side of the one-side tubular portion 481b. The collar member C provided and the collar member C disposed on the front side of the other side tubular portion 482c are different to the extent that they do not interfere with each other.

Thereby, while suppressing the wiring W from falling off from the wiring guide arm 480 by disposing the collar member C, it is possible to suppress the arrangement space by folding the wiring guide arm 480. It is desirable that the lengths of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 in the longitudinal direction (the length of the collar member C to the axis) differ from the diameter of the collar member C or more.

Next, the operation of the combined operation unit 400 will be described. First, the change in the posture of the shielding member 420 with respect to the sliding movement of the main body member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33.

28 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, FIG. 29 is a rear view of the combined operation unit 400, FIG. 30 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 31 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400. 32 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 33 is a rear view of the combined operation unit 400.

In addition, in FIGS. 28 and 29, the state in which the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position is shown, and in FIGS. 30 and 31, the posture of the swing base member 421 with respect to the main body member 410 from the state of FIGS. 28 and 29. The main body member 410 is arranged at an intermediate position where the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is arranged at the inner end of the guide hole 424b in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged. The state in which the member 410 is arranged at the overhanging position is illustrated.

Further, in FIG. 28, the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is shown by an imaginary line, and in FIGS. 28, 30 and 32, a part of the main body member 410 is shown by a hidden line and the overlapping portion P is shown by an imaginary line. In FIGS. 29, 31 and 33, the rear upper plate 470 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

Further, in FIG. 30, the vicinity of the connecting member 423 is magnified, and in the magnified view, a state in which the connecting member 423 is moved by a predetermined amount from the central end of the pair of guide holes 424b is illustrated by an imaginary line. Will be done. Further, in FIG. 31, the vicinity of the guide hole 413 is magnified, and in the magnified view, a state in which the insertion shaft portion 421c is moved by a predetermined amount from the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The main body member 410 is moved in the vertical direction along the guide hole 452 as the leg member 440 meshed with the drive gear 463 is rotated by rotating the drive gear 463.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the contact plate 421d of the swing base member 421 of the shielding member 420 is supported by the decorative plate portion 418 of the base member 411 in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position. Therefore, the central portion in the left-right direction of the swing base member 421 is supported. In this state, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is arranged at the lateral end of the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 in the left-right direction, and the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. The wiring guide arm 480 is folded so that the extending directions of the guide arms are parallel to each other. Further, the upper side surface of the slide lever 473 and the lower side surface of the holding portion 415 are brought into contact with each other to prevent the main body member 410 from moving downward.

As shown in FIG. 28, at least a part of the mechanical portion of the swing member 430 such as the transmission gear 435 is a gap (formed in the center in the left-right direction and downward) formed between the pair of decorative members 422 of the shielding member 420. It is arranged in a gap that becomes wider as it goes (see FIGS. 28 and 34). As a result, in the state where the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position, the swinging member 430 can be packed in the shielding member 420 in the vertical direction and arranged, and the width of the shielding member 420 and the swinging member 430 in the vertical direction can be increased. It can be suppressed. In this case, since the area of the front view formed by the main body member 410, the shielding member 420, and the swinging member 430 can be reduced, the opening 211a (see FIG. 6) can be made larger accordingly.

Here, for example, a mechanical portion such as a transmission gear 435 of the swing member 430 may be arranged on the front side of the main body member 410. In this case, in order to increase the area of the overlapping portion P between the main body member 410 and the decorative member 422 (the main body member 410 and the decorative member 422 are brought together in the moving direction of the main body member 410), the decorative member 422 is a mechanical portion thereof. It is conceivable to place it on the front side of. On the other hand, in this case, since it is necessary to move the swing member 430 accommodating the decorative member 422 to the front side (direction away from the main body member 410), the space on the front side of the swing member 430 is suppressed and the neck It becomes difficult to form the swing member 430 three-dimensionally on the front side.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, at least a part of the swing member 430 (mechanical part such as the transmission gear 435) can be accommodated in the space created by the pair of decorative members 422 being separated from each other. it can. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to move the decorative member 422 to the front side of the mechanical portion of the swing member 430 in order to increase the area of the overlapping portion P between the main body member 410 and the decorative member 422. The 430 can be arranged close to the main body member 410. As a result, the swing member 430 can be three-dimensionally formed on the front side.

In FIG. 28, since the swing member 430 takes a posture in which the main body member 431 is tilted (see FIG. 34), the vertical width in the front view is suppressed as compared with the standing posture (see FIGS. 32 and 35). To. Therefore, even when the swing member 430 is viewed alone, the area of the front view formed by the swing member 430 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the contact plate 421d of the swing base member 421 of the shielding member 420 is supported by the decorative plate portion 418 of the base member 411 in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged at an intermediate position. The left-right central portion of the swing base member 421 is supported (that is, the shielding member 420 is in the same posture as in FIGS. 28 and 29). In this state, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is arranged at the inner end of the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 in the left-right direction, and the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. Placed in. Further, in the wiring guide arm 480, the third guide arm 483 is mounted on the upper side surface of the main body member 410, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 take an inclined posture with respect to the left-right direction, respectively.

Since the third guide arm 483 is formed shorter than the other guide arms 481 and 482, the main body member is in a state where the third guide arm 483 is stably mounted on the upper side surface of the main body member 410. It can be maintained longer while the 410 is in motion. As a result, the wiring W arranged inside the wiring guide arm 480 can be made more stable, and disconnection of the wiring W can be prevented.

Here, when the main body member 410 is moved downward at high speed and is arranged at an intermediate position, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 bounces off at the inner end of the guide hole 424b, and the swing base of the shielding member 420. The shaft support position (shaft support rod 423c, see FIG. 23) between the member 421 and the connecting member 423 may bounce upward, and the posture of the shielding member 420 may not be stable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the guide hole 413 for guiding the insertion shaft portion 421c of the swing base member 421 is formed so as to incline toward the inside in the left-right direction, and the slide shaft portion 423e is guided. Holes 424b are formed in the left-right direction.

In other words, when the slide shaft portion 423e reaches the inner end of the guide hole 424b, the insertion shaft portion 421c is a directional component perpendicular to the rebounding direction of the shaft support positions of the swing base member 421 and the connecting member 423. It is guided so as to be movable in the direction of having.

Therefore, a resistor F directed downward from the upper side surface of the guide hole 413 is applied to the insertion shaft portion 421c that is moved upward as the swing base member 421 moves upward, and is above the insertion shaft portion 421c. Movement to is suppressed. In this case, it is suppressed that the swing base member 421 bounces upward and the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 bounces at the inner end of the guide hole 424b. In addition, even if the swing base member 421 bounces upward and the connecting member 423 bounces upward, the slide shaft portion 423e comes into contact with the upper and lower side surfaces of the guide hole 424b, so that the movement of the connecting member is suppressed. Will be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the bending portion 423b is formed in the connecting member 423 and the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 bounces off at the inner end of the guide hole 424b, the bending portion 423b is the swing base member 421. It moves in a direction away from the upper side surface (the bent portion 213b moves to the center side in the left-right direction by a distance X). Therefore, when the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 bounces off at the inner end of the guide hole 424b in the left-right direction, a sufficient distance can be formed between the connecting member 423 and the swing base member 421, and the connecting member 423 and the connecting member 423 can be separated from each other. It is possible to prevent the rocking base member 421 from colliding with the rocking base member 421. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the swing base member 421 can be improved.

In the state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the intermediate position, the connecting member 423 connected to the swing base member 421 suppresses the movement of the swing base member 421 in the left-right direction. That is, for example, when the swing base member 421 starts to move to the left in the front view due to disturbance, the connecting member 423 inserted into the guide hole 424b on the right in the front view is located at the center of the pair of guide holes 424b in the left-right direction. The movement is dammed at the end, and the movement of the swing base member 421 in the left-right direction is suppressed. Therefore, the arrangement of the swing base member 421 can be stabilized.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the swing base member 421 of the shielding member 420 is suspended and supported by the connecting member 423 in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the overhanging position. In this state, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is arranged at the inner end of the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 in the left-right direction, and the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is the upper end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. Placed in. Further, the wiring guide arm 480 has a posture in which the other side bottom 481e2 (see FIG. 25) of the first guide arm 481 and the one side bottom 482e1 (see FIG. 26) of the second guide arm 482 are in contact with each other in the swing direction. Take.

Here, when the main body member 410 moves from the intermediate position to the overhanging position, the pair of left and right insertion shaft portions 421c move upward along the guide holes 413 in opposite directions in the left-right direction. That is, the forces applied to the pair of swing base members 421 from the pair of left and right guide holes 413 of the main body member 410 are oriented in opposite directions to each other and cancel each other out. Therefore, the swing shaft hole 421b (see FIG. 33) formed on the central axis of the pair of swing base members 421 is suppressed from being displaced in the left-right direction, so that the shielding member 420 is displaced in the left-right direction. Is suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 33, the pair of swing base members 421 and the pair of decorative members 422 of the shielding member 420 are in contact with each other in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the overhanging position. As a result, for example, even if one swing base member 421 moves faster than the other swing base member 421 and the pair of swing base members 421 are displaced from each other (deviation in the vertical direction), the other The displacement can be suppressed by the contact with the swing base member 421. As a result, the posture of the shielding member 420 at the overhanging position can be stabilized.

The change in the area of the overlapping portion P will be described. The overlapping portion P means a portion where the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 overlap in the front view. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 30, most of the main body member 410 corresponds to the overlapping portion P from the state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the retracted position to the state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the intermediate position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32, when the main body member 410 is arranged at the overhanging position, the shielding member 420 is moved above the main body member 410, especially in the central portion in the left-right direction, and the area of the overlapping portion P is increased. Is made smaller. That is, the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 can be visually recognized separately.

As a result, the area of the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 in the front view is larger when the main body member 410 is arranged in the overhanging position than when the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position. It is made larger, and the width in the vertical direction is expanded especially in the central part in the horizontal direction. In this case, the area change in the front view of the region formed by the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which easily attracts the attention of the player, can be increased, and the effect is produced. The effect can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the change in the area of the overlapping portion P described above occurs after the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 start to project to the front of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). As a result, the effect can be performed as if the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 expand, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Next, the operation of the swing member 430 of the composite operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 on the line XXXIV-XXXIV of FIG. 28, and FIG. 35 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 on the line XXXV-XXXV of FIG. In FIG. 34, the tilted state of the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is shown by a solid line, and the hanging portion 422b of the decorative member 422 is accommodated between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the main body member 410. The state is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 35, the state in which the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is erected is shown by a solid line, and the state in which the swing member 430 is tilted is shown by an imaginary line for reference, and is arranged in an overhanging state. The moving member 540 of the swinging operation unit 500 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the drive gear 434 is rotated by the drive motor 433 (see FIG. 23), and the transmission gear 435 is rotated accordingly, so that the connecting shaft 435c moves back and forth, and the connecting shaft 435c is connected. When the connecting member 436 pivotally supported by the shaft 435c moves in the front-rear direction, the main body member 431 pivotally supported by the connecting member 436 swings around the shaft support portion 416 (see FIG. 23). In this case, the main body member 431 is moved in the direction of approaching and separating from the decorative member 422b. The swing member 430 can switch between the tilted state shown in FIG. 34 and the standing state shown in FIG. 35 at an arbitrary position, and the posture can be changed as long as it does not interfere with the shielding member 420.

Since the shaft support portion 416 (see FIG. 23) is connected to the lower end side of the swing member 430, when the swing member 430 is in the tilted state (see FIG. 34), the upper end side is arranged to face the shielding member 420. It is possible to secure a large distance D between the main body member 410 and the main body member 410. On the other hand, the movement width of the lower end portion of the swing member 430 on the opposite side of the shielding member 420 can be reduced, and the swing member 430 can be compared with the case where the swing member 430 slides back and forth. The space required for arranging the above can be suppressed.

In other words, when securing a space for accommodating the shielding member 420 by sliding in the front-rear direction, the lower end portion of the swing member 430 on the opposite side of the shielding member 420 also moves by the interval D in the same manner as the upper end portion. As a result, the arrangement space for the swing member 430 increases accordingly. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the swing member 430 is swung, the shielding member 420 is smoothly accommodated between the main body member 410 and the swing member 430, and the arrangement area of the swing member 430 is arranged. It is possible to achieve both suppression and suppression.

In the present embodiment, in particular, the change width d of the outer shape of the lower portion on the front side of the main body member 431 is small while the swinging member 430 tilts. Therefore, even if the main body member 431 is tilted in a state where the other members are close to or in contact with each other below the main body member 431 (see FIG. 9), it is possible to suppress the load from being applied between the members.

In the present embodiment, in the state of FIG. 9, the upper surface of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 40) arranged to face the main body member 431 forms a downwardly convex curved surface, and the main body member 431 is close to this curved surface. The main body member 431 can be tilted at a position (a position where the main body member 431 and the moving member 540 partially overlap each other in the front view). As a result, the posture of the main body member 431 can be changed by a large width at the upper part of the main body member 431 while ensuring the effect that the main body member 431 and the moving member 540 are brought close to each other and visually recognized integrally at the lower part of the main body member 431. it can.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the decorative member 422 of the shielding member 420 is inclined downward (closer to the shaft support 416 (see FIG. 23)) and toward the back surface (main body member 410 side). It is formed so as to be curved in a direction away from the swing member 430. In this case, when the decorative member 422 starts to be accommodated between the swing member 430 and the main body member 410, the distance between the decorative member 422 and the swing member 430 can be secured, and the decorative member 422 and the neck can be secured. Collision with the swing member 430 can be avoided.

Further, the lower end portion of the decorative member 422 can be stored deeply (downward) in the gap formed between the main body member 410 and the swing member 430 while the upper end portion of the decorative member 422 is projected to the front. .. Since no other member is arranged on the front side of the swing member 430, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the front portion of the swing member 430 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the swing member 430 is erected, the decorative member 422 is separated upward from between the swing member 430 and the main body member 410, and the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is separated. The upper end portion and the main body member 410 are arranged close to each other. As a result, it is possible to fill the dead space when the decorative member 422 is not accommodated between the main body member 410 and the swing member 430. Further, by making it possible to form a posture in which the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is arranged close to the main body member 410, the movement width of the swing member 430 in the front-rear direction in the pachinko machine 10 in which the front-rear width is defined is increased. It can be secured, and the effect of swinging the swing member 430 can be improved.

Here, in FIG. 34, a state in which the swing member 430 is arranged above the third symbol display device 81 and the swing member 430 is tilted is shown. In this case, the direction A1 of the effect surface on the front side of the swing member 430 is a direction inclined diagonally downward toward the front. On the other hand, in FIG. 35, the swing member 430 is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), and the state in which the swing member 430 is erected is shown by a solid line. In this case, the direction A2 of the effect surface on the front side of the swing member 430 is directed to the front. That is, by adjusting the degree of swing of the swing member 430, the directions A1 and A2 of the swing member 430 on the front side are directed toward the player's eyes (the center front side of the third symbol display device 81). Can be adjusted to. Therefore, the attention of the swing member 430 can be improved, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, in order to improve the attention of the swing member 430, a new rotating shaft is not provided, and the shaft branch 416 (see FIG. 23) is utilized. That is, the shaft support portion 416 is used for the purpose of securing a distance between the decorative member 422 and the swing member 430 when the decorative member 422 starts to be accommodated between the swing member 430 and the main body member 410. It is also used for the purpose of adjusting the front side orientations A1 and A2 of the member 430 toward the player's eyes (the front side of the center of the third symbol display device 81).

The degree of swing of the swing member 430 can be determined by whether or not the sensor passing portion 435d passes through the photo sensor 417. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 34, the sensor passing portion 435d does not pass through the photo sensor 417. On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 35, the sensor passing portion 435 has passed through the photo sensor 417. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a gap is secured between the swing member 430 and the main body member 410 in a state where the sensor passing portion 435 does not pass through the photo sensor 417.

Therefore, by moving the main body member 410 ascendingly while the sensor passing portion 435 does not pass through the photo sensor 417, the shielding member 420 can be combined with the main body member 410 without interfering with the swinging member 430 and the shielding member 420. It can be accommodated between the swing member 430 and the swing member 430.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37, it will be described that the shape of the hanging portion 422b suppresses the malfunction of the operation of the composite operation unit 400. FIG. 36 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 37 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 in the line XXXVII-XXXVII of FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 36 and 37, a state in which the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is tilted by a predetermined angle from the upright state (see FIG. 35) and the back side of the main body member 431 is in contact with the hanging portion 422b is shown. ..

As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the main body member 410 is moved up and down in a state where the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is in the middle of the standing state (see FIG. 35) and the tilted state (see FIG. 34). There are cases where control is performed. This control is performed, for example, when the combined operation unit 400 is immediately changed from the state shown in FIG. 34 to the state shown in FIG. 35.

Here, the drive motor 462 (see FIG. 21) that drives the main body member 410 after confirming that the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 reaches the tilted state (see the broken line in FIG. 35) from the upright state shown in FIG. 35. If the main body member 431 is rotated, the state in which the back surface side of the main body member 431 comes into contact with the hanging portion 422b cannot occur (see FIG. 34).

However, in this case, the drive motor 462 (see FIG. 21) is rotated after waiting for the completion of the operation of the swing member 430. Therefore, as compared with the case where the drive motor 433 (see FIG. 23) that tilts the swing member 430 and the drive motor 462 that drives the main body member 410 are simultaneously rotated, the composite operation unit 400 is moved from the state of FIG. 34 to FIG. 35. The period for changing to a state becomes longer. In other words, in order to immediately change the combined operation unit 400 from the state of FIG. 34 to the state of FIG. 35, it is necessary to drive the drive motor 433 and the drive motor 462 at the same time. In this case, the main body member 410 of the swing member 430 is moved up and down while the main body member 431 is in the standing state (see FIG. 35) to the tilted state (see FIG. 34). In this case, the main body portion 431 of the swing member 430 may come into contact with the hanging portion 422b, causing the composite operation unit 400 to malfunction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drooping portion 422b is formed in a curved shape (see FIG. 37). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 37, the contact of the swing member 430 with the back surface side (formed by a plane) of the main body member 431 is not a contact on a surface but a contact on a point (line). It is possible to suppress the frictional resistance at the contact position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the composite operation unit 400 from malfunctioning due to the contact between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging portion 422b.

For example, when the state of FIGS. 36 and 37 is a state in which the main body member 410 is in the process of ascending and moving from FIG. 35, the frictional resistance at the contact position between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging portion 422b is increased. If it is large, it causes a decrease in the moving speed of the main body member 410. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the frictional resistance at the contact position between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging portion 422b is suppressed, the moving speed of the main body member 410 can be increased. Further, as the main body member 410 moves upward, the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 tilts with respect to the curved shape of the hanging portion 422b, so that the hanging portion 422b exerts a driving force on the main body member 431 of the swing member 430. A giving relationship arises. As a result, it is possible to reduce the burden on the drive motor 433 to tilt the swing member 430.

Further, for example, when the state of FIGS. 36 and 37 is a state in which the main body member 410 is in the process of descending from FIG. 34, the friction at the contact position between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging portion 422b. If the resistance is large, it becomes a factor that reduces the moving speed of the main body member 410. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the frictional resistance at the contact position between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging portion 422b is suppressed, the moving speed of the main body member 410 can be increased. Further, since the hanging portion 422b is formed so as to be inclined downward and inclined diagonally backward and the back surface side of the main body member 431 is formed in a flat shape, even if the main body member 410 moves downward while they are in contact with each other, the hanging portion is formed. The 422b and the main body member 431 do not get caught in each other.

From these, it is possible to prevent the composite operation unit 400 from malfunctioning by moving the main body member 410 while the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is tilted. Therefore, the state of the composite operation unit 400 can be changed immediately by moving the main body member 410 while the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is tilted.

Next, the swing operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 50. FIG. 38 is a front perspective view of the rocking operation unit 500, and FIG. 39 is a rear perspective view of the rocking operation unit 500. Note that FIGS. 38 and 39 show a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged at the retracted position.

The swing operation unit 500 is composed of a pair of left and right operation units (see FIG. 5), but since they have the same technical configuration, in FIGS. 38 to 50, the operation on the left side of the pair of left and right operation units is performed. The unit will be described as a swinging operation unit 500.

FIG. 40 is a front exploded perspective view of the rocking operation unit 500, and FIG. 41 is a rear exploded perspective view of the rocking operation unit 500. In addition, in FIG. 40, the fastening hole portion 527 is partially magnified, and in FIG. 41, the bridge member 528 is partially magnified.

As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, in the swinging operation unit 500, a rectangular plate-shaped base member 510 and shaft support holes 522 and 526 are formed at both ends of the base member 510, and one side shaft support hole 522 is formed in the base member 510. The distance between the central shafts of the long plate-shaped drive side arm member 520 and the shaft support holes 532 and 533 formed at both ends is the shaft support hole 522 of the drive side arm member 520. , 526 has a length equivalent to the distance between the central shafts, and one side shaft support hole 532 at one end is swingably supported by the base member 510. A horizontally long block-shaped moving member 540 that is swingably supported by the other side shaft support hole 526 of the drive side arm member 520 and the other side shaft support hole 533 of the driven side arm member 530, and the drive side arm member 520. The drive device 550 that generates a driving force for swinging the shaft, and the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are sandwiched between the drive device 550 and the base member 510, and the drive motor 551 is fastened and fixed. Mainly includes a front plate member 560.

The base member 510 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 511, a plurality of shaft support portions 512 projecting in a columnar shape from the right side portion of the main body portion 511 to the front side, and the lowermost shaft support portion 512 thereof. A drive gear receiving hole 513 formed on the left side of the front view of the three shaft portion 512c, a photo sensor 514 arranged on the right side of the shaft support portion 512, and a rectangle from the left side portion of the main body portion 511 to the front side. It mainly includes a lower support portion 515 projecting from the shape.

The main body portion 511 is formed so that the height of the upper end portion of the first shaft portion 512a is different between the left side in front view and the right side in front view. That is, on the left side of the first shaft portion 512a in front view, a step-down portion 511a whose upper side surface is lowered by one step is provided.

The step-down portion 511a has an effect of expanding the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 8) in a state where the moving member 540 of the swing operation unit 500 is arranged at the overhanging position. Further, in a state where the moving member 540 is arranged in the retracted position, for example, when the driven side arm member 530 falls backward, the area where the driven side arm member 530 and the main body portion 511 may come into contact with each other in the front-rear direction is increased. It can be reduced (see FIG. 39). As a result, when the moving member 540 moves from the retracted position to the overhanging position, or when the moving member 540 moves from the overhanging position to the retracted position, the driven side arm member 530 and the main body portion 511 are brought together. The area that may be rubbed can be reduced, and the moving member 540 can be moved smoothly.

The shaft support portion 512 is formed of three rod members whose shafts are parallel to each other while being spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and one end of the driven side arm member is pivotally supported in this order from the top. The shaft portion 512a, the second shaft portion 512b on which one end of the drive side arm member is pivotally supported, and the third shaft portion 512c on which the transmission gear 553 meshed with the drive gear 552 is pivotally supported. Mainly prepare.

The drive gear receiving hole 513 is a through hole for internally fitting a step portion projecting to the back surface side of the drive gear 552.

The lower support portion 515 is brought into contact with the lower side of the lower side surface of the other end portion of the drive side arm member 520 in a state where the drive side arm member 520 is arranged in the retracted position, and the lower support portion 515 is in contact with the lower side of the lower side surface of the other end portion of the drive side arm member 520. The portion is prevented from swinging further downward.

The drive side arm member 520 is a member formed of a resin material, and is one end of a main body plate portion 521 formed in a long plate shape and the main body plate portion 521 (the end portion on the right side when viewed from the front). ), A semicircle centered on a one-sided shaft support hole 522 formed in the front-rear direction and through which the second shaft portion 512b is inserted, and a one-side shaft support hole 522 formed below the one-side shaft support hole 522. A gear portion 523 in which gear teeth are engraved on the outer circumference of the gear portion 523, a sensor passing plate 524 fastened and fixed to a raised portion 521a raised from the vicinity of the outer circumference of the gear portion 523 to the front side, and a one-side shaft support hole 522. A collar member 525 having through holes arranged coaxially and fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body plate 521, and the other end of the main body plate 521 (the left end when viewed from the front) are bored in the front-rear direction. The other side shaft support hole 526 in which the second shaft portion 542b of the moving member 540 is pivotally supported via the collar, and a pair of fastening holes arranged near the other end of the main body plate portion 521 and bored in the front-rear direction. A pair of fastening hole portions 527 including 527a1 and 527b1 and a bridge member 528 through which the insertion portions 528a2 and 528b2 are inserted into the fastening hole portion 527 and fastened and fixed are mainly provided.

The main body plate portion 521 includes a raised portion 521a at one end (right end in FIG. 40), which is inserted into the guide hole portion 563 and the sensor passing plate 524 is fastened and fixed to the tip.

The gear portion 523 is a portion that is meshed with the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553 of the drive device 550 (see FIG. 48), and includes an umbrella portion 523a that is overlaid on the front side.

In the present embodiment, the umbrella portion 523a is formed so as to cover the entire gear tooth 523 (see FIG. 48). However, the umbrella portion 523a does not necessarily have to cover the entire gear tooth 523, and is formed so as to cover at least the gear teeth of the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553, so that the umbrella portion 523a is formed as the second gear portion. The contact with 553b is possible, and the wobbling of the drive side arm member 520 can be prevented.

The sensor passing plate 524 is a member arranged on the front side of the front plate member 560 in the assembled state (see FIG. 42), and is a fastening portion that is raised and fastened to one end of the main body plate portion 521. It mainly includes a 524a and a sensor passing plate portion 524b extending in the radial direction about the one-side shaft support hole 522 in the assembled state from the fastening portion 524a.

The sensor passing plate portion 524b is a member that is arranged to face the front side surface of the front plate member 560 and passes through the inside of the photo sensor 514. Here, the sensor passing plate portion 524b can be brought into contact with the front side surface of the front plate member 560, and the sensor passing plate portion 524b is brought into contact with the front plate member 560 to bring the drive side arm member 520 into contact. Shaft tilting with respect to the biaxial portion 512b is suppressed. On the other hand, the sensor passing plate portion 524b is a member capable of detecting that the drive side arm member 520 is in the retracted position by passing through the inside of the photo sensor 514. That is, the sensor passage plate portion 524b can be used for both increasing the resistance to deformation (shaft tilt) of the drive side arm member 520 and detecting the posture of the drive side arm member 520.

The color member 525 is a plate-shaped member having a substantially diamond shape with rounded outer shapes, and has a main body portion 525a having a circular outer shape having a diameter at the end in the lateral direction of the outer shape, and a main body thereof. An outer fitting hole 525b formed in the center of the portion 525a, and a pair of fastening portions 525c arranged on both the left and right sides of the main body portion 525a and having a tapered tip and fixed to the main body plate portion 521. Mainly prepared.

The pair of fastening hole portions 527 includes a first fastening hole portion 527a to which the first bridge member 528a is fixed, and a second fastening hole portion 527b to which the second bridge member 528b is fixed.

As shown in FIG. 40, since the pair of fastening holes 527 are formed on the other side shaft support portion 526 side (the side on which the moving member 540 is arranged) of the drive side arm member 520, the fastening hole 527 and the one side shaft are formed. A long distance from the support hole 522 can be secured. Therefore, as will be described later, even if the driven side arm member 530 comes into contact with the bridge member 528 and the drive side arm member 520 may be twisted and deformed, the deformation is caused by the fastening hole 527 and the one-side shaft support hole 522. It can be generated using a long distance in the part between and (the twist angle per predetermined length in the longitudinal direction can be reduced). In this case, the load applied from the one-side shaft support hole 522 to the second shaft portion 512b (load in the direction in which the second shaft portion 512b is tilted and folded) can be suppressed, and the durability of the second shaft portion 512b is improved. be able to.

The first fastening hole portion 527a is bored adjacent to the first fastening hole 527a1 to which the first bridge member 528a is fastened and fixed, and the first fastening hole 527a1 and the auxiliary protrusion 528a3 is inserted. The first bridge member 528a is provided with a first pin fastening hole 527a2 to which the first bridge member 528a is non-rotatably fixed.

The first fastening hole 527a1 and the first pinning hole 527a2 are arranged along a line forming a predetermined angle θ1 (θ1 <90 degrees) with respect to the lateral direction of the drive side arm member 520 (see FIG. 43). ..

The second fastening hole 527b is bored adjacent to the second fastening hole 527b1 to which the second bridge member 528b is fastened and fixed, and the second fastening hole 527b1, and the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 is inserted. The second pin fastening hole 527b2 to which the second bridge member 528b is non-rotatably fixed, and the base portion 527b3 formed in such a manner that the outer edges of the second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pin fastening hole 527b2 are raised to the front side. , Equipped with.

The second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pin fastening hole 527b2 are arranged along a line forming a predetermined angle θ2 (θ2 <90 degrees) with respect to the lateral direction of the drive side arm member 520 (see FIG. 43). .. That is, when the second bridge member 528b bends and deforms toward the front side in FIG. 43, the load applied to the drive side arm member 520 is defined as the twisting direction (the direction of rotation about the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 520). It can be divided in the bending direction (the direction in which the drive side arm member 520 bends toward the front side). As a result, when the second bridge member 528b receives a load from the driven side arm member 530 and is flexed and deformed, it is possible to prevent the drive side arm member 520 from being twisted and deformed about the longitudinal direction.

The bridge member 528 is arranged on the opposite side of the other side shaft support 526 with the first bridge member 528a arranged on the side close to the other side shaft support 526 and the first bridge member 528a. A second bridge member 528b, which is formed to be larger (longer and wider in the lateral direction) than the first bridge member 528a, is provided.

The first bridge member 528a projects from the main body portion 528a1 formed in the shape of a long plate, the insertion portion 528a2 that is inserted into and fastened to the first fastening hole 527a1, and the insertion portion 528a2. Auxiliary protrusion 528a3, a rib portion 528a4 formed along the side edge of the main body portion 581a1 on the side close to the other side shaft support hole 526, and projecting toward the back side, and an end portion of the rib portion 528a4. 528a5 is an inclined portion that is inclined with respect to the projecting direction.

The main body portion 528a1 is formed with a length that covers the driven side arm member 530 in a front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 48).

The auxiliary protrusion 528a3 is a portion inserted into the first pin fastening hole 527a2 formed adjacent to the first fastening hole 527a1 of the main body plate portion 521, whereby the bridge member 528 is inserted into the main body plate portion 521. 2 points are supported. Therefore, the bridge member 528 can be fixed to the main body plate portion 521 so as not to rotate relative to each other.

Since the rib portion 528a4 is not formed up to the tip of the main body portion 528a1, contact with the driven side arm member 530 is suppressed at the retracted position (see FIG. 48), and the driven side arm is suppressed at the overhanging position (see FIG. 50). It is formed in such a manner that it easily comes into contact with the member 530. The details will be described later.

The second bridge member 528b is projected adjacent to the main body portion 528b1 formed in the shape of a long plate, the insertion portion 528b2 that is inserted into and fastened to the second fastening hole 527b1, and the insertion portion 528b2. Auxiliary protrusion 528b3, a rib portion 528b4 formed along the side edge of the main body portion 581b1 near the other side shaft support hole 526 and projecting toward the back side, and an end portion of the rib portion 528b4. It mainly includes an inclined portion 528b5 that is inclined with respect to the projecting direction.

The main body portion 528b1 is formed with a length that covers the driven side arm member 530 in a front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 48).

The auxiliary protrusion 528b3 is a portion inserted into the second pin fastening hole 527b2 formed adjacent to the second fastening hole 527b1 of the main body plate portion 521, whereby the bridge member 528 is inserted into the main body plate portion 521. 2 points are supported. Therefore, the bridge member 528 can be fixed to the main body plate portion 521 so as not to rotate relative to each other.

Since the rib portion 528b4 is not formed up to the tip of the main body portion 528b1, contact with the driven side arm member 530 is suppressed at the retracted position (see FIG. 48), and the driven side arm is suppressed at the overhanging position (see FIG. 50). It is formed in such a manner that it easily comes into contact with the member 530. The details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 43, the second bridge member 528b has a width of a portion overlapping the driven side arm member 530 rather than a width of a portion of the main body portion 528b1 (see FIG. 41) fastened to the drive side arm member 520. The one is formed narrower. As a result, when the driven side arm member 530 of the second bridge member 528b comes into contact with the second bridge member 528b, it is possible to prevent the second bridge member 528b from twisting about the longitudinal direction (flexion along the longitudinal direction). Can be made easier).

Therefore, when the driven side arm member 530 and the second bridge member 528b come into contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the second bridge member 528b from being twisted and deformed, and the mode of deformation can be limited. In this case, since the arrangement position of the portion (second pin fastening hole 527b2) for preventing the second bridge member 528b from turning over can be limited, the configuration of the second bridge member 528b can be simplified. .. That is, it is not necessary to form the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 (see FIG. 41) in the lateral direction of the second bridge member 528b with respect to the insertion portion 528b2 (see FIG. 41).

The driven side arm member 530 is a member formed of a resin material, and is one end of a main body plate portion 531 formed in a long plate shape and the main body plate portion 531 (the end portion on the right side when viewed from the front). ), It is bored in the front-rear direction at the one-side shaft support hole 532 through which the first shaft portion 512a is inserted, and at the other end (the left end when viewed from the front) of the main body plate portion 531. The first shaft portion 542a of the moving member 540 is mainly provided with an other side shaft support hole 533 that is pivotally supported via a collar.

The front side surface of the main body plate portion 531 is formed on the same plane as the front side surface of the drive side arm member 520.

The moving member 540 has a main body portion 541 formed from a long block shape in the left-right direction and a curved surface whose upper surface is convex downward, and a columnar protrusion on the back side on the right side of the main body portion 541 when viewed from the rear. It mainly includes a pair of shaft support portions 542 to be provided, and an alignment portion 543 projecting from the right side surface of the main body portion 451.

In the present embodiment, the moving member 540 is formed to be thicker toward the side where the pair of moving members 540 abut (right side in FIG. 42A), so that the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is a pair of moving members. The member 540 is formed on the abutting side and at a position separated from the driven side arm member 530 on the front side (see FIG. 42).

The shaft support portion 542 is formed at the same shaft-to-axis distance as the shaft-to-axis distances of the first shaft portion 512a and the second shaft portion 512b, and in the state shown in FIG. 38, the relative arrangement of the pair of shafts is first. It is formed from a pair of shafts formed in the same arrangement as the shafts of the shaft portion 512a and the second shaft portion 512b, and mainly includes a first shaft portion 542a and a second shaft portion 542b in order from the top.

The first shaft portion 542a is a portion inserted through the other side shaft support hole 533 of the driven side arm member 530, and the second shaft portion 542b is inserted through the other side shaft support hole 526 of the drive side arm member 520. This is the part.

Here, as described above, the distance between the shaft support holes 522 and 526 at both ends of the drive side arm member 520 and the distance between the shaft support holes 532 and 533 at both ends of the driven side arm member 530 are Be the same. Further, the relative arrangement of the first shaft portion 512a and the second shaft portion 512b arranged on the base member 510 and the first shaft portion 542a and the second shaft portion 542b arranged on the moving member 540 is arranged. The relationship (direction and distance of the straight line connecting the axes) is the same. Therefore, a parallel link is formed by the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530, and the posture of the moving member 540 is not changed during the swing of the drive side arm member 520 (FIGS. 48 to 50).

The alignment portion 543 is a portion for aligning the relative positional relationship of the pair of moving members 540 when the moving member 540 is arranged at the overhanging position. The moving member 540 on the right side of the front view (see FIG. 8) is formed with a recess that is recessed so as to accept the positioning portion 543 of the moving member 540 on the left side.

The drive device 550 includes a drive motor 551 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front plate member 560 with the drive shaft facing the rear side, a drive gear 552 that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 551, and one in the drive gear 552. It mainly includes a transmission gear 553 in which the first gear portion 553a of the first stage is meshed and the second gear portion 553b of the second stage is meshed with the gear portion 523 of the drive side arm member 520.

The transmission gear 553 is a member in which two gear teeth having different diameters are coaxially formed, and is a first gear portion 553a formed from a large-diameter gear arranged to face the base member 510, and a first gear portion 553a thereof. A second gear portion 553b formed of gears having a diameter smaller than that of the first gear portion 553a arranged on the front side of the gear portion 551a, and bored at the center of the first gear portion 553a and the second gear portion 553b. It is mainly provided with a shaft support hole 553c which is pivotally supported by the third shaft portion 512c of the base member 510.

The front plate member 560 has a main body portion 561 formed in a horizontally long plate shape, a holding portion 562 recessed in the same arrangement as the arrangement of the shaft support portion 512 of the base member 510, and a fastening portion 524a of the sensor passing plate 524. A guide hole portion 563 formed in an arc shape along the movement locus of the above is mainly provided.

The holding portion 562 is recessed with a diameter equivalent to the diameter of each cylinder of the shaft support portion 512, and the tip end portion of each shaft portion of the shaft support portion 512 is internally fitted and fixed. As a result, the shaft support portion 512 can be supported at both ends, so that the shaft can be stabilized. Therefore, the operation of the drive side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the transmission gear 553 can be stabilized.

The guide hole portion 563 is an arc-shaped elongated hole through which a raised portion 521a projecting from the drive side arm member 520 toward the sensor passing plate 524 is inserted, and extends in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion. A stopper wall portion 563a is provided. As a result, even if the drive-side arm member 520 is displaced in the radial direction with respect to the second shaft portion 512b, the raised portion 521a of the drive-side arm member 520 is brought into contact with the guide hole portion 563 and movement is restricted. , The position of the drive side arm member 520 can be stabilized.

The stopper wall portion 563a is a wall portion for preventing the moving member 540 from swinging beyond the movable range when the moving member 540 is moved toward the overhanging position (see FIG. 43). is there. When the moving member 540 moves to the right from the state shown in FIG. 43, the stopper wall portion 563a and the raised portion 521a (see FIG. 40) to which the sensor passing plate 524 and the sensor passing plate 524 are fastened and fixed are brought into contact with each other. To. The stopper wall portion 563a extends not only to the front side but also to the back side. As a result, the contact area between one end of the drive side arm member 520 and the stopper wall portion 563a can be increased, and the raised portion 521a to which the sensor passing plate 524 and the sensor passing plate 524 are fastened and fixed at the time of contact can be increased. The stress applied to can be reduced.

The end portion of the movable range of the swinging operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43. 42 (a) and 43 are front views of the rocking motion unit 500, and FIG. 42 (b) is a side view of the rocking motion unit 500 in the direction of the arrow XXXIIb of FIG. 42 (a). Note that FIG. 42 shows a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 43 shows a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged in the overhanging position.

As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the posture of the moving member 540 is not changed when the moving member 540 swings from the retracted position to the overhanging position. Therefore, when the pair of left and right moving members 540 (see FIG. 6) are close to each other (both are swung to the overhanging position), the side surfaces arranged to face each other (the right side surface in FIG. 43) remain parallel. Since they are brought close to each other, it is possible to easily fit the alignment portion 543 to unite the pair of moving members 540.

In a state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the overhanging position, the bridge member 528 is placed on the front side surface of the driven side arm member 530. Further, since the distance between the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 is narrowed, the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 can be brought into contact with each other when swinging beyond the overhanging position. As a result, the swing of the drive side arm member 520 can be stopped.

As shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the side (right side of FIG. 42) where the pair of moving members 540 are in contact with each other in the left-right direction, and is front and rear. In the direction, it is formed so as to be separated from the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530.

As shown in FIG. 43, the bridge member 528 fastened and fixed to the front side of the drive side arm member 520 is extended so as to cover the front side of the driven side arm member 530.

Here, with reference to FIG. 44, the difference in the fastening portion between the first bridge member 528a and the second bridge member 528b will be described. Due to the difference at the fastening portion, the ease of turning over the first bridge member 528a and the second bridge member 528b from the drive side arm member 520 differs.

Here, "turning over" means that the bridge member 528 receives a force from the driven side arm member 530 toward the upper side of FIG. 44 and is peeled off from the driving side arm member 520.

44 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the drive side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530 and the first bridge member 528a in the XXXIVa-XXXXIVa line of FIG. 43, and FIG. 44 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first bridge member 528a. It is sectional drawing of the drive side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the 2nd bridge member 528b in -XXXXIVb line.

First, as a first difference, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pinning hole 527b2 for receiving the second bridge member 528b are different from the first fastening hole portion 527a. The base portion 527b3 is formed. As a result, the second embedding width Wb1, which is the embedding width of the insertion portion 528b2 into the second fastening hole 527b1, is longer than the first embedding width Wa1, which is the embedding width of the insertion portion 528a2 into the first fastening hole 527a1. Will be done. Therefore, the second bridge member 528b can be fixed more firmly than the first bridge member 528a (the second bridge member 528b is less likely to be turned over than the first bridge member 528a).

The second difference is that the first overhang width Wa2, which is the overhang width of the insertion portion 528b2 from the main body plate portion 521 in the fastened and fixed state, is the overhang width of the insertion portion 528a2 from the main body plate portion 521. It is shortened as compared with the second overhang width Wb2. Therefore, the second bridge member 528b can suppress the deformation in the vicinity of the fastening position as compared with the first bridge member 528a (the second bridge member 528b is the first bridge member 528a. It's hard to turn over in comparison).

The third difference is that the first fastening hole 527a1 is formed on the opposite side of the driven side arm member 530 with respect to the first pin fastening hole 527a2 (see FIG. 44A), but the second fastening hole 527b1 is the first. The 2-pin fastening hole 527b2 is formed on the side close to the driven side arm member 530 as a reference (see FIG. 44 (b)).

In this case, the driven side arm member 530 moves (deflects and deforms, collapses and deforms) in a direction close to the bridge member 528 (upward in FIG. 44), and is fastened when a load is applied to the bridge member from the driven side arm member 530. There is a difference in how to endure in the part.

That is, when the main body portion 528a1 of the first bridge member 528a is pushed by the driven side arm member 530 and the main body portion 528a1 bends from the insertion portion 528a2, the auxiliary protrusion portion 528a3 separates from the drive side arm member 520 (FIG. 44 (a)). Therefore, the frictional resistance between the side surface of the auxiliary protrusion 528a3 and the inner surface of the first pin fastening hole 527a2 causes a resistance force against the turning of the main body portion 528a1.

On the other hand, when the main body portion 528b1 of the second bridge member 528b is pushed by the driven side arm member 530 and bends from the insertion portion 528b2, the seat surface of the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 is pressed against the drive side arm member 520. (See FIG. 44 (b)). Therefore, in addition to the frictional resistance between the side surface of the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 and the inner side surface of the second pin fastening hole 527b2, the seating surface of the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 is the side surface of the main body plate portion 521 on the front side (upper side of FIG. 44B). By being pressed against the body, resistance to turning over of the main body 528b1 is generated.

Therefore, the resistance to the turning of the second bridge member 528b can be increased as compared with the resistance to the turning of the first bridge member 528a.

The distance between the axes of the second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pinning hole 527b2 is formed longer than the distance between the axes of the first fastening hole 527a1 and the first pin fastening hole 527a2.

Due to the difference from the first to the third described above, the same load is applied from the driven side arm member 530 to either the first bridge member 528a or the second bridge member 528b toward the front side (upper part of FIG. 44). In this case, the second bridge member 528b has a resistance force at the root portion against turning (a force that can withstand turning at the fastening position with the drive side arm member 520) as compared with the first bridge member 528a. growing.

With reference to FIG. 45, a mode of contact between the driven side arm member 530 and the bridge member 528 when the driven side arm member 530 bends and deforms will be described. 45 (a) is a partial side view of the swinging operation unit 500 in the direction of arrow XXXVa of FIG. 43, and FIGS. 45 (b) and 45 (c) are driven sides from the state of FIG. 45 (a). It is a partial side view of the rocking operation unit 500 which showed the state which the arm member 530 bends to the front side in time series.

In addition, in FIG. 45A, a state in which the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are parallel in the longitudinal direction is shown, and in FIG. 45B, the driven side arm member 530 is on the front side (FIG. 45). (B) The state in which the first bridge member 528a is in contact with the bent first bridge member 528a is shown on the left side), and in FIG. 45 (c), the driven side arm member 530 is further bent toward the front side from the state of FIG. 45 (b). The state of contact with the bridge member 528b is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 45, the base member 510, the moving member 540, and the front plate member 560 are virtually illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 45, the first bridge member 528a is arranged closer to the moving member 540 as compared with the second bridge member 528b. Therefore, when the upper end of the driven side arm member 530 bends to the front side (left side in FIG. 45) due to factors such as the weight of the moving member 540 and contact with other members, the first bridge first when the amount of bending is small. The driven side arm member 530 abuts on the bridge member 528a (see FIG. 45B). After that, when the amount of bending of the driven side arm member 530 increases, the first bridge member 528a bends and deforms, and the second bridge member 528b comes into contact with the driven side arm member 530 (see FIG. 45 (c)).

That is, since the displacement of the driven side arm member 530 is larger in the portion in contact with the first bridge member 528a, a larger load is applied to the first bridge member 528a as compared with the second bridge member 528b. Be done.

Here, when the resistance to the bending deformation of the first bridge member 528a is as large as that of the second bridge member 528b, the first bridge member 528a is bent and deformed even if the amount of bending of the driven side arm member 530 is large. It may not (instead, the drive side arm member 520 bends). In this case, the driven side arm member 530 and the second bridge member 528b do not come into contact with each other, and only the first bridge member 528a receives the load from the driven side arm member 530 independently. The durability of the member 528a is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first bridge member 528a is fastened to the drive side arm member 520 in a manner in which the first bridge member 528a is more easily turned over at the root portion than the second bridge member 528b. Therefore, the first bridge member 528a is likely to be turned over (deforms with respect to the drive side arm member 520 near the root) before the driven side arm member 530 comes into contact with the second bridge member 528b.

In addition, the first bridge member 528a is formed to be narrower in the lateral direction and the plate thickness is formed to be the same as that of the second bridge member 528b (see FIG. 44). That is, the cross-sectional coefficient of the second bridge member 528b in the same direction is larger than the cross-sectional coefficient of the first bridge member 528a in the direction of the load applied from the driven side arm member 530 to the bridge member 528. Will be done. Therefore, the first bridge member 528a is more likely to bend in the vertical direction (left-right direction in FIG. 45A) in the lateral direction than the second bridge member 528b.

As a result, the pair of bridge members 528 can abut on the driven side arm member 530 and receive a load (see FIG. 45 (c)), and the load can be distributed and burdened on the pair of bridge members 528. Therefore, the durability of the first bridge member 528a and the second bridge member 528b can be improved.

The method in which the pair of bridge members 528 receive the load from the driven side arm member 530 is not limited to bending the first bridge member 528a. For example, by making the first overhang width Wa2 (see FIG. 44) of the first bridge member 528a longer than that of the present embodiment, the driven side arm member 530 and the first bridge have a deflection amount of FIG. 45 (b). The bridge member 528a may not be brought into contact with the bridge member 528a, and the pair of bridge members 528 may start to come into contact with the driven side arm member 530 at the same time with the amount of deflection shown in FIG. 45 (c). In this case, both the first bridge member 528a and the second bridge member 528b can receive the load from the driven side arm member 530, and the load is applied to the first bridge member 528a and the second bridge member 528b. Can be distributed and burdened.

On the other hand, when the amount of deflection is small (see FIG. 45B), the driven side arm member 530 does not come into contact with any of the pair of bridge members 528, so that it is difficult to suppress the bending of the driven side arm member 530. (Up to the amount of deflection in FIG. 45 (c), the deflection is suppressed only by the rigidity of the driven side arm member 530).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the amount of deflection of the driven side arm member 530 is small, the bending can be suppressed by bringing the driven side arm member 530 into contact with the first bridge member 528a (FIG. 45). See (b)). Further, as described above, when the amount of bending of the driven side arm member 530 becomes large, the first bridge member 528a is bent and deformed, and the driven side arm member 530 and the second bridge member 528b are brought into contact with each other. As a result, the pair of bridge members 528 can receive the load from the driven side arm member 530, and the load can be distributed to the pair of bridge members 528 to bear the load. Therefore, the first bridge member 528a and The durability of the second bridge member 528b can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the front-rear relationship between the drive side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the bridge member 528 will be described. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of the drive-side arm member 520 and the driven-side arm member 530 in the line XXXXIV-XXXXIV of FIG. 43. In FIG. 46, only the cross-sectional view of the long portion of the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 is shown for easy understanding, and the shapes of the end portions of the arm members 520 and 530 are omitted. To do.

As shown in FIG. 46, the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are formed so that the front side surface (the side surface above FIG. 46) is substantially the same plane, and the bridge member 528 is the driven side arm member 530. It is put on the front side of. Therefore, the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side along the arrow B1 (deflection deformation or tilt deformation), or the drive side arm member 520 moves to the back side along the arrow B2 (deflection deformation or tilt deformation). Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the drive-side arm member 520 from rotating (twisting and deforming) along the arrow B3. That is, by bringing the bridge member 528 and the driven side arm member 530 into contact with each other, the relative movement (deformation) between the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 can be suppressed.

Here, the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43) is arranged on the front side of the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530, and the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the front side of each arm member 520, 530. (See FIG. 42). As described above, since the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed closer to the side where the pair of moving members 540 abut (right side in FIG. 43), the driven side arm member 530 is in front of the driving side arm member 520. There is a great risk of falling. On the other hand, when the driven side arm member 530 tilts forward, the driven side arm member 530 of the bridge member 528 is supported (contacted) from the front side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the driven side arm member 530 from moving to the front side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 43), and accordingly, it is possible to prevent the moving member 540 from moving to the front side.

Since the drive-side arm member 520 is a member to which the driving force is transmitted, the drive-side arm member 520 may wobble in the swing axis direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46) depending on the transmission condition. The wobbling can be suppressed by the contact between the bridge member 528 and the driven side arm member 530.

On the other hand, when the drive side arm member 520 moves to the front side (deflection deformation or tilt deformation) along the arrow B1 or rotates clockwise (twist deformation) in the opposite direction of the arrow B3, the bridge Since the bridge member 528 is moved in a direction away from the driven side arm member 530, it becomes difficult to suppress the movement of the drive side arm member 520. Therefore, it is preferable that there is a mechanism for preventing these movements. Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the drive side arm member 520 is suppressed from moving toward the front side (deflection movement or tilting deformation) along the arrow B1, and the drive side arm member 520 is in the opposite direction of the arrow B3. A mechanism for suppressing clockwise rotation (torsional deformation) will be described.

FIG. 47 is a partial cross-sectional view of the swinging operation unit 500 in the line XXXXV-XXXXV of FIG. 43. As shown in FIG. 47, one end of the drive side arm member 520 is brought into contact with the transmission gear 553 from the front side (upper side of FIG. 47). That is, the gear portion 523 is brought into contact with the front side of the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553, and in addition, the umbrella portion 523a is brought into contact with the front side of the second gear portion 553b. Here, regardless of the arrangement of the drive side arm member 520, the transmission gear 553 is arranged on the opposite side of the driven side arm member 530 with respect to the straight line connecting the shaft support holes 522 and 526 formed at both ends of the drive arm member 520. It is installed (see FIGS. 48 to 50).

Therefore, when the side of the drive side arm member 520 close to the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side (twisting and deforming in the opposite direction of the arrow B3 in FIG. 46), the gear portion 523 is pressed against the first gear portion 553a. The umbrella portion 523a is moved in the direction of being pressed against the second gear portion 553b. In this case, the deformation resistance of the drive side arm member 520 increases. Therefore, the movement (twisting deformation) of the drive side arm member 520 in the opposite direction of the arrow B3 in FIG. 46 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 47, the sensor passing plate 524 is arranged on the front side of the front plate member 560 at the tip of one end of the drive side arm member 520. As a result, when the other end (right side of FIG. 47) of the drive side arm member 520 moves to the front side along the arrow B1 (deflection deformation or tilt deformation), one end sandwiching the second shaft portion 512b is sandwiched. The deformation resistance of the drive-side arm member 520 can be increased by the sensor passing plate 524 coming into contact with the front plate member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the other end of the drive-side arm member 520 from moving in the direction of the arrow B1 (deflection deformation or tilting deformation).

As shown in FIG. 47, the collar member 525 is formed to have a thickness substantially equal to the thickness of the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553. As shown in FIG. 41, the color member 525 is formed in a shape smaller than the outer shape of one end of the drive side arm member 520 in the front view. Therefore, the color member 525 causes the base member 510 and the drive side arm member. The contact area with 520 can be suppressed. Therefore, the contact resistance when the drive side arm member 520 is swung can be suppressed, and the drive motor 551 can be downsized.

Next, the swinging operation of the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. 48 to 50 are front views of the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530. In FIG. 48, the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are arranged at the retracted position as in FIG. 42, and in FIG. 49, the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm are arranged from the state of FIG. 48. A state in which the member 530 is swung by a predetermined amount is shown in FIG. 50, and a state in which the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are arranged at the overhanging positions is shown in FIG. Further, in FIGS. 48 to 50, the outer shape of the moving member 540 is shown by an imaginary line, the sensor passing plate 524 is not shown, and a part of the collar member 525 and the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553 is shown by a hidden line. In addition to being shown, the umbrella portion 523a of the gear portion 523 is partially omitted so that the gear teeth can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIGS. 48 to 50, the distance between the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 is shortened from the retracted position to the overhanging position. Therefore, the area covered by the driven side arm member 530 increases as the bridge member 528 moves from the retracted position to the overhanging position, and the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side and abuts on the bridge member 528. The resistance force generated from the bridge member 528 can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 48, the rib portion 528a4 of the first bridge member 528a and the rib portion 528b4 of the second bridge member 528b are formed on one side shaft support hole 532 and the other side shaft support hole of the driven side arm member 530. It is formed below the straight line connecting 533. Therefore, at the retracted position, the driven side arm member may change its posture in such a manner that the portion above the straight line connecting the one-side shaft support hole 532 and the other-side shaft support hole 533 falls to the front side (front side in FIG. 48). The distance between the 530 and the bridge member 528 can be kept large. As a result, when the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 start from the retracted position, the driven side arm member 530 falls forward and comes into contact with the bridge member 528, so that the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side It is possible to prevent the swing resistance of the arm member 530 from increasing.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 50, the rib portion 528a4 of the first bridge member 528a and the rib portion 528b4 of the second bridge member 528b are arranged at intermediate positions in the longitudinal direction of the driven side arm member 530. .. Therefore, at the overhanging position, the distance between the driven side arm member 530 and the bridge member 528, which may change in posture in a manner of tilting and deforming starting from the one-side shaft support portion 532, can be narrowed. As a result, at the overhanging position, the driven side arm member 530 and the bridge member 528 can be brought into contact with each other while the amount of deformation of the driven side arm member 530 is small.

That is, the rib portions 528a4 and 528b4 suppress the swing resistance when the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 start from the retracted position, and the driven side arm member 530 is arranged at the overhanging position. In the state, it is possible to make the driven side arm member 530 and the bridge member 528 come into contact with each other while the amount of deformation of the driven side arm member 530 is small.

Further, at least a part of the bridge member 528 is arranged on the front side of the driven side arm member 530 while the drive side arm member 520 is arranged from the retracted position to the overhanging position. .. As a result, the driven side arm member 530 moves in the axial direction while the bridge member 528 is not arranged on the front side of the driven side arm member 530, and the side surface of the driven side arm member 530 is arranged to face the drive side arm member 520. It is possible to prevent the bridge member 528 from coming into contact with the bridge member 528. Further, since the driven side arm member 530 can always come into contact with the bridge member 528, the effect of suppressing the axial misalignment of the driven side arm member 530 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 50, in a state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the overhanging position, the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are on the side where the pair of moving members 540 are in contact with each other (right side in FIG. 50). Take an inclined posture on the opposite side of. Therefore, it may be necessary to keep the drive motor 551 operating in order to maintain the arrangement of the moving member 540 (to prevent the drive side arm member 520 from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the side where the pair of moving members 540 abut (right side in FIG. 50). Therefore, in the state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the overhanging position, the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 receive a load from the moving member 540 in the clockwise direction in the front view. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drive side arm member 520 from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front, so that it is not necessary to continue operating the drive motor 551 while the moving member 540 is arranged at the overhanging position. The power consumption of the drive motor 551 can be reduced.

As described above, the transmission gear 553 and the gear portion 523 formed at one end of the drive side arm member 520 are brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIGS. 48 to 50, the contact surfaces of the transmission gear 553 and the gear portion 523 are moved in substantially the same direction (left side of FIG. 48) during the swinging operation of the drive side arm member 520.

That is, the driving force required for the rotation of the gear portion 523 is not only from the meshing with the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553, but also the side surface of the first gear portion 553a (front side in FIG. 48) and the gear. It can also be transmitted by contact with the side surface on the back side of the portion 523. This can be rephrased as reducing the swing resistance of the drive side arm member 520. As a result, the driving force required for the drive motor 551 can be reduced, and the drive motor 551 can be miniaturized.

As shown in FIG. 48, the collar member 525 has a longitudinal direction connecting the pair of fastening portions 525c and a lateral direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, and the longitudinal direction is a posture along the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 520. It is fastened and fixed to the drive side arm member 520. As a result, the collar member 525 and the base member are contacted along the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 520 as compared with the range in which the collar member 525 and the base member 510 are in contact with each other along the lateral direction of the drive side arm member 520. The range of contact with 510 is increased.

Therefore, the other end of the drive-side arm member 520 (the left end in FIG. 48) is inserted into the one-side shaft support hole 522 in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 40) starting from the second shaft portion 512b (see FIG. 40). The range in which the color member 525 is pressed against the base member 510 (see FIG. 40) can be increased when the color member 525 is deformed in the vertical direction of the paper surface. As a result, the deformation resistance of the drive side arm member 520 can be increased.

Further, the straight line L connecting the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 535 always intersects the circular outer shape of the main body portion 525a of the collar member 525. That is, it does not intersect with the outer shape of the fastening portion 525c. As a result, the distance between the shafts of the collar member 525 and the transmission gear 553 can be suppressed to the minimum length.

In other words, since it is not necessary to insert the fastening portion 525c arranged in the longitudinal direction of the collar member 525 between the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 553, the central axis of the collar member 525 and the transmission gear The distance between the axes of 553 and the central axis can be shortened. The distance between the axes is at least a distance at which the main body portion 525a of the collar member 525 and the transmission gear 553 can be arranged to face each other. As a result, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the collar member 525 can be improved, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the drive side arm member 520 can be improved.

Further, even when the distance between the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 555 is the same, when the fastening portion 525c is inserted between the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 553. In comparison, the contact area between the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553 and the drive side arm member 520 in the axial direction can be increased.

Next, the rocking operation unit 2500 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 51. In the first embodiment, the case where the end portion of the bridge member 528 of the swinging motion unit 500 is not fixed has been described, but in the swinging motion unit 2500 in the second embodiment, the main body portion 2561 of the front plate portion 2560 is used. A thickening portion 2561a for accommodating the tip of the bridge member 2528 is provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

51 (a) and 51 (b) are partial front views of the swinging operation unit 2500 in the second embodiment. Note that FIG. 51 (a) shows a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 51 (b) shows a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged in the overhanging position. In 51 (a) and 51 (b), the moving member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), the main body portion 2528a of the bridge member 2528 is formed over the width direction of the driven side arm member 530. As a result, when the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side (front side of the paper in FIG. 51) (falling deformation or bending deformation), the area of the main body portion 2528a that comes into contact with the driven side arm member 530 is set to the first embodiment. It can be expanded in comparison, and the movement of the driven side arm member 530 can be suppressed.

The main body portion 2561 of the front plate member 2560 is formed by thickening the thickening portion 2561a in the front-rear direction (vertical direction on the paper surface of FIG. 51) at the upper end portion thereof, and recessing downward from the upper end surface of the thickening portion 2561a. The accommodating portion 2561b is provided.

The accommodating portion 2561b is a recess that is recessed in a state of being closed on all sides in a top view, and is a recess in which the tip portion of the bridge member 2528 is accommodated in a state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the overhanging position. Is. The inner surface of the accommodating portion 2561b includes a movement locus of the tip portion of the bridge member 2528 (the upper tip portion of FIG. 51 (a)) (the tip portion of the bridge member 2528 is moved during the movement of the moving member 540). It is formed in a mode that does not abut on the inner surface of the accommodating portion 2561b). This prevents the bridge member 2528 from coming into contact with the inner surface of the drive side arm member 2520 in the inner surface of the accommodating portion 2561b during the movement of the moving member 540 from the retracted position to the overhanging position. can do.

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), the end portion of the bridge member 2528 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2561b in a state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the overhanging position. Therefore, for example, when the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side (for example, falls and deforms) and applies a load to the bridge member 2528, the resistance to the load can be improved.

That is, when the tip of the bridge member 2528 is not accommodated in the accommodating portion 2561b, the bridge member 2528 is cantilevered and resistant to the load from the driven side arm member 530 (the load toward the front side in FIG. 51). (The bridge member 2528 is fastened to the drive side arm member 2520). On the other hand, when the tip of the bridge member 2528 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2561b, a resistance force can be generated by the double-sided support against the load from the driven side arm member 530 (fastening with the driving side arm 2520). Supported by the position and the accommodating portion 2561b). As a result, it is possible to prevent the driven side arm member 530 from moving to the front side.

Further, since the bridge member 2528 is fastened and fixed to the drive side arm member 2520, the tip portion of the bridge member 2528 is housed in the accommodating portion 2561b, so that the drive side arm member 2520 is aligned in the front-rear direction. be able to.

In this case, the moving members 540 of the swinging operation unit 2500 formed in pairs on the left and right can be aligned in the front-rear direction, and the pair of moving members 540 are arranged at the overhanging positions (see FIG. 8). In the above, it is possible to prevent the pair of moving members 540 from being displaced relative to each other in the front-rear direction. Since the accommodating portion 2561b is arranged at a position closer to the contact position (see FIG. 8) between the pair of moving members 540 as compared with the driving side arm member 2520, the moving members 540 generated starting from the accommodating portion 2561b It is possible to reduce the misalignment of.

As a result, the effect of correcting the misalignment between the pair of moving members 540 can be ensured, and the pair of moving members 540 can be visually recognized integrally in the state where the pair of moving members 540 are arranged at the overhanging positions, thereby producing an effect. Can be improved.

Next, the rocking operation unit 3500 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 52. In the first embodiment, the case where the outer surface of the umbrella portion 523a of the drive side arm member 520 is formed in an arc shape has been described, but the swinging operation unit 3500 in the third embodiment is stretched outward from the umbrella portion 523a. An overhanging portion 3523b is provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

52 (a) to 52 (c) are front views of the rocking operation unit 3500 according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 52 (d) is a rocking on the Ld-Ld line of FIG. 52 (b). It is sectional drawing of the operation unit 3500. In FIG. 52, for easy understanding, only the base member 3510, the drive side arm member 3520, and the drive device 550 are shown, and the other members are omitted, and the photosensor 514 and the drive of the base member 3510 are shown. The illustration of the sensor passing plate 524 of the side arm member 3520 is omitted.

Further, FIG. 52 (a) shows a state in which the drive side arm member 3520 and the moving member 540 (see FIG. 7) are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 52 (b) shows the drive side arm member 3520 and the moving member. The state in which the 540 (see FIG. 7) is rotated by a predetermined angle from the retracted position is shown, and in FIG. 52 (c), the drive side arm member 3520 and the moving member 540 (see FIG. 7) are arranged in the overhanging position. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 52, the drive-side arm member 3520 includes an overhanging portion 3523b extending outward in the axial direction from the umbrella portion 523a. The overhanging portion 3523b is arranged below the second shaft portion 512b regardless of the posture of the drive side arm member 3520, and the width between the outer peripheral wall 3516 and the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553. It is formed with the above width (see FIG. 52 (b)). That is, during the swinging operation of the drive-side arm member 3520, either the outer peripheral wall 3516 or the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553 is arranged to face each other on the back surface side of the overhanging portion 3523b.

The base member 3510 includes an outer peripheral wall 3516 formed to be curved along the outer circumference of the umbrella portion 523a on the outer side in the axial direction of the umbrella portion 523a. The outer peripheral wall 3516 is projected from the front side of the main body portion 511 of the base member 3510 to a height equivalent to the front side surface of the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553 (see FIG. 52 (d)).

From these, it is possible to prevent the drive side arm member 3520 from moving (tilting deformation or bending deformation) to the front side starting from the second shaft portion 512b of the shaft support portion 512. That is, the drive side arm member 3520 moves to the front side (tilt deformation or flexure deformation) above the second shaft portion 512b due to the weight of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43), and is below the second shaft portion 512b. In, it moves to the back side (falling deformation or bending deformation). In this case, in addition to the umbrella portion 523a abutting on the front side surface of the transmission gear 553, the overhanging portion 3523b abuts on the front end surface of the outer peripheral wall 3516. As a result, the movement (falling deformation or bending deformation) of the drive side arm member 3520 can be suppressed by abutting at two positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), when the drive side arm member 3520 is arranged at the overhanging position, the drive side arm member is compared with the case where the drive side arm member 3520 is arranged at another position. The contact position between the 3520 and the transmission gear 553 in the front-rear direction can be set to a position separated from the second shaft portion 512b in the shaft radial direction.

That is, when the drive side arm member 3520 is arranged at the overhang position, the umbrella portion 523a is arranged so as to face the front side surface of the gear tooth portion of the second gear portion 553b, while the overhang portion 3523b is arranged at the second gear portion. It is arranged against the front side surface of the main body portion of 553b. In this case, the overhanging portion 3523b can come into contact with the main body portion of the second gear portion 553b in the front-rear direction. Such an arrangement is not seen in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b).

Further, in the state where the drive side arm member 3520 is arranged at the overhanging position, the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 3520 is along the vertical direction, so that the weight of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43) causes the drive side arm member 3520 to move. It is a state in which movement in the front-back direction (falling deformation or bending deformation) is likely to occur with a large width. In the present embodiment, as described above, the contact position between the drive side arm member 3520 and the transmission gear 553 in the front-rear direction can be set to a position separated from the second shaft portion 512b in the shaft radial direction, so that the drive side arm member The resistance to the movement of the 3520 in the front-rear direction can be increased, and the movement can be suppressed.

Next, the combined operation unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. In the first embodiment, the case where the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 is a smooth elongated hole without being caught has been described, but the composite operation unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment has a recessed portion on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b. 4424c is formed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 53 is a front view of the combined operation unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged at an intermediate position. In addition, in FIGS. 53 and 54, the illustration of the color member of the slide shaft portion 423e is omitted, and the shaft portion can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 53, when the main body 410 of the composite operation unit 4400 moves downward from the retracted position and is arranged at the intermediate position, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 hits the inner end of the guide hole 4424b. Contact. A recessed portion 4424c, which is a recess capable of accommodating a part of the slide shaft portion 423e, is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b arranged directly above the abutting position. The recessed portion 4424c is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of curvature of the recessed portion 4424c is formed to be equal to or greater than the radius of the slide shaft portion 423e.

Here, when the main body member 410 moves downward from the retracted position, the shaft support hole 423d arranged at the opposite end of the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 moves in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 abuts against the inner end of the guide hole 4424b and rebounds, the shaft support hole 423d rebounds in the vertical direction. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e also bounces upward due to the momentum of the bounce in the vertical direction.

The effect of the recessed portion 4424c will be described with reference to FIG. 54. 54 (a) and 54 (b) are partial front views of the combined operation unit 4400. FIG. 54 (a) shows a state immediately before the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 abuts on the inner end of the guide hole 4424b, and FIG. 54 (b) shows the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423. The state immediately after abutting on the inner end of the guide hole 4424b is shown. In FIG. 54, the slide lever 473, the solenoid 474, the wiring guide arm 480, and the like are omitted for ease of understanding, and the moving directions of the opposite ends of the slide shaft portion 423e and the slide shaft portion 423e. Are illustrated by arrows C41 to C44.

As shown in FIG. 54A, when the main body member 410 is moved downward and the end of the connecting member 423 on the opposite side of the slide shaft portion 423e is moved downward along the arrow C42, the slide shaft portion is moved downward. The 423e abuts on the lower side surface of the guide hole 4424b and slides along the arrow C41. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e is not accommodated in the recessed portion 4424c.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54B, the slide shaft portion 423e abuts against the inner end of the guide hole 4424b and bounces off, and the opposite end of the connecting member 423 of the slide shaft portion 423e is along the arrow C44. When it bounces upward, the slide shaft portion 423e is also pressed upward. In this case, the slide shaft portion 423e abuts on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b and tries to slide along the arrow C43. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e is housed in the recessed portion 4424c.

Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e and the recessed portion 4424c can be brought into contact with each other in the left-right direction, which is the elongated direction of the guide hole 4424b. In this case, a large resistance can be generated against the slide shaft portion 423e that tends to move in the elongated direction of the guide hole 4424b.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the slide shaft portion 423e from moving along the left-right direction of the guide hole 4424b. Therefore, the rebound width of the slide shaft portion 423e can be reduced, and the arrangement of the shielding member 420 can be stabilized. By moving the main body member 410 (see FIG. 21) upward by the drive device 460, the slide shaft portion 423e is driven inside the guide hole 4424b in the left-right direction.

Next, the combined operation unit 5400 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. In the first embodiment, the case where the end portion of the connecting member 423 on the slide shaft portion 423e side is in contact with only the guide plate 424 has been described, but the composite operation unit 5400 in the fifth embodiment is a slide of the connecting member 5423. A leaf spring member 5425, which is a plate-shaped spring member that abuts on the end on the shaft portion 423e side, is formed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 is a rear view of the combined operation unit 5400 in the fifth embodiment in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position. As the main body member 410 moves downward from the retracted position, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 moves in the left-right direction inside the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 5424.

The connecting member 5423 includes a projecting portion 5423f projecting from an end portion of the rod member 423a on the slide shaft portion 423e side. The projecting portion 5423f is projected vertically upward with the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 arranged at the inner end of the guide hole 424b, and is projected on the right side in the rear view (FIG. 56 (c)). The corners on the right side) are rounded and chamfered, and the corners on the left side when viewed from the rear are formed at right angles.

The guide plate 5424 includes a grip portion 5424c projecting in a U-shape on the back surface side of the base plate 424a at the upper outer end of the pair of guide holes 424b. The grip portion 5424c is formed in such a manner that the open side of the U-shaped portion is directed inward in the left-right direction and one end of the leaf spring member 5425 is sandwiched by the inner side surface of the U-shaped portion.

The details of the leaf spring member 5425 will be described with reference to FIG. 56. 56 (a) to 56 (c) are partial rear views of the combined operation unit 5400. In addition, in FIGS. 56 (a) to 56 (c), the movement of the connecting member 5423 is shown in chronological order, and the periphery of the guide hole 424b on the left side of the rear view is partially shown in FIG. 56 (a). In FIG. 56 (b), the main body member 410 (see FIG. 55) is arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG. 56 (b), the main body member 410 is moved from the retracted position to the intermediate position by a predetermined distance. In c), the states in which the main body member 410 is arranged at the intermediate position are illustrated.

For ease of understanding, in FIG. 56, only the decorative member 422, the connecting member 5423, the guide plate 5424, and the leaf spring member 5425 are shown, and the other members are not shown. Further, the decorative member 422 and the connecting member 5423 show only the outer shape, and the illustration of the internal pattern and the like is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 56A, the leaf spring member 5425 is arranged in a posture in which the elongated direction is directed to the left-right direction, and one end thereof is gripped by the grip portion 5424c in a straight plate-like fixed portion 5425a. And the curved portion 5425b which is connected to the other end portion of the fixed portion 5425a and is formed to be curved so as to project toward the connecting member side, and the lateral direction from the end portion inside the curved portion 5425b (right side in FIG. 56A). It mainly includes a fall prevention unit 5425c, which is extended to.

The curved portion 5425b is formed so that the first inclined surface 5425b1 formed on the outer side in the left-right direction and the second inclined surface 5425b2 formed on the inner side in the left-right direction have different inclination angles with respect to the left-right direction. That is, the first inclined surface 5425b1 is gently inclined from the left-right direction (the inclination angle is reduced), and the second inclined surface 5425b2 is sharply inclined from the left-right direction (the inclination angle is increased to near a right angle).

The fall prevention portion 5425c comes into contact with the upper end portion of the projecting portion 5423f in a state where the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 is arranged at the inner end (right side in FIG. 56A) of the guide hole 424b. As a result, even if the end of the leaf spring member 5425 on the opposite side of the grip portion 5424c may hang downward due to deterioration over time or the like, in the state of FIG. 56 (c), the projecting portion 5423f holds the leaf spring member 5425. Since it is lifted, the arrangement relationship between the leaf spring member 5425 and the projecting portion 5423f can be maintained. That is, it is possible to prevent the end portion of the leaf spring member 5425 on the opposite side of the grip portion 5424c from hanging downward.

Here, the change in the direction of the force generated between the projecting portion 5423f and the leaf spring member 5425 during the movement of the connecting member 5423 will be described. When the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 is arranged at the left end of the guide hole 424b, the projecting portion 5423f and the leaf spring member 5425 are separated from each other, so that the projecting portion 5423f and the leaf spring member 5425 are separated from each other. No force is generated (see FIG. 56 (a)).

As the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 moves toward the inside of the guide hole 424b in the left-right direction (right side in FIG. 56A), the posture of the connecting member 5423 changes, and the protruding portion 5423f becomes the leaf spring member 5425. They gradually approach each other and eventually come into contact with each other (see FIG. 56 (b)). The connecting member 5423 continues to move inward in the left-right direction, and the upper end of the projecting portion 5423f is gradually moved upward, so that the free end side of the leaf spring member 5425 (right end side in FIG. 56B) The end gradually moves upward.

When the protruding portion 5423f and the first inclined surface 5425b1 of the curved portion 5425b of the leaf spring member 5425 are in contact with each other, the force F51 applied from the protruding portion 5423f to the leaf spring member 5425 is the first inclined surface 5425b1 of the curved portion 5425b. It is transmitted in the normal direction of. That is, the force F51 faces in the thickness direction of the leaf spring member 5425, that is, in the direction of bending the leaf spring member 5425. In this case, since the component of the force applied to the connecting member 5423 as a reaction of the force F51 is small in the left-right direction, the leaf spring member 5425 causes the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 to move to the right. It is suppressed that the movement of the connecting member 5423 is hindered. As a result, the insertion shaft portion 421c (see FIG. 55) is maintained at the lower end of the guide hole 413 (see FIG. 55) until the main body member 410 (see FIG. 55) reaches the intermediate position. can do.

When the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 reaches the inner end portion in the left-right direction of the guide hole 424b (the end portion on the right side in FIG. 56C) and bounces off, the protruding portion 5423f is the curved portion 5425b of the leaf spring member 5425. The second inclined surface 5425b2 of the above is abutted (see FIG. 56 (c)).

In this case, the force F52 applied from the projecting portion 5423f to the leaf spring member 5425 is transmitted in the normal direction of the second inclined surface 5425b2 of the curved portion 5425b. That is, the force F52 has a large component directed in the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring member 5425, that is, in the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring member 5425.

Here, the leaf spring is easily elastically deformed in the thickness direction, but the leaf spring is unlikely to be elastically deformed in the longitudinal direction. In the present embodiment, the direction of the force F52 can be directed to the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring member 5425 by increasing the inclination angle of the right side surface of the curved portion 5425b to near a right angle with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the resistance force of the leaf spring member 5425 to the rebound of the connecting member 5423 can be increased, and the connecting member 5423 can be prevented from moving. Therefore, the connecting member 5423 can be maintained at the end inside the guide hole 424b (on the right side in FIG. 56C).

Further, as described above, the projecting portion 5423f is chamfered with rounded corners on the right side in the rear view (right side in FIG. 56C), and the left corner in the rear view is formed at a right angle. As a result, when the corner on the right side of the projecting portion 5423f in the rear view abuts on the leaf spring member 5425 (see FIG. 56B), the projecting portion 5423f abuts smoothly (without biting) on the left side of the projecting portion 5423f in the rear view. When the corner abuts on the leaf spring member 5425 (see FIG. 56 (c)), the projecting portion 5423f bites into the leaf spring member 5425. That is, the corner on the left side of the projecting portion 5423f when viewed from the rear is fitted between the second inclined surface 5425b2 of the leaf spring member 5425 and the fall prevention portion 5425c.

By moving the main body member 410 (see FIG. 55) upward by the drive device 460 (see FIG. 21), the slide shaft portion 423e is driven inside the guide hole 4424b in the left-right direction. In this case, the projecting portion 5423f moves away from the curved portion 5425b of the leaf spring member 5425.

Next, the combined operation unit 6400 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. In the first embodiment, the case where the wiring guide arm 480 for guiding the wiring is expanded and contracted by folding is described, but in the composite operation unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment, the wiring guide slide 6480 for guiding the wiring can be expanded and contracted by sliding movement. Is formed in. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 57 is a partial front view of the combined operation unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the overhanging position. Note that FIG. 57 shows the extended state of the wiring guide slide 6480. In the extended state of the wiring guide slide 6480, the wiring W arranged inside the wiring guide slide 6480 has few bends and is formed substantially linearly. Therefore, the required length of the wiring W can be suppressed.

The wiring guide slide 6480 is provided in the extending direction of the first guide slide 6488, which is swingably supported around the shaft support portion 472 and the wiring W is inserted therein, and the slide elongated hole 6481b of the first guide slide 6481. A second guide slide 6482 that is slid along the line and the wiring W is inserted inside, and a third guide that is slid along the extending direction of the slide elongated hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482 and the wiring W is inserted inside. It mainly comprises slide 6483.

The first guide slide 6481 has a rectangular tubular main body portion 6481a in which a substantially rectangular through hole 6481a1 is formed in the longitudinal direction, and a pair of side surfaces (arranged in the front-rear direction) arranged to face each other within the side surfaces of the main body portion 6481a. A pair of slide elongated holes 6481b formed so as to face each other and formed along the longitudinal direction of the main body 6481a, and a shaft support 472 which is formed in the front-rear direction at the end of the main body 6481a. Mainly includes a shaft support hole 6481c and a cylindrical columnar portion 6481d bridged in the front-rear direction to the lower end portion of the through hole 6481a1 of the main body portion 6481a.

The extending direction of the slide elongated hole 6481b is formed in parallel with the lower side surface (the side surface on the left side of FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6481a. The wiring W is wound around the cylindrical portion 6481d from below.

The second guide slide 6482 is a rectangular tubular main body portion 6482a and a main body portion 6482a that is slidably fitted in the through hole 6481a1 of the first guide slide 6781 to form a substantially rectangular through hole 6482a1 in the longitudinal direction. A pair of slide elongated holes 6482b formed facing each other and formed along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6482a, and a main body portion 6482a. Mainly includes a pair of projecting portions 6482c that project outward from the front and rear side surfaces of the above and are inserted into the slide elongated holes 6481b of the first guide slide 6488.

The extending direction of the slide elongated hole 6482b and the lower side surface of the main body portion 6482a (the side surface on the left side of FIG. 57) are formed in parallel. The projecting portion 6482c is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the slide elongated hole 6481b.

In the second guide slide 6482, the projecting portion 6482c is formed so as to be slidable inside the slide slot 6481b of the first guide slide 6488, and the outer surface of the second guide slide 6482 is the main body portion 6481a during the movement. It comes into contact with the inner surface of the through hole 6481a1. That is, the distance from the central axis of the slide elongated hole 6481b of the first guide slide 6488 to the inner surface of the lower side surface (the side surface on the left side of FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6481 is from the central axis of the projecting portion 6482c to the main body portion 6482a. It is formed approximately equal to the distance to the outer surface of the lower side surface. Thereby, when the second guide slide 6482 is slid with respect to the first guide slide 6488, the posture of the second guide slide 6482 can be stabilized.

The third guide slide 6483 is a rectangular tubular main body portion 6483a that is slidably fitted in the through hole 6482a1 of the second guide slide 6482 and has a substantially rectangular through hole 6483a1 formed in the longitudinal direction, and a main body thereof. It mainly includes a pair of projecting portions 6483b that project outward from the front and rear side surfaces of the portion 6483a and are inserted into the slide elongated holes 6482b of the second guide slide 6482.

In the third guide slide 6483, the projecting portion 6483b is formed so as to be slidable inside the slide elongated hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482, and the outer surface of the third guide slide 6483 is the main body portion 6482a during the movement. Abuts on the inner surface of the through hole 6482a1. That is, the distance from the central axis of the slide elongated hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482 to the inner surface of the lower side surface (side surface on the left side of FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6482a is from the central axis of the projecting portion 6483b to the main body portion 6483a. It is formed approximately equal to the distance to the outer surface of the lower side surface. As a result, the posture of the third guide slide 6482 can be stabilized when the third guide slide 6483 is slid with respect to the second guide slide 6482.

Here, the inner surface of the first guide slide 6488 and the outer surface of the second guide slide 6482 are each formed of smooth surfaces, while the inner surface of the second guide slide 6482 and the outer surface of the third guide slide 6483 are formed. It is formed on a rough surface. In this case, the frictional resistance of the slide movement of the second guide slide 6482 with respect to the first guide slide 6481 is formed smaller than the frictional resistance of the slide movement of the third guide slide 6483 with respect to the second guide slide 6482.

As a result, the second guide slide 6482 slides in preference to the third guide slide 6483. That is, when the main body member 410 moves upward from the state of FIG. 57, the second guide slide 6482 is first stored in the first guide slide 6488, and after the storage is completed, the third guide slide 6482 is stored in the second guide slide 6482. 6483 is stored.

58 (a) and 58 (b) are partial front views of the combined operation unit 6400. Note that FIG. 58 (a) shows a state in which the main body member 410 is arranged at an intermediate position (see FIG. 30), and FIG. 58 (b) shows a state in which the main body member 410 is arranged in a retracted position. To.

As shown in FIG. 58, the wiring guide slide 6480 does not have a portion where the wiring W may be sandwiched, and it is possible to prevent the wiring W from being disconnected. Further, since there is no risk of sandwiching the wiring W, the arrangement interval between the wiring W and the inner side surfaces of the guide slides 6481,6482,6483 can be reduced. As a result, the width of the wiring guide slide 6480 in the lateral direction can be suppressed.

With the main body member 410 arranged at the intermediate position, the wiring W is left inside the wiring guide slide 6480 (see FIG. 58 (a)). Therefore, the tension applied to the wiring W can be temporarily removed.

Next, the rocking operation unit 7500 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59. In the first embodiment, the case where the pair of bridge members 528 is fixed to the drive side arm member 520 has been described, but the rocking operation unit 7500 in the seventh embodiment is the first bridge of the pair of bridge members 7528. The bridge member 7528a is formed so as to be swingable with respect to the drive side arm member 7520. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

59 (a) and 59 (b) are partial front views of the rocking operation unit 7500 according to the seventh embodiment. In addition, FIG. 59 (a) shows a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 59 (b) shows a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged in the overhanging position. Is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the first bridge member 7528a, which is the smaller side of the pair of bridge members 7528, is formed in the shaft support hole 7529 formed in the main body plate portion 7521 of the drive side arm member 7520. It is pivotally supported so that it can swing, and is urged clockwise by a torsion spring (not shown). The main body plate portion 7521 is different from the main body plate portion 521 in the first embodiment except that the formation of the first fastening hole 527a1 corresponding to the first bridge member 7528a is omitted and the shaft support hole 7529 is formed instead. It is formed in the same way. Further, the second bridge member 7528b, which is the larger side of the pair of bridge members 7528, is fastened and fixed to the main body plate portion 7521 of the drive side arm member 7520.

The driven side arm member 7530 is provided so as to project from the front side of the main body plate portion 531 and include a projecting portion 7534 that abuts with the first bridge member 7528a in the swing direction.

Here, the drive side arm member 7520 and the driven side arm member 7530 are arranged in the retracted position and the overhanging position, and are relative to the shaft support hole 7529 of the projecting portion 7534. The position changes (similar to the relative movement of the other side shaft support hole 526 and the other side shaft support hole 533 along the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 7520).

By swinging the first bridge member 7528a along the projecting portion 7534, the distance between the first bridge member 7528a and the second bridge member 7528b at the overhanging position (see FIG. 59 (b)) is increased. Can be expanded. As a result, when the driven side arm member 7530 bends to the front side, the distance between the positions where it can come into contact with the bridge member 7528 (the end of the first bridge member 7528a and the end of the second bridge member 7528b). Can be expanded. In this case, the length in the longitudinal direction in which the driven side arm member 7530 can freely bend without abuting on the bridge member 7528 can be divided into short lengths, and the amount of bending of the driven side arm member 7530 (in the front-rear direction). The amount of movement of) can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 59, the distance between the first bridge member 7528a and the other side shaft support hole 533 can be maintained regardless of whether the moving member 540 is arranged in the retracted position or the overhanging position. it can. Here, the misalignment of the driven side arm member 7530 with respect to the driving side arm member 7520 is likely to occur at the other side shaft support hole 533, which is the connection position with the moving member 540, and the misalignment width is likely to be large. In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the first bridge member 7528a from being separated from the other side shaft support hole 533, and to increase the effect of suppressing the displacement of the driven side arm member 7530 with respect to the driving side arm member 7520. Can be done.

Further, when the drive side arm member 7520 and the driven side arm member 7530 are arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 59 (a)), the first bridge member 7528a is urged by a torsion spring (not shown). It swings in a direction close to the second bridge member 7528b. As a result, the drive side arm member 7520 is moved to the retracted position while the distance between the first bridge member 7528a and the second bridge member 7528b is widened, and the first bridge member 7528a and the other side shaft support hole 533 Can be prevented from interfering with each other.

Next, the game board 8013 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. In the first embodiment, the case where light is emitted from the light irradiation device 331c to the specific winning opening 65a has been described, but the game board 8013 in the eighth embodiment is an outer rail formed by planting on the base plate 8060. Light is applied to the vicinity of the upper half of 62. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board 8013 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 60, since the light irradiation device 8610 is arranged outside the outer rail 62, the degree of freedom of decoration of the game area is reduced by the shielding member for partially hiding the light irradiation device 8610. Can be prevented. Further, since the light irradiation device 8610 is arranged in the embedded hole 8013a formed in the game board 8013, it is possible to prevent the light irradiation device 8610 from increasing the thickness of the game board 8013 in the front-rear direction.

From the light irradiation device 8610, light is irradiated to the inside of the game area through the back side of the outer rail 62. A mechanism by which the irradiated light changes the traveling direction to the front side (front side in FIG. 60) will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

FIG. 61 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 8013 in the LXI-LXI line of FIG. 60. As shown in FIG. 61, the light irradiation device 8610 mainly includes a main body portion 8611 fixed to the embedding hole 8013a and a light irradiation portion 8612 arranged on the side surface of the main body portion 8611.

The game board 8013 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has an embedded hole 8013a in which the light irradiation device 8610 is arranged, and the game board 8013 downward from the embedded hole 8013a along the back surface of the game board 8013 beyond the outer rail 62 ( A projection passage 8013b, which is a recess extending inward of the game area), and a form formed at the extended end of the light projection passage 8013b and approaching the front side as it goes downward (inside the game area). It mainly includes a direction changing portion 8013c formed in an inclined manner.

The embedded hole 8013a, the light projecting passage 8013b, and the direction changing portion 8013c can be formed by processing such as cutting and drilling, or by forming a protrusion having an appropriate shape on the resin mold.

The light path E81 emitted from the light irradiation section 8612 is formed inside the light projecting passage 8013b, reaches the direction changing section 8013c and is reflected, so that the traveling direction of the light is on the front side from the path E81 (FIG. 61). It changes to the route E82 toward the left side). Here, since the direction changing portion 8013c that changes the traveling direction of the light is formed by the game board 8013 formed of the light-transmitting resin material, it is inconspicuous and the influence on the decoration of the game area can be reduced. it can. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the game area can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 61, the light traveling along the path E82 irradiates the nails planted in front of the game board 8013 from below. This makes it possible to brighten the shadow formed below the nail by illuminating the hall. Therefore, it is possible to improve the directing ability of the area below the nail, and it is possible to make the ball easier to see when the ball passes through the area below the nail, and the burden felt by the player due to the difficulty in seeing the ball is eased. be able to.

In particular, since the nail to be planted on the upper part of the game board 8013 is arranged at a position where the player can look up, the light reflected from the nail is directed to the player by irradiating the light from below the nail. be able to. In this way, the nail that defines the flow path of the sphere can be used as a member that produces light.

Since the lower part (lower half) of the nail is less likely to collide with the ball, the effect on the flow of the ball is small even if it is processed. For example, by processing the lower part (lower half) of the nail into a crystal shape, light can be reflected in a plurality of directions, and the effect ability of the nail can be enhanced.

Further, by setting the color of the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 8612 to a color different from the color of the nail (for example, yellow) (for example, red), the nail irradiated with the light can be distinguished from other nails. Can be made easier.

In this case, for example, a plurality of light irradiation devices 8610 may be arranged on the game board 8013 (six in this embodiment, see FIG. 60), and light may be irradiated in order. That is, after the light is radiated from the leftmost light irradiating device 8610 in the front view, the light is radiated from the light irradiating device 8610 on the right side (the second from the left end in the front view), and then on the right side (front). Light may be emitted from the light irradiation device 8610 (third from the left end in the visual sense), and the same may be continued thereafter.

According to this, the nails to be planted in the game board 8013 shine in order along the curved arrow R81 by the light emitted from the light irradiating device 8610. For example, when it is more advantageous for the player to hit right, the nails to be planted on the game board 8013 are lit in order along the curved arrow R81 so that the player can hit right. Can be signaled to. As a result, the nail forming the flow path of the ball is given the effect of telling the player where to drive the ball, so that the attention of the nail can be improved.

The light emitted from the light irradiation device 8610 is not necessarily limited to the nail. For example, the wind turbine arranged on the game board 8613, the through gate 67 (see FIG. 60), and the like may be exposed to light.

Next, the wiring guide arm 9480 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. In the first embodiment, the case where the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 of the wiring guide arm 480 do not overlap in the front-rear direction except for the shaft support portion has been described, but the wiring guide arm 9480 in the ninth embodiment has been described. , The overhanging front locking portion 9482f arranged on the second guide arm 9482 overlaps with the first guide arm 9481 in the front-rear direction. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIGS. 62 to 64, the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are omitted for ease of understanding.

62 (a) is a front view of the first guide arm 9484 according to the ninth embodiment, FIG. 62 (b) is a bottom view of the first guide arm 9481, and FIG. 62 (c) is a detachable front view. It is a perspective view of the locking member 9481f. In FIG. 62 (a), the detachable front locking member 9481f is partially cross-sectionally viewed, and the fitted portion between the attachment portion 9481d and the detachable front locking member 9481f is visible.

As shown in FIG. 62 (a), the first guide arm 9481 has a detachable front locking member 9481f formed detachably on the attachment portion 9781d and a plate-shaped arm portion 9481a from both ends of the straight portion of the attachment portion 9481d. Mainly includes a plate-shaped non-slip plate portion 9481 g extending toward the side and an auxiliary bottom portion 9481h extending from the back side of the other side bottom portion 481e2.

In the plate-shaped arm portion 9481a, the formation of the notch portion 481a1 (see FIG. 25A) is omitted. This is because, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the detachable front locking member 9481f is molded separately from the attachment portion 9481d, so that the notch portion 481a1 is unnecessary. As a result, the strength of the plate-shaped arm portion 9481a can be ensured.

As shown in FIG. 62A, the attachment portion 9481d includes a fitting recess 9481d1 which is a recess having a semicircular cross section extending in the front-rear direction.

The fitting recess 9481d1 is a recess having a semicircular cross section into which the columnar fitting arm portion 9481f2 of the detachable front locking member 9484f, which will be described later, is fitted, and is a recess in the lateral direction of the attachment portion 9481d (FIG. 62 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface). (Direction) is extended. As a result, the shape for the fitting recess 9481d1 is added to the molding die of the fitting portion 9481d, and the fitting portion 9481d1 is formed by pulling out in one direction (FIG. 62 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface). The 9481d can be easily manufactured.

The fitting recess 9481d1 is formed in a semicircular shape having a radius equal to or slightly smaller than the radius of the fitting arm portion 9481f2. As a result, the fitting arm portion 9481f2 can be fitted into the fitting recess 9481d1, and the detachable front locking member 9481f can be prevented from sliding in the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d.

In this case, the contact area with respect to the thickness of the fitting arm 9481f2 can be increased and the frictional force can be increased as compared with the case where the attachment arm 9481d and the fitting arm 9481f2 hit each other on a flat surface. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detachable front locking member 9481f from falling off from the attachment portion 9481d.

As shown in FIG. 62 (c), the detachable front locking member 9481f is a plurality of long plate-shaped main body plate portions 9481f1 extending vertically from the side surface of the main body plate portion 9481f1 in the thickness direction in a columnar shape. Mainly includes a fitting arm portion 9481f2.

Since the detachable front locking member 9481f is removable from the attachment portion 9481d, when the wiring W is replaced, such as when the wiring W is broken, the detachable front locking member 9481f is removed to lock the detachable front. It is possible to save the trouble of replacing the wiring W by avoiding the member 9481f and facilitating the replacement of the wiring W.

The plurality of fitting arm portions 9481f2 are portions for fixing the detachable front locking member 9481f to the attachment portion 9484d by sandwiching the attachment portion 9481d, and are arranged side by side at intervals slightly shorter than the plate thickness of the attachment portion 9481d. A pair of rod-shaped members are connected in two sets. When the detachable front locking member 9481f is fixed to the attachment portion 9481d, a pair of rod-shaped members of the plurality of fitting arm portions 9481f2 are elastically deformed by being pushed from the attachment portion 9481d, and the attachment portion is elastically restored by the elastic recovery force. 9481d is sandwiched.

The length of the fitting arm portion 9481f2 is formed to be slightly longer than the length in the width direction of the fitting portion 9481f, and the fitting portion 9481f is directed toward the mating arm portion 9481f2 on the other side holding the fitting portion 9481f at the tip of the fitting arm portion 9481f2. A protruding portion 9481f3 is formed. By catching the projecting portion 9481f3 on the attachment portion 9481f, it is possible to prevent the detachable front locking member 9481f from coming off from the attachment portion 9481f to the front side (front side in FIG. 62A).

In this case, the fitting arm portion 9481f2 is formed in a columnar shape, and the fitting recess 9481d1 is formed as a recess having a semicircular cross section. Therefore, when the fitting arm portion 9481f2 sandwiches the attachment portion 9484d with an elastic recovery force. , The axial center of the fitting arm portion 9481f2 is brought to the center of the fitting recess 9481d1. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the alignment when the detachable front locking member 9481f is attached to the attachment portion 9481d, and the time required for the attachment can be shortened.

The non-slip plate portion 9481g is a portion that sandwiches the wiring W with the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, and is formed continuously over the width direction (vertical direction in FIG. 62B) of the attachment portion 9481d. It is elastically deformable in the thickness direction of the attachment portion 9481d and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. The distance between the tip of the non-slip plate portion 9481g and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a is usually formed to be less than or equal to the thickness of the wiring W, and by inserting the wiring W there, the non-slip plate portion 9481g is formed. It is elastically deformed, and the elastic recovery force prevents the wiring W from slipping with respect to the plate-shaped arm portion 481a.

The orientation of the non-slip plate portion 9481g is arranged so as to be elastically deformable along the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d. As a result, the wiring W can be sandwiched between the non-slip plate portion 9481d and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a in the width direction, and the wiring W can be prevented from moving and rubbing in the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d. The durability of the wiring W can be improved.

The orientation of the pair of non-slip plate portions 9481g is opposite to each other at both ends of the attachment portion 9481d. As a result, it is possible to prevent the attachment portion 9481d and the wiring W from moving in the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d regardless of the movement direction of the wiring W. The non-slip plate portion 9481 g is arranged to face the rib portion N. As a result, the wiring W can be suppressed not at the tip portion of the non-slip plate portion 9481g but at the intermediate portion (belly), so that the resistance applied to the wiring W can be increased (see FIG. 64).

The other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h is a plate-shaped portion formed having the same outer peripheral shape as the other side bottom portion 481e2, and the other side tubular portion 481c is formed in the circumferential direction of the other side tubular portion 481c from the back surface of the other side bottom portion 481e2. It is extended over about 120 degrees around the axis, and an inclined side surface 9481h1 is provided at the extending tip. As shown in FIG. 64A, the extended tip of the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h and the end portion of the one side bottom portion 482e1 of the second guide arm 9482 overlap in a front view. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from falling off to the back side (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 64A).

The inclined side surface 9481h1 inclines toward the back side (lower side in FIG. 62B) as the distance from the other side bottom portion 481e2 increases.

63 (a) is a front view of the second guide arm 9482, FIG. 63 (b) is a bottom view of the second guide arm 9482, and FIG. 63 (c) is the LXIIIc of FIG. 63 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd guide arm 9482 in -LXIIIc line.

As shown in FIG. 63 (a), the second guide arm 9482 includes an overhanging front locking portion 9482f extending from the front end portion of the attachment portion 482d in both directions in the thickness direction of the attachment portion 482d, and the attachment portion. Mainly includes a non-slip plate portion 9482 g extending from the end portion of the straight portion of the plate-shaped arm portion 482a and the plate-shaped arm portion 482a toward the plate-shaped arm portion 482a and the attachment portion 482d arranged to face each other.

The overhanging front locking portion 9482f is attached to an extended end portion extending to the opposite side of the plate-shaped arm portion 482a with the attachment portion 482d sandwiched between them, and the back side (FIG. 63) as the extension tip approaches the attachment portion 482. (C) Provided with an inclined side surface 9482f1 inclined to the right side).

Since the technical idea of the non-slip plate portion 9482 g is the same as the technical idea of the non-slip plate portion 9481 g described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

64 (a) and 64 (b) are front views of the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 of the wiring guide arm 9480, and FIG. 64 (c) is the LXIVc- of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 1st guide arm 9481 and the 2nd guide arm 9482 of the wiring guide arm 9480 in the LXIVc line. In FIG. 64 (a), a state in which the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded is shown, and in FIG. 64 (b), the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are axially rotated and opened. The state of being struck is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the wiring W is shown, and in FIG. 64 (c), the wiring W is not shown.

Here, in order to secure the arrangement area of other movable accessories, it is desirable to suppress the arrangement area of the wiring guide arm 9480. Therefore, it is difficult to provide a margin in the area for accommodating the wiring W (for example, between the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the attachment portion 9481d of the first guide arm 9481). In this case, the wiring W rubs against the inner surface of the wiring guide arm 9480 each time the state changes, such as when the wiring guide arm 9480 is folded or opened, the wiring W deteriorates early, and the durability of the wiring W deteriorates. It may decrease.

On the other hand, in the wiring guide arm 9480 of the present embodiment, the wiring W is sandwiched between the non-slip plate portions 9481 g, 9482 g and the plate-shaped arm portions 481a, 482a, so that the wiring W becomes the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. , 482a and relative movements with respect to the attachment portions 9481d and 482d are suppressed. As a result, the durability of the wiring W can be ensured.

Further, when the second guide arm 9482 is deformed with respect to the first guide arm 9481 in a twisted manner, the wiring W may also be twisted and the durability of the wiring W may be lowered.

On the other hand, in the wiring guide arm 9480 according to the present embodiment, in the state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64B), the other side auxiliary bottom 9481h is the second guide arm. It overlaps with the one-side bottom 482e1 of 9482 in the front-rear direction. Here, the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h extends in the circumferential direction of the other side tubular portion 481c along the back surface of the other side bottom portion 481e2 (see FIG. 62 (b)).

Therefore, in the state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64 (b)), the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h and the one side bottom portion 482e1 are in a positional relationship that allows contact in the front-rear direction. It is formed. That is, when the second guide arm 9482 is twisted and deformed in the direction of pressing the one side bottom portion 482e1 against the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h with respect to the first guide arm 9484, the one side bottom portion 482e1 and the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h are brought into contact with each other. , The deformation resistance of torsional deformation increases. In this case, it is possible to prevent the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 from being twisted and deformed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress twisting and deformation of the wiring W, and it is possible to secure the durability of the wiring W.

In the present embodiment, in a state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64 (a)), the overhanging front locking portion 9482f is in front of and behind the attached portion 9481d of the first guide arm 9481. They overlap in the direction and are formed in a positional relationship that allows contact in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 64 (c)). That is, when the second guide arm 9482 is twisted and deformed in the direction of pressing the overhanging front locking portion 9482f against the attachment portion 9481d with respect to the first guide arm 9484, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f and the attachment portion 9481d are hit. It is touched and the deformation resistance of torsional deformation increases. In this case, it is possible to prevent the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 from being twisted and deformed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress twisting and deformation of the wiring W, and it is possible to secure the durability of the wiring W.

Further, when the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h is further extended in the circumferential direction from the present embodiment, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are in a folded state (see FIG. 64A), and the second guide arm is second. The guide arm 9482 and the other side auxiliary bottom 9481h are brought into contact with each other, and the first guide arm 9484 and the overhanging front locking portion 9482f are brought into contact with each other.

In this case, since the back surface side of the second guide arm 9482 and the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h are in contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the front side of the second guide arm 9482 from falling down. On the other hand, since the front side of the first guide arm 9484 and the overhanging front locking portion 9482f are in contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the back side of the second guide arm 9482 from falling down. Therefore, when the first guide arm 9484 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64 (a)), the second guide arm 9482 twists with respect to the first guide arm 9484 regardless of the direction. Can be suppressed.

Further, the same effect can be obtained by adding the overhanging front locking portion 9482f to the back side of the second guide arm 9482. In this case, the pair of overhanging front locking portions 9482f is the first. Since the guide arm 9482 is sandwiched, it is necessary to improve the accuracy of positioning the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the portion that suppresses the twist of the second guide arm 9482 is formed so as to be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the second guide arm 9482, so that the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are aligned. It is possible to reduce the degree required for the accuracy of.

In the present embodiment, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64 (a)), and the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (FIG. 64). Before reaching (b)), the extended tip of the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h may come into contact with the end surface of the one side bottom portion 482e1 of the second guide arm 9482.

On the other hand, by forming the inclined side surface 9481h1 (see FIG. 62 (a)) at the extending tip of the other side auxiliary bottom 9481h, the extending tip of the other side auxiliary bottom 9481h is in contact with the end face of the one side bottom 482e1. Even when they are in contact with each other, the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h can be mounted on the back side (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 64 (b)) of the one side bottom portion 482e1. This makes it easy to form a state in which the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64 (a)).

Further, from the state in which the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64 (b)), the first guide arm 9484 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (FIG. 64 (a)). (See), the extended tip of the overhanging front locking portion 9482f may come into contact with the side surface of the attachment portion 9481d.

On the other hand, by forming the inclined side surface 9482f1 (see FIG. 63 (c)) at the extending tip of the overhanging front locking portion 9482f, the extending tip of the overhanging front locking portion 9482f is attached to the attachment portion 9481d. Even when it comes into contact with the side surface, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f can be mounted on the front side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 64 (a)) of the attachment portion 9481d (see FIG. 64 (c)). This makes it easy to form the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 in a folded state (see FIG. 64A).

In the present embodiment, the case where the overhanging front locking portion 9482f that contacts the attachment portion 9481d is formed on the front side is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f may be formed as a pair of front side and back side. As a result, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f can be brought into contact with the attachment portion 9488d regardless of the direction of the twist deformation of the second guide arm 9482, and the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are twisted and deformed. It can be suppressed.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the pair of decorative members 422 of the composite operation unit 400 swings to form a gap has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the decorative member 422 may be guided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and the pair of decorative members 422 may be slidably moved in the directions away from each other to form a gap for accommodating the swing member 430. In this case, the width of the gap formed between the pair of decorative members 422 can be secured in the vertical direction.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the moving upper lid member 332 of the board surface lower unit 300 slides in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair of long plate-shaped movable members that are pivotally supported on the inner surface of the pair of step portions 324a and are formed in pairs on the left and right are provided, and the movable members are in the direction in which the pair of step portions 324a are continuously provided. A closed state that is arranged along the longitudinal direction to prevent the ball from passing through the specific winning opening 65a, and an opening that allows the ball to pass through the specific winning opening 65a by swinging in the ascending or descending direction from that state. It may be possible to form a state. Further, with the same configuration, the second winning opening 640 may be configured instead of the specific winning opening 65a.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the light emitted from the light irradiation device 331c is reflected to the front side when the moving upper lid member 332 of the board surface lower unit 300 is in the retracted state has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, a portion that reflects the light emitted from the light irradiation device 331c toward the front side when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the overhanging state may be formed in the lower portion of the moving upper lid member 332. In this case, the light reflected by the moving upper lid member 332 is not blocked by the sphere, and the effect of producing the light can be improved.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the positioning portion 543 is united with the moving member 540 of the swinging operation unit 500 by uneven fitting has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, magnets may be arranged at positions where the pair of moving members 540 are arranged close to each other, and the moving members 540 may be united by magnetic force. In this case, the moving members 540 can be attracted to each other by magnetic force, and it is not necessary for the driving device 550 to generate a holding force when the moving members 540 are arranged at the overhanging position. Therefore, the power consumption of the drive device 550 can be suppressed.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the guide hole 413 of the composite operation unit 400 is formed in a straight line has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the guide hole 413 may be formed in a curved shape. In this case, even if the moving speed of the main body member 410 is the same, the swing speed of the shielding member 420 can be adjusted.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 of the composite operation unit 400 swings has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the swing member 430 may include a slide member that slides and moves in a direction away from the main body member 410, and a decorative member 422 may be accommodated between the slide member and the main body member 410.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the guide arms of the wiring guide arms 480 of the composite operation unit 400 are stacked in the vertical direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the guide arms of the wiring guide arm 480 may be stacked in the front-rear direction. In this case, since the vertical width of the wiring guide arm 480 can be narrowed, the width of the bottom wall portion 211 required to accommodate the wiring guide arm 480 can be narrowed outside the opening 211a. As a result, the arrangement area of the third symbol display device 81 can be expanded.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the moving member 540 is supported by a pair of arm members of the driving side arm members 520, 2520, 3520, 7520 and the driven side arm members 530, 7530 has been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the moving member 540 may be supported by a plurality of arm members of three or more. In this case, for example, by fastening and fixing the bridge members 528, 2528, and 7528 to the intermediate arm members and arranging them so as to cover the front sides of the arm members at both ends, the effect of suppressing the misalignment between the arm members is suppressed. Can be improved. That is, when one of the arm members at both ends pushes one end of the bridge member 528, 2528, 7528 and the bridge member 528, 2528, 7528 bends, the other end is the other. It moves in a direction approaching the arm member and is supported by the other arm member. In this way, the arm members at both ends work to suppress the bending of the bridge members 528, 2528, 7528, and as a result, the misalignment of the plurality of arm members can be suppressed, and the posture of the moving member 540 is stabilized. Can be made to.

In the first to fifth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, each of the guide arms 481 to 483 of the wiring guide arm 480 has a cylindrical portion (for example, one side shaft support portion 482b) and a cylindrical portion (for example, one side shaft support portion 482b). For example, the case where the shaft is supported by the other side cylindrical portion 481c) has been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the portion supporting the columnar portion may be formed by elongated holes extending in the longitudinal direction of each of the guide arms 481 to 483. In this case, in addition to the vertical expansion and contraction in which the guide arms 481 to 483 are bent, the horizontal expansion and contraction in which the guide arms 481 to 483 slide and move in the extending direction of the elongated hole can be performed.

In the first to fifth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, the lower side surface (for example, the plate-shaped arm portion 481a) of each arm member (for example, the first guide arm 481) constituting the wiring guide arm 480 is used. Although the case where the width is shorter than that of the upper side surface (for example, the attachment portion 9481d) is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower side surface (for example, plate-shaped arm portion 481a) of each arm member (for example, the first guide arm 481) may be longer than the upper side surface (for example, the attachment portion 9481d). In this case, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from sliding down from the lower side surface (for example, the plate-shaped arm portion 481a) due to gravity.

From the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment, in the seventh embodiment and the ninth embodiment, the case where the width of the wiring W is shorter than the attachment portions 481d and 9484d has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, the formation of the front locking portion 481f may be omitted, and the width of the wiring W may be longer than the width of the plate-shaped arm portions 481a and the attachment portions 481d and 9481d. In this case, since a part of the wiring W protrudes from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the attachment portions 481d and 9484d, the wiring W can be easily taken out by pinching (hooking with a finger) the protruding portion with a finger. As a result, maintenance of the wiring W can be easily performed.

From the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment, in the seventh embodiment and the ninth embodiment, the case where the widths of the attachment portions 481d and 9481d are constant has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a portion other than the portion where the front locking portion 481f of the attachment portions 481d and 9481d is fixed may be formed with the same width as the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. In this case, by making the width of the wiring W longer than the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, a part of the wiring W can be projected from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the attachment portions 481d and 9481d. Therefore, the wiring W can be easily taken out by pinching the protruding portion with a finger (hanging it with a finger). As a result, maintenance of the wiring W can be easily performed.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the recessed portion 4424c is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the thickness of the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b may be thicker than the thickness of the lower side surface. In this case, the friction generated between the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b and the connecting member 423 can be made larger than the friction generated between the lower side surface of the guide hole 4424b and the connecting member 423, so that the main body member 410 is lowered. It is possible to suppress the rebound of the connecting member 423 that occurs when moving to.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the recessed portion 4424c is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a recess capable of accommodating the slide shaft portion 423e may be formed on the upper side surface of the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. In this case, when the insertion shaft portion 421c is arranged at the lower end portion of the guide hole 413, the resistance F applied to the insertion shaft portion 421c from the side surface of the guide hole 413 can be increased.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the direction changing portion 8013c is arranged only at the extended end portion of the light projecting passage 8013b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction changing portion 8013c may be additionally arranged in the middle of the light projecting passage 8013b. In this case, the light reflected from the direction changing portion 8013c arranged in the middle of the projection passage 8013b to the front side and the light transmitted through the direction changing portion 8013c are arranged at the extended end portion of the projection passage 8013b. The light can be separated from the light reflected from the direction changing portion 8013c to the front side. That is, since the light emitted from the light irradiation device 8610 can be divided into a plurality of pieces, the number of lights visually recognized in the front view can be increased with respect to the number of the light irradiation devices 8610. As a result, the number of light irradiation devices 8610 arranged can be suppressed while maintaining the effect of the light irradiation device 8610.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

<First control example>
Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 78. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

The symbol, which is a kind of symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, is composed of nine main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" and a sub symbol consisting of a shell-shaped symbol. It is configured. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 65 (a), on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of upper row, interruption, and lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. ing. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display screen, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), on the display screen, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become. Further, five effective lines, that is, left line L1, middle line L2, right line L3, right-down line L4, and right-up line L5 are set on the display screen. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state where a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the variable display of ~ Z3 is completed, it is assumed that a big hit has occurred, and the big hit movie is displayed.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "probability variation symbols", and the jackpot A which is a 16R probability variation jackpot or the jackpot B which is a 4R probability variation jackpot is When it occurs, the combination of the same probabilistic symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "normal symbols", and when a jackpot C which is a 16R normal jackpot or a jackpot D which is a 4R normal jackpot occurs. , The same combination of normal symbols is stopped and displayed.

The mode of the variable display of the symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol row. The number of symbols can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and for example, only numbers may be variablely displayed as the symbol.

Further, if a ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. On the third symbol display device 81, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, it is reserved. Indicates that the number of balls is four. When the number of reserved balls symbol is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there are no reserved balls.

In this control example, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the third symbol display device 81, the number of reserved balls may be a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four may be the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67, a super background notice effect, which is one of the effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, will be described. This super-background notice effect is an effect in which the player can operate the scroll direction of the background by the selection switch 270. Further, when a specific image (an image in which the door blinks in this control example) is displayed in the background image of the super background notice, by operating the decision switch 270e, it is expected whether or not there is a big hit in the hold. A background image (background inside the door) showing the value is displayed. Therefore, the player who wants to know the information on whether or not there is a big hit in the hold will pay attention to the appearance of the specific image in the background image of the super background notice and play the game. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, since the background image of the super background notice can be scrolled and displayed in any direction of the player by operating the switch, it is possible to give the player the impression that the background image is being searched. .. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

FIG. 66A is a diagram showing an example of a background image of the super background notice effect. When the background image of the super background notice effect is displayed, for example, when the right switch 270b is pressed, the background image is scrolled to the right. Here, in this control example, the background image is set to scroll to the right based on the pressing of the right switch 270b, and then scrolling is continued until the selection switch 270 in another direction is operated. Has been done. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the background image may be scrolled according to the pressing time of the selection switch 270. As a result, it is possible to flexibly respond to the operation of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In FIG. 66 (b), when the background image of the above-mentioned super background notice effect is displayed (see FIG. 66 (a)), the rear image is scrolled to the right based on the pressing of the right switch 270b. It is a figure. By scrolling the rear image to the right, the image of the door partially displayed at the right end of the screen in FIG. 66 (a) can be visually recognized in the center of the screen in FIG. 66 (b). In the state, it is displayed.

The image of this door is data that blinks at regular intervals. As a result, when a certain period of time elapses while the door is visible as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the door blinks and is displayed as shown in FIG. 67 (a). In this case, when the enter button 270e is pressed, an effect suggesting the display of the background inside the door, which is a special image, is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), an image in which the door is opened is displayed, and the characters "I will enter inside with the next fluctuation!" Are displayed. Here, in this control example, the blinking display of the door is configured to be performed at regular intervals, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking display interval may be irregular. Further, in this control example, data that blinks at regular intervals is prepared in advance and configured to display blinking of the door, but the present invention is not limited to this, and data that blinks the door based on a predetermined trigger. It may be configured to change to.

The background inside the door (not shown), which is a special image, indicates the degree of expectation as to whether or not there is a big hit in the hold, as described above. The detailed processing will be described later, but the background inside the door is displayed from the time it is displayed until the end of 20 fluctuations. When the 20th variation is completed, it is determined again whether or not there is a big hit in the hold, and the background image is changed based on the determination result. Specifically, if it is determined that there is a big hit in the hold, the same image of the background inside the door as the previous time is displayed with high probability, while if not, the display of the background inside the door is terminated. It becomes. Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71, the production of Super Reach A, which is one of the Super Reach effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, will be described. The effect of the super reach A is an effect executed during the variable period of the third symbol, and the stop symbol is displayed based on the pressing of the frame button 22.

In Super Reach A, a small bubble is displayed as well as a display mode of loose stitches. Here, the loose-grained display mode is, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the third symbol showing 6 symbols in which the number “6” is added to the main symbol of anglerfish on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1. The symbol, the shell symbol of the sub symbol on the middle line L2, the 7 symbols with the number "7" attached to the main symbol of the whale on the right line L3 are stopped and displayed, and the 5 symbols are on the left line L1 of the lower symbol row Z3. A shell symbol is displayed on the middle line L2 and four symbols are stopped and displayed on the right line L3, which is a display mode in which none of the lines (L1 to L5) is reachable.

Next, the characters "foam chance" are displayed, and the loosening display mode changes to the double reach display mode. Here, in the double reach display mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the same symbol as in FIG. 68 (a) is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 and is displayed on the left line L1 of the lower symbol row Z3. 7 symbols are displayed as a shell symbol on the middle line L2, a stop display of 6 symbols on the right line L3, a reach display mode of 6 symbols on the right-down line L4, and a reach display mode of 7 symbols on the right-up line L5. It is an aspect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (a), along with the display that a plurality of bubbles are rotated, the characters "Stop the bubbles by touching!" Are displayed, and then the bubbles are rotated as shown in FIG. 69 (b). A display is displayed in which a big hit symbol (6 symbols, 7 symbols and a special symbol) is inserted in the bubble.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70A, the color of the bubble containing the big hit pattern changes, and the characters "The colored bubble is a hit!" Are displayed. In addition, an indicator indicating the remaining time during which the button can be pressed is displayed at the lower right of the screen.

Then, when the frame button 22 is pressed within the remaining time during which the button can be pressed, the colored bubbles or the non-colored bubbles are stopped and displayed. FIG. 70B is a diagram illustrating a screen in which colored bubbles are stopped and displayed.

When the colored bubbles are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 71, the colored bubbles change to a symbol (7 symbols) in which the colored bubbles are jackpots, and the jackpot is notified. On the other hand, when the non-colored bubbles are stopped, the non-colored bubbles are changed to a design (for example, 5 symbols) that is disengaged, and the disengagement is notified (not shown).

As described above, in Super Reach A in this control example, the big hit symbols (6 symbols, 7 symbols and special symbols in the above example) are unified into colored bubbles, and the outlier symbols (6 symbols, 7 symbols) are unified. Designs (designs other than symbols and special symbols) are unified as uncolored bubbles. As a result, the player only has to press the button focusing on the presence or absence of the color, and can provide an easy-to-understand game machine.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74, the jackpot effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. In this jackpot effect, a map on which squares such as sugoroku are arranged is displayed, and the squares on the map can be selected based on the operation of the selection switch 270 or the like. An event is set for each of the selected squares, and a round effect during the jackpot production is performed based on the mass event. The mass event is set based on the jackpot type, the number of times the jackpot continues, the value of the display effect counter 233o, and the like.

In addition, when the jackpot continues (when the jackpot is in the probability change state or the time saving state), the continuous effect is executed from the square selected in the previous jackpot effect. Furthermore, although it is not the square selected in the previous jackpot production, there is a continue mass that can start (restart) continuous production. Whether or not the restart from the continuous mass can be executed is determined based on the history of the passed cells and the like. Also, if you have passed all the squares on the map, a new map will be displayed from the next jackpot production. Furthermore, at the end (ending) of the jackpot production, the mass event may be changed depending on whether or not there is a jackpot in the hold.

FIG. 72 (a) shows a case where the first square is selected from the start point in the previous jackpot effect, and then the jackpot effect is continuously started (during the probability change or the time reduction). It is a figure which showed. In addition, the square with "S" written in the figure means the starting point, and it will start from here at the time of the first big hit. Further, "G" in the figure means a goal point, and the operation when the goal point is reached will be described later with reference to FIG. 73 (b).

As shown in FIG. 72A, when the continuous jackpot effect is started, the effect is continuously started from the square selected in the previous jackpot effect. When the jackpot effect is started, the square that is the start point of this operation (the square that was selected last time) is lit in a different color from the other squares, and the dog character is displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize where the operation start point of this time is. The mode for allowing the player to recognize the operation start point is not limited to this, and for example, the cell at the operation start point may be displayed in a blinking manner, or the cell may be indicated by a symbol such as an arrow. It may be a thing.

An arrow indicating the operable direction is displayed near the square at the operation start point. As a result, the player can easily recognize which direction the player can operate. In this control example, arrows indicating that the operation is possible in the right direction and the downward direction are displayed. Here, when the right switch 270b is pressed, the square to the right of the square at the operation start point (that is, the square two ahead of the start point) is lit and displayed, and the dog character is displayed.

On the other hand, when the selection switch 270 corresponding to the direction not shown as the operable direction is operated, it is considered that the switch operation has not been performed, and the display is not changed. In the above case, in order to suggest that the switch operation is invalid, it may be configured to display on the screen or output a sound.

Here, if the decision switch 270e is pressed while the square to the right of the square at the operation start point (that is, the square two ahead of the start point) is selected, the square event set for the square is displayed. The production is executed.

In FIG. 72 (b), in the jackpot effect (see FIG. 72 (a)) when the square one step ahead of the start point described above is the operation start point, the decision switch 270e is pressed after the right switch 270b is pressed. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect when it is pressed. In FIG. 72B, when it is determined that the square two ahead of the start point has been selected based on the operation of the determination switch 270e, an effect corresponding to the mass event set in the square is performed. Specifically, a display suggesting the content of the mass event "The number of selectable backgrounds has increased!" Is displayed on the upper left portion of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can easily recognize the content of the mass event.

Further, when the continuous jackpot effect is started, the previous map and mass event are read, and a new mass event is read according to the value of the display effect counter 233o of the display control device 114. When a new mass event is set by comparing the previous mass event with the new mass event, the characters "Continue mass has increased!" Are displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (a). Will be done.

As a result, the player can easily recognize that the mass event has changed. On the other hand, not limited to this, the mass event may be changed so that the player cannot recognize it. As a result, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

With reference to FIG. 73 (b), a display will be described when the jackpot effect is continuously executed after passing through the continuous mass. In the jackpot effect of this control example, when passing through the continuous squares provided on the map of the jackpot effect, it is possible to execute the continuous effect (restart) from the passing square in the next continuous jackpot effect. Become. Specifically, when there is a route (one or more cells) that has passed through the continuous mass and has not passed, it is restarted from the continuous mass that has the unpassed route closest to the starting point. To. In this case, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), the characters "The restart point is here" are displayed, and the square corresponding to the restart point is indicated by an arrow.

As a result, the player can easily recognize that the continuous jackpot effect is started from the square. In addition, the squares that have passed are marked with the letters "Done" and are shaded, and the squares that have not passed are marked with the letters "Not". As a result, the player can easily recognize which square has not passed. By this restart, it is possible to restart not only the square selected last time but also the continuous square having a route that has not passed, so that it is easy to pass the square that has not passed.

If you pass all the squares, a new map will be displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 74A, a new map is displayed and the characters "I found a new map!" Are displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the new map has been displayed.

If it is determined that there is a big hit in the hold at the end (ending) of the big hit effect, a mass event is set based on the big hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), a square 2 squares ahead of the square at the current position (that is, a square that can be reached by generating a jackpot twice) is set as a special square. By setting the square two ahead as a special square, the player will continue the game with the expectation of at least two more big hits. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, the production of Super Reach B in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. 75 and 76 are schematic views schematically showing the effect timing of the super reach B, and FIGS. 77 and 78 are diagrams illustrating the effect of the super reach B.

The production of this Super Reach B is based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the character (girl) on the screen holding a pattern (shark, shrimp, etc.) in his hand (see FIG. 77 (a)). A throwing effect (see FIG. 77 (b)) or a non-throwing effect is performed. When this throwing effect is performed, the design held in the hand changes to the next design. Then, if the same symbol as the reach symbol appears, the effect is to notify the jackpot (see FIG. 78 (b)).

In the case of the super reach B production of the jackpot, it is possible to execute the production of throwing until the same symbol as the reach symbol appears based on the operation of the frame button 22, and the production of the out-of-order super reach B can be executed. If so, based on the operation of the frame button 22, the throwing symbol cannot be executed until the same symbol as the reach symbol appears.

In this control example, if the throwing effect (see FIG. 77 (a)) is executed three times, the effect of notifying the jackpot (see FIG. 78 (b)) is executed. Specifically, when the 7 symbols are reachable, the effect of throwing the 4 symbols is started. When the effect of throwing the symbol 4 is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22, the effect shifts to the effect of throwing the symbol 5. Similarly, when the effect of throwing the symbol of 5 is executed, the effect shifts to the effect of throwing the symbol of 6, and when the effect of throwing the symbol of 6 is executed, the effect of 7 is displayed.

On the other hand, in the production of the jackpot Super Reach B, if the frame button 22 is not pressed, the jackpot will be a jackpot even though the throwing effect has not been performed, so that the effect of notifying the normal jackpot (normal effect) Performs a different effect (replacement effect). Here, in Super Reach B, it is necessary to operate the frame button 22 a plurality of times before the effect of notifying the jackpot is executed. Therefore, the normal effect is replaced with the replacement effect in advance at the timing (replacement timing) in which the operation of the frame button 22 is considered to be insufficient before the effect of notifying the jackpot is executed. This replacement timing is variable according to the number of operations of the frame button 22, and the details will be described later.

First, with reference to FIG. 75A, a case where the frame button 22 is never pressed in the production of Super Reach B will be described. When the fluctuation of Super Reach B is started, the fluctuation of the symbol (normal effect) is started. Then, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped in a display mode in which they reach, and the reach effect is started. The period of this reach effect is the frame SW valid period in which the effect based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is executed. If the frame button 22 is not pressed during the frame SW valid period, the effect of notifying the jackpot is replaced with the replacement effect at the replacement timing. As a result, even if the frame button 22 is not pressed and the big hit is achieved even though there is no throwing effect, the player can be notified of the big hit without any discomfort.

Next, a case where the frame button 22 is pressed only once in the production of Super Reach B will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). When the fluctuation of the super reach B is started, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped in a display mode in which the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are reachable, and the reach effect is started, as in the case of FIG. 75 (a) described above. .. Then, based on the fact that the frame button 22 is pressed during the frame SW valid period, the effective effect of throwing a symbol is executed. Here, the effect of throwing a symbol (effective effect) or the effect of not throwing a symbol (fake effect), which is executed based on the button operation, is drawn based on the effect counter 223i of the voice lamp control device 113. is there.

When the effective effect is executed, the timing (replacement timing) at which the operation of the frame button 22 is considered to be insufficient changes before the effect for notifying the jackpot is executed, so that the replacement timing is delayed by the delay time dt. To. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect of notifying the big hit from being replaced even though the operation of the frame button 22 is in time by the time the effect of notifying the big hit is executed.

In FIG. 75B, since the frame button 22 is not pressed once the frame button 22 is pressed, the jackpot is notified at the replacement timing (after the change), which is delayed by the delay time dt as described above. The production will be replaced with a replacement production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76 (a), in the effect of Super Reach B, a case where the frame button 22 is pressed and the effect of notifying the big hit is not replaced and the big hit is notified will be described.

When the fluctuation of the super reach B is started, as in the case of FIGS. 75 (a) and 75 (b) described above, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped in a display mode in which the symbol of 7 is reached. And the reach production is started. Then, based on the fact that the frame button 22 is pressed during the frame SW valid period, the effective effect or the false effect is executed. In FIG. 76A, a false effect, which is an effect in which the symbol 4 cannot be thrown by the first pressing, is executed. Then, the effective effect is executed by pressing the second and third times, and the symbol possessed by the character is changed to the symbol of 6. When the frame button 22 is pressed during the stoptable period in the state where the symbols 6 are displayed, the stop display effect which is an effective effect is executed, and the stop display in which the symbols 7 appear is executed.

On the other hand, even if the frame button 22 is pressed when it is not in the stoptable period, the effective effect is not executed, and the false effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect of the stop display from being executed at an early timing such that the display period of the stop display is insufficient.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76 (b), in the effect of Super Reach B, a case where the frame button 22 is pressed and the effect of notifying the jackpot is not replaced and the disconnection is notified will be described.

In FIG. 76 (b), similarly to FIG. 76 (a) described above, in the frame SW valid period, a false effect and two effective effects are executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 three times, and the effect of 6 is executed. The design will appear. Here, in FIG. 76A, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the stoptable period, the stop display effect, which is an effective effect, is executed, and the symbol 7 is displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 76 (b), when the frame button 22 is pressed during the stoptable period, a stop display effect that is a false effect is executed, and the symbol 7 does not appear. As a result, it is possible to prevent a big hit symbol from being displayed even though the display mode of the out-of-order Super Reach B is being executed.

As described above, FIG. 77A exemplifies a screen in which the effective effect based on the frame button 22 is not executed when the symbol 7 is reached in the super reach B. In the upper left of the screen, 7 symbols are displayed to suggest that the 7 symbols have reached the reach. Further, the character in the center of the screen has 4 symbols, and when the effective effect is executed 3 times, the symbol changes from 5 symbols → 6 symbols → 7 symbols, which is a reach symbol 7 The design of will be displayed. An indicator indicating the frame SW validity period is displayed at the lower right of the screen.

As described above, FIG. 77B illustrates a screen in which the effective effect is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 when the symbol 4 is displayed during the frame SW valid period of the super reach B. It was done. An effect in which the character in the center of the screen throws the symbol 4 based on the operation of the frame button 22 is displayed.

FIG. 78 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a screen that has become a big hit due to the above-mentioned replacement effect. The jackpot notification by the replacement effect is executed when the jackpot is obtained even though the operation of the frame button 22 is not executed. In this case, since the operation of the frame button 22 is not executed, the stop display is performed in the disengaged manner. Therefore, in this control example, after the stop display, an effect of notifying the jackpot in which the characters "revival jackpot" is displayed as shown in FIG. 78A is executed. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that it is a big hit effect that looks like an outlier. As a result, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort felt by the player by notifying the jackpot even though the stop display is displayed in the off-mode.

FIG. 78 (b) is a diagram illustrating an effect in which a jackpot is notified by a normal effect in which replacement is not performed. This effect is a diagram when the frame button 22 is pressed a predetermined number of times during the frame SW valid period and a big hit symbol appears as shown in FIG. 76 (a). In FIG. 78 (b), the symbol 6 is thrown to the upper right of the screen based on the pressing of the frame button 22 during the stoppable period.

<About the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 79, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 100). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203h of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first winning opening 64. Alternatively, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second winning opening 640. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a ball is usually used in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the symbol start port (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 100).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the RAM 203 is timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. Further, in the first random number table 202a, there is a low probability time of the special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in the low probability state) and a high probability time of a higher probability of a big hit of the special symbol than the low probability time (the period when the special symbol is in the low probability state) Two types of judgment values are included, one for (the period during which the special symbol is in a high probability state). That is, the number of big hit random numbers included in the table is different in each state. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203.

Here, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol is out of alignment. If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first hit random number counter C1, there are three random number values that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random number values "0 to 2" are the first hit random numbers for the low probability. It is stored in table 202a (see FIG. 81 (b)). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 3 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "3/400".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 30 random number values that are big hits of the special symbol, and the values "0 to 29" are the first random number table 202a for high probability (FIG. 81 (b). ) Is stored in). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 30 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "3/40".

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and is provided in the ROM 202 together with the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 81 (c)). As shown in FIG. 81 (c), when the jackpot is a special symbol, the jackpot type when the random number value is "0 to 24" in the first hit type counter C2 is "big hit A". , When the random number value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is "big hit B". Further, the jackpot type when the random number value is "50 to 74" is "big hit C", and the jackpot type when the random number value is "75 to 99" is "big hit D".

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99), and "Reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the RAM 203 reaches the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and rear" and "reach other than the front and rear". Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. A table for a narrow low probability time is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off". Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front-back deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front-back deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long production time, so that it is possible to secure the ball entry time to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and the variation due to the third symbol display device 81. The display will be easier to continue. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Here, the fluctuation time refers to the time from when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started until the symbol is stopped and displayed and the symbol is fixed. For example, if the symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.4 seconds after the symbol fluctuation of 9.6 seconds is executed and the symbol is confirmed, the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (9.6 seconds + 0.4 seconds). Notated as. Based on this fluctuation time, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the fine symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 100) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (d)), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is mainly controlled. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110 (see FIG. 82 (a)).

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (d)), for example, as fluctuation patterns for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", and "disengagement" Various types of "normal reach", various types of "outlier super reach", and various types of "outlier special reach" are specified, and various types of "hit normal reach", various types of "hit super reach", and various types of "hit special reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for big hits. ing. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the lottery result and the stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type). As the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern effect of 5 seconds to 30 seconds specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, the fluctuation time of 5 seconds to 30 seconds is specified.

Here, the types of super reach will be described. In this control example, "super reach A", "super reach B", and various other super reach types are defined as the types of super reach. "Super Reach A" is a reach effect based on the player pressing the frame button 22, taking the effect screens of FIGS. 68 to 71 described above as an example, and "Super Reach B" is the above-mentioned effect. This is a reach effect based on the player pressing the frame button 22, using the effect screens of FIGS. 77 and 78 as an example.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. , It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second hit random number table (FIG. 81 (d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is set. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the second hit random number table, it is determined to be a hit of a normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability time of a higher probability of hitting a normal symbol than the low probability time (normal symbol). It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

When the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5-28". These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the release period of the second winning opening 640 is further. Is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", so that the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but the opening time And the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 100).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 79, the RAM 203 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 100) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 99) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 98) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 50, the RAM 203 is undergoing probabilistic change with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d. It has a flag 203e, a time saving medium counter 203f, a look-ahead probability changing flag 203g, a counter buffer 203h, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a storage area for the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data are four. Among the vacant areas of the hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a shifts to the execution area. Then, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having the smaller area number. Will be done. In this control example, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, those of them A winning information command including a value is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts each value of each counter C1 to C3 from the winning information command, and uses these as the winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. Store in 223a.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, and the acquired data is obtained from the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty, so that the winning data stored in the other hold areas can be stored in the same manner as the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. , Shift processing is performed to fill the holding area, which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (starting winning) of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of (variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S404 in FIG. 95). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the first special symbol is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 93).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 93 and S405 in FIG. 95). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d maximizes the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 97). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 96).

When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 and the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d (the number of hold times M of the fluctuation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is It is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 97). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 and the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b (FIG. 97). S603: No).

The probability changing flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability changing state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol). If the value of the probability changing flag 203e is on, the pachinko machine 10 is It indicates that the special symbol is in the probabilistic state, and if the value of the probabilistic change flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial value of the probabilistic change flag 203e is set to off, and at the timing when the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is closed (that is, the end timing of the jackpot) in the final round of the jackpot in the main control device 110. A value is set according to the jackpot type. Specifically, on is set in the case of "big hit type A" or "big hit type B", and off is set in the case of "big hit type C" and "big hit type D".

When the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 59) is executed by the MPU 201, a lottery for the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol change start processing, the value of the probability changing flag 203e is referred to, and if that value is on, a lottery of the special symbol is performed based on the judgment value for high probability in the first random number table 202a. On the other hand, if the value of the probability changing flag 203e is off, a lottery of special symbols is performed based on the determination value for the low probability time in the first random number table 202a.

The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time saving medium counter 203f is set to zero, and the value corresponding to the jackpot type at the closing timing (that is, the jackpot ending timing) of the specific winning opening (big opening opening) 65a in the final round of the jackpot. Is set. Specifically, 100 is set in the case of "big hit type A" or "big hit type C", and 0 is set in the case of "big hit type B" or "big hit type D". After that, 1 is subtracted every time the variation effect of the special symbol is completed until the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f becomes 0 (S223 in FIG. 57).

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the lottery for the normal symbol is based on the random number table per normal symbol for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability (see S710 and S711 in FIG. 62).

As described above, the counter buffer 203h is a buffer area used for counting each counter value.

The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

Next, the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. As described above, the ROM 202 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201.

FIG. 81A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 81 (a), the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first per random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, a second per random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. ..

As described above, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 81 (b)) is a table in which the values of random numbers that serve as jackpots for special symbols are defined. When the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, the first per random number table 202a includes a table for determining whether or not the special symbol is a big hit when the special symbol has a low probability (first per random number table 202a for a low probability) and a high special symbol. A table (first hit random number table 202a for high probability) for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit at the time of probability is provided, and the number of big hit random numbers included in each table is different. There is. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 81 (c)) is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is set for each jackpot type. .. As shown in FIG. 81 (c), in the first hit type selection table 202b, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, and jackpot D are set to be selectable, respectively, and the first hit is determined as the jackpot A determination value. The value of the type counter C2 is "0 to 24", the judgment value of the jackpot B is "25 to 49", the judgment value of the jackpot C is "50 to 74", and the judgment value of the jackpot D is "74 to 99". There is.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 81 (d)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 81 (d), when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C3 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is judged to be a hit of a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed. , The electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

On the other hand, when the probability of the normal symbol is high (during the time saving state of the normal symbol), it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit when the value of the second hit random number counter C3 is in the range of 5 to 204. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed. , The electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times".

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 82. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 82 (a)) is a data table used for determining the display mode of the variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202d is a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 82 (b)) dedicated to the case where the hit / fail determination result is a jackpot, and the hit / fail determination. If the result is out of order and the game is in the normal game state, the dedicated out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 82 (c)) and the hit / fail judgment result are out of order, and if the game is in the probabilistic game state Each of them is configured by at least the usage (probability variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 82 (d)).

Here, the various super reach selected by each fluctuation pattern table includes "super reach A", "super reach B", or other super reach selected by the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The type of super reach selected by this fluctuation pattern table is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice control device 113, and is transmitted from the voice control device 113 to the display control device 114 to execute various super reach effects. Will be done.

Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 83. At least the variation pattern table is stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. Since the fluctuation pattern table is already known, it will be briefly described. However, based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the rough fluctuation content (variation time, fluctuation type) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is shown. (Reach, disengagement, etc.)) to determine more detailed fluctuation details. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 83, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and a power off. At least the flag 223e, the frame SW valid period 223f, the replacement timing 223g, the replacement flag 223h, the effect counter 223i, and the other memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas has each of the counters C1 to C3 which are the winning information. Each value is stored. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in response to the start prize when the main control device 110 wins the start. Therefore, various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. , The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, or in the main control device 110, the first special symbol When the fluctuation display in the above is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command, and specially It is stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1308 in FIG. 104). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the number of hold balls corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere counter 203c of the main control device 110. .. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1302 in FIG. 104), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1402 in FIG. 105). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1305 in FIG. 104), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1410 in FIG. 105). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type) is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variation effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

The power off flag 223e is set to ON by receiving a command indicating power failure detection from the main control device 110. After that, when it is determined in the start-up process that the power off flag 223e is on, the work area of the RAM is cleared and the flag is set to off.

The frame SW valid period 223f is a counter for indicating a period during which the effect based on the operation of the frame button 22 is possible in the effect of the super reach A or the super reach B. This frame SW valid period 223f is set when Super Reach A or Super Reach B is executed, and is executed every 1 ms in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 106). And it is subtracted one by one.

The replacement timing 223g indicates the timing for replacement with the effect for notifying the jackpot even though the frame button was not pressed in Super Reach B. This replacement timing 223g is referred to in the super reach B operation process (see FIG. 109), and is reset based on the number of times the effective effect is executed based on the pressing of the frame button 22.

The replacement flag 223h is set to on when it is determined in the super reach B operation process (see FIG. 109) that the replacement timing has passed and the replacement effect is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent duplicate replacement effects from being set by determining that the replacement timing has passed again after the replacement effects have been set once. This replacement flag 223h is set off (initialized) when the frame SW valid period becomes 0.

The effect counter 223i is updated in the main process (see FIG. 103) of the voice lamp control device 113. The effect counter 223i selects an effect mode based on the pressing of the frame button 22.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 104) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 84.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 98).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by 1. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged consecutively on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation for.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be enabled in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d, or a control program thereof. Fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 or the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to transfer to the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a and corresponding to the boot process by the boot program (see S1901 in FIG. 111) is set.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 91) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 112 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, since it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b and the third symbol area 235d when the power is turned on are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing image data corresponding to the fluctuating image at power-on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 40). The main image at power-on is an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on, while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is a simple image with a smaller amount of data than the image displayed during a normal game. Therefore, the image data can be quickly transferred and the image can be displayed after the power is turned on.

When the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, while the main image is being turned on, the display control device 114 Is on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, the variable image when the power is turned on with the "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and the "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol when the power is turned on. The variable image and the variable image are displayed alternately and repeatedly during the variable period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the "x" symbol is displayed after the variable effect is stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 88, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 88 is an explanatory view illustrating two types of rear images and a range of rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 88 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 88 (b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the “city stage” and the back surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”.

As shown in FIG. 88, as the back image corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, so that the third symbol display device 81 smoothly displays the image. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player to change the stage to "city stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 first positions the display area between the position a and the position a'in the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, the back image (not shown) used for the super background notice is an image that can be scrolled not only in the horizontal direction but also in the vertical direction, unlike the above-mentioned back surface A and back surface B. This enables scrolling in the horizontal or vertical direction. In addition, the image used for the super background notice can be scrolled and includes an image that changes with the passage of time. As a result, it is possible to execute a display in which a specific image (door image) blinks at a predetermined time.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 88A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are recorded. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often performed without changing the stage while displaying the city stage, which is the initial stage, so all the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed city stage is displayed in the back image area. By making the character ROM 234 resident, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88B, the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage contains only a part of the back surface area, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, for the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the back image area 235c of.

Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the intention of the player, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but doing so makes the resident video RAM 235 very much. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a', and the position is from the position a including the initial position. Since the image between b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, it can be arbitrarily operated by the player by operating the frame button 22. When the stage is changed at the timing of, by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial positions of the rear surface B and the rear surface C are immediately displayed in the third symbol display device 81. It can be displayed in a scroll display or while changing the color tone with the passage of time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surface B and the back surface C, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from position b'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from position a to position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

On the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 84) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area by using the image data of the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left in a smooth connection.

Returning to FIG. 84, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned main symbol with the numbers "0" to "9", which is the third symbol, is resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first winning opening 64, the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a state.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the main symbol without the numbers "0" to "9" is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed of DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. Flag 233i, drawing target buffer flag 233j, winning information storage area 233k, game state storage area 233m, fluctuation history storage area 233n, display effect counter 233o, continuation counter 233p, rear image change flag 233q, super background flag 233r, map storage area It has at least 233s, a mass setting table storage area 233t, a mass event storage area 233u, a route history storage area 233w, a background addition flag 233x, and a door fluctuation count counter 233y.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table and display data in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A to D. If either is the case, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening production is a production for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened, and the round production will be from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state. As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variation effect was stopped. Therefore, the rear image changes as the third symbol disappears. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, a variation effect, an opening effect, a round effect, an ending effect, a final display effect, and a demo effect are stored. Here, the details of the data table storage area 233b will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the data table storage area 233b.

First, the data table storage area 233b corresponds to a variable effect table storage area corresponding to the variable effect, an opening effect table storage area corresponding to the opening effect, a round effect table storage area corresponding to the round effect, and an ending effect. A table storage area for the ending effect, a table storage area for the definite display effect corresponding to the definite display effect, and a table storage area for the demo effect corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

Here, in the variation effect table storage area, various variation effect display data tables for executing a normal variation effect and various stop display display data tables for executing stop display are provided. In addition, various display data tables for Super Reach A for executing the above-mentioned Super Reach A are provided. Further, various display data tables for super reach B for executing the above-mentioned super reach B are provided, and various display data tables for throwing display for executing the effective effect used in the production of super reach B. And, various display data tables for false throwing display for executing the false effect are provided, and various display data tables for the replacement display for executing the replacement effect are provided.

Further, in other opening effect table storage areas and the like, a plurality of types of display data tables corresponding to each effect are provided.

Next, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a boy image and a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backs A to. Information for specifying whether to display a back image different from C (for example, an image corresponding to the super background notice effect) is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this control example, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type will be described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. During that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 20). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 22) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This is because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration can be realized only based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, is resident among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 90). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 90).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In the "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 21, in the example of FIG. 21). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 91) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 91, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is displayed. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before being used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the above-mentioned power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 sets it on in the main process (see FIG. 110) (see S1905). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S4405 in FIG. 130 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2201 in FIG. 112 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2208 in FIG. 112 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 112B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 112 (b) see S2209) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command is determined so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 113 to 126) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 127 to 130) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4301 in FIG. 130 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 130 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 131) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 91), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 91) described later, which describes the drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 91) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 91 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 129) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 91) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 91, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and various image controllers 237 are used. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 creates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 112 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4007 in FIG. 127). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S1902 in FIG. 110) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4513 in FIG. 131). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4514 in FIG. 131). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S4602 in FIG. 132).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, displays the image on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 112 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S4602 in FIG. 132).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The winning information storage area 233k is an area for storing the winning information received from the voice lamp control device 113, and is used when determining whether or not there is a big hit in the hold at the time of super background notice.

In the game state storage area 233m, when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the game state is extracted from the received variation pattern command and stored. The game state storage area 233m is used in the opening command processing (S2902) executed in the jackpot-related command processing (FIG. 118) to determine whether or not the starting jackpot is a continuous jackpot. Specifically, if it is determined that the probability is changing or the time is shortened, it is determined that the jackpot is continuous, and in other cases, it is determined that the jackpot is not continuous.

The variation history storage area 233n is an area in which the variation pattern based on the received command is stored in the variation pattern command processing, similarly to the game state storage area 233m. The fluctuation history storage area 233n is used when a mass event is set in the map setting process (S3001) in the opening command process (FIG. 119) executed at the start of the jackpot. Specifically, it will be described later in the description in the mass event setting table storage area 233t.

The display effect counter 233o is a loop counter of 0 to 198, and is updated in the counter update process (S2207) executed in the V interrupt process (FIG. 112) of the display control device 114. This display effect counter can be used when selecting a background type in the super background effect process (see FIG. 115), when setting a mass event in the map setting process (FIG. 120), or in the super background SW process (see FIG. 124). It is used when selecting the background type in the above, or when selecting the background addition flag to be turned on in the jackpot middle SW process (see FIG. 125).

The continuation counter 233p is added when it is determined in the map setting process (see FIG. 120) that is executed at the start of the jackpot effect that it is a continuous jackpot. Based on the value of the continuation counter 233p and the value of the display effect counter 233o described above, the mass event defined in the mass setting table storage area 233t described later is set. The continuation counter 233p is initialized to 0 when the continuation of the jackpot ends (when the gaming state becomes normal).

The rear image change flag 233q is set to on in the rear image change command process (see FIG. 122) when the rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the rear image change flag 233q is set to on, in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 131),
The super background flag 233r is set to on when the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the super background notice is set to on in the back image change command (see FIG. 122). When the super background flag 233r is set to on, it is determined that the super background notice is being produced. As a result, when the SW-related command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the super-background SW process (S3602) is executed in the SW-related command process (see FIG. 123). This super-background SW process is performed based on the operation of the selection switch 270 or the like during the production of the super-background notice. This super background flag 233q is set to off at the end of the super background notice effect.

The map storage area 233s is an area for storing information on the map and mass event set in the jackpot effect. This map storage area 233s is an area that is read when the information between the map and the mass event is stored in the processing at the time of receiving the ending command, which is the end of the jackpot effect, and the continuous jackpot is executed. is there. As a result, when the continuous jackpot is executed, the previously set map and the mass event can be read out, and the continuous jackpot effect can be executed.

The mass setting table storage area 233t is referred to when a mass event is set in the map setting process (see FIG. 120) executed at the start of the jackpot effect. Here, the details of the mass setting table storage area 233t will be described with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the mass setting table storage area 233t.

The normal mass setting table 233t1 and the continuous mass setting table 233t2 are stored in the mass setting table storage area 233t.

The normal mass setting table 233t1 is a table that is referred to for setting a mass event when the first map is read (when the jackpot does not continue and there is no passage history of the continuous mass).

In the normal mass setting table 233t1, patterns A to C of mass events are defined based on the values of the jackpot type and the display effect counter 233o. Here, the jackpot type is determined using the information in the fluctuation history storage area 233n. For example, when the jackpot type is "big hit A" and the value of the display effect counter 233o is "10", "pattern B" is set as a mass event.

Next, the continuous mass setting table 233t2 is a table that is referred to for setting a mass event when reading a continuous map (when the jackpot is continuous or there is a passage history of the continuous mass). is there.

In the continuation mass setting table 233t2, mass event patterns A to E are set based on the number of continuations (value of the continuation counter 233p) and the value of the display effect counter 233o. For example, when the number of continuations (value of the continuation counter 233p) is "5" and the value of the display effect counter 233o is "10", "pattern B" is set as a mass event. In this control example, the mass event "pattern D" may be set when the number of continuations is 5 or more, and the mass event "pattern E" is set when the number of continuations is 10 or more. Is configured so that may be set. This makes it possible to set a special mass event that is set only when the jackpot continues.

The mass event storage area 233u is an area for storing the event of the mass selected during the jackpot production. Specifically, when the decision switch 270e is pressed in the jackpot middle SW process (FIG. 125), the event of the determined mass is stored in the mass event storage area by the process of S3807. The mass event stored in the mass event storage area 233u is referred to in the process of S3101 of the round number command process (see FIG. 119) for executing the round effect, and is used for determining the round number display data table. As a result, the corresponding round effect of the determined mass event can be executed.

The route history storage area 233w is an area for storing the selected (passed) square in the jackpot effect. In the route history storage area 233w, information on the selected square is added when the determination switch 270e is pressed in the jackpot middle SW process (see FIG. 125). Thereby, in the map setting process (see FIG. 120), it is possible to determine the presence / absence of the passage history of the continuous mass, the presence / absence of the non-passage mass, and the like.

The background addition flag 223x is a flag that is set to be turned on according to the selected mass event in the jackpot effect. By setting the background addition flag 223x to on, when the back image change command is received, the corresponding additional background can be set.

The door inside fluctuation counter 223y is an area for counting the number of fluctuations executed during the display of the door inside background in the super background notice stage. The in-door fluctuation counter 223y is set to a predetermined value (20 in this control example) when the in-door background is set, and is subtracted by 1 each time the subsequent fluctuation is executed. When the in-door fluctuation counter 223y becomes 0, the winning information storage area 233k is referred to, and if there is a big hit in the hold, the same in-door background is set again with high probability, and if there is no big hit in the hold, There is a high probability that a background other than the background inside the door will be set.

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 92 to 101. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67 is executed. Is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through-gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, a special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (S201: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 100) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S208). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 94.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time is determined. If (S209: No) has not elapsed, the display content of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S210), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 94. When this special symbol change start processing is executed, a lottery for special symbols is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined which of the jackpot A to the jackpot D.

In this control example, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The LED display is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S211 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S212). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of a special symbol (S212: Yes), the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S213), and this process ends. When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the process of S213, when the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 100), it branches to S1001: Yes and the opening command. Is set. As a result, the jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the process of S213, the probabilistic change flag 203e is set to off, or the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is set to 0. This is to make the state during the jackpot the same as the initial state.

In the processing of S212, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S214), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1. If the above is the case (S214: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S215), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S214: No), the processing of S215 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the special symbol variation start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (S104) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters, a lottery (win / fail judgment) for "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform the lottery. This is a process for determining an effect pattern of a variable effect (variable effect pattern).

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the probabilistic change flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probabilistic change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. If the probabilistic change flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. If the probabilistic change flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol.

When the probability changing flag 203e is on (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability changing state of the special symbol, so that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the first random number table Based on the jackpot determination value for high probability of 202a, the lottery result of whether or not the jackpot is a special symbol is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 30 jackpot determination values for high probability stored in the first random number table 202a one by one. As described above, 30 random numbers of "0 to 29" are set as the big hits of the special symbol at the time of high probability, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random numbers that hit these are set. If the numbers match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when the probability changing flag 203e is off (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, so the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301. And, based on the first hit random number table 202a and the jackpot determination value for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the jackpot determination value for the low probability of 3 stored in the first random number table 202a. As described above, three random number values of "0 to 2" are set as the big hits of the special symbol at the time of low probability, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first and the random numbers that hit these. If the numbers match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the jackpot of four types of special symbols (big hit). Of A to D), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 24", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16 round probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "25 to 49", it is determined. If it is judged to be jackpot B (4 rounds probability variation jackpot), if it is in the range of "50 to 74", it is judged to be jackpot C (16 rounds time reduction jackpot), and if it is in the range of "74 to 99" It is determined that the jackpot is D (4 rounds of time-saving jackpot) (see FIG. 81 (b)).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of LEDs 37A and 37B) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hits A to D). Further, the jackpot type (big hits A to D) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

For example, "completely off", "out of normal reach", "out of super reach", and "out of special reach" are defined as the variation pattern for the jackpot, and "hit normal reach", as the variation pattern for the jackpot. Various types of "hit super reach" and "hit special reach" are stipulated.

In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", the front-back off reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", the front-back off reach is set.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To determine.

Here, various types of "hit super reach" and "missing super reach" include "super reach A", "super reach B", and other super reach, based on the numerical value of the variable type counter CS1. Is selected in the process of S307 or S309. In this control example, the type of super reach (“super reach A”, “super reach B”, etc.) is configured to be selected by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the voice lamp control device 113 is not limited to this. It may be configured to be selected by the MPU 221 of. Thereby, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 100). Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S312 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64, and if there is a starting winning, This is a process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c must be less than 4. If (S403: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol reserved ball counter The value (N) of 203c is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 100) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, based on the various counter values stored in the processing of S406, the winning / failing of the lottery in the special symbol (whether it is a big hit or not), the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted. (S407).

If the winning / failing of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted by the processing of S407, then the predicted winning / failing of the lottery, the predicted stopping type, and A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S408).

The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 100) to be executed later by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as the winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, it is determined whether or not the game state is a probabilistic jackpot (S409). In the process of S409, when it is determined that the game state is a probability change jackpot (S409: Yes), the look-ahead probability change flag 203g provided in the RAM 203 is set to ON (S410), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state is not a probabilistic jackpot (S409: No), the process proceeds to S411.

In the process of S411, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the time saving jackpot (S411), and if it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving jackpot (S411: Yes), the look-ahead probability change provided in the RAM 203 is in progress. The flag 203g is set to off (S412), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S411, when it is determined that the game state is not a time saving jackpot (S411: No), the process of S412 is skipped and this process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the electric motor associated with the second winning opening 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S501). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. Includes monaka. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S501: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is larger than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S504: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S508). The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is a big hit of a special symbol (S509). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In this control example, the lottery of the normal symbol is less likely to be won during the jackpot of the special symbol.

During the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the second winning opening 640 provided immediately above the specific winning opening 65a , The ball becomes easy to enter. Here, in this control example, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is prevented from being opened during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state). As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball that is to be won in the specific winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible.

Even if the ball is suppressed from entering the second winning opening 640 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the ball enters the first winning opening 64. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first winning opening 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

In the processing of S509, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired by the processing of S507. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 81 (d)).

In the process of S508, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S508: No), the process proceeds to the process of S511. In the processing of S511, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 is low. Based on the second hit random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 81 (d)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S510 or S511 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S512), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S512: Yes). , Set the display mode at the time of hit (S513). In the process of S513, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S514), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S514: Yes), the special symbol is currently being hit. Whether or not it is determined (S515). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In this control example, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is missed. , The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S515, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so that the second winning opening 640 The opening period of the electric accessory 640a accompanying the above is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S514: No), the process proceeds to the process of S517. In the processing of S517, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set to 0. . Set to 2 seconds, set the number of times of opening to 1 (S517), and shift to the process of S519.

In the process of S512, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S512: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

In the process of S519, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S519), and if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S519: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83. The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S519: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S522). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S520 or the process of S521 before the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S522, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S522: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S522, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S518, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S523, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 100) is executed next, the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. After finishing, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S513 or the process of S518.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result of the normal symbol (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process a hit of the normal symbol? Is determined (S524). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S525), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S525, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 100) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S516 or the process of S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67, and if the ball has passed, the second This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per 2.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variation display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S603).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol entry port 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter The value (M) of 203d is added by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S605), and this process is terminated. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S701) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this control example) is executed in order to wait for the control devices on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. (S802). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process shifts to S810. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is shifted to S810 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S810 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S914 of the main process (see FIG. 100), the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 are correctly saved.

In the process of S810, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S810). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S811, S812) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S811, S812) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S811, S812) is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S811, S812), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S811), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S812). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S813.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S813. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S813, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S814), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (peripheral) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 93) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 95) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 95) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 101) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 96), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 94), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed on the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In this control example, among the LEDs 37A and 37B of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 94) ends, the first symbol display device The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 94) after ending the variation display executed in 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 96), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 96), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S513 or the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 96) after ending the variable display (see FIG. 96). Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process is shifted to S901, and each process after S901 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S909: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the processing of S908, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 98 has been executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S914), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack is used in the initial setting process (S801). By setting the pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S901. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 100), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (see FIG. 100). Large opening port) This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). Specifically, if the processing of S213 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 93) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1001, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001: Yes), the opening command is set (S1002), and this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1003). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. In the process of S1003, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1003: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1003, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1006). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1004, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls are formed. When a prize is won (for example, 10 pieces), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1007, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this processing is completed. To do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009). Specifically, when the special gaming state (all 16 or 4 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state is completed, it is determined that the ending effect is started.

In the process of S1009, when it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: Yes), the ending command is set (S1010). The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is jackpot A or jackpot B (S1011), and if it is jackpot A or jackpot B (S1011: Yes), the high probability of the special symbol after the end of jackpot A or jackpot B. In order to shift to the state, the probability changing flag 203e is set to on (S1012), and the process shifts to S1015.

In the processing of S1011, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not jackpot A or jackpot (that is, jackpot C or jackpot D), in order to shift to the time saving state of the normal symbol after the end of jackpot C or jackpot D. , The probability change flag 203e is set to off (S1013), the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 100 (S1014), and the process shifts to S1015. In the process of S1015 executed after the process of S1013 or S1014, the end of the jackpot is set and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1009, if it is not the ending start timing (S1009: No), this process ends. By this jackpot control process (see FIG. 101), various settings related to jackpot can be made.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 109. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S1101). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S1217 is in the middle of execution due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). It is determined whether or not it has been started (S1102). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 103, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1214 in FIG. 103), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1217. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1217 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1102: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1217. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1103).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1106. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1103: Yes), the process proceeds to S1104 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1103: No), the process proceeds to S1108.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1103: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1104. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1217 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1103: No), and the data shifts to S1108.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1102: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1217, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process shifts to S1104 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1104, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1104). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1105: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1106). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1105: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1107), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S1108, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1108). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1217 is executed (see S1216 in FIG. 103). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1217 is executed, the process of S1108 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1217 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1108: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1109), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1110), and then an interrupt occurs. Set the permission (S1111) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the process of S1108 is reached with the power off flag turned off because the start-up process of this time was started after, for example, the power supply was completely cut off, so that the process of S1108 via the processes of S1104 to S1106 was started. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1108: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1109, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1110, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1110), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1111), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1109 is that when the processing of S1108 is reached via the processing of S1104 to S1106, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1104. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1201 was executed (S1201), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1201: No), the process proceeds to S1212 without performing the processes of S1202 to S1311. In the process of S1201, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1202 to S1311 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1212 and the variation display setting process of S1213 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1212 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S1213 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1201 (S1201: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1203 to S1213 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1202). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1208 described later (S1203), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1204). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S1205 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1205, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1206). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the SW input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1207). In this SW input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 or the selection switch 270 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 or the like is confirmed. It is a process of setting to perform an effect corresponding to a case. In this process, when an operation by the player such as the frame button 22 is detected, a SW-related command based on the operated switch is set for the display control device 114. Details of this SW input monitoring / effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 106.

When the SW input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1208), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1209). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1209, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1210). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1208 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1209 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S1210 is completed, the effect counter 223i is updated (S1211). The effect counter updated here is used for selecting an effect when the frame button 22 is pressed in the above-mentioned Super Reach B. In this control example, the effect counter 223i is updated in the main process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an interrupt process may be provided for the update.

When the processing of S1211 is completed, the command determination processing that performs the processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed (S1212). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 104. Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1213). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 105.

When the processing of S1213 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1214). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If it is determined in the process of S1214 that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1214: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1216), and the power-off process is executed. (S1217). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1218), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of information on the occurrence of power failure.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1214 (S1214: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1215), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1215: No), the process returns to the process of S1201 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1215: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1212). This command determination process (S1212) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. ..

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1301). When the variation pattern command is received (S1301: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1302), and the variation pattern selection for extracting the variation pattern type from the received variation pattern command. The process is executed (S1303), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 105) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S1301: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S1304). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1305), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1306), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 105) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1304: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1307). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1307: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). The number of holdings N) of the fluctuation display in the above is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1308). Further, in the process of S1308, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1308 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) or when the special symbol lottery is performed, so that the starting winning is won. Every time it is detected or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set by the process of S1308 to the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110. Can be adjusted to the value of. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning prize is detected or special. At the time of the symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1408 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1307, when the reserved ball number command is not received (S1307: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning command is received from the main control device 110 (S1309). Then, when the opening command is received (S1309: Yes), the winning information is extracted from the received command and stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1310), and the winning command for display based on the winning information is set. (S1311), the process returns to the main process. The display winning command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display winning command, the display control device 114 stores the winning information in the winning information storage area 233k in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1309, when the reserved ball number command is not received (S1309: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command is received from the main control device 110 (S1312). Then, when the opening command is received (S1312: Yes), the display opening command for executing the opening effect is set in the third symbol display device 81 (S1313), and the process returns to the main process. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1312, if the opening command has not been received (S1312: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1314). Then, when the round number command is received (S1314: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1315), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number command (S1314: Yes). S1316), this process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1314, when the number of rounds command is not received (S1314: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command is received from the main controller 110, and when the ending command is received. (S1317: Yes), a display ending command is set (S1318), and this process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1317, if the ending command is not received (S1317: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1319). ), Return to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

By this process, it is possible to set a command for making various settings to the display control device 114 based on the command output from the main control device 110.

Next, the variation display setting process (S1213) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1213). This variation display setting process (S1213) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1401). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1406 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1402), and then the fluctuation pattern is processed in S1303 of the command determination process (see FIG. 104). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S1403).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1404). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the selection SW valid period is set based on the high-speed fluctuation period (S1405). Based on the selected SW validity period set here, in the SW input monitoring / effect processing (see FIG. 106) described later, the super-background operation processing for processing the switch operation at the time of super-background notice is executed. Become.

When the processing of S1405 is completed, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a SW effect (S1406). In the process of S1406, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is a SW effect (that is, super reach A or super reach B), the frame SW validity period 223f and the replacement timing 223g are set based on the fluctuation pattern. , The process proceeds to S1408. On the other hand, in the process of S1406, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not the SW effect (that is, super reach A or super reach B), the process of S1407 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1408.

In the process of S1408, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S1408). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1409.

In the process of S1409, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1409). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1409: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variation display Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1409: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1410), and then in the process of S1306 of the command determination process (see FIG. 104), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1411).

Next, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control unit 110, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. (S1412), and this process ends. By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 stops and displays the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

Here, the SW input monitoring / effect processing (S1207) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing this SW input monitoring / effect processing (S1207). This SW input monitoring / effect processing (S1207) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and causes the effect based on the operation of the frame button 22 or the like to be executed. Therefore, a display command based on the operated switch is generated and set.

In the SW input monitoring / effect processing (S1207), first, it is determined whether or not the selected SW is valid (S1501). As described above, whether or not the selection SW is valid is set based on the high-speed fluctuation period in the processing of S1405 of the fluctuation display setting processing (see FIG. 105).

In the process of S1501, when it is determined that the selected SW is valid period (S1501: Yes), the super background operation process which is the operation process when the super background notice is executed is performed (S1502), and this process is performed. To finish.

Here, the super-background operation process (S1502) will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the operation process (S1502) at the time of super background. This super background operation process (S1502) is executed in the SW input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a switch such as the selection switch 270 in the super background notice. This is a process of generating and setting a display command based on the operated switch in order to execute an effect based on the operation.

In the super-background operation process (S1502), first, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S1601). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), the background image change command is set (S1602), and this process ends. The display control device 114 changes the background image (super background preview image, normal background image, etc.) by receiving this background image change command.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1601 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1601: No), it is determined whether or not the determination switch 270e is pressed (S1603). If it is determined in the process of S1603 that the decision switch 270e is pressed (S1603: Yes), the display decision SW press command is set (S1604), and this process ends. In the display control device 114, the background image is changed to a special background by receiving this display determination SW command while displaying the specific image of the super background notice.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1603 that the determination switch 270e is not pressed (S1603: No), it is determined whether or not any of the selection switches 270a to 270d is pressed (S1605). If it is determined in the process of S1605 that any of the selection switches 270a to 270d is pressed (S1605: Yes), the display selection SW pressing command is set based on the pressed selection switch (270a to 270d). (S1606), this process is terminated. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display selection SW command during the display of the super background notice, the scroll direction of the super background notice is changed based on the operated selection switch.

Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. In the process of S1501, if it is determined that the selected SW is not valid (S1501: No), it is determined whether or not the frame SW is valid (S1503). In the process of S1503, if it is determined that the frame SW is not valid period (S1503: No), the jackpot operation process, which is the operation process when the jackpot effect is being executed, is performed (S1504), and this process is terminated. ..

Here, the jackpot operation process (S1504) will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation process (S1504). This jackpot operation process (S1504) is executed in the SW input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the switch operation of the selection switch 270 or the like during the jackpot effect. This is a process of generating and setting a display command based on an operated switch in order to execute an effect based on.

In the jackpot operation process (S1504), first, it is determined whether or not the determination switch 270e is pressed (S1701). If it is determined in the process of S1701 that the decision switch 270e is pressed (S1701: Yes), the display decision SW press command is set (S1704), and this process ends. When the display control device 114 receives the display decision SW pressing command at the time of selecting the event mass in the jackpot effect, the event mass is determined and the effect corresponding to the mass is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1701 that the determination switch 270e is not pressed (S1701: No), it is determined whether or not any of the selection switches 270a to 270d is pressed (S1703). If it is determined in the process of S1703 that any of the selection switches 270a to 270d is pressed (S1703: Yes), the display selection SW pressing command is set based on the pressed selection switch (270a to 270d). (S1704), this process is terminated. In the display control device 114, when the event mass is selected in the jackpot effect, the selected event mass is changed based on the operated selection switch by receiving this display selection SW command.

Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the processing of S1503 that the frame SW valid period is (S1503: Yes), the value of the frame SW valid period 223f is subtracted by 1 (S1505), and it is determined whether or not the super reach A is changing. (S1506). When it is determined in the process of S1506 that the super reach A is changing (S1506: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S1507).

If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the process of S1507 (S1508), a display valid press command is set (S1508), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1507 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1507: No), the process of S1508 is skipped and the present process is terminated. When the display control device 114 receives the display valid pressing command set in the process of S1508, the stop display (for example, FIGS. 70 (b) and 71 (a)) is executed in the effect of the super reach A. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S1506, when it is determined that it is not Super Reach A (S1506: No), it is determined whether or not it is Super Reach B (S1509). If it is determined in the process of S1509 that it is not Super Reach B (S1509: No), there is no process based on the switch operation, so this process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined to be Super Reach B in the processing of S1509 (S1509: Yes), the operation processing at Super Reach B is executed to execute the processing based on the switch operation during the production of Super Reach B (S1509: Yes). S1510), this process is terminated.

Here, the super reach B operation process (S1510) will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the operation process (S1510) at the time of super reach B. This super reach B operation process (S1510) is executed in the SW input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the operation of the frame button 22 in the super reach B is performed. This is a process of generating and setting a display command in order to execute an effect based on (for example, FIG. 77B).

In the super reach B operation process (S1510), first, it is determined whether or not the frame SW valid period is larger than 0 (S1801). If it is determined in the process of S1801 that the frame SW valid period is larger than 0 (S1801: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1803. On the other hand, in the processing of S1801, if it is determined that the frame SW valid period is not larger than 0 (that is, 0) (S1801: No), it is the timing to end the production of Super Reach B, so the replacement is performed. The flag is turned off (S1802), and the process proceeds to S1803.

In the process of S1803 executed after the process of S1801 or S1802, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S1803). If it is determined in the process of S1803 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1803: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1803, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1803: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223i is acquired (S1804), and the data of the winning information storage area 223a is acquired (S1805). The process proceeds to S1806.

In the process of S1806, it is determined whether or not the changing winning information is a big hit (S1806). In the processing of S1806, when it is determined that the changing winning information is a big hit (S1806: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223i acquired in the processing of S1804 is 0 to 100. (S1807).

In the process of S1807, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223i is 0 to 100, it is determined whether or not the remaining valid pressing count = 1 and it is not the stoptable period (S1808). In the process of S1808, if it is determined that the remaining number of valid presses = 1 and it is not the stoptable period (S1808: Yes), the display valid press command is set (S1809), and the process proceeds to S1811. .. On the other hand, in the processing of S1807, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223i is not 0 to 100 (that is, 101 to 198), and in the processing of S1808, the remaining effective number of times is not 1 or the stoppable period. If it is determined that (S1808: No), a false press command for display is set (S1809), and the process proceeds to S1811.

In the process of S1811, which is executed after the process of S1809 or S1810, the replacement timing is updated based on the number of remaining valid presses and the remaining frame SW valid period. Specifically, the super reach B is provided with a replacement timing. After this replacement timing has passed, it is determined that the number of remaining valid presses is large (that is, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is insufficient during the remaining frame SW valid period) even though the remaining frame SW valid period is short. The effect that is determined and suggests a big hit is replaced in advance. As described above, by setting the replacement timing based on the remaining frame SW valid period and the number of remaining valid presses, it is possible to set in advance an effect suggesting a big hit, and processing when the remaining frame SW valid period has elapsed. The load can be reduced.

When the processing of S1811 is completed, it is determined whether or not the replacement flag 223h is off (S1812). If it is determined in the processing of S1812 that the replacement flag 223h is not off (S1812: No), a display replacement command has already been set to replace the effect suggesting a big hit, so this processing is performed as it is. To finish.

On the other hand, in the process of S1812, when it is determined that the replacement flag 223h is off (S1812: Yes), it is determined whether or not the replacement timing has passed (S1813). If it is determined in the process of S1813 that the replacement timing has not passed (S1813: No), the replacement does not need to be performed yet, so this process ends. In the process of S1813, when it is determined that the replacement timing has passed (S1813: Yes), a display replacement command is set (S1814) to replace the effect suggesting a big hit, and the replacement flag 223h is set. Set it on (S1815) and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1806, when it is determined that the changing winning information is not a big hit (S1806: No), then it is determined whether or not the effect counter 223i is 0 to 50 (S1816). If it is determined that the effect counter 223i is 0 to 50 in the process of S1816 (S1816: Yes), a display valid pressing command is set (S1817), and this process is terminated. In the process of S1816, if it is determined that the effect counter 223i is not 0 to 50 (that is, 51 to 198) (S1816: No), a false press command for display is set (S1818), and this process is terminated. To do.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 132. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. If the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S1901), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S1901) will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1901) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is performed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2001). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2002). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2001.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2002, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2002, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S2003). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2004), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S1901 in FIG. 110) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1902 in FIG. 110) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (see S1901 in FIG. 110) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 111, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2001 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, it is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2001 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2002. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2003 to S2005 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2001 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. And, after repeating a plurality of times including the process of S1902, the processes of S2003 to S2005 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes S2003 to S2005 may be executed without performing the processes S2001 and S2002. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 110. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1902). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1903). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1903, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S1904). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1904, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (SS1905). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 130 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S4302 in FIG. 130 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, a simple command determination process (FIG. 112) is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112 (b)). 112 (b) S2208) and the simple display setting process (see S2209 in FIG. 112 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entering (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and the main control device was instructed to start the variable effect. When the sound lamp control device 113 is used from 110, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. be able to. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S1905, interrupt permission is set (S1906), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1906, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 112 (a). FIG. 112A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2101), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing or the simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described later, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 112 (b). FIG. 112B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 91) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2201), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2201: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. Therefore, instead of the image at the time of power-on, the normal production image is used as the third symbol. The command determination process (S2202) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S2203) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2202), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the image. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 113 to 126.

In the display setting process (S2203), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2202) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2204). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2203) or the simple display setting process (S2209). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2205). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2206). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2205), which are determined in the task process (S2204), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 91 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 132 (a).

Next, the counter update process (S2207) is executed. The details of the counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 132 (b). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2207, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2201 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2201: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2208) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2209) is executed to shift to the process of S2204.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 113 to 126, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2202), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 113, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2301), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2301: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2301: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2203) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2302), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2303).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2304), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2304: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2305), the process returns to S2301.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2305) will be described with reference to FIG. 114 (a). FIG. 114 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, the data in the game state storage area is updated based on the reception command (S2401). Next, the received variation pattern is stored in the variation history storage area (S2402), a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is used as data. It is read from the variation effect table storage area (see FIG. 17) of the table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2403).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of S2403, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2403 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2404). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2403 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2405). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2405, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2403, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2406), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S2407). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2408), the super background effect processing is executed (S2409), and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2407, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2403. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2404. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2406, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the super background effect processing (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the super background effect processing (S2409). When the door interior background in the super background notice is displayed, whether the super background effect processing (S2409) ends the door interior background according to the number of fluctuation displays executed during the display of the door interior background. This is a process for deciding whether to continue.

In the super background effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation number counter 233y in the door is larger than 0 (S2601). If it is determined in the process of S2601 that the number of fluctuation counters in the door 233y is 0 (S2601: No), the background inside the door is not being displayed, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2601, when it is determined that the in-door fluctuation counter 233y is larger than 0 (S2601: Yes), the in-door fluctuation counter 233y is subtracted by 1 (S2602), and the in-door fluctuation counter 223y is set. It is determined whether or not it is 0 (S2603).

If it is determined in the process of S2603 that the in-door variation counter 223y is not 0 (S2603: No), this process is terminated because it is not the end timing of the in-door background. On the other hand, in the process of S2603, when it is determined that the fluctuation number counter 223y in the door is 0 (S2603: Yes), the data of the winning information storage area 233k is acquired (S2604), and the value of the display effect counter 233o is acquired. Then (S2605), the process proceeds to S2606.

In the process of S2606, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit in the hold from the data of the winning information storage area 233k acquired in the process of S2604 (S2606). In the process of S2606, when it is determined that there is a big hit in the hold (S2606: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the display effect counter 233o acquired by the process of S2605 is 0 to 150 (S2606: Yes). S2607).

When the value of the display effect counter 233o is determined to be 0 to 150 in the processing of S2607, the same rear image discrimination flag as the currently displayed door interior background is set to ON (S2608), and S2612 Move to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2607 that the value of the display effect counter 233o is not 0 to 150 (that is, 151 to 198) (S2607: No), the door is different from the currently displayed door interior background. The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the inner background is set to on (S2609), and the process proceeds to S2612.

On the other hand, in the process of S2606, when it is determined that there is no big hit in the hold (S2606: No), then it is determined whether or not the display effect counter 233o is 0 to 30 (S2610). When the display effect counter 233o is determined to be 0 to 30 in the process of S2610, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the background inside the door different from the background inside the door currently displayed is set to ON (S2611). , S2612. On the other hand, in the processing of S2610, when it is determined that the value of the display effect counter 233o is not 0 to 30 (that is, 31 to 198) (S2611: No), the back image corresponding to the background other than the background inside the door. The determination flag is set to on (S2613), and the process proceeds to S2614.

In the process of S2612 executed after S2608, S2609 or S2611, the in-door fluctuation number counter 223y is set to 20, and the process proceeds to the process of S2614.

In the process of S2614 executed after S2612 or S2613, the rear image change flag 233q is set to ON (S2614), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 113, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2304, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2304: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2306). If there is a display variable type command (S2306: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2307), and the process returns to S2201.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2307) will be described with reference to FIG. 114 (b). FIG. 114B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, or complete out of order) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S2501), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B) is executed, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the variation effect to be performed is finally set (S2502).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2502 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. Set to (S2503) to end this process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2502 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2204), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2502 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2503, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S2502.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 113, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the processing of S2306 (S2306: No), then the reach-related command processing is executed among the unprocessed commands (S2309), and the process returns to the processing of S2301. ..

Here, the details of the reach-related command processing (S2309) will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing reach-related command processing (S2309). This reach-related command process (S2309) executes a process corresponding to the reach-related command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the reach-related command processing (S2309), first, it is determined whether or not the effect being changed is Super Reach A (S2701), and if it is determined to be Super Reach A (S2701: Yes), it is effectively pressed. It is determined whether there is a command (S2702).

If it is determined that there is a valid press command in the process of S2702, the stop display table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2703), and this process is terminated. Here, the process of S2703 is executed based on the pressing of the frame button 22 during the production of Super Reach A. By setting the stop display table in the display data table buffer 233d, the stop display (see FIG. 70B) is displayed in the effect of Super Reach A.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701, if it is determined that the effect being changed is not Super Reach A (that is, Super Reach B) (S2701: No), the display Super Reach B process is executed (S2704). , End this process.

Here, the details of the display super reach B process (S2704) will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the display super reach B process (S2704). This display super reach B process (S2704) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and is a switch such as the selection switch 270 during the production of the super reach B. This is a process for performing an operation-based process.

In the display super reach B process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a valid pressing command (S2801). In the process of S2801, when it is determined that there is a valid pressing command (S2801: Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol is a big hit (that is, whether or not it will be a big hit in the next effective effect) (S2802). ..

In the process of S2802, when it is determined that the symbol is a big hit (that is, it becomes a big hit in the next effective effect) (S2802: No), the stop display table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2803). This process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2802, if it is determined that the symbol is not a big hit (that is, it does not become a big hit in the next effective effect) (S2802: No), the throwing display table is set in the display table buffer (S2804), and this End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S2801, if it is determined that there is no valid command (S2801: No), it is determined that there is a false press command (S2805). If it is determined that there is a false press command in the process of S2805 (S2805: Yes), the false throw display table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and this process is terminated.

In the process of S2805, when it is determined that there is no false pressing command (S2805: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a replacement command (S2807). If it is determined that there is a replacement command in the process of S2807 (S2807: Yes), the replacement table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2808), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2807 that there is no replacement command (S2807), there is no process based on the switch operation during the production of Super Reach B, so this process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 113, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2308 that there is no reach-related command (S2308: No), it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot-related command (S2810). If it is determined in the process of S2810 that there is a jackpot-related command (S2810: Yes), the jackpot-related command process is executed (S2811), and the process returns to the process of S2301.

Here, the details of the jackpot-related command processing (S2811) will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related command processing (S2811). This jackpot-related command process (S2811) executes a process corresponding to a display command related to the jackpot effect received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the jackpot-related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command (S2901). If it is determined that there is a display opening command in the process of S2901, the opening command process is executed (S2902), and the process proceeds to the process of S2903. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display opening command, the process of S2902 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2903.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S2902) will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (a). FIG. 118 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the opening command process, first, a map setting process for setting a map displayed in the jackpot effect is executed (S3001). The details of this map setting process (S3001) will be described later with reference to FIG. 120. When the processing of S3001 is completed, the opening display data table is read from the opening effect table storage area (see FIG. 17) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3002). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S3002 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3003).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3002, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3004), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3004). S3005). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3006), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3005, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3002, The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S3003. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, when this opening command processing is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, the image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced due to the slow read speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data used for the above to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect of the third symbol display device 81 is completed, and thus indicates the first round. If the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There was a risk that time would be generated and the player would feel uncomfortable or anxious about whether or not the operation was stopped.

Further, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects (for 16 rounds) in the third symbol display device 81 are completed. If the image data required for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display ending command, there is a lot of waiting time from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. There is a risk that the player may feel uncomfortable or anxious about whether or not the operation has stopped.

Therefore, in this control example, when the display opening command is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and by the time the jackpot variation display is completed on the third symbol display device 81. , Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. As a result, when the opening effect is completed in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects (16 rounds) are performed in the third symbol display device 81. ) When the process is completed, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not feel anxious or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

As described above, in this control example, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is started from there. The third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is completed by the end of the variable effect that is a big hit. As a result, when the variable effect that becomes a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the opening effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is worried that the operation has not stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

Here, the details of the map setting process (S3001) will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a map setting process (S3001). This map setting process (S3001) is executed in the jackpot-related command process (see FIG. 118) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and is a process for setting the map displayed in the jackpot effect.

In the map setting process, first, the data of the game state storage area 233 m is acquired (S3301), and it is determined whether or not the acquired game state is in the probable change or the time reduction (S3302). In the process of S3302, when it is determined that the game state is in the probability change or the time is shortened (S3302: Yes), the continuation counter 223p is added by 1 (S3303), and the data of the previous map is read from the map storage area 233s. (S3304), a mass event is selected and set from the continuous mass setting table 233t2 based on the value of the continuation counter 233p and the value of the display effect counter (S3305), and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3302, when it is determined that the game state is not in the probability change or the time reduction (S3302: No), the route history storage area 233w is referred to to determine whether or not there is a continuous mass passage history. (S3306).

In the processing of S3306, if it is determined that there is no continuous mass passage history (S3306: Yes), the first map is read because there is no continuous map (S3307), and the jackpot fluctuation pattern and the value of the display effect counter 233o are set. Based on this, the mass event is selected and set from the normal mass setting table 233t1 (S3308), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3306, when it is determined that there is a continuous mass passing history (S3306: No), it is determined whether or not there is a non-passing mass (S3309). In the process of S3309, if it is determined that there is an unpassed cell (S3309: Yes), the previous map and the event cell are read from the map storage area 233s (S3310) in order to continue the production from the previous map. ), Set the restart point in the continuum of the route with the unpassed mass closest to the start (S3311), and end this process.

If it is determined in the processing of S3309 that there are no unpassed cells (S3309: No), a map different from the previous one is read from the map storage area 233s (S3312) in order to move to a new map, and a jackpot fluctuation pattern is displayed. A mass event is selected and set from the normal mass setting table 233t1 based on the value of the effect counter 233o (S3313), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2901, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2901: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2903), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S2903: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2904), and this process ends.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2904) will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (b). FIG. 119 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table is determined based on the round number indicated by the display round number command and the data of the mass event storage area 233u, and the determined round number display data table is used as the data table. It is read from the round effect table storage area (see FIG. 86) of the storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3101). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3102).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3104). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3105), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 118. In the processing of S2903, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2903: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2905), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S2905: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2906), and this process ends. On the other hand, if there is no display ending command in the process of S2905 (S2905: No), the process of S2906 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S2906) will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the ending command processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit in the hold in the data of the winning information storage area 233k (S3401). In the process of S3401, if it is determined that there is a big hit in the hold (S3401: Yes), the mass event is updated based on the information of the hold of the big hit and the display effect counter 233o (S3402), and the process of S3403 Move to. In the process of S3402, for example, when there is a jackpot in the hold, a square 2 squares ahead of the square at the current position (that is, a square that can be reached by generating the jackpot twice) is set as a special square (FIG. 74 (FIG. 74). b) See). By setting the square two ahead as a special square, the player will continue the game with the expectation of at least two more big hits.

Next, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined (S3403), and the determined ending display data table is stored in the ending effect table storage area (FIG. 3) of the data table storage area 233b. Read from (see 86) and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3404). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3405). Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3401, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3406), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3406). S3407). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3408), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this ending command processing, the ending effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot of the special symbol ends, so that the player recognizes that the jackpot has ended. Can be made to.

Returning to the description of FIG. 113, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2310, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2310: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2312), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S2312: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2313), and the process returns to the process of S2301.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2313) will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 131) of the rear image change due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (see FIG. 131). S3501). Then, the back image type (back A to C, super back notice, background inside the door, etc.) is selected based on the current background image and the background addition flag 223x, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the selected back image type is selected. Is turned on, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to other back image types is set to off (S3503), and the process shifts to S3504.

In the process of S3504, it is determined whether or not the selected back image type is a super background notice (S3504). If it is determined in the process of S3504 that it is a super background notice, the super background flag 233r is set to ON (S3505), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3504 that it is not a super background notice, the process of S3505 is skipped and the present process is terminated. By turning on the super background flag 233r by the processing of S3505, the super background SW processing (S3602) that performs the processing based on the switch operation in the super background in the SW related command processing (see FIG. 123) described later is performed. Can be executed.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S3501 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S3502. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing (S2204), when it is specified that any one of the back side A to C, the super back side notice, the background inside the door, etc. is displayed depending on the back side type of the back side image specified in the display data table. From the back image discrimination flag set by the processing of S3502, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the back image is The type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data corresponding to the range is stored and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3502, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier may be selected, or the back image type received later may be selected. You may select the back image type indicated by the back image command. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image type indicated by the command may be selected. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 113. In the process of S2312, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2312: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a SW-related command among the unprocessed commands (S2314). If it is determined that there is a SW-related command in the process of S2314 (S2314: Yes), the SW-related command process is executed (S2315), and the process returns to the process of S2301.

Here, the details of the SW-related command processing (S2315) will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing SW-related command processing (S2315). This SW-related command process (S2315) executes a process corresponding to a command based on the switch operation received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the SW-related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the super background flag 233r is on (S3601). If it is determined that the super background flag 233r is on in the processing of S3601 (S3601: Yes), the super background notice is being displayed, so the super background SW that performs processing based on the switch operation in the super background The process is executed (S3602), and the present process is terminated.

Here, the details of the SW process in the super background (S3602) will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the SW process (S3602) in the super background. This super-background SW process (S3602) is a process for executing an effect based on the operation of the selection switch 270 or the like while the super-background notice is being displayed.

In the super background SW process, first, it is determined whether or not the determination switch 270e is pressed (S3701). When it is determined in the process of S3701 that the determination switch 270e is pressed (S3701: Yes), the display data of the background image currently being displayed is acquired (S3702), and it is determined whether or not the transitionable display is in progress. (S3703). Here, the transitionable display means a case where a specific image is displayed in the rear image, and a case where the image of the door is blinking in the present control example (see FIG. 67).

In the process of S3703, if it is determined that the transferable display is not in progress (S3703: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if this is not the case (S3703: Yes), the value of the in-door fluctuation counter 223y is set to 20 (S3704), the data of the winning information storage area 233k is acquired (S3705), and the value of the display effect counter 233o is obtained. (S3706), and the process proceeds to S3707.

In the processing of S3707, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit in the hold in the data of the winning information storage area 233k acquired by the processing of S3705 (S3707), and if it is determined that there is a big hit in the hold (S3707). : Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the display effect counter 233o acquired by the process of S3706 is 0 to 100 (S3708).

In the process of S3708, when the display effect counter 233o is determined to be 0 to 100 (S3708: Yes), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the high-expectation door interior background is set to ON (S3709). The process proceeds to S3714. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display effect counter 233o is not 0 to 100 (that is, 101 to 198) (S3708: No), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the low expectation door interior background is set to on. Then, the process proceeds to S3714.

On the other hand, in the process of S3707, when it is determined that there is no big hit in the hold (S3707: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the display effect counter 233o is 0 to 30 (S3711).

When it is determined that the display effect counter 233o is 0 to 30 in the processing of S3711 (S3711: Yes), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the high-expected door interior background is set to ON (S3712). The process proceeds to S3714. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display effect counter 233o is not 0 to 30 (that is, 31 to 198) (S3711: No), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the low expectation door interior background is set to on. Then, the process proceeds to S3714.

In the process of S3714 executed after S3709, S3710, S3712 or S3713, the rear image change flag 233q is set to ON (S3714), and this process is terminated. By setting the rear image change flag 233q to ON in the process of S3714, the rear image of the background inside the door set in any of S3709, S3710, S3712 or S3713 can be displayed.

The back image change flag 233q set to ON in the process of S3714 sets the data of the back image in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 131), and the back image is changed. The timing at which the data of the rear image is set may be synchronized with the timing at which the next variation display is started, or may be synchronized with the timing at which the currently executed variation display ends. good. As a method of synchronizing with each of the above-mentioned timings, a method of adjusting the timing for setting the rear image change flag 233q to ON in the processing of S3714, and a method of adjusting the rear image data in the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 131) are set. An example is a method of adjusting the timing. Specifically, in the process of S3714, the time difference from the synchronization timing is calculated, and the rear image change flag 233q is set to on after the calculated time elapses to adjust the timing at which the rear image is changed. be able to.

Here, depending on the processing of S3707, S3708, and S3709, the ratio of setting the high-expected door interior background differs depending on whether there is a big hit in the hold or not. That is, for the player, the display content of the background inside the door is one of the information for predicting the possibility that the hold may be a big hit. As a result, the player who wants to know this information will play the game while paying attention to the display of the specific image, which is the timing when the background inside the door can be displayed. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of S3701, when it is determined that the determination switch 270e is not pressed (S3701: No), then whether or not any of the selection switches (upper switch 270a to left switch 270d) is pressed is determined. Determine (S3715).

When it is determined in the process of S3715 that any of the selection switches (upper switch 270a to left switch 270d) is pressed (S3715: Yes), it is based on the pressed selection switch (upper switch 270a to left switch 270d). Then, the display coordinates are reset (S3716), and this process ends. On the other hand, if this is not the case (S3715: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the scroll display of the rear image is executed based on the set display coordinates. Specifically, the display coordinates for displaying the rear image are stored in chronological order, and the rear images corresponding to the display coordinates are displayed in the stored order. For example, if the display coordinates are stored so as to increase only in the horizontal direction, the rear image is scrolled and displayed in the horizontal direction (to the right of the third symbol display device 81).

In the process of S3716, for example, the display coordinates set to increase only in the horizontal direction are fixed at the current values in the horizontal direction and increased in the vertical direction based on the pressing of the upper switch 270a. Reset the display coordinates so that. As a result, the rear image scrolled in the horizontal direction (rightward of the third symbol display device 81) can be changed to be scrolled in the vertical direction (upward of the third symbol display device 81).

As a result, the player can be given a feeling as if he / she is searching in the back image of the super background notice displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by his / her own operation, and the player's interest can be enjoyed. Can be improved. Further, the background image of the super background notice includes a specific image (the image of the door in this control example) necessary for displaying the background inside the door as described above. As a result, the player who wants to display the background inside the door searches in the back image of the super background notice with further interest in order to find a specific image, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 123, the description continues. If it is determined in the process of S3601 that the super background flag 233r is not on (S3601: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot is being produced (S3603). In the process of S3603, if it is determined that the jackpot is being produced (S3603: Yes), the jackpot SW process is executed (S3604), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if this is not the case (S3603: No), the process of S3604 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Here, the details of the jackpot middle SW process (S3604) will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the SW processing during the jackpot. This jackpot middle SW process executes a process corresponding to a display command based on an operation of the selection switch 270 or the like received from the voice lamp control device 114 during the jackpot effect.

In the jackpot middle SW process, first, it is determined whether or not the SW is valid within the round (S3801). In the process of S3801, when it is determined that the SW valid period in the round is not (S3801: No), it is not the timing to perform the effect based on the switch operation, so the process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3801, when it is determined that the SW valid period in the round is (S3801: Yes), then it is determined whether or not any of the selection switches (upper switch 270a to left switch 270d) is pressed. (S3802).

In the process of S3802, if it is determined that any of the selection switches (upper switch 270a to left switch 270d) is pressed (S3802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the selection is normal (S3803). Specifically, when the movable direction in the map of the jackpot effect is downward or right (see FIG. 72 (a)), the case where the lower switch 270c or the left switch 270d is pressed is considered to be a normal selection. It is determined.

If it is determined in the process of S3803 that the selection is normal (S3803: Yes), the pointer 233f is set so that the display moves one square in the selection direction (S3804), and the process proceeds to the process of S3805.

On the other hand, in the process of S3803, if it is determined that the selection is not normal (S3803: No), the process of S3804 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3805.

In the process of S3805, it is determined whether or not the determination switch 270e is pressed (S3805). In the process of S3805, when it is determined that the determination switch 270e is pressed (S3805: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a determinable cell is selected (S3806). Specifically, when the same square as the previous time is selected, it is determined that the determinable square is not selected.

If it is determined in the process of S3806 that the decidable cell is not selected (S3806: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if this is not the case (S3806: Yes), the event of the determined mass is stored in the mass event storage area 233u (S3807), the determined mass is added to the route history storage area (S3808), and the process proceeds to S3809. Transition.

By the process of S3807, the round effect by the above-mentioned round number command process (see FIG. 119 (b)) can be executed based on the mass event stored in the mass event storage area 233u. Further, based on the route history stored in the route history storage area 233w by the processing of S3808, the presence or absence of unpassed cells is determined by the above-mentioned map setting processing (see FIG. 120) (whether or not to display a new map). Discrimination) becomes possible.

In the process of S3809 executed after the process of S3808, it is determined whether or not the determined mass event is the background addition (S3809). In the process of S3809, when it is determined that the mass event is the background addition (S3809: Yes), the background addition flag 233x is set to on based on the display effect counter 233o (S3810). Specifically, when the display effect counter 233o is 0 to 100, the background addition flag 233x is set to on. Not limited to this, if a plurality of backgrounds to be added (for example, additional background A and additional background B) are prepared and the display effect counter 233o is 0 to 50, the background addition flag 233x for adding the additional background A is turned on. When the display effect counter 233o is 51 to 100, the background addition flag 233x for adding the additional background B may be set to on.

On the other hand, in the process of S3809, if it is determined that the event is not the background addition (S3809: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 113. In the process of S2314, if it is determined that there is no SW-related command (S2314: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display winning command among the unprocessed commands (S2216). If there is a display winning command in the processing of S2216 (S2216: Yes), the winning information based on the received command is stored in the winning information storage area 233k (S2317), and the process returns to the processing of S2301.

The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 233k by the processing of S2317 is used for selecting a display effect in the above-mentioned super background effect processing (see FIG. 115).

On the other hand, in the processing of S2316, if it is determined that there is no display winning command (S2316: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2318), and the error command is determined. If there is (S2318: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2319), and the process returns to the process of S2301.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2319) will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3901). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S3902). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3901, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S3902 is determined, and the error type is supported. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S3902, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 113. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2318 (S2318: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2320), and the process returns to the process of S2301.

In the processing of S2301 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2301: Yes). ), The processing of S2302 to S2320 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2301 to S2320 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2301 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2209) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112B) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are sent from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 114 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 114 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, , Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 114A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2402. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2203), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 127, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4001: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S4002 to S4004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4005. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S4001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S4002), S4003 to S4004 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S4003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S4003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S4004).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S4101).

In the task processing (S2204), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are obtained for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S4102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 127. After the warning image setting process (S4004) or in the process of S4003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4003: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4005.

In S4005, the pointer update process is executed (S4005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S4201, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S4202). As a result, if it is End information (S4202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S4203), and if it is a demo display data table (S4203: Yes), the display data table buffer. The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S4204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4205), and this process is completed and displayed. Return to the setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S4203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S4206). ), End this process and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S4202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 127. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4006). In the task processing (S2204), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S4006 together with the warning image developed earlier, and for each sprite, Determine various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S4007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4008). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S4008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S4008: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S4009).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S4009: No), the confirmation display has not yet been produced and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S4010), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4011). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4013). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S4014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2204), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S4015, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4009, if the confirmation display flag is off instead of on (S4009: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S4016). If the demo display flag is off (S4016: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S4017) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4018). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3320), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S4021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S4016, if the demo display flag is on (S4016: No), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2209), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112 (b)), also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, a simple variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2205), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 130A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. (S4302) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 130 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S4301 (S4301: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 131.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 130 (b). FIG. 130 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S4401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4401: Yes). ), Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4402). In the process of S4402, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S4402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4402: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4403. Further, as a result of the processing of S4401, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4401: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4403.

In the process of S4403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4403: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S4403 (S4403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S4405), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2208 in FIG. 112 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2209 in FIG. 112 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 113 to 126) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 127 to 129) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. Is displayed as a normal image. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 131) (see S4301: No in FIG. 130 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 contains image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by the above, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a normal image transfer setting process (S4303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4005) of the display setting process (S2203) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described at the indicated address (S4501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4502), and if it is transfer data information (S4502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4504), and the process proceeds to S4505.

Further, in the process of S4502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S4502: No), the processes of S4503 and S4504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4505. In the process of S4505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4506).

In the process of S4506, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S4506 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4506: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4506: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4507. Further, as a result of the processing of S4505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S4505: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4507.

In the processing of S4507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4507), and if the transfer start flag is on (S4507: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S4508), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S4503 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S4513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4507: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S4509). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S4509: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4509: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S4510), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4511). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4512), and the process proceeds to S4513.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S4511, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S4513, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4513). The discrimination in the process of S4513 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S4513, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4513: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S4513 (S4513: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4514). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S4514, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S4515), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. The image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132 (a), the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2206), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 132A is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2204) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2205), the drawing list shown in FIG. 91 is generated (S4601). That is, in the process of S4601, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2204). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2205), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S4602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information instructing the first frame buffer 236b to expand the image drawn as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S4602 (S4603). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 112 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132 (b), the details of the counter update process (S2207) described above, which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 132B is a flowchart showing this counter update process.

In the counter update process, first, the display effect counter 233o is updated (S4701). Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S4702), and this processing is terminated.

<Modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, a modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 137. In the modified example of the first embodiment, the relief timing is provided during the production period of Super Reach B. If the frame button 22 is not pressed during the production of Super Reach B and this relief timing elapses, the relief production is executed. Here, as described above, the super reach B is an effect in which the jackpot is notified by pressing the frame button 22 a plurality of times. Therefore, if the inputtable period of the frame button 22 is reduced, there may be a case where the frame button 22 is not pressed in time. However, in this modification, when the inputtable period of the frame button 22 decreases (the relief timing elapses), the relief effect is executed, so that the frame button 22 required to notify the jackpot is pressed. The number of times decreases. As a result, the above-mentioned problem can be avoided.

With reference to FIG. 133, the timing at which the effect of Super Reach B in this modification is executed will be described. FIG. 133 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the execution timing of the effect of Super Reach B.

First, referring to FIG. 133 (a), the frame button 22 is not pressed until the first relief timing and the second relief timing have passed during the production of Super Reach B, and then the frame button 22 is not pressed during the stoptable period. A case where 22 is pressed to execute the stop display effect will be described.

When the reach effect of Super Reach B (reach with 7 symbols) is started, a screen in which the girl character in the center of the screen holds the 4 symbols in her hand is displayed as in the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 77 (a)). When the frame button 22 is not pressed in this state and the first relief timing elapses, the relief effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. 134 (a), the screen in which the character holds the symbol 5 together with the symbol 4 in his hand. Is changed to. Similarly, when the frame button 22 is not pressed and the second relief timing elapses, the relief effect is executed again, and as shown in FIG. 134 (b), the character has 4 symbols, 5 symbols, and 6 symbols. The screen is changed to a handheld screen.

In this state, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the stoptable period, the effect of throwing the 4 symbols, 5 symbols, and 6 symbols is executed, and the effect of notifying the jackpot is executed. As described above, in this modification, the remaining number of effective effects required for the notification of the jackpot is reduced each time the relief timing elapses. As a result, even if the player is delayed in noticing the pressing of the frame button 22 in the reach effect, the required number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is reduced, so that the frame button 22 is in time for the notification of the jackpot. The press can be executed.

Further, although the frame button 22 is pressed, the relief effect is executed in the same manner as described above when the relief timing elapses without being effective. As a result, even if the throwing effect, which is an effective effect, is not displayed even though the frame button 22 is pressed, the effect proceeds at the relief timing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect from not progressing even though the frame button 22 is pressed, and to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player.

FIG. 133 (b) is a diagram showing the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed before the elapse of each relief timing described above. If the frame button 22 is pressed and the effective effect is executed before the lapse of the first relief timing, the relief effect is not executed even after the lapse of the first relief timing, and the same applies to the second relief timing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the details of the contents of the data table storage area 233b in the modified example of the first control example will be described. FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the data table storage area 233b in this modification. The only difference from the first control example of this data table storage area 233b is that various display data tables for relief display are provided in the variation effect table storage area, and the others are different from the first control example described above. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Various display data tables for relief display store display data for relief effects such as FIGS. 134 (a) and 134 (b) described above. The display data for the relief effect is stored in the data table storage area 223b by the process of S2003 of the boot process (see FIG. 111) of the display control device 114, similarly to various other display data tables. Then, in the display super reach B process (see FIG. 137) described later, when the relief command is received, the relief display display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the super reach B time operation process (S1510) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the operation process (S1510) at the time of super reach B. In the super reach B operation process (S1510) in this modification, the above-mentioned first control example, determination of whether or not the relief timing has passed (S1830), and display relief command when the relief timing has passed are displayed. Since the parts to be set (S1831) are different and the other processes are the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, in the process of S1803, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1803: No), it is determined whether or not the relief timing corresponding to the remaining number of valid presses has elapsed (S1830). ). For example, as shown in FIG. 133 (a), when the effective effect has never been executed (the number of remaining effective presses is 3), the case where the first relief timing has passed corresponds to the case. Further, when the first relief timing has passed and the relief effect is executed once (the number of remaining effective pressings is two), the case where the second relief timing has passed corresponds to.

If it is determined in the process of S1830 that the relief timing has not passed, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if this is not the case, a display relief command is set based on the elapsed timing (S1831). For example, when the first relief timing has passed, a command for executing the effect of having two symbols is set as shown in FIG. 134 (a), and when the second relief timing has passed as it is, FIG. 134 (b). ), A command is set to execute the effect of having three symbols. The relief command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the display of the relief effect is executed by the display super reach B process (see FIG. 137) of the display control device 114 that has received the command. Become.

Next, the display super reach B process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the display super reach B process (S2704). The display super reach B process (S2704) in this modification displays the above-mentioned first control example, determination of whether or not there is a relief command (S2830), and a relief display display data table when there is a relief command. Since the processing (S2831) portion set in the data table buffer 233d is different and the other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, when it is determined that there is no replacement command in the processing of S2807 (S2807: No), it is determined whether or not there is a rescue command (S2830). If it is determined that there is no rescue command in the process of S2830, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a relief command in the process of S2830, the relief display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and this process is terminated.

As a result, the relief effect is executed based on the passage of the relief timing. As a result, even if the inputtable period of the frame button 22 is reduced, the case where the frame button 22 is not pressed in time can be relieved by executing the relief effect.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

An effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect based on the establishment of the start condition, a display means for displaying the effect mode of the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means, and an operation means that can be operated by the player. And an identification means for identifying a signal output by operating the operation means, and a determination means for determining whether or not a specific condition is satisfied when a specific identification result is identified by the identification means. , When it is determined by the discriminating means that the specific condition is satisfied, the effect mode executed by the effect execution means is changed to the specific effect mode until the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the start condition that is satisfied next. A game machine A1 characterized by having an effect variable setting means for setting to be variable.

According to the game machine A1, the effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect based on the establishment of the start condition, the display means for displaying the effect mode of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means, and the game. A specific condition is satisfied when an operation means that can be operated by a person, an identification means that identifies a signal output by the operation of the operation means, and a specific identification result are identified by the identification means. A predetermined condition is satisfied for the effect mode to be executed by the effect execution means based on the determination means for determining whether or not the signal is met and the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the determination means. It has an effect variable setting means that is set so as to be changed to a specific effect mode until it is done. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied, the effect mode executed by the effect execution means can be changed to a specific effect mode based on the player's operation, which improves the interest of the player. be able to.

In the game machine A1, the back display mode is determined based on the back display means for displaying the back display mode displayed on the back side of the predetermined effect displayed on the display means and the identification result by the identification means. The gaming machine A2 includes a scroll display means for scrolling and displaying in the direction of the above, and the specific condition is satisfied when a specific back symbol is displayed in the back display mode.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the back display means for displaying the back display mode displayed on the back side of the predetermined effect displayed on the display means and the identification by the identification means. Based on the result, it has a scroll display means for scrolling the back display mode in a predetermined direction, and the specific condition is satisfied when the specific back design is displayed in the back display mode. is there. Therefore, the rear display mode can be scrolled based on the operation of the player. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the game machine A2, the back display means normally scrolls and displays the back display mode in a predetermined direction, and when a predetermined identification result is determined by the identification means. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the scroll display in a predetermined direction is changed to a scroll display in a direction based on the identification result.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the back display means normally scrolls and displays the back display mode in a predetermined direction, and the identification means. When a predetermined identification result is determined, the scroll display in the predetermined direction is changed to the scroll display in the direction based on the identification result. Therefore, based on the player's operation, the scroll display is executed in a predetermined direction, and when the scroll display direction is changed, the operation may be performed again. As a result, the burden on the player for executing the scroll display can be reduced.

In any of the game machines A1 to A3, the operation means is composed of a plurality of operation units, and the plurality of operations includes a direction operation unit that indicates a scroll direction of the rear display mode, and the specific identification result. The gaming machine A4, characterized in that it is composed of at least a specific operation unit to be identified.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A1, the operation means is composed of a plurality of operation units, and the plurality of operations indicate the scroll direction of the rear display mode. It is composed of at least a directional operation unit and a specific operation unit that is identified with the specific identification result. Therefore, the scroll direction can be changed by operating the direction operation unit, and the effect can be changed by operating the specific operation unit. As a result, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

An effect mode selection for selecting an effect execution means for executing a game effect, a display means for displaying an effect mode executed by the effect execution means, and an effect mode executed by the effect execution means from a plurality of effect modes. By having an operating means that can be operated by the player in the gaming machine having the means, and operating the operating means every time a predetermined condition is satisfied as the effect mode selected by the effect mode selection means. A route effect mode in which the effect mode is changed by the player selecting one route from a plurality of routes is set, and when the route effect mode is executed, the previously executed route effect mode is used. A game machine B1 characterized in that it has an auxiliary means for assisting in selecting a route other than the selected route.

According to the game machine B1, there are a plurality of effects of the effect execution means for executing the effect of the game, the display means for displaying the effect mode executed by the effect execution means, and the effect mode executed by the effect execution means. The game machine having the effect mode selection means for selecting from the modes has an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the effect mode selected by the effect mode selection means is described every time a predetermined condition is satisfied. A route effect mode is set in which the effect mode is changed by the player selecting one route from a plurality of routes by operating the operation means, and when the route effect mode is executed, it is executed before. It has an auxiliary means for assisting in selecting a route other than the route selected in the route effect mode. As a result, when the player selects a route in the route effect mode, the player is assisted in selecting a route other than the previously selected route. As a result, it is possible to reduce the operation load of the player when selecting a route other than the previously selected route.

In the game machine B1, the determination means for executing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the determination information by the determination means on the display means, and the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating specific determination information is displayed, the effect mode selection means executes the privilege game. The game machine B2, characterized in that the route effect mode is selected based on the privilege game being executed by the means.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the judgment means for executing the judgment based on the establishment of the judgment condition and the identification information indicating the judgment information by the judgment means are dynamically displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having a dynamic display means for causing the display means and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating specific determination information is displayed on the display means. The effect mode selection means selects the route effect mode based on the privilege game being executed by the privilege game execution means. Therefore, the player can select the route effect mode during the execution of the privilege game. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the execution of the privilege game.

In the game machine B2, the effect executing means is characterized in that, during the execution of the privilege game, the display means displays the route effect mode selected by the effect mode selection means.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B2, the effect execution means causes the display means to display the route effect mode selected by the effect mode selection means during the execution of the privilege game. Is. Therefore, during the execution of the privilege game, the route effect mode based on the operation of the player is displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the execution of the privilege game.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, the route effect mode is set to the set square by passing through the set square or stopping at the set square when a plurality of set squares are set on the route. The gaming machine B4, which has a route privilege granting means for granting the privilege being granted.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects played by the game machines B1 to B3, in the route effect mode, a plurality of set squares are set on the route, and the set squares pass through or stop at the set squares. As a result, it has a route privilege granting means for granting the privilege set in the set square. Therefore, when the route effect mode is displayed, the player can be expected to be given the privilege. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the game machine B4, the route privilege granting means sets a privilege to be assisted by the auxiliary means so that the route privilege granting means can be started from the start of the next privilege game from the set square that has passed or stopped as the privilege. A game machine B5 characterized by being.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B4, the route privilege granting means can be started from the start of the next privilege game from the set square that has passed or stopped as the privilege. The privilege to be assisted by the auxiliary means is set. Therefore, at the start of the next privilege game, the player can start from the set square that has passed or stopped in the previous privilege game. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression of a continuous production from the previous privilege game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information. , The identification in a gaming machine having a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed with the identification information indicating that the lottery result is a specific lottery result. The information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings and is displayed in a combination of specific symbols so that the lottery result by the lottery means is set to indicate that the lottery result is the specific lottery result. , A reach display mode in which one symbol string is dynamically displayed among the plurality of symbol rows is displayed, and a plurality of specific symbols that are a combination indicating the specific lottery result are set and displayed. This is a symbol variable means for changing the specific symbol of the symbol string dynamically displayed in the reach display mode to a specific display mode, and the symbol variable means is changed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The gaming machine C1 is characterized by having a revariable means for changing a specific symbol to the original display mode.

According to the game machine C1, the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information can be dynamically displayed. It has a possible dynamic display means and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed with the identification information indicating that the lottery result is a specific lottery result. In the game machine, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings and is displayed in a combination of specific symbols so as to indicate that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result. , The dynamic display means displays a reach display mode in which one symbol string is dynamically displayed among the plurality of symbol rows, and is a specific symbol that is a combination showing the specific lottery result. Is displayed by setting a plurality of the above, and based on the symbol variable means for changing the specific symbol of the symbol string dynamically displayed in the reach display mode to a specific display mode and the establishment of a predetermined condition. It has a re-variable means for changing a specific symbol changed by the symbol-variable means to the original display mode. Therefore, even when there are a plurality of specific symbols that result in a specific lottery during the display of the reach display mode, the specific symbol is changed to the specific display mode by the symbol variable means. Here, the specific symbol that has been changed to the specific display mode is changed to the original display mode by the revariable means. As a result, the player only needs to pay attention to the specific display mode during the display of the reach display mode in which there are a plurality of specific symbols that result in a specific lottery result. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

The game machine C1 has an operating means that can be operated by the player, and the dynamic display means dynamically performs the specific symbol and symbols other than the specific symbol that are varied by the symbol variable means in the reach display mode. It is to be displayed, and is characterized by having a stop display means for stopping and displaying the dynamic display of the symbol string dynamically displayed in the reach display mode based on the operation of the operation means. Game machine C2.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, the dynamic display means has an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the dynamic display means is the specific one that is changed by the symbol variable means in the reach display mode. A symbol other than the symbol and its specific symbol is dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display of the symbol string dynamically displayed in the reach display mode is stopped and displayed based on the operation of the operating means. It has a stop display means. Therefore, even when there are a plurality of specific symbols that result in a specific lottery during the display of the reach display mode, the specific symbol is changed to the specific display mode by the symbol variable means. As a result, the player may pay attention to the specific variable display mode and perform the operation. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the game machine C2, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, one of the specific symbols is the reach display mode at the timing when the operation means is operated. The game machine C3 is characterized in that it is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed at a position where it can be displayed in combination with the symbol displayed stopped by.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the stop display means is described at the timing when the operation means is operated. One of the specific symbols is stopped and displayed so that it is displayed at a position where it can be displayed in combination with the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach display mode. Therefore, the symbol that is stopped and displayed based on the operation of the player and is re-variable to the original display mode by the re-variable means is displayed in combination with the symbol that is stopped in the reach display mode. As a result, the player can easily recognize whether or not the stopped-displayed symbol is a specific lottery result. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the game machines C1 to C3, the reach display mode is characterized in that the reach display mode is composed of a display mode in which two or more symbol rows are stopped and displayed and one symbol row is dynamically displayed with the same symbol. Game machine C4 to play.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C3, in the reach display mode, two or more symbol rows are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and one symbol sequence is dynamically displayed. It is composed of the display modes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In any of the game machines C1 to C4, the symbol variable means is characterized in that the plurality of specific symbols are variably displayed in the specific display mode having the same display mode. ..

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines C1 to C4, the symbol variable means causes the plurality of specific symbols to be variably displayed in the specific display mode having the same display mode. It is a thing. Therefore, even if there are a plurality of specific symbols that result in a specific lottery during the display of the reach display mode, the specific symbol is changed to the same specific display mode by the symbol variable means. As a result, the player only needs to pay attention to one specific display mode while displaying the reach display mode in which there are a plurality of specific symbols that result in a specific lottery result. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information. , The identification in the gaming machine having the privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by the identification information indicating that it is a specific lottery result. The information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings and is displayed in a combination of specific symbols so that the lottery result by the lottery means is set to indicate that the lottery result is the specific lottery result. , One of the plurality of symbol columns is displayed in a reach display mode in which one symbol string is dynamically displayed, and a specific symbol that is a combination indicating the specific lottery result is set and displayed. The dynamic display is based on the operation means that can be operated by the player and the operation means that is operated when the identification information is displayed in the reach display mode by the dynamic display means. A symbol variable means for changing the symbol of the symbol sequence, a discriminating means for discriminating the remaining period of the period displayed in the reach display mode, and a symbol by the symbol variable means within the period determined by the discriminating means. In the remaining period of the reach display mode, when it is determined by the symbol variable determination means for determining whether or not the specific symbol can be changed to the specific symbol and the symbol variable determination means cannot be changed to the specific symbol, the specific symbol D1 is a gaming machine D1 having a specific effect setting means for setting a specific effect for displaying.

According to the game machine D1, the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information can be dynamically displayed. It has a possible dynamic display means and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed with the identification information indicating that the lottery result is a specific lottery result. In the gaming machine, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings and is displayed in a combination of specific symbols so as to indicate that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result. , The dynamic display means displays in a reach display mode in which one of the plurality of symbol rows is dynamically displayed, and the specific symbol is a combination showing the specific lottery result. Is set and displayed, and the operating means that can be operated by the player and the operating means are operated when the identification information is displayed in the reach display mode by the dynamic display means. Based on the symbol variable means for varying the symbols in the dynamically displayed symbol sequence, the discriminating means for discriminating the remaining period of the period displayed in the reach display mode, and the discriminating means within the discriminant period. , The symbol variable determining means for determining whether or not the symbol can be changed to the specific symbol by the symbol variable means, and the reach display mode when it is determined by the symbol variable determining means that the symbol cannot be changed to the specific symbol. In the remaining period, it has a specific effect setting means for setting a specific effect for displaying the specific symbol. Therefore, during the execution of the reach display, the symbol can be changed to a specific symbol based on the operation of the player. Here, if the symbol cannot be changed based on the player's operation in the remaining time of the reach display during execution, a specific effect for displaying the specific symbol is set. As a result, even when there is no or few operations by the player, it is possible to set and display a specific symbol which is a combination showing a specific lottery result. As a result, in the execution of the reach display, even when there is no or few operations by the player, a specific symbol can be displayed to indicate that a specific lottery result has been obtained.

In the game machine D1, in the specific effect, after the symbol sequence dynamically displayed in the reach display mode is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the specific symbol, the stopped and displayed symbol is replaced with the specific symbol. A game machine D2 characterized in that it is composed of an effect to be displayed.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D1, the specific effect is performed after the symbol sequence dynamically displayed in the reach display mode is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the specific symbol. It is composed of an effect of replacing the stopped display symbol with a specific symbol and displaying it. Therefore, if the symbol cannot be changed based on the player's operation due to the absence or few operations of the player, first, a symbol different from the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. After that, the stopped and displayed symbol is replaced with a specific symbol. As a result, even when there is no or few operations by the player, it is possible to perform an effect with less discomfort.

In the game machine D1 or D2, when the lottery result by the lottery means is different from the specific lottery result, the symbol of the symbol string dynamically displayed in the reach display mode is specified regardless of the operation of the operation means. The game machine D3, characterized in that it has a prohibiting means for prohibiting the change to a symbol.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, when the lottery result by the lottery means is different from the specific lottery result, the symbols of the symbol sequence dynamically displayed in the reach display mode are displayed. It has a prohibiting means for prohibiting the change to the specific symbol regardless of the operation of the operating means. Therefore, even though the lottery result is not a specific lottery result, it is possible to prevent a specific symbol indicating a specific lottery result from being displayed.

A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information. , The identification in a gaming machine having a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed with the identification information indicating that the lottery result is a specific lottery result. The information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings and is displayed in a combination of specific symbols so that the lottery result by the lottery means is set to indicate that the lottery result is the specific lottery result. , One of the plurality of symbol columns is displayed in a reach display mode in which one symbol string is dynamically displayed, and a specific symbol that is a combination indicating the specific lottery result is set and displayed. The dynamic display is based on the operation means that can be operated by the player and the operation means that is operated when the identification information is displayed in the reach display mode by the dynamic display means. A symbol variable means for changing the symbols in the symbol sequence to different symbols in a predetermined order, a discriminating means for discriminating the remaining period of the period displayed in the reach display mode, and within the period discriminated by the discriminating means. , The symbol variable determining means for determining whether or not the symbol can be changed to the specific symbol by the symbol variable means, and the symbol variable determining means, when it is determined that the specific symbol cannot be changed by the symbol variable determining means, the said The gaming machine D4 is characterized by having a special symbol variable means for varying the symbol in an order in which it can be varied to a specific symbol.

According to the game machine D4, the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information can be dynamically displayed. It has a possible dynamic display means and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed with the identification information indicating that the lottery result is a specific lottery result. In the game machine, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings and is displayed in a combination of specific symbols so as to indicate that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result. , The dynamic display means displays in a reach display mode in which one of the plurality of symbol rows is dynamically displayed, and is a combination of showing the specific lottery result. Is set and displayed, and the operating means that can be operated by the player and the operating means are operated when the identification information is displayed in the reach display mode by the dynamic display means. Based on this, a symbol variable means for changing the symbols of the dynamically displayed symbol sequence into different symbols in a predetermined order, a discriminating means for discriminating the remaining period of the period displayed in the reach display mode, and a discriminating means thereof. When the symbol variable determining means for determining whether or not the symbol can be changed to the specific symbol by the symbol variable means and the symbol variable determining means determine that the specific symbol cannot be changed within the period determined by In addition, it has a special symbol variable means for varying the symbol in an order in which the specific symbol can be varied during the remaining period. Therefore, during the execution of the reach display, the symbol can be changed to a specific symbol based on the operation of the player. Here, if the symbol cannot be changed based on the player's operation in the remaining time of the reach display during execution, the symbols are changed in the order in which the specific symbol can be changed in the remaining period. As a result, even if the start of the operation by the player is delayed, the symbol can be changed to a specific symbol based on the operation of the player.

In the game machine D4, the special symbol changing means variably displays the symbols in the order in which the symbols to be changed in a plurality of orders are put together in the predetermined order changed by the symbol changing means. A game machine D5 characterized by being.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, the special symbol variable means is a collection of symbols that are variable in a plurality of orders among the predetermined orders that are variable by the symbol variable means. The symbols are variably displayed in order. Therefore, even if the start of the operation by the player is delayed, the player can easily recognize that the symbol can be changed to a specific symbol based on the operation of the player.

Examples of the member projecting from the board surface include nails, wind turbines, and through gates.

A game machine F1 in any one of the game machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, and E1 to E15, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and when the stop It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine F2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, and E1 to E15. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, and E1 to E15, the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Machine F3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the above, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game machine has been proposed in which a lottery is executed based on a player's operation to change the effect when the lottery is won (for example, Patent Document 1). : Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 07-185086).
However, there has been a demand for a game machine with even higher interest.
The present technical idea was made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine with further improved interest.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the above. When the identification information is displayed by the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, a privilege advantageous to the player is provided. The identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings and is displayed in a combination of specific symbols, so that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result. The dynamic display means displays the specific lottery result in a reach display mode in which one of the plurality of symbol strings is dynamically displayed in a state of being dynamically displayed. A specific symbol to be a combination to be shown is set and displayed, and the operating means that can be operated by the player and the operating means when the identification information is displayed in the reach display mode by the dynamic display means. Is operated, a predetermined lottery is executed, and when the lottery result is a specific result, the symbol variable means for changing the symbol of the dynamically displayed symbol sequence and the predetermined lottery It has a table setting means for variablely setting the lottery probability.
<Effect>
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 1, the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information are operated. When the dynamic display means capable of displaying the target and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result are displayed, a privilege grant that gives a player an advantageous privilege is given. The identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings and is displayed in a combination of specific symbols so as to indicate that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result. The dynamic display means is set, and among the plurality of symbol rows, one symbol row is displayed in a state of being dynamically displayed in a reach display mode, and is a combination showing the specific lottery result. A specific symbol is set and displayed, and the operating means is operated when the operating means that can be operated by the player and the identification information are displayed in the reach display mode by the dynamic display means. Based on this, a predetermined lottery is executed, and when the lottery result is a specific result, the symbol variable means for changing the symbol of the dynamically displayed symbol sequence and the lottery probability of the predetermined lottery are determined. It has a table setting means for variable setting. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

8 1 Third symbol display device (display means )
S105 discrimination means
S208 Dynamic display means
S904 privilege granting means

Claims (1)

A lottery means to execute a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, and
Display means on which identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed, and
A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information and
In a gaming machine having a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by the identification information indicating that the lottery result is a specific lottery result.
The identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol columns and is displayed in a combination of specific symbols so as to indicate that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result.
The dynamic display means displays a specific symbol in a reach display mode in which one symbol sequence is dynamically displayed among the plurality of symbol rows, and a specific symbol that is a combination showing the specific lottery result is displayed. It is set and displayed,
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
When a predetermined lottery is executed based on the operation of the operating means when the identification information is displayed in the reach display mode by the dynamic display means, and the lottery result is a specific result. The symbol variable means for varying the symbols in the dynamically displayed symbol sequence and
A gaming machine characterized by having a table setting means for variably setting the lottery probability of the predetermined lottery.

Images